Sunteți pe pagina 1din 535

DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA SpA.

Galvarino Gallardo 1690, Providencia Santiago Chile

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION

COMPAÑIA MINERA MILPO

MILPO II

FILTRO DE BANDA
HORIZONTAL 2 x 73 m²

73 m² BELT FILTER # 1
73 m² BELT FILTER # 2

ORDEN DE COMPRA No: LMCO-0000000794

CONTRATO DELKOR No: 28410

DOCUMENTO DELKOR No: D284-HBF-MO-01


MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION
SECCION 01……………….. FILOSOFIA DE CONTROL
SECCION 02………………..MANUAL DE OPERACION
TABLA DE CONTENIDOS

MANUAL DE MANTENCION
SECCION 03 INSTALACION DE LA TELA
INFORMACION TECNICA DEL FILTRO
SECCION 04………………..EQUIPOS Y COMPONENTES MECANICOS
SECCION 05………………..SISTEMA DE CENTRADO DE TELAS
SECCION 06………………..INSTRUMENTACION
SECCION 07………………..MOTORES ELECTRICOS
SECCION 08………………..REPUESTOS
SECCION 09………………..PROGRAMA DE LUBRICACION
SECCION 10………………..PLANOS

LL. M. A. S. MAYO 2011 0


PREPARO REVISO FECHA REVISION

BELT FILTER 2x73m²

NOMBRE DEL EQUIPO TAG MODELO


COMPAÑIA
73M² BELT FILTER #1 05-820-4223-003 MINERA MILPO

32B / 08-30V
MILPO II
73M² BELT FILTER #2 05-820-4223-004

CONTRATO ORDEN DECOMPRA


DOCUMENTO DELKOR
DELKOR- No:
No: D284-HBF-MO-01
No: 28410 LMCO-0000000794
Sección 1-Página 1 de 12

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION

SECCION 1

FILOSOFIA DE CONTROL

D. G. R. B. MAYO 10 0
PREPARO REVISO FECHA REVISION

BELT FILTER 2x73m²

NOMBRE DEL EQUIPO TAG MODELO


COMPAÑIA
73M² BELT FILTER #1 05-820-4223-003 MINERA MILPO

32B / 08-30V
MILPO II
73M² BELT FILTER #2 05-820-4223-004

CONTRATO ORDEN DECOMPRA


DOCUMENTO DELKOR
DELKOR- No:
No: D284-HBF-MO-01
No: 28410 LMCO-0000000794
Sección 1-Página 2 de 12
1

FILOSOFIA DE CONTROL
COMPAÑÍA MINERA MILPO S.A.A.

DOC. Nro. F284-HBF-002

CN 28410

FILTRO BANDA HORIZONTAL 73m2


32B / 08–30 V

DG RB ISSUED FOR 29/06/10 2


APPROVAL
PREPARED CHECKED REASON FOR DATE REV
REVISION

DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA LTDA.


Sección 1-Página 3 de 12

1. INTRODUCCIÓN

El equipamiento suministrado por Delkor para el Proyecto MILPO II consiste en dos (2) Filtros
Banda Horizontal (HBF) de 73m2 que serán alimentados con pulpa de relaves de Cu y Pb proveniente
de la descarga de espesadores. Ambos HBF son idénticos y su modelo es 32B/08-30V. Las
características principales de cada filtro son:.

Las características principales del filtro son:


Modelo: 32B/ 08-30V
Área Filtración: 73m2
Potencia Instalada Accionamiento: 75 kW
Longitud caja de vacío: 24m
Ancho de la correa: 3.2m
Modelo Bomba Vacío: KENFLO CBF410-2
Potencia Instalada Bomba Vacío: 220 kW
Presión de Vacío a 2200msnm y 25ºC: -60kPa

Las variables de proceso para cada uno de los filtros son:


Alimentación sólidos, tph 187.5
% sólidos Alimentación 72 a 73
Densidad Sólido, t/m3 4.5
Densidad Líquido, t/m3 1.0
Temperatura, ºC Amb.
pH 10.5
Granulometría sólido, P80 34% -400# (33μm)
Dosificación Floculante, g/t By client
Etapas de lavado N/A
Espesor Queque, mm 10
Tiempo Ciclo, seg 30-40
Velocidad Banda, m/min 34 a 45 m/min
Humedad Queque (base húmeda) 12.2%

2
Sección 1-Página 4 de 12

2. DOCUMENTOS DE REFERENCIA

• P&ID F284CC32001

3. CHECK LIST

Los siguientes ítems deberán ser completados durante el comisionamiento:


• Calibración y ajuste de todos los instrumentos
• Prueba de todas las válvulas y motores
• Inspección de las boquillas de limpieza de lavado de tela. Todas funcionando y en posición
correcta para cubrir el 100% del ancho de la tela (aspersión plana proyectada en la tela con
ángulo 20º de la horizontal).
• Hermeticidad de las líneas de vacío. Chequear presión de vacío que entrega la bomba de
vacío colocando un plástico sobre el filtro. Para una elevación de 2200msnm y considerando
las temperaturas promedio del sistema (25ºC), la presión de vacío deberá ser -60kPa. En
caso de menor presión de vacío, chequear posibles fugas en las líneas de vacío o flujo de agua
de sello de la bomba de vacío insuficiente.
• Verificar que los lazos de control funcionen correctamente según se detalla en sección 6.2.

4. DESCRIPCIÓN DE COMPONENTES

Panel de Control Local: Cada filtro incluye un Panel de Control con gabinete Nema 4X con PLC
marca Allen Bradley modelo MicroLogix 1100 con comunicación Ethernet y Modbus RTU. El Panel
de Control incluye en la compuerta un selector de modo Manual/Automático. También incluye
botoneras Partir/Parar para usar en modo automático y botonera Detener Alarma. Incluye luces
indicadoras de estado de los motores y alarmas. En la compuerta del panel se dispone de un
controlador digital de señal 4 a 20mA que permite aumentar o disminuir la velocidad del
accionamiento del filtro, y el respectivo % de velocidad es leído directamente en una pantalla incluida
en el panel. Incluye Switch Principal ubicado en la compuerta del Panel de Control que permite
instalar candado para mantención segura y botón Parada de Emergencia. En el PLC será suministrado
el programa del filtro, pero, NO es parte de nuestro suministro el SW físico de programación RS
Logix500.

3
Sección 1-Página 5 de 12

Panel de Control (Solo referencial)

Botoneras Locales (suministradas por el cliente): Las botoneras sólo están operativas en
Modo Manual y se encuentran ubicadas adyacentes a los siguientes motores para los siguientes
componentes: Accionamiento del filtro, Soplador, Bomba de Filtrado, Bomba de vacío y Agitador en
tanque de floculación.

Flocculating Tank: Corresponde a un estanque agitado de aprox. 1.6 m3 donde ingresa el flujo de
alimentación al filtro y el flujo de floculante, se mezclan y homogenizan antes de descargarse para
alimentar el filtro.

Wash Control Box (“WCB”): Cada filtro es suministrado con un panel de control eléctrico para
controlar (minimizar) el consumo de agua de lavado. El WCB es una entidad independiente al PLC
principal e incluye un micro PLC Micrologix 1100 y display T3M. El WCB incluye selector manual /
automático. En modo manual, las válvulas con actuadores eléctricos permanecerán siempre abiertas
para que el Operador maneje los flujos de agua con válvulas manuales ubicadas en cada línea.
La línea de agua para limpieza de tela y banda, incluye un switch de baja presión y un flujómetro con
alarmas de alto y bajo flujo programadas en el PLC.
o Cuando se activa la alarma de baja presión, el operador debe revisar el correcto
suministro de agua.
o Cuando se activa la alarma por bajo flujo sin caída de presión, entonces alarma por
boquillas tapadas y el operador procederá a realizar limpieza o cambio de boquillas.

4
Sección 1-Página 6 de 12

o Cuando se activa la alarma por alto flujo, entonces alarma por boquillas gastadas y
el operador procederá a reemplazar las boquillas.

Panel de Wash Control Box (Solo referencial)

Línea de agua de lavado de banda y tela:


• La línea de agua lavado de banda incluye una válvula con actuador eléctrico que está
enlazada con timer en el micro PLC. La frecuencia y la duración de lavado de la banda
son variables ajustables en terreno y pre-definidas en 60 min y 10 min respectivamente,
es decir, la banda se lava durante 10 minutos (dos vueltas aproximadamente) cada una
hora. Con esto se obtiene un ahorro de consumo agua entre 3 y 4 m3 por cada hora de
operación versus si el lavado fuera continuo.
• El manifold que distribuye el agua de lavado de tela incluye una válvula con actuador
eléctrico que se cierra cuando el accionamiento del filtro se ha detenido.

5. PUESTA EN MARCHA

5.1 Secuencia de partida


1. Chequear ajuste y tensión de la tela. La tensión puede ser chequeada observando la posición del
polín tensor de tela “dinámico”. Si el polín tensor dinámico se encuentra en su posición más
baja, entonces ajustar el polín tensor estático.
2. Cerrar manualmente las válvulas de drenaje línea alimentación pulpa, drenaje de tanque
receptores de filtrado y aislamiento de Water Strainer stand by (WS 02 ó WS 04).

5
Sección 1-Página 7 de 12

3. Revisar visualmente que no exista ningún elemento extraño sobre y debajo del Filtro, que pueda
entorpecer o perjudicar el correcto funcionamiento del mismo.
4. Verificar que el sistema de alimentación esté operativo y exista disponibilidad de pulpa.
5. Verificar que el agua para lavado de tela y lavado de correa esté disponible a 500 kPa y que las
válvulas manuales estén operativas.
6. Asegurar que las válvulas manuales (V-03, V-04,V-05,V-06 y V-07) para lavado de tela/correa se
encuentren abiertas. Realizar inspección visual al sistema de lavado de tela y banda. Verificar que
todas las boquillas estén inyectando agua y que los aspersores estén en su posición correcta
(que cubran toda el área de la tela).
7. Abrir manualmente las válvulas de aguas de sello (V-12, V-15 y V-18) bomba vacío, caja de vacío
y bomba filtrado. Con esta acción, el switch de flujo (FS 01) libera alarma de bajo flujo (FAL 02),
y el flujómetro (FIT 02) libera alarma por bajo flujo en el PLC. Chequear flujos y presiones de
aguas de sello para el filtro: Caja vacío: 3m3/h @ 150kPa. Bomba vacío: 30m3/h @ 150kPa.
Bomba de Filtrado 1m3/h @ 150kPa.
8. Verificar presiones de aire instrumentación al sistema automático alineamiento de tela
Deltracker (400 kPa) y al sistema de levante caja vacío (700 kPa). Con esta acción, el switch de
presión (PS 04) libera la alarma por baja presión aire instrumentación (PAL 04).
9. Chequear que todos los instrumentos estén funcionando correctamente y las respectivas
señales de alarma sean reconocidas por el PLC.
10. Chequear que el receptor de filtrado se encuentre vacío.
11. Chequear que el tanque de la pata barométrica se encuentre lleno de agua.
12. Pasar selector de modo del filtro y WCB a posición Automático. Presionar el botón “Partir
Filtro”, entonces el sistema arrancará según la siguiente secuencia en pasos de 10 segundos cada
uno:
i. Partir Soplador
ii. Partir Bomba de filtrado
iii. Partir Accionamiento Filtro (Partida suave programada en Variador de Frecuencia ubicado
en el CCM)
iv. Partir Bomba de Vacío
v. Partir Agitador Feed Box
13. Chequear temperatura de salida agua de sello bomba de vacío. Para un correcto funcionamiento
de la bomba, el agua de sello a la salida de la bomba debe tener una temperatura 10 – 14 ºC
mayor a la temperatura de entrada a la bomba.
14. Alimentar pulpa al Filtro. Verificar correcto escurrimiento de pulpa en los alimentadores tipo
“cola de pez”.
15. Ajustar velocidad de accionamiento del filtro hasta lograr espesor y humedad de queque
adecuados.
16. Chequear espesores y humedad de queque, % sólidos pulpa alimentación.
17. Chequear amperajes de todos los motores.

6
Sección 1-Página 8 de 12

5.2 Secuencia de detención Automática.


Cortar alimentación de pulpa al filtro despichar y lavar línea de pulpa. y luego presionar botón “Parar
Sistema” y comienza la siguiente secuencia de parada que detiene los equipos en el orden e intervalos
descritos:
1. Al presionar el botón Parar Filtro, inmediatamente se detienen las bombas de alimentación de
pulpa al filtro y alimentación de floculante, este enclavamiento debe ser realizado por Cía Minera
MILPO”.
2. 2 minutos después, se detiene Motor Bomba de Vacío
3. 8 minutos después, se detiene Motor Accionamiento Filtro
4. 10 segundos después, se detiene Motor Soplador
5. 8 minutos después, se detiene Motor Bomba de Filtrado
Nota: Si la detención es por un período de tiempo prolongado, entonces cortar manualmente flujos
agua sello bomba de vacío y bomba filtrado.

6. FILOSOFÍA DE CONTROL
La filosofía de control de los Filtros Banda DELKOR será programada en PLC de MILPO II bajo el
siguiente esquema:

6.1 SELECTORES

6.1.1 Selector de modo Manual / Automático


En ambos modos, manual y automático, siempre deben operar los enclavamientos y lazos indicados
más adelante.

Manual: Corresponde al modo de operación para pruebas y mantención. Habilita las botoneras jog
partir/parar locales (no suministradas) ubicadas junto a cada uno de los siguientes componentes:
1. Sopladores
2. Accionamiento Filtro (Partida suave programada en Variador de Frecuencia ubicado en el CCM)
3. Bomba Vacío (solo en Sala de Control)
4. Bombas de Filtrado
5. Agitador Feed Box

Automático: Es el modo normal de funcionamiento del sistema donde opera de acuerdo a la lógica
programada en el PLC. En este modo se habilita la función Partir/Parar Filtro desde el PLC del Panel
de Control.

7
Sección 1-Página 9 de 12

6.2 SEÑALES

6.2.1 Entrada al PLC


Al PLC deberán llegar las siguientes señales de terreno:
1. Flujo Agua Sello Caja Vacío.
2. Descentrado de Tela (señal proveniente de uno de los dos switch de desalineamiento ubicados a
cada lado del filtro)
3. Ajuste tensión tela (señal proveniente de un switch ubicado en polín tensor dinámico)
4. Descentrado de Banda (señal proveniente de uno de los dos switch de desalineamiento ubicados
a cada lado del filtro)
5. Piolas de Seguridad 1 y 2 (señal proveniente de dos pull cord ubicados a cada lado del filtro)
6. Baja Presión Soplador (señal proveniente del switch de presión de aire ubicado en la línea de
aire del soplador)
7. Alto Nivel Receptor de Filtrado (señal proveniente del switch de nivel ubicado en la parte
superior del receptor de filtrado)
8. Perdida de Vacío (señal proveniente de vacuostato ubicado en línea alimentación bomba vacío)
9. Bajo Flujo Agua de Sello Bomba de Vacío (señal proveniente de switch de bajo flujo ubicado en
línea alimentación agua sello bomba de vacío y suministrado por el Cliente )
10. Baja Presión Aire de Instrumentación (switch de baja presión ubicado en línea alimentación aire
instrumentación al deltracker y sistema levante neumático caja de vacío)
11. Parada de Emergencia local
12. Alimentación de pulpa al filtro (desde el Flujómetro suministrado por el cliente)

6.2.2 Entrada al DCS Cliente


1. Altura pulpa zona formación (señal proveniente de sensor de nivel ultrasónico. Se programan
alarmas por alto y bajo nivel de pulpa en zona formación)
2. Flujo de alimentación al filtro
3. Temperatura de agua de sello bomba de vacío
4. Temperatura motor bomba de vacío
5. Nivel de agua en torre de enfriamiento.

6.2.3 Entrada al CCM


1. Partir/Parar Bomba Filtrado.
2. Partir/Parar Soplador
3. Partir/Parar Accionamiento Correa Filtro.
4. Modificar velocidad de accionamiento

8
Sección 1-Página 10 de 12

5. Partir/Parar Bomba Vacío


6. Partir/Parar Agitador Feed Tk.

6.2.4 Entrada al WCB


1. Baja Presión Agua Lavado Tela/Correa (señal enviada por switch de presión ubicado en línea de
agua lavado)
2. Bajo Flujo Agua Lavado Tela/Correa (señal enviada por flujómetro ubicado en línea agua lavado)
3. Alto Flujo Agua Lavado Tela/Correa (señal enviada por flujómetro ubicado en la línea de lavado)

6.2.5 Señales de salida del WCB


1. Abrir/Cerrar válvula solenoide agua de Lavado de Tela
2. Abrir/Cerrar válvula solenoide agua de Lavado de Banda
3. Alarma Baja Presión Agua Lavado
4. Alarma Limpieza Boquillas
5. Alarma Reemplazo Boquillas

7.0 Procedimientos frente a situaciones de Emergencia


1. Interruptores de desalineamiento de tela/correa (ZS1, ZS2, ZS3 y ZS4) son activados:
i) Alarma visual y audible por desalineamiento tela/banda
ii) Detención del accionamiento del Filtro
iii) Cierre alimentación pulpa y floculante al filtro

2. Cordones de seguridad ( pull switch o pull cord ) son activados ( HS1 y HS2 ):
i) Alarma visual y audible por Emergencia
ii) Detención del accionamiento del Filtro
iii) Cierre alimentación de pulpa y floculante al filtro
Importante: Los Pull Cord están conectados a ambos CCM y al PLC

3. Bajo flujo agua de sello caja de vacío es activado:


i) Alarma visual Bajo Flujo Agua Sello Caja Vacío. De persistir la alarma por un período superior
a 1min, entonces:
ii) Cierre alimentación de pulpa y floculante al filtro
iii) Pasados 2 minutos que la alimentación de pulpa ha sido cortada, entonces detener
accionamiento del Filtro

4. Si se detiene el accionamiento del Filtro de Banda:

9
Sección 1-Página 11 de 12

i) Alarma visual Detención Accionamiento Filtro


ii) Cierre alimentación de pulpa y floculante al filtro

5. Baja presión aire del soplador es activado:


i) Alarma visual Baja Presión Soplador
ii) Cierre alimentación de pulpa y floculante al Filtro
iii) Pasados 2 minutos desde que la alimentación de pulpa ha sido cortada, entonces detener
accionamiento del Filtro

6. Nivel alto en el estanque receptor de Filtrado es activado:


i) Alarma visual Nivel Alto Estanque Filtrado. De persistir la alarma por un período superior a
1min, entonces:
ii) Cierre alimentación de pulpa y floculante al filtro
iii) Pasados 2 minutos que la alimentación de pulpa al filtro ha sido cortada, entonces detener
accionamiento del Filtro.

7. Baja presión aire de instrumentación es activado:


i) Alarma visual Baja Presión Aire Instrumentación.
ii) Cierre flujos alimentación pulpa y floculante al filtro.
iii) Pasados 2 minutos que la alimentación de pulpa al filtro ha sido cortada, entonces detener
accionamiento del Filtro.

8. Baja tensión o tela alargada es activado:


i) Alarma visual por baja tensión de tela
Nota: en parada programada del filtro se ajustará tensión de tela mediante polín tensor estático

9. Perdida de presión de vacío:


i) Alarma visual por Baja Presión de Vacío.
ii) Cierre alimentación pulpa y floculante al filtro

10. Bajo Flujo agua sello Bomba Vacío:


i) Alarma visual y audible por Bajo Flujo Agua Sello Bomba Vacío
ii) Detención Bomba Vacío
iii) Cierre alimentación pulpa y floculante al filtro. Si el accionamiento del filtro permanece
detenido por más de 10 minutos:
iv) Detención bomba de vacío

10
Sección 1-Página 12 de 12

11. Alto nivel de pulpa en la alimentación al filtro por más de 10 segundos:


i) Alarma visual por Alto Nivel de Pulpa en Alimentación
ii) Disminuir el flujo alimentación. Si alarma continúa por otros 10 segundos, entonces:
iii) Cortar flujo alimentación.

8. Detención por alarma


Si alguna de las alarmas se desactiva, se detiene la alarma sonora pero la luz de alarma permanecerá
encendida hasta que el operador normalice la falla y luego cancele la alarma.
Cuando el equipo se detiene por acción de alguna alarma, el operador deberá reponer la falla y
presionar la botonera de cancelar alarma.
En caso que el filtro se detenga con carga sobre la tela, se procederá a descargar de la siguiente
forma:
- Pasar selector de Automático a Manual.
Desde sala de Contro de Motores realizar los siguientes pasos:
- Partir Soplador
- Asegurar suministro de agua sello caja vacío
- Partir accionamiento Filtro.
Una vez descargado el filtro se pasará a la posición Automática para reiniciar la operación.

9. Enclavamientos
• Accionamiento del Filtro: Solo podrá funcionar si el soplador de aire está funcionando y el sensor
de bajo flujo de agua de sello caja de vacío está desactivado.
• Bomba de vacío: Solo podrá funcionar si el flujómetro del agua de sello de la bomba de vacío no
alarma por bajo flujo.
• Alimentación de pulpa: El flujo de alimentación de pulpa al filtro deberá ser variable y controlado
por el nivel de pulpa en la zona de formación del filtro mediante señal análoga entregada por el
sensor de nivel ultrasónico. El set point de nivel de pulpa será determinado durante la puesta en
marcha y optimizado por el operador durante los primeros meses de operación del filtro.
• Soplador: Se detendrá si el motor de accionamiento del filtro se encuentra detenido por más de
5 minutos.
• Agitador Feed Box: Se detendrá si el motor de accionamiento se encuentra detenido por más de
10 minutos.
„

11
Sección 2 ~ Página 1 de 20

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION

SECCION 2

MANUAL DE OPERACION

LL. M. A. S. MAYO 10 0
PREPARO REVISO FECHA REVISION

BELT FILTER 2x73m²

NOMBRE DEL EQUIPO TAG MODELO


COMPAÑIA
73M² BELT FILTER #1 05-820-4223-003 MINERA MILPO

32B / 08-30V
MILPO II
73M² BELT FILTER #2 05-820-4223-004

CONTRATO ORDEN DECOMPRA


DOCUMENTO DELKOR
DELKOR- No:
No: D284-HBF-MO-01
No: 28410 LMCO-0000000794
FEED DAM ROLLER

BOWED ROLLER

FISH TAIL FEEDER

TAIL PULLEY WASH FEEDER

BELT
AIR BOXES

BELT RETURN
ROLLER

CLOTH ROLLER
Sección 2 ~ Página 2 de 20

CLOTH
TENSIONER

VACUUM BOX
SEAL STRIP
WEAR BELT
SPRAY PIPE
HEAD PULLEY
CLOTH
Sección 2 ~ Página 3 de 20

1.- INTRODUCCIÓN
El Filtro de Correa Horizontal Delkor incorpora todas las últimas características de diseño
Delkor. El diseño del Filtro de Banda Horizontal ha sido desarrollado para satisfacer las
necesidades de la minería e industria en general. Cada filtro está diseñado para una operación
continua de 24 horas al día con una disponibilidad mayor de 95%. El Filtro de Banda se
especifica con diseños y componentes bien probados. Las dimensiones del ancho del Filtro y
largo del Filtro son dimensiones que Delkor ha incorporado a través de los años.
x Área total de Filtración = Ancho de la correa x Largo de la Caja de vacío
x Área Efectiva de Filtración = A x B
A = Ancho efectivo = Ancho de la correa – Ancho de borde
B = Largo efectivo = Nº de Cajas de Vacío x Largo de la Caja de Vacío

MARCO DEL FILTRO


El marco del filtro es diseñado para permitir el libre acceso al equipo en la parte inferior para
mantenimiento del área de la caja de vacío. Las secciones del canal y ángulo adecuadamente
dimensionadas aseguran la rigidez total del marco durante la operación del filtro. El filtro está
también diseñado para asegurar que no haya vibración del marco bajo todas las condiciones
posibles de operación:
Hay 3 Sub-Secciones principales que considerar para el montaje:
¾ Marco del cabezal -apoya la Polea de Transmisión, Marco de Transmisión
y Caja de Engranajes.
¾ Marco de la cola -apoya la Polea de Cola, Compensación de la correa y
Tensor de la Tela
¾ Marcos intermedios -apoya la caja de vacío, apoyo de la correa, rodillos de
retorno de la correa y rodillos de retorno de la tela. El
número de marcos intermedios es igual al número de
las secciones de la caja de vacío x largo de cada
sección; cada marco intermedio es espaciado idéntico.

POLEA DE CABEZA & COLA

Polea de cabeza (Head Pulley)


Apoyada en el marco del cabezal por dos rodamientos auto-alienantes y sellados . Las cajas del
soporte se montan en placas de asiento con ajuste provisto por pernos de fijación y los ejes se
aseguran mediante manguitos cónicos de ajuste. Anillos de sello se montan en los ejes para
evitar que entre líquido a los rodamientos.
Los ejes se fijan a la polea mediante manguitos cónicos de fijación. Uno de los ejes es mas largo
para montar la unidad motriz.
Sección 2 ~ Página 4 de 20

La Polea de Cola
El diseño es similar a la Polea de Cabeza, con un sistema tensor de tornillos que permite
controlar la tensión y regular el centrado de la banda de goma.
Soportes
Todas las poleas son apoyadas por soportes lubricados con grasa, ajustados con sellos
diseñados para proveer una capacidad de duración de B-10 100,000 horas. Las cajas de l
soporte serán de materiales adecuados para las condiciones del proceso. Instalamos anillos de
ajuste en todos nuestros rodillos para evitar la contaminación de los soportes de derrame, lo
cual puede ocurrir bajo condiciones anormales de operación.
NOTA: Cubiertas de goma para los soportes pueden ser incluidas en el suministro.

RODILLOS DE CORREA Y DE TELA (BELT RETURN ROLLER & CLOTH


ROLLER)
Todos los Rodillos de Correa y de Tela son fabricados de tubería estándar de acero con ejes
de materiales adecuados para las condiciones del proceso. Los ejes son diseñados para evitar
soldaduras excesiva y esfuerzo del material.
El recubrimiento exterior es de caucho natural.

CAJA DE VACÍO (VACUUM BOX)

Diseño
La caja de vacío es una sección de acero inoxidable fabricada en longitudes estándares ( el
espacio entre los soportes intermedios). La única soldadura necesaria en esta pieza durante la
fabricación es los extremos, refuerzos internos y las conexiones de las cañerías de descarga de
vacío.

Material de construcción
Para las partes húmedas de la caja de vacío se definen en las hojas de datos. El grosor de la
placa usado en fabricar las partes húmedas de la caja de vacío es de 3mm e incluye tolerancia de
corrosión de 1mm.
Elevación
El Montaje de la Caja de Vacío se levanta y baja, en el plano vertical, ya sea por:
x Un mecanismo neumáticamente operado,
x Un sistema manual de contra peso o,
x Una cuerda de cable con un huinche,
Este sistema evita que la caja de vacío se tuerza, manteniendo los sellos paralelos a la correa de
goma siempre. Este mecanismo tiene tornillos de ajuste (acero inoxidable) para asegurar que
los sellos de vacío se ajusten a la altura correcta y se cierren en posición. Por favor consulte a
la hoja de datos para confirmar el tipo de sistema de elevación seleccionado.
Seal Strip
Ajustada con un material de polietileno de alta-densidad llenado con cerámica e incluye una
ranura de agua para lubricación. El agua entrando al sello actúa tanto como un lubricante y
también cono un enfriador. Las franjas de sellos se montan en la parte superior de la caja de
vacío con una cinta de “Buta Seal”.
Sección 2 ~ Página 5 de 20

Wear Belt
Se asienta en una guía ubicada en la parte superior del Seal Strip. Estas correas de desgaste
tienen una superficie de goma en el lado en contacto con la correa del transportador y una
superficie de poliéster en contacto con la franja del sello.
El coeficiente de fricción entre las superficies de goma de la correa del transportador y la
correa de desgaste es 0,7 y el coeficiente de fricción entre la superficie de poliéster de la
correa de desgaste y la franja de sello HDPE es 0,15-0,2. La diferencia entre estos coeficientes
de fricción asegura que la correa de desgaste se mueva con la correa del transportador
deslizándose sobre la franja del sello. Las correas de desgaste retornan debajo de la caja de
vacío a través de los end slides ubicados en el extremo de cada caja de vacío.
Las correas de desgaste son fabricadas de cuatro armazones de poliéster doblado para asegurar
la resistencia química al pH del filtrado que se está manipulando y tendría una duración de 3- 6
meses a una velocidad de la correa del transportador de hasta 40 m/min.

Agua De Sello

El agua de Sello es alimentada a través de un rotámetro y cañería flexible para el tubo múltiple del
agua de sello, el cual recorre el largo completo de la caja de vacío. La solución del sello entonces
entra a los sellos, en ambos lados de la caja de vacío, y es alimentado también al deslizamiento de
la entrada de la correa de desgaste. El control de la solución del sello está provisto por una alarma
de flujo bajo, instalada en la línea de alimentación, el cual detiene el filtro una vez activada.

CORREA TRANSPORTADORA
La correa transportadora principal es fabricada de caucho natural reforzado con un armazón de
poliéster. Esta correa tiene ranuras regulares cortadas en un ángulo recto en la dirección del
Sección 2 ~ Página 6 de 20

movimiento y tiene perforaciones de drenaje perforados en el centro para la extracción del


filtrado hacia la caja de vacío. Esta es una correa empalmada sin fin y se instala sobre la polea de
cabeza y de cola.

BELT GUIDE ROLLER


Los rodillos de guía de la correa se montan en ambos lados de la correa del transportador a
intervalos regulares a lo largo del marco superior e inferior. Los rodillos están en HDPE y
ajustados con un sellado para duración del soporte montado en un eje de acero inoxidable.

CURBING
El borde de la correa incluye una batea vertical hecha de goma estirada por presión. Este borde
tiene una dureza de 50 shore A y el diseño patentado fluctuante permite al borde achatar cuando
recorriendo alrededor de las Poleas de Cabeza y Cola.
El diseño del Curbing permite capacidad extra de pulpa y controla el derrame en exceso en el
interior del filtro de la correa. Este diseño del borde se ha desempeñado exitosamente durante
los últimos 30 años en los Filtros de Banda Delkor.

CURBING

CAJAS DE AIRE (AIR BOXES)


La correa principal del transportador de goma se apoya en las partes superiores de la caja-aire
por un cojín de aire. Un ventilador centrífugo genera el aire con la presión y caudal adecuados
para minimizar el roce. Las cajas de aire son pre-montadas en forma modular y apernadas en
posición en el marco del filtro. Para montaje las partes superiores de la caja-aire son calzadas
(provisto por Delkor) y ajustadas exactamente a dentro de 1 mm para asegurar una carga
pareja y soporte óptimo del cojín de aire. La placa superior de la caja-aire es fabricada de acero
inoxidable y conducto de aire entre el ventilador y la caja de aire (provisto por Delkor) es del
mismo material como el marco del filtro. El conducto de aire dentro del marco del filtro se
ajusta con amortiguadores ajustables y las cajas de aire tienen punto de presión para permitir
que el sistema se optimice a lo largo de la longitud de la caja de aire.
Sección 2 ~ Página 7 de 20

TELA DEL FILTRO (CLOTH)


Una Tela Filtrante sin fin es transportada a lo largo de la correa transportadora principal.
Después de la descarga el queque, la tela y la correa transportadora se separan y ambas se
devuelven hacia la polea de cola mediante un sistema de Rodillos de Retorno. La tela tiene un
sistema de guía de control neumático. Se obtiene la tensión cambiando la posición del último
rodillo de retorno y por un rodillo de tensión por gravedad.

Rodillo curvo en operación en extremo de la polea de cola


del filtro
Sección 2 ~ Página 8 de 20

Bowed Roller:
El flujo de vacío ejerce una fuerza en la tela del filtro que la arrastra hacia el centro del filtro
haciendo que se arrugue y doble. Esta arruga produce filamentos individuales en la tela para
romper y eventualmente rasgar. Delkor puede instalar un Rodillo Curvo para sacar las arrugas
y dobleces en la tela antes de entrar a la zona de vacío. El grado de la inclinación puede ser
ajustado rotando los extremos del eje. El rodillo curvo tiene extremos del eje de acero y
soportes múltiples encajados en una cañería flexible de goma.

Deltracker:
Este arrastrador de la tela consiste en un brazo del sensor que monitorea la posición de la tela,
una válvula de control de aire y un rodillo de la tela. El rodillo puede pivotear de lado a lado
entre los fuelles de aire alimentado por una válvula Camtac. El diseño de la válvula Camtac es
tal que cantidades pequeñas de aire son entregadas en cada lado del rodillo. Así, durante la
operación, el movimiento del pivote del rodillo de la tela es minimizado de tal manera que la
tela es cambiada en cualquier dirección con el mínimo de tensión lateral sobre los filamentos.

SISTEMA DE LAVADO

Lavado de la tela
El filtro está instalado con dos o tres barras de pulverizar de lavado de tela. Estas se ubican
debajo del área de descarga del conglomerado con dos dirigidas detrás de la tela y una en
frente. No siempre es necesario que las 3 barras de pulverizar estén operando.
Lavado de la Correa
El filtro está instalado con una barra de pulverizar de lavado de la correa. El pulverizar es
dirigido en el lado ranurado de la correa y necesita ser operado solamente una vez a la
semana.
Calidad y cantidad del agua
La calidad y cantidad del agua puede ser ajustada para adaptar a las exigencias del proceso. Si el
consumo de agua para lavar presenta un problema en el equilibrio de agua, Delkor puede
ayudar con opciones de diseño del circuito de agua.
Es importante que el suministro de agua de pulverizar de la tela se mantenga libre de sólidos
retenidos; sólidos máximo 50 ppm y 10 micrones. Todas las cañerías de pulverizar son
diseñadas para facilitar la fácil remoción mientras el filtro está en operación. Delkor puede
ofrecer barras de pulverizar tipo auto-limpieza para reducir el mantenimiento de la manguera.
Esta es una barra de pulverizar ajustada con una mecanismo de cepillo interno rotatorio.

TRANSMISIÓN DEL FILTRO


Delkor ha controlado el consumo de energía de sus filtros alrededor del mundo bajo
condiciones normales y de sello de vacío desgastado y estos detalles se toman en cuenta para
calcular el consumo de energía del filtro propuesto. El sistema de transmisión del filtro incluye
un Motor Eléctrico de Velocidad Variable, una Transmisión de Correa-V y un reductor de
Engranajes helicoidales. La Caja de Engranajes Helicoidales están montadas en el eje en la polea
de transmisión con el motor de transmisión montado arriba.
Sección 2 ~ Página 9 de 20

La caja de engranajes están diseñadas para una duración de B10 a torsión normal de 100
000 horas. El variador electrónico de velocidad permite ajustar la velocidad de la banda para
obtener La operación óptima del equipo.

PROCEDIMIENTO MONTAJE
FILTRO DE BANDA

PROCEDIMIENTO MONTAJE FILTRO DE BANDA DELKOR.

1.-MONTAR PLACAS O TUERCAS DE NIVELACIÓN EN LAS FUNDACIONES

2.-MEDIR COTAS DE ELEVACIONES SOBRE LAS PLACAS O TUERCAS ( FIGURA 1)


2.1.-Inclinación = 0.6 % ( zona mas alta: lado de descarga )
2.2.-Emitir Protocolo con esta medición.

3.-MONTAR ESTRUCTURA HEAD FRAME


3.1.-Montar sin la estructura Cake Discharge Frame ( esta se monta después de montar la Polea
de Cabeza )

4.-MONTAR ESTRUCTURA TAIL FRAME


4.1.-Montar sin la estructura Feed Dam Frame ( esta se monta después de montar la Polea de
Cola )

5.-MONTAR ESTRUCTURA INTERMEDIATE FRAME

6.-MONTAR POLEA DE CABEZA.


6.1.-Utilizar eslingas de fibra de 6” de ancho mínimo para no dañar el recubrimiento de caucho
de la Polea, no utilizar para el izaje los ejes de la Polea. El eje motriz es el de mayor largo y se
ubica al lado del reductor.
6.2.-Utilizar un spread bar para el izaje
6.3.-Montar anillos de bloqueo en el descanso del lado del Reductor
6.4.-Centrar la Polea en forma axial con respecto a la estructura, apretar los manguitos de
fijación de ambos descansos, manteniendo los juegos radiales requeridos para los rodamientos,
revisar que las obturaciones de grasa estén correctamente montadas, lubricar y torquear los
pernos de las tapas de descansos.
6.5.-Verificar paralelismo de la Polea con respecto a la estructura. Ubicar el centro de eje de
acuerdo a plano 173-HBF-CB-42-001. Apretar pernos pernos reguladores contra el descanso y
apretar sus contratuercas.

7.-MONTAR POLEA DE COLA


7.1.-Medir el ancho interno ( alojamiento del rodamiento ) de los descansos take-up. Los
descansos con ancho menor se deben montar hacia el lado del reductor. Estos no utilizan
anillos de bloqueo.
7.2.-Utilizar eslingas de fibra de 6” de ancho mínimo para no dañar el recubrimiento de hule de
la Polea, no utilizar para el izaje los ejes de la Polea
7.3.-Utilizar un spread bar para el izaje
Sección 2 ~ Página 10 de 20

7.4.-Centrar la polea en forma axial con respecto a la estructura, apretar los manguitos
de fijación de ambos descansos, manteniendo los juegos radiales requeridos para los
rodamientos, revisar que las obturaciones de grasa estén correctamente montadas, lubricar y
torquear pernos de tapas de descansos.
7.5.-Apretar los espárragos tensores completamente en las tuercas take-up, utilizar tuerca y
contratuerca suministrados.
7.6.-Verificar paralelismo de la Polea con respecto a la estructura. Ubicar el centro de eje de
acuerdo a plano 173-HBF-CB-42-001, dejándola en la posición más cercana a la Polea de
Cabeza.

8.-MONTAR CLOTH ROLLERS, BELT RETURN ROLLERS Y JOCKEY PULLEY


8.1.-Montar los descansos centrados con respecto a las perforaciones ovaladas de los soportes
de descanso, para ambos tipos de polines
8.2.-Montar los anillos de bloqueo en todos los polines hacia el lado del Reductor
8.3.-Centrar los polines en forma axial con respecto a la Estructura y apretar los manguitos de
fijación cuidando mantener la tolerancia radiales requeridas para los rodamientos
8.4.-Todos los polines que se encuentran sobre la parte superior del Filtro deben montarse
después de montada la Banda.
Estos polines son:
8.4.1.-Los polines de tela ( 2 polines ), el polín curvo y polín de alimentación ( Feed dam Roller
) ubicados en el lado de alimentación y sobre la Polea de Cola
8.4.2.-Los polines de tela ( 4 polines ) ubicados en el lado de descarga
8.5.-El polín centrador de tela debe montarse con el centrador de tela (Deltracker ).

9.-TORQUEAR Y APRETAR PERNOS DE ESTRUCTURA


9.1.-Apretar todas las tuercas de fijación sobre las placas de apoyo de columnas
9.2.-Apretar todos los pernos que fijan los descansos de poleas y polines a la Estructura.
9.3.-Torquear todos los pernos de la estructura
9.4.-Emitir Protocolo de torqueo de pernos de la Estructura.

10.-MEDIR ELEVACIÓN EN LAS ZONAS DE APOYO DE LAS CAJAS DE AIRE


10.1.-Hacer esta medición sobre los Intermediate Frame, tanto en forma longitudinal del Filtro
como en forma transversal .
10.2.-Elevaciones longitudinales:
10.2.1.-Medir diferencia de altura en largo total ( ejes “A” y “N” ) = 172 mm. Tolerancia +/-
3,5 mm

10.2.2.-Medir diferencia de altura entre ejes consecutivos ( desde eje “B” hasta eje “M” )= 18
mm. Tolerancia +/- 1,0 mm entre columnas consecutivas.
10.3.-Elevaciones transversales
10.3.1.-Medir diferencia de altura en ambos lados de cada intermdiate frame, diferencia máxima
aceptable +/- 1,0 mm
10.4.-Emitir Protocolo de nivelación
Sección 2 ~ Página 11 de 20

FIGURA 1
11.-MONTAR CAJAS DE AIRE SOBRE LA ESTRUCTURA ( FIGURA 1 )
11.1.-Montar cajas de aire y simultáneamente los sellos “H” de caucho entre éstas. La
separación para el sello H es de 6 mm. Debe quedar sellada toda la zona inferior ( cajas de
acero carbono ) para dejar sin fugas de aire.
11.2.-Dejar separación entre 0,5 y 1,0 mm máximo entre los bordes de tops contiguos ( los
tops son las planchas de acero inoxidable sobre las cuales desliza la banda )
11.3.-Nivelar mediante shims para que los tops contiguos queden a la misma altura entre sí.
Los shims se montan entre los ángulos soporte de los intermediate frame y las cajas soporte de
acero carbono. No se aceptan diferencias de altura entre tops contiguos.
11.4.-Revisar y reapretar si es necesario los pernos que unen los tops con las cajas soporte de
acero carbono.
11.5.-Apretar en forma provisoria los pernos que fijan las cajas soporte a la estructura
11.6.-Repetir procedimiento indicado en punto 10 anterior, pero midiendo las elevaciones por
encima de los tops. Considerar las mismas tolerancias indicadas en ese caso.
11.7.-Para corregir la nivelación, soltar los pernos y montar shims, apretar nuevamente los
pernos y rechequear nivelación de tops (según punto 10 anterior). Nunca se debe chequear
nivelación estando los pernos sueltos

11.8.-Si la nivelación es correcta, apretar en forma definitiva los pernos y emitir Protocolo de
Nivelación

12.- SOLDAR TOPS DE CAJAS DE AIRE.


12.1.-Revisar cuidadosamente que los bordes de tops contiguos se encuentren totalmente
alineados. Corregir si esto no ocurre. No se aceptan diferencias de altura entre tops
contiguos
12.2.-Preparar los bordes de los tops contiguos mediante puntos de soldadura o bien mediante
atiesadores provisorios para mantener su alineamiento
12.2.1.- Solo se deben emplear herramientas y materiales de acero inoxidable
12.3.-Soldar bordes con proceso TIG. Soldar 10-15 mm y espaciar cada 100 mm. Minimizar el
aporte de calor durante el proceso de soldadura. Soldar alternado.
12.4.-Esmerilar y pulir zona soldada. Utilizar discos lijadores máximo gr120-gr 80 para pulir.
No utilizar piedras rígidas, utilizar discos con respaldo de caucho.
12.5.-Diferencia de altura entre bordes de planchas inox consecutivas: no se acepta
12.6.-Deformaciones debido a soldadura: no se aceptan.
12.7.-Punto obligatorio de Inspección Delkor
Sección 2 ~ Página 12 de 20

13.-AJUSTAR ALTURA POLEA DE CABEZA


13.1.-La parte superior del recubrimiento de caucho debe quedar 4,0 +/- 1,0 mm mas alto que
el top mas cercano. Para lograr esto se deben montar shims por debajo de los descanso de la
Polea de Cabeza.
13.2.-Emitir Protocolo con la altura final de la Polea de Cabeza

14.-AJUSTAR ALTURA POLEA DE COLA


14.1.-La parte superior del recubrimiento de caucho debe quedar 8,0 +/- 1,0 mm mas alto que
el top mas cercano. Para lograr esto se deben montar shims por debajo de la guía inferior del
descanso take-up de la Polea de Cola.
14.2.-Emitir Protocolo con la altura final de la Polea de Cola

15.-AJUSTAR PARALELISMO Y CUADRATURA ENTRE POLEAS DE COLA Y CABEZA


15.1.-Considerar las siguientes tolerancias:
15.1.1.-Tolerancia de paralelismo entre Poleas +/- 4,0 mm
15.1.2.-Tolerancia de diagonales entre Poleas +/- 8,0 mm
15.2.-Emitir Protocolo con registro de estas dimensiones
15.3.- Inspección Delkor

FIG. 2

16.-MONTAR SISTEMA DE LEVANTE NEUMÁTICO Y CAJA DE VACÍO ( FIG 2 )


16.1.-Montar sistema de levante: brazos, ejes y cilindros neumáticos con sus soportes. Los
cilindros mantengalos en posición cerrada (es decir la Caja de Vacío se debe armar en posición
inferior). Apretar los pernos en forma provisoria.
16.2.-Montar Caja de Vacío: End Bracket, Tail Bracket, Vacuum Box, empaquetaduras de
caucho, espárragos de fijación, placas guía. Apretar todos los pernos en forma provisoria.
16.3.-Montar en forma provisoria las correas de desgaste ( “wear belt” ) sobre los ejes
superiores del sistema de levante. La cara rugosa o de caucho del wear belt debe ir en
contacto con la banda.
16.4.-Medir rectitud y planitud de la cara superior de la caja de vacío. La tolerancia de
deformación máxima aceptable para esta cara en toda su extensión es de +/-1,5 mm.
16.5.-Diferencias de altura entre tramos consecutivos de la caja de vacío no son aceptables.
Sección 2 ~ Página 13 de 20

16.6.-Apretar todos los pernos en forma definitiva.


16.7.-Repetir medición de acuerdo a 16.4 anterior. Emitir Protocolo de control dimensional
16.8.-Cortar todos los excesos de caucho de las empaquetaduras ubicadas entre los flanges de
los tramos de la Caja de Vacío
16.9.-Inspección Delkor

17.-MONTAR SEAL STRIPS, END PAD DE COLA Y DE CABEZA


17.1.-Prearmar los Seal Strip y End Pad sobre una superficie limpia y pareja. Puede utilizarse la
Caja de Aire ( tops ) para este trabajo. Se debe dejar una abertura de XX mm en los fondos de
los dientes de los tramos de seal strip. No golpear las piezas de plástico y protejerlas durante
su prearmado. Medir el largo total obtenido y comparar con el largo de la Caja de Vacío.
17.2.-Revisar cuidadosamente la cara superior de la Caja de Vacío, eliminar golpes o
deformaciones menores y limpiarla con paños limpios y solvente de evaporación rápida
17.3.-Montar dos tramos de Buta Seal a cada lado con la cara adherente hacia la Caja de Vacío.
En los extremos ( End y Tail Bracket montar cuatro tramos longitudinales y cuatro
transversales de Buta Seal ). No estirar el Buta Seal durante su montaje
17.4.-Retirar el papel protector superior del Buta Seal y montar los Seal Strip en forma
cuidadosa haciendo conincidir el eje longitudinal de estos ( ancho interior 35 mm ) con el eje
longitudinal de la Caja de Vacío.
17.5.-Montar los Clamping Plate y apretar sus pernos en forma provisoria pero en forma
suficiente que se requiera una presión en los lados para poder desplazar los Seal Strip
17.6.-Inspección obligatoria de Delkor durante todo el proceso

18.-AJUSTAR LOS SEAL STRIP


18.1.-Montar una “cuerda de piano” o cuerda de nylon por el centro del filtro y sobre la cara
superior de los Seal Strip. Esta cuerda debe estar a 90º con respecto a las Poleas de Cola y
Cabeza ( ya previamente alineadas y centradas), centrada con respecto a éstas y
suficientemente tensa. Verificar que además la cuerda coincida con el eje central formado por
las cajas de aire.
18.2.-Ajustar en forma lateral los Seal Strip de manera que su slot central de 35 mm de ancho
quede centrado con respecto a la cuerda. La tolerancia máxima permisible de desviación del
slot con respecto al eje formado por la cuerda es de : +/- 1,0 mm. Controlar cada 300 mm de
largo la desviación. Para este control utilizar vernier ( o pie de rey / o pie de metro ), no
utilizar cinta métrica. Para corregir el centrado mueva los Seal Strip sin golpes en forma lateral
18.3.-Ajustar los pernos de los Clamping Plate clamp en forma definitiva. Apretar en forma
pareja para lograr buen asentamiento contra el Buta Seal. Hacer medición final de rectitud de
Seal Strip y emitir Protocolo Dimensional
18.4.-Inspección obligatoria de Delkor durante todo el proceso

19.-MONTAR END SLIDE Y WEAR BELT SUPPORT

20.-MONTAR MANIFOLD AIRE SISTEMA LEVANTE Y SU PANEL NEUMÁTICO


20.1.-Montar manifold y mangueras entre éste y los cilindros de levante

20.2.-Montar panel neumático de sistema de levante


20.3.-Purgar lineas de aire y verificar en la válvula de tres vías del Panel las posiciones de
levante y bajada de la Caja de Vacío

21.-MONTAR WEAR BELTS Y AJUSTAR LA ALTURA FINAL DE LA CAJA DE VACÍO.


Sección 2 ~ Página 14 de 20

21.1.-Montar los Wear Belts ( correas de desgaste ) sobre los Seal Strip
21.2.-Subir lentamente la Caja de Vacío mediante el sistema neumático de levante, hasta dejar la
parte superior de los Wear Belt (cara que quedará en contacto con la Banda) alineada con los
tops. Se requieren 750 kPa disponibles para este efecto.
21.3.-Apretar las tuercas y contratuercas superiores de los l espárragos que fijan la Caja de
Vacío contra la estructura del Filtro, cuidando que dicho espárrago quede centrado en el slot
del ángulo soporte de la Caja de Vacío
21.4.-Apretar las Guide Plate laterales contra los bordes de los flanges de la Caja de Vacío.
Estas guías se deben fijar contra la esttructura del Filtro formando un pequeño ángulo entre sí
para facilitar el descenso y subida de la Caja de Vacío: dejar 8 mm mas abiertas hacia el lado de
la alimentación del Filtro.
21.5.-Fijar la altura definitiva de los Wear Belts mediante las tuercas y contratuercas inferiores
de los espárragos. La tolerancia de la parte superior de los wear belts con respecto a los tops
es de: +/ -0,2 mm. Utilizar para este control vernier, no cinta métrica.
21.6.-Los espárragos tienen tres tuercas en su parte inferior. Después de fijar la altura
definitiva se deben apretar en forma definitiva las dos tuercas superiores entre sí de manera de
mantener la altura de la Caja de Vacío y permitir que ésta pueda subir y bajar, sin tener que
repetir este control cada vez.
21.7.-Emita Protocolo de Control Dimensional de acuerdo a 20.5 anterior.
21.8.-Inspección obligatoria de Delkor durante todo el proceso.

22.-MONTAR COMPONENTES MECÁNICOS Y MOTORES ELÉCTRICOS


Seguir las instrucciónes específicas de los Fabricantes en cada caso. Tensar y alinear bandas de
transmisión.
22.1.-Reductor de accionamiento Sew
22.2.-Bomba de vacío Nash
22.3.-Bomba de Filtrado Krogh
22.4.-Soplador Tetlack

23.-MONTAR COMPONENTES ESTRUCTURALES / PIPING


Montar todos los componentes estructurales y pinping que no interfieren con el montaje de la
Banda:
23.1.-Torre soporte, moisture trap, estanque y pierna barométrica

23.2.-Receiver ( estanque receptor de filtrado )


23.3.-Manifold de vacío
23.4.-Plataformas y escaleras de servicio
23.5.-Piping de alimentación de Pulpa, de agua de sello de la Caja de Vacío, de agua de sello de
la Bomba de Vacío, de la Bomba de Filtrado, de descarga de filtrado
23.6.-Manifold de aire de Cajas de Aire. Identificar dampers abiertos / cerrados en los ductos
de aire.

24.-MONTAR TODA LA INSTRUMENTACIÓN LOCAL

25.-MONTAR Y EMPALMAR LA BANDA


25.1.-Inspeccionar en forma cuidadosa el 100 % de los tops. Si hay rayas, marcas o daños en
general, se deben pulir antes de montar la banda. Este punto debe ser inspeccionado por
Delkor.
25.2.-Montar, centrar y alinear la banda con respecto a la estructura. Medir y compartir
diferencias con respecto a las columnas de los frame intermedios. Verificar posición de la Polea
de Cola (debe estar desplazada hacia el lado de la Polea de Cabeza.
25.3.-Empalmar banda
Sección 2 ~ Página 15 de 20

25.4.-Hacer tracking de banda.


25.5.-Trazar y hacer perforaciones de banda
25.6.-Pegar curbings
25.7.-Inspección obligatoria de Delkor después de 25.1 y durante todo el proceso.

26.-MONTAR TODOS LOS COMPONENTES ESTRUCTURALES FALTANTES


26.1.-Los polines de tela ( 2 polines ), el polín curvo y polín de alimentación ( Feed dam Roller
) ubicados en el lado de alimentación y sobre la Polea de Cola
26.2.- Los polines de tela ( 4 polines ) ubicados en el lado de descarga
26.3.-Estanque alimentador y su estructura soporte, alimentador (“fish tail feeder”)
26.4.-Cañerías de lavado de tela y de banda
26.5.-Chute de descarga

27.-MONTAR Y EMPALMAR LA TELA


27.1.-Al llegar a este punto deben estar 100 % concluídas las soldaduras
27.2.-El montaje y empalme de la primera tela se hace bajo supervisión Delkor
Sección 2 ~ Página 16 de 20

VERIFICACIONES ANTES DE LA PUESTA EN MARCHA

Una vez que las verificaciones mecánicas (ver sección 3) han sido completadas, proceder de la
manera siguiente:

Abra la válvula de agua de sello en el flujometro hasta que aparezcan pequeñas gotas de agua en
la parte exterior de los rieles de sello. Verifique que el flujo sea aproximadamente de 2,2 m3/h y
fije el límite inferior del regulador de flujo a 1,5 m3/h.

Heche agua a la tela y a los rociadores de limpieza de la correa y verifique que estén parejos y
que no estén bloqueados. Verifique el ángulo de los rociadores que deberían estar entre 85 a
90º con relación a la tela en el lado de la correa y de 60º con relación a la tela en el lado del
queque o ajustarlos para el máximo efecto.

Verifique que la presión de los rociadores, la que debería estar a una máxima presión relativa
de 500 kpa para su correcta operación. Una presión más alta hace que las gotas del rociador
sean demasiado pequeñas y una presión más baja reducirá la limpieza efectiva de la tela y de la
correa

Asegúrese que todas las líneas de aire comprimido estén abiertas.

Asegúrese que el filtro regulador de presión no esté bloqueado. Ajuste la presión del regulador
a 2 bar.

Prepare de la bomba de vacío de acuerdo a las instrucciones del fabricante.

Si se desea, un test de vacío puede realizarse tapando las ranuras de la correa y las
perforaciones con hojas de plástico cargadas de agua. Esta técnica es útil para identificar fugas
en el sello de vacío en el sistema de agua.

Asegúrese que el sistema de enclavamiento funcione y que funcione de acuerdo a las


recomendaciones en el esquema de enclavamiento.
Sección 2 ~ Página 17 de 20

PARTIDA DEL FILTRO


Asegúrese que todas las válvulas estén cerradas.

Abra las válvulas de los rociadores de agua y verifique que los rociadores cubran el ancho total
de la tela y la correa. Limpie cualquier boquilla bloqueada.

Verifique que no haya ningún objeto extraño sobre la correa.

Verifique que el sistema de alimentación de la pulpa esté operativo y que la pulpa esté
disponible.

Revise que no haya hoyos en la tela del filtro.

Revise que la parte inferior de la correa transportadora esté limpia y que no haya ningún objeto
sobre esta.

Abra el agua de sello y revise que el flujo esté correcto.

Partir la bomba de filtrado.

Abra la válvula de agua de la correa de deslizamiento.

Partir el accionamiento a baja velocidad e incremente lentamente la velocidad.

Partir la bomba de vacío.

Abra el agua de sello de la bomba de vacío inmediatamente después de partir la bomba de


vacío.

Asegúrese que las correas transportadoras y la tela, ambas estén bien centradas y que el
sistema de centrado de tela esté funcionando correctamente.

Introduzca la alimentación abriendo la válvula de alimentación a 20% (el valor real será determinado
durante la puesta en servicio) y genere un queque.
El vacío sólo será logrado cuando toda el área de vacío esté cubierta de sólidos.

Cuando el vacío se logra en la correa (-30 a -80 kpa) y se haya formado un queque seco del filtro,
incremente gradualmente la velocidad de la correa y la tasa de alimentación se obtiene abriendo la
válvula de alimentación a la tasa requerida.

Parta la bomba de sumidero y la bomba de filtrado.


Sección 2 ~ Página 18 de 20

DETENCIÓN DEL FILTRO

Pare la alimentación.

Deje suficiente tiempo al queque húmedo para que pierda el agua y que se seque lo máximo posible y
descargue todo el queque.

Cierre la válvula de vacío de agua de sello.

Pare la bomba de vacío.

Rotar la tela de 2 a 3 revoluciones para asegurar que la tela y la correa, ambas estén limpias.
Cierre los rociadores de lavado.

Pare el accionamiento del filtro.

Cierre la válvula de agua de la correa de deslizamiento.

Cierre la válvula de agua de sello del filtro.

Filtrado. Detenga la bomba de filtrado.


FUNCIONAMIENTO NORMAL

Durante un funcionamiento normal, los siguientes ajustes de rutina son normales:


Ajuste la tasa de alimentación y la velocidad de la correa para optimizar la capacidad del filtro
para obtener una baja humedad del queque final.

Los rociadores de lavado pueden ser ajustados para minimizar la cantidad requerida
para un lavado eficiente de la tela.

El lavado de la correa puede no ser requerido y las condiciones de la correa deben ser
revisadas durante su funcionamiento con o sin lavado para decidir si un lavado es
necesario.

La tensión de la tela puede necesitar ajustes para mantener la tensión correcta.

Revise lo siguiente una vez al día:

a. Análisis de la humedad de queque


b. Revisión del espesor de queque
c. Revisión de la perdida de vacío.
Sección 2 ~ Página 19 de 20

ACCIONES DE EMERGENCIA

Interrupción de energía

En el caso de una interrupción de energía, todos los equipos tienen que ser
reseteados. Parta el filtro siguiendo el procedimiento de partida.

x Cierre la válvula de alimentación.

Falla de los instrumentos de aire

En el caso de una falla de los instrumentos de aire:

x Cierre la válvula de alimentación


x Pare el accionamiento del filtro
x Pare todas las bombas

Rotura de la tela

En el caso de la rotura de la tela:


x Pare el filtro (el botón de parada o el alambre de desenganche)
x Repare la tela
x Vuelva a partir siguiendo las instrucciones en secciones 3 y 5.

OPERACIÓN ANORMAL
Perdida de vacío

Revise lo siguiente:

a) La bomba de vacío funciona a su correcta velocidad y tiene suministro de agua


fría de sello.
b) Revise que el tanque barométrico esté lleno de agua.
c) Revise todas las flanges y uniones en los manifold de vacío y los receptores por
si hay fugas.
d) Revise que el filtrado se esta removido de manera correcta.
e) Revise los posibles daños en las correas de desgaste.
f) Revise todas las uniones y los END BRACKETS de la caja de vacío.
g) Revise si hay suficiente pulpa/queque en el filtro.
h) Revise que el sistema de centrado de la tela esté funcionando correctamente,
para que las perforaciones de drenaje estén alineadas en las ranuras de la caja
de vacío.

Mala descarga del queque

Revise lo siguiente:

a) Utilización de tela correcta para el filtro


Sección 2 ~ Página 20 de 20

b) Espesor del queque


c) Humedad del queque
d) Velocidad de la correa
e) Tensión de la tela

Centrado de correa inadecuado

Ajuste las poleas de cabeza, de cola y los rodillos.

PROGRAMA DE INTERCONEXIÓN

El programa de interconexión es como sigue:

Interconexiones cableadas

x Los interruptores (ZS-1,2,3,4) de la tela/correa son activados


- pare el motor del filtro de banda
x Interruptores de carrera (pull-switch) son activados (HS-1,2)
- pare el motor del filtro de banda
x Bajo flujo de agua de sello de la bomba de vacío
- alarma
- pare la bomba de vacío

Interconexiones cableadas

x Interruptor del flujo de agua de sello del filtro es activado en bajo flujo
- alarma
- si el bajo flujo se mantiene por mas de 1 minuto, pare el motor del filtro de banda.
x Si se para el filtro de banda
- alarma
- pare la alimentación al filtro

x Si se para la bomba de filtrado


- alarma
- pare el motor del filtro de banda
x Si se para la bomba de vacío
- alarma
- pare la alimentación al filtro.

Ajuste el variador de velocidad del sistema de accionamiento a un mínimo y haga partir el


motor. Incremente la velocidad de la correa lentamente y si funciona correctamente, ajuste la
velocidad a una velocidad media. Observe atentamente la posición de la correa
transportadora sobre las poleas principales y si es necesario, ajuste la polea de cola para
asegurar que la correa esté centrada correctamente, sin balanceo. Deje la correa andando
hasta que se centre por completo. Casi todas las correas van a estar desajustadas inicialmente
y necesitan ajustes precisos antes que se detenga el balanceo. Es esencial que la correa se esté
centrando de manera precisa para que las perforaciones de drenaje estén ubicados
centralmente sobre las ranuras de la caja de vacío.
Sección 3 ~ Página 1 de 8

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION

SECCION 3

MANUAL DE MANTENCION
INSTALACION DE LA TELA
INFORMACION TECNICA DEL
FILTRO

LL.M. A.S. MAYO 10 0


PREPARO REVISO FECHA REVISION

BELT FILTER 2x73m²

NOMBRE DEL EQUIPO TAG MODELO


COMPAÑIA
73M² BELT FILTER #1 05-820-4223-003 MINERA MILPO

32B / 08-30V
MILPO II
73M² BELT FILTER #2 05-820-4223-004

CONTRATO ORDEN DECOMPRA


DOCUMENTO DELKOR
DELKOR- No:
No: D284-HBF-MO-01
No: 28410 LMCO-0000000794
Sección 3 ~ Página 2 de 8

MANUAL DE MANTENCION DEL FILTRO

1. REVISIÓN MECÁNICA DE LA UNIDAD DEL FILTRO

1.1 El nivel de las poleas de cabeza y cola, la caja de vacío y la superficie de la correa de
deslizamiento deben ser chequeada para asegurar que se encuentren ajustada en un nivel
general adecuado. Las variaciones excesivas en las alturas de estos componentes
afectaran el consumo de vacío del filtro. No debería haber espacio entre la correa de
desgaste y la correa transportadora. La mejor manera de realizar esto es de ajustar el
nivel de las correas de desgaste con la parte superior de las cajas de aire utilizando una
escuadra, esto se hace previo el ajuste de la correa transportadora (Figura 1).

1.2 El filtro es instalado de manera inclinada desde el extremo de cola hasta el extremo del
sistema de accionamiento, pero horizontal a lo ancho de a correa. De esta manera se
obtiene un ancho parejo del queque para minimizar el uso del vacío.

1.3 Todos los rodillos de soporte para la tela y la correa deben también ser revisados para
el paralelismo y el nivelaje.

1.4 Revise que de los rodamientos engrasado tenga una cantidad de grasa adecuada.

1.5 Revise el sentido de rotación de los motores del eje y la bomba partiendo los motores y
corregir si es necesario.

1.6 Revise el nivel del aceite en las cajas reductoras.

1.7 Revise que ningún cuerpo extraño esté atrapado entre la correa transportadora y la caja
de vacío/correa destiladora o los rodillos de la correa transportadora.

1.8 Revise la tensión de la correa transportadora. La correa es tensionada suavemente de


manera que no ocurra deslizamiento en la polea de accionamiento y no muy apretada,
para que la catenaria esta plana sobre polines guías de retorno.
Sección 3 ~ Página 3 de 8

2. MANTENCIÓN DEL FILTRO

2.1 Inspección Diaria

2.1.I Revise si hay daños en la guardera.

2.1.2 Revise las boquillas de los rociadores y desbloquee si es necesario.

2.1.3 Revise que la tela no tenga hoyos.

2.1.4 Revise que las correas de desgaste no estén rotas y que se estén moviendo en conjunto
con la correa.

2.1.5 Revise que no haya ninguna acumulación en ningún rodillo. La acumulación de queque en
un rodillo hace que la correa o la tela se descentre. Limpie las acumulaciones con agua.

2.2 Inspección Semanal

2.2.1 Revise todos los rodillos para que se muvan libremente.

2.2.2 Revise el desgaste del rodillo de centrado de tela y que esté libre de movimiento.

2.2.3 Bombee grasa en los rodamientos.

2.2.4 Revise el regulador Deltracker para presión máxima a 2 bar.

2.2.5 Revise el brazo del sensor Deltracker esté libre de movimiento.

2.3. Inspección Mensual

2.3.1 Revise todos los rodamientos y engráselos.

2.3.2 Revise la operación de los interruptores de limite y los interruptores manuales.

2.3.3 Limpie el regulador Deltracker colector de humedad y rellénelo.

2.3.4 Inspeccione las cajas de vacío.

a) Saque las mangueras de vacío

b) Asegúrese que el huinche mantenga la tensión a la cuerda.

c) Suelte las tuercas de los soportes de la caja de vacío (A en fig. 1).

d) Desconecte la manguera de suministro de agua de sello

e) Utilice un huinche para bajar la caja de vacío

f) Después de haber bajado la caja de vacío, fije la caja de vacío en su posición.


Sección 3 ~ Página 4 de 8

g) Revise el desgaste de las correas de desgaste, de los rieles de sello, rieles terminales
de deslizamiento de HPDE.

h) Revise que las mangueras de agua de sello, el manifold y las ranuras en los rieles de
sello estén libres y desbloqueados.
i) Revise que los rieles de sello estén dentro de sus limites de desgaste. Para hacer
esto, ponga una escuadra a lo largo de la parte superior de las correas de desgaste,
y mida el espacio que queda entre la escuadra y los rieles de sello (ver fig. 4).
El nuevo espacio es de 3 mm y él limite de desgaste es de 0,5 mm

j) Si el espacio es menor de 0,5 mm reemplace los rieles de sello de esta manera:


 Retire la correa de desgaste
 Retire la manguera de agua de sello y codos
 Retire las tuercas de fijación (ver fig. 4)
 Limpie la parte superior de la caja de vacío y ponga dos tiras de autoadhesivo
"Buta seal" de cada lado de la caja de vacío.
 Ajustar el nuevo juego de rieles de sello, incluyendo los terminales de cabeza
y de cola.
 Cambie las tuercas de fijación, codos y mangueras.
 Reajuste la altura de la caja de vacío.

k) Para ajustar la altura de la caja de vacío:


 Refiérase a la fig. 2 y mida la dimensión "D" y "E". Medir cada D y E para cada
segmento de la caja de vacío.
 Refiérase a la fig. 3 y fijar las tuercas de fijación a las dimensiones D y E
correspondientes.
 Levantar la caja de vacío y ajustarla con tuercas A (ver fig. 1)
 Reajustar todas las mangueras.
 Ir soltando poco a poco el huinche cuando la caja de vacío esté ajustada en su
posición de manera que el huinche no esté siempre bajo tensión.
Sección 3 ~ Página 5 de 8

3 INSTALACION DE LA TELA

3.1. Mueva el rodillo de ajuste de la tela a su posición más suelta (mas alta)

3.2. Levantar el tensor de la tela y fijarlo en una posición más alta.

3.3 Verifique que la parte superior de la tela sea la correcta.

Nota: La mayoría de las telas de filtro tienen un lado superior y un lado inferior, entonces su
correcta instalación es importante. Esto esta normalmente marcado sobre la tela y el ingeniero
instalador lo confirmará.

3.4 Alimente la tela a lo largo de la cama del filtro sobre la polea de cabeza y rodillos de
descarga a través del lavado final de la tela, a lo largo de la base del filtro hasta el rodillo
de cola, bajo el rodillo de retención de alimentación y cortinas de retención.

3.5 Junte los dos extremos de la tela del filtro. Esto se hace con una costura engrampada en
las telas monofilamento o pegamento para telas de tipo needle felt.

3.6 Es importante que el centro de la tela esté alineado para asegurar que la tela esté
completamente paralela. Alinear los bordes de la tela puede causar problemas de
centrado de la tela si la tela no esta paralela.

3.7 Para telas con costura engrampada, pasar a través de la guía de acero y tire el alambre
de seguimiento de poliéster. Apriete cada extremo del alambre asegurándose que el
alambre no esté muy apretado que pueda plegar la costura.

3.8 Para telas tipo needle felt pegue de esta manera:

3.8.1 Tire la tela hacia arriba para minimizar el undimiento alrededor de los rodillos de
retorno

3.8.2 Alinee la tela y marque la línea de centro de la tela.

3.8.3 Asegúrese que las líneas de centro de la tela correspondan y que la tela esté paralela.
Sección 3 ~ Página 6 de 8

3.8.4 Marcando una línea con tiza, medir 150 mm de traslape y corte la tela para que se
adecue.

3.8.5 Ponga el extremo de la tela sobre una tabla de madera en la parte superior de la correa
del filtro

3.8.6 Preparare suficiente de pegamento SC2000 mezclado con un endurecedor de acuerdo a


lo recomendado por el fabricante.

3.8.7 Pintar la parte superior del borde trailing de la tela con una banda de 150mm de
SC2000. Pintar la parte inferior del borde conductor con una banda de 150 mm de
SC2000

3.8.8 Esperare hasta que el pegamento esté seco; verifique tocando la superficie.

3.8.9 Aplique una segunda capa de SC2000 sobre las dos superficies y espere hasta que la
superficie del pegamento esté casi seca; el pegamento tiene que estar ligeramente
pegajoso cuando uno lo toca.

3.8.10 Ponga la tela plástica delgada sobre las superficies pegadas del borde y alinee los bordes
uno sobre otro; con las líneas de centro de la tela correspondiendo exactamente.

3.8.11 Retire la tela plástica del centro y, con un rodillo, pegue las superficies moviendo hacia
afuera desde la línea de centro.

3.8.12 Deje las junturas por un mínimo de 2 horas para completa adherencia.

3.9 Suelte el rodillo tensor y parta el filtro.

3.10 Ajuste el brazo detector del sistema de centrado de tela para asegurar que la tela esté
alineada centralmente con el filtro.
Sección 3 ~ Página 7 de 8

4 INFORMACION TECNICA DEL FILTRO

4.1 GENERAL

Modelo : 32B/06/30V
Ancho : 3200mm.
Largo : 27300mm
Area activa del filtro : 73 m2
Ancho de la correa principal : 3.20 m

4.2 CINTA DE TRANSPORTE

Material : Caucho natural


Tipo : Con guardera de los bordes.
Solera de bordes de la cinta : 130 mm
Estrias transv. De la cinta : Inclinada al 0.6%

4.3 SOPORTE DE LA CINTA

Tipo : Caja de Aire (Colchon de aire).


Material : Arriba (AISI 304l) – Abajo (ASTM A36)

4.4 CAJA DE VACIO

Material : SS 316l
Numero de cajas : 08 c/u
Consumo de agua de sello : 3 m3/hr (total).

4.5 LAVADO DE LA TELA DEL FILTRO Y DE LA CORREA

Número cañería de lavado : 3


Cantidad de boquillas por cañería : 24
Tipo de boquilla : Norton APG-40N
Material : SS 316
Consumo de agua de lavado de la tela : 18 m3/h
Consumo de agua de lavado de la correa : 8 m3/h

4.6 SISTEMA DE CENTRADO DE LA TELA

Consumo de aire : 4 m3/hr (aire libre)


Sección 3 ~ Página 8 de 8

4.7 RECEPTOR DE FILTRADO 1

Material : Acero al carbono.


Cantidad : 1
Diámetro : 1850 mm
Altura : 2700 mm

4.8 TRAMPA DE HUMEDAD

Material : Acero al carbono.


Cantidad : 1
Diámetro : 1000 mm
Altura : 1500 mm
Sección 4 ~ Página 1 de 142

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION

SECCION 4

EQUIPOS Y COMPONENTES
MECANICOS

A.S. R.B. MAYO 10 0


PREPARO REVISO FECHA REVISION

BELT FILTER 2x73m²

NOMBRE DEL EQUIPO TAG MODELO


COMPAÑIA
73M² BELT FILTER #1 05-820-4223-003 MINERA MILPO

32B / 08-30V
MILPO II
73M² BELT FILTER #2 05-820-4223-004

CONTRATO ORDEN DECOMPRA


DOCUMENTO DELKOR
DELKOR- No:
No: D284-HBF-MO-01
No: 28410 LMCO-0000000794
Sección 4 ~ Página 2 de 142

VACUUM PUMP REV: 0


284- VP - 1 DATE: 20/04/10

SUPPLIER KENFLO
MODEL Nº CBF410-2BV3
Nº OF UNITS 2
NORMAL OPERATING FLOW RATE 9.000 m3/h
DELIVERY PRESSURE -60 kPa
AMBIENT EMP ºC 10 to 30 Celcius
ALTITUDE 2.200 m.a.s.l.
PUMP SPEED 420 rpm
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION CAST IRON
SUCTION SIZES 12” (300 mm)
DISCHARGE SIZE 12” (300 mm)
SHAFT SEALING GLAND WATER
SEAL WATER 500 l/min (30 m3/h @ 1bar)
SEAL WATER CONNECTION
GLAND WATER CONNECTION
INSTALLED MOTOR kW 220 (300 HP)
MOTOR rpm 1200 ( 6 Poles)
VOLTAJE / FRECUENCY / PHASES 460 V / 60 Hz / 3 Ph
DRIVE TYPE V-BELT
STARTING METHOD SOFT START
DISCHARGE PRESSURE ATM

Vacuum Pump Data Sheet 28410 rev 0.doc


Sección 4 ~ Página 3 de 142

Water-ring Vacuum Pump and Outfit

Installation and Operation Instruction


CBF300-----CBF730

Guangdong Foshan Pump Factory Co., Ltd

2005
Sección 4 ~ Página 4 de 142

Dear KENFLO Customers:


Thank you for purchasing KENFLO products.
We will try to provide you with our best services to achieve our mission of customer satisfaction.
This instruction will provide a clear guideline for how to install, operate and maintain 2BE1
303~705 water-ring pumps. Before using pumps, technicians and operators should read it
carefully for many years of reliable service.
Adequate safety precautions should be taken to prevent direct or indirect hurt to human or
the machine in the process of transportation, assembly, operation and maintenance etc, even if
there is no clear indication of attention items and technical requirements in this manual.

1 GENERAL INTRODUCTION
2BE1 water-ring vacuum pumps are of single-stage and single-acting configuration, and generally
used for sucking gases which contain no solids, and are dissolved slightly or insoluble in service
liquid. When the wetted components of a vacuum pump are made of or coated with corrosion free
materials, it can suck corrosive gases or use corrosive liquids as its service liquid.
Explanation of Model Number

CBF 40 0 — 2 B G 3 — 0 Y 420

Pump rotational speed


Code of mating motor. (See attached table 1)
Supplementary code of drive mode. (See attached table 2)
Code of shaft seal. ‘3’ is packing seal with external water
supply, and ‘4’ is packing seal with internal water supply. ‘2’
is single mechanical end face seal with internal water
supply, and ‘5’ is double mechanical end face seal with
external water supply.
Code of drive mode. “D” is direct coupled drive, “G” is
gears drive; “V” is belt drive.
Code of construction materials. ‘B’ indicates that major
wetted components are made of common materials. ‘N’
indicates that they are made of 304. ‘H’ for 316, ‘P’ for
Code of minimum absolute suction pressure. ‘1’ indicates it
can reach 160 mbar, its high effective range is between
160~1013 mbar. ‘0’ indicates 33mbar.
Characteristic code of length-diameter ratio of impeller
(When the pump casing has partition wall, the code is ‘6’)
Code of nominal radius of impeller (cm)

Code of pump series

1
Sección 4 ~ Página 5 de 142

2 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION AND CONSTRUCTION


2.1 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Figure 1 illustrates working principle of a
vacuum pump. 1. Water Ring
The impeller is assembled eccentrically inside 2. Inlet Port
the nearly circular pump casing. When the 3. Discharge Port
impeller revolves in the direction indicated in 4. Pump Casing
Fig.1, the liquid is thrown outwards under 5. Impeller
centrifugal force to form a liquid ring. As a
result, a crescent chamber area is developed
Fig. 1
between impeller hub and inner surface of the
liquid ring. As rotation proceeds from point ‘A’ to point ‘B’, the chamber area between adjacent
vanes will grow larger progressively, i.e. vacuum is set up and gas is drawn in via the inlet port.
And as rotation proceeds from point ‘C’ to point ‘A’, the corresponding chamber will become
smaller and smaller and the gas aspirated will be compressed. When the pressure reaches or is
above outside pressure, it will be discharged through discharge port.
2.2 SERVICE LIQUID
The service liquid is usually clear water at normal temperature. Hard water should be softened
before use. The service liquid can not only form a liquid ring, but also carry away the heat
generated by air compression, and seal the gap between the impeller end face and distributing plates
as well.
During operation, the pump must be supplied with water continually as some service liquid is
discharged together with the compressed gas. (For amount of water supply refer to attached table 7)
Pay attention to select corresponding material of wetted parts to match different service liquids.
The pump should be supplied with a service liquid which is as cool as possible, and free of any
solids. If service water contains particles or dirt, filters should be mounted in supply pipelines to
prevent wear of the parts inside the pump, or prevent the impeller from being jammed.
2.3 ULTIMATE SUCTION PRESSURE
Minimum suction pressure is determined by the temperature of service liquid.
The suction capacity curve of CBF water-ring vacuum pump is based on water at 15℃ and gas at
20℃. If water temperature is much higher, its suction capacity will reduce because of water in the
pump evaporating under vacuum state.
CBF water-ring vacuum pump can operate at 200mbar when water is at 40℃. The higher service
water temperature is, the higher permissible minimum suction pressure will be.
The pump will make vibration or abnormal noise if it runs at less than 180mar.
2.4 CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
2BE1 water-ring vacuum pump is constructed by the following ten main components:
2
Sección 4 ~ Página 6 de 142

1) Pump casing---Consisting of the fore part, the rear and the partition wall in the middle if having
partition wall.
2) Rotator---Consisting of the impeller and shaft which are combined through shrinking process.
The shaft is equipped with a shaft bushing.
3) Distributing Plates---The front and rear ones are mounted between the casing and the front side
cover or the rear side cover.
4) Valve Plate Components---Consisting of a water-check plate and a flexible valve plate. They
are mounted in the discharge port of distributing plate, which can adjust the angle of air
discharge automatically. The flexible valve plate made of Teflon is a wearing part. Replace a
new one in time if the old damaged, otherwise the vacuum will be affected.
5) Shaft Seal Components---Large size pumps usually use the packing seal. There are two cooling
methods for shaft seal: internal water supply and external water supply. And the assembly
direction of stuffing box is depended on the method used. Details are illustrated in the
following figures.

It is internal water supply It is external water supply


method when the foundry method when the foundry
number 4 is above the axis. number 3 is above the axis. It
There's no necessity to supply is necessary to supply cooling
cooling water to shaft seal. water to shaft seal.
Fig. 3

For specifications of packing in detail refer to attached table 3.


We generally supply the products with packing seal with external water supply.
Notices: factory-adjusted of regular products
z If the seal is shaft packing seal with external water supply, the shaft seal should be
supplied with water before pump operating.
z If it is single mechanical end face seal with internal water supply, there's no necessity
to supply the shaft seal with water in operation, while the mechanical seal is cooled by
internal water supply.
z If it is double mechanical end face seal with external water supply, cooling water
should be supplied into shaft seal before pump operating, otherwise mechanical seal

3
Sección 4 ~ Página 7 de 142

will burn out.


z To the outfits with closed circle service liquid such as 2BW5, packing seal and single
mechanical end face seal should be assembled with internal water supply, besides
cooling water should be supplied to shaft seal of double mechanical end face seal.
z The assembly of water supply method for shaft seal has met the contracts when our
products leave factory. If customers want to change water supply method for shaft
seal, you should adjust the angle of the stuffing box and the seal gasket according to
Fig.3 and supply shaft seal with water as requested.
6) Side cover
7) Bearing---In CBF300-730, two cone bearings and adjust shims are combined together for axial
locating.
For specifications of bearings refer to attached table 4.
8) Water supply pipelines---Service water is supplied into the pump through them.
9) Water supply pipelines for shaft seal---Cooling and sealing water should be supplied to the
stuffing box through them when using packing seal with external water supply or double
mechanical end face seal.
10) Automatic draw-off valve--Used for the control of the starting water level. When the pump
stops, water in the pump will be discharged automatically to keep the water level, which can
prevent the pump from restarting over the starting water level.
For the construction of CBF300-730 refer to Fig. 2.

3 PERFORMANCE AND INSTALLATION DRAWING OF UNIT


Please refer to the related catalogs for performance of the pump. Refer to attached table 5 for spare
parts of regular supply. Special demands are specified in contracts. See attached installation
drawing of products for overall and mounting dimensions.

4 INSTALLATION OF UNIT
Notice: Each pump is subject to strict tests before ex factory. Please do not disassemble
the pump before putting it into operation if nothing special.
A water-ring vacuum pump unit consists of vacuum pump, motor, drive devices and supporting
connectors. Necessary tools and hoisting equipments should be prepared before installation. For
weights of the vacuum pump, the motor and the reductor see rating plates.

WARNING
Pay attention to select appropriate hosting equipments according to the weight
of the machine. The operators should have related knowledge.
There are three kinds of drive mode for CBF vacuum pumps: direct coupled drive, gears drive and
belt drive. Their assembling methods are as follows:
4
Sección 4 ~ Página 8 de 142

4.1 DIRECT COUPLED DRIVE


(a) There should be a certain clearance between two
couplings of the pump and the motor mounted on the
based. Place straightedge of a steel ruler on external
circumference of the couplings along the axis (see
Fig.4). Check the couplings by placing the ruler at four
positions--top, bottom, right and left, to make sure that
maximum clearance between the ruler and the
couplings is below 0.2mm at any point. And the axial
clearance between two couplings should be uniform Fig. 4
and in the range of 3~5mm.
Clearance can be checked by feeler gauge. In case of any deviation found, adjust it by placing shims
under the motor feet until the clearance meet the requirements after bolts are tightened.
(b) Rotate the couplings several turns by hand to check if the unit can operate freely.
(c) Mount coupling guards.
Notice: Misalignment between the motor and the vacuum pump may occur during lifting
and transportation processes. Adjust again if necessary.
4.2 BELT DRIVE
The length of belts should be the same and there
should be available tension devices when using
V-belt.
(a) According to installation drawing, place the
vacuum pump and guide tracks of the motor
(Some models do not contain guide tracks) on the Fig. 5
concrete base, and then place the motor on the bed.
Check if they are in good touch with the base, and then adjust the levelness of the pump and the
motor. The next step is to mount a V-belt and adjust it by a tension device.
Notice: The tension of belts should be adjusted moderately. To be too loose will affect the
transmission of shaft power, and make the belt easily to be damaged; to be too tight will
increase the shaft power, and reduce service life of the belt, motor, pump and bearings.
(b) Check if the two belt pulleys’ ends are in the same vertical plane, otherwise re-align them. Turn
the pulleys several turns by hand to make sure they rotate freely. Use a straightened fiber string to
check the two pulleys for alignment (see Fig.5). The four points A, B, C and D located in the two
pulleys should be on the same straight line.
Notice: Ensure to lock belt pulleys and mount belt guards so as to guarantee safety
operation.

WARNING
z Mount belt guards before pump operation to prevent bodily injury.
5
Sección 4 ~ Página 9 de 142

z Anti-electrostatic belts should be mounted in the anti-explosion places. A


new anti-electrostatic belt should be used in replacing the old one with the
regulations; otherwise it will cause serious safety accidents.
4.3 GEARS DRIVE
The vacuum pump is usually mounted on the concrete base while the motor and the reductor are
placed on the same bed plate. First of all, level the pump and put nuts on the anchor bolts but do not
tighten. Then align the vacuum pump with the motor and the gear fixed on the bed plate. In this
process, shims can be added under the pump or the bed plate for aligning. After tightening the
anchor bolts, align the couplings according to the alignment method indicated in direct coupled
drive. Check if installation accuracy of the couplings can meet the requirement of Fig.4. Pay
attention to avoid inappropriate installation which may cause the unit deformation, excessive noise,
excessive vibration or bearings damage.
When using reductors with water cooling system, ambient water should be supplied to the
connection of cooling water. Exhaust water should be drained to specified places.
The cooling water pressure for the reductor is in the range of 0.1-0.3Mpa (shown in the manometer
pressure). The lubricant brand is ISO VG460 (subject to instruction of reductor).
For the usage of reductors refer to their installation instruction attached.

5. ARRANGEMENT AND INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES


Before installing pipelines, especially inlet pipe, clean up welding slag, rust and other foreign
matters. It is recommended to mount filters (20/30 mesh/inch) in new pipes. The filters are mounted
between two flanges, and should have a little clamping allowance outside the external circle in
order to avoid being absorbed into the pump. They can be removed after ensuring that there are no
foreign matters remaining inside the pipes for a period of usage. The new filters are easy to be
clogged by foreign matters, which will affect the gas suction. If so, disassemble and clean it in time.
Generally, the pump should be stopped to clean the filters after it has operated initially for a week,
and then do the same thing after three weeks. Repeat the work until the system is clean enough
inside. Finally, remove filters. The pipes must be flushed with clean water before being connected
to the pump, ensuring that all the foreign matters adhering to them have been removed away.

WARNING
z Clean up pipes before starting, otherwise foreign matters absorbed will
damage or lock the vacuum pump.
z Remove filters in the inlet pipes in test run before ensuring that there are no
foreign matters in them. Otherwise the gas suction of the pump will be
affected.
Notice: Too many bends in the piping arrangement or adopting thin-wall discharge pipes
may increase the noise of gas scouring and produce noise pollution.
Check inlet and outlet pipes for seal. In order to avoid increase of suction and discharge resistance,
diameter of pipes and valves should not be smaller than that of the tee pipe couplings and gas/water
6
Sección 4 ~ Página 10 de 142

separator connections.
Mount a vacuum manometer in the inlet pipe and a vacuum gauge on the side of the inlet tee joint
respectively.
Refer to Fig.6, 7, 8 and 9 for pipelines arrangement according to different applications.

Fig. 6 Fig. 7

Fig. 8 Fig. 9

7
Sección 4 ~ Página 11 de 142

16 Cylindrical
1. Vacuum Pump 6 Vacuum Manometer 11 Inlet Gate Valve
Gas/Water Separator
7 Gate Valve for Supplying
2. Discharge Pipe 12 Check Valve 17 Heat Exchanger
Service water
3. Gate Valve for 8 Water Supply Pipe for Shaft
13 Vacuum Gauge 18 Liquidometer
Flushing and Draining Seal
9 Water Supply Gate Valve 19 Discharge Pipe for
4. Automatic Drain Valve 14 Suction Tee Joint
for Shaft Seal Stuffing Box Leakage
20 Discharge Pipe for
5. Service Water Pipe 10 Manometer 15 Gas/Water Separator
Flushing and Draining

Explanation of Fig.6-9
z Our regular supplies only include the parts drawn with continuous lines.
Explanation of Fig.7 and 8
z The arrangements shown in Fig.7 and 8 are suitable for absorbing and discharging combustible,
corrosive, explosive gases or gases which are required to be recycled. But customers should
add a field monitor to ensure that the liquid level of the gas/water separator must be in the
middle of the liquidometer.
z When service water is required to be recycled, it is recommended to mount a heat exchanger
(shown in Fig.7, such as our product –2BW5 outfit). As 2BE1 vacuum pump is of self-priming
(self-sucking), no blower pump is required. The liquid level of the cylindrical gas/water
separator and the pump axial lead should be on the same horizontal line. Because of some water
being carried away by the discharged gas, specific amount of water should be supplied
regularly, even for the closed-cycle service water system shown in Fig.7.
Explanation of Fig.9
z When CBF water-ring vacuum pumps discharge gas and water on one side, they can be
discharged to ditch at the same time.
Notice:
z The ditch should have sufficient flow cross-sections, otherwise the discharge pressure
and the pump shaft power will increase because of gas not being exhausted smoothly.
A check valve should be mounted in the inlet pipeline to prevent backflow of gas and
liquid.
z If service liquid isn’t required to be recycled, its discharge should be in accordance
with related environment regulations.

WARNING
z If the arrangements shown in Fig.6 or 9 are used for absorbing and
discharging combustible, explosive or toxic gases, it will be dangerous
because of gases flowing out from liquid discharge connections. Customers

8
Sección 4 ~ Página 12 de 142

should separate the water discharging from the vacuum pump for second
time and induct the toxic, combustible and explosive gases to specified
places.
z Even if the arrangements shown in Fig.7 or 8 are used, customers should
take measures to monitor gas leakage to prevent serious safety accidents.

6. STARTING AND STOPPING


6.1 PRE-START PREPARATION
(1) If the pump has been out of operation for too long time (more than two years), grease in the
bear oil reservoir of the pump should be replaced before starting. It is recommended to use 3#
lime grease or 3# lithium grease. Clean the reservoir with gasoline thoroughly before replacing
the grease.
(2) If a reductor fitted, check if oil level is proper.
(3) Flush the pump through water supply pipelines and rotate the rotor by hand, then discharge the
sewage out of the pump through water discharge pipelines. Before restarting the units which
have just had a test run or been out of regular operation for more than two days, use clean water
to wash the pumps in order to avoid difficulty in start-up and even burning-out of the motor,
which is caused by inner rust and scale crust.
(4) Check electrical safety and correctness.
(5) Ensure that the rotation direction of the motor is the same as the arrow direction on rotary
brand of the pump.
(6) Check reliabilities of coupling guards or belt guards.
6.2 START-UP

WARNING
In test run, when suction inlet of the pump is open, safety cover is required in
order to prevent foreign matters such as body, clothing etc from being entrapped.
Do not touch any rotating parts.
See Fig.6
(1) Open gate valve 7 to supply water into the pump (if it is shaft seal with external water supply,
open gate valve 9 at the same time). When there is some water flowing out from automatic
drain valve 4, it proves that the water level in the pump reaches or has exceeded the position of
valve 4. Then shut down gate valve 7 and let the water level fall down to the position of the
drain valve.
(2) Open suction gate valve 18.
(3) Automatic drain valve 4 can monitor and control the liquid level of the pump starting to avoid
starting with too high liquid level. When valve 4 changes from having water flowing out to
having no water flowing out, it proves that the liquid level in the pump has been in proper
9
Sección 4 ~ Página 13 de 142

position which satisfies the requirement for starting. Start the motor, then the pump runs. At the
same time open gate valve 7 to enable the pointer of the vacuum manometer 6 to approach the
reading 0Mpa (gauge pressure). With the decrease of absolute suction pressure, the pointer will
shift to negative value (between 0~-0.003Mpa).
Notice: Please refer to the attached table 7 for the adjustment method for the optimal
amount of water, and the amount of supplying water for all kinds of models or rotational
speeds.
(4) In case of shaft seal with external water supply, adjust gate valve 9 to make the manometer of
shaft seal water supply reading between 0.02-0.04Mpa.
Notice:
z If the suctioned system has been already in vacuum state, gate valve 11 should remain
closed before the pump starting. Open valve 11 slowly when the degree of vacuum in
pipelines reaches the specified value after the pump starts.
z If the discharge pressure of the pump is higher than the ambient pressure, the shaft
power will increase even to burn-out the motor. Please contact us for corresponding
necessary measures if the pump is required to operate under such conditions.
See Fig. 7 and 8.
If the pump is used for sucking combustible, explosive, poisonous or recycled gases, adjust the
sealing liquid level of the cylindrical gas/water separator to make the liquid level be in the middle
of the liquidometer in order to prevent gas leakage.
If the arrangement shown in Fig.8 adopted and the service fluid used only for once, adjust the drain
gate vale of the gas/water separator manually to make its liquid level be in the middle of the
liquidometer in order to prevent gas leakage from the bottom of the gas/water separator.
If the arrangement shown in Fig.7 adopted and the service liquid recycled, supply the liquid
regularly to avoid water being carried away by gases, which will lead to water level falling and gas
leakage.
6.3 STOPPING
(1) Check whether corresponding devices in the system can satisfy stopping regulations before the
unit stopping.
(2) Shut down water supply gate valve 7. In case of shaft seal with external water supply, shut
down gate valve 9 of shaft seal water supply at the same time. Then turn off the motor
immediately.
(3) Open drain valve 3(or the bottom cover of the pump) to discharge the accumulated water in
order to prevent the pump rusting or frost cracking in frozen conditions.

7 OPERATION SUPERVISORY AND MAINTENANCE


1. Observe following situations regularly in operation

10
Sección 4 ~ Página 14 de 142

(1) Whether the power supply voltage and shaft power (current) are in working order.
(2) Whether the temperature of bearings is in working order. The temperature rise of the bearings
should be below 35℃ and the maximum measured temperature shouldn’t exceed 75℃. For the
temperature rise of motor bearings refer to installation and operation instruction of the motor
and the reductor.
Notice:
The front bearing in the pump is a cylinder roller bearing carrying radial load and the
rear bearings are the combination of two bearings carrying radial and axial load. Thus
the measured temperature of the rear bearings is higher than that of the front bearing in
pump operation.
(3) Whether the amount of water supply is in working order. In case of shaft seal with external
water supply, check if water supply for shaft seal is also in working order.
(4) Check belt tension for belt-driven units. New belts are easy to produce tensile deformation. Stop
the unit to check and adjust the belts after operating for 20 minutes in trial run. Pay attention to
the types of belts when replacing them.
2. If abnormal situations occur in operation, shut down the unit and check it immediately. After the
problems solved, the unit can be restarted according to regulations.
3. After 2500 hours operation, remove the old grease and add new grease which will occupy about
2/3 space of the bear oil reservoir.
4. Press the packing appropriately; and the tightness can be adjusted by the bolts on the gland plate.
The leakage though the shaft seal is permitted. If the packing cannot be adjusted further after long
time use, replace a new one. In replacement, remove the old packing and clean up the packing box.
When filling in the packing, notch position of the filler should be staggered 90 degree.
5. It is recommended to use soft water as service water of the pump. If the water quality doesn’t
meet the requirement, clean up the scale incrustant regularly. After the pump stops, if the impeller
are locked by the scale incrustant, emerge it in ethane acid (10%) for about 30 minutes, or flush it
by hydrochloric acid (6%) quickly, then use clean water to wash it. In serious condition, the pump
should be disassembled and cleaned.

CAUTION: Don’ let drops of acid solution contact skins or fly into eyes.

8 ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY OF VACUUM PUMP


8.1 DISASSEMBLY
8.1.1 DISASSEMBLY OF CBF 300~430

For construction of pump, refer to Fig.2.


Disconnect the water supply pipes and take out the couplings. If it is belt drive, remove the pulleys.
1)Disassembly of Front Bearing

11
Sección 4 ~ Página 15 de 142

a) Remove outer cover (cap) 11 of the front bearing and then disassemble lock nuts or circlips,
lockwashers and oil deflector rings.
b) According to Fig.10, push out the bearing, the front bearing housing and the inner cap of
the front bearing by screwing the four M12 bolts uniformly into the M12 tap holes in the
front bearing housing.

Fig.10 Front Bearing Construction Fig.11 Back Bearings Construction

2)Disassembly of Rear Bearings


Refer to Fig.11.
a) Unscrew the bolts 1 one by one. Take out each compensating washers set 2 on the bolts
carefully with a small thin steel plate. Place the washers of the same bolt in a group, and
then remove outer cover 3 of the rear bearings.
Note: The axial clearance between the impeller and front and rear distributing plates in
the pump has already been adjusted well before ex factory.
The compensating washers are used to adjust the axial clearance between the impeller
and the front and rear distributing plates. When disassembling, pay attention to
distinguish the washer sets and store them separately. Make sure that they should be
reassembled in their original places respectively. Otherwise the front and back axial
clearances may be distributed unequally, which will affect the pump performance or even
make the impeller to be locked.
b) Remove lock nut 4 (or circlips for CBF600, 610, 630, 700, 710 and 705) and lockwasher 5.
c) Unscrew screws 6 which are evenly distributed and place a stripping ring between the bear
and its inner cap (shown in Fig.12). Then re-tighten screws 6 evenly.
Use the same method of disassembling the front bearing to disassemble the rear bearing housings,
inner cover and the bearings.
Notice: The bearings may be damaged without using the stripping ring in disassembling.
The customers can machine stripping rings according to the following table.
3)Place the pump on two blocks vertically with its drive end upward (shown in Fig.13) and
12
Sección 4 ~ Página 16 de 142

disassemble the other parts one by one. If field conditions limited, the pump can be disassembled
horizontally (shown in Fig.14).

Size of Stripping Rings


CBF D1 Da S
300
125 165 10
310
360 148 191 10
400
410 168 223 10
Fig.12 430 Fig.13

Fig.14
8.1.2 DISASSEMBLY OF CBF 500~730

Because of large magnitude of interference, it is difficult to pull out the bearings in CBF 500~730
though the methods shown in Fig.11 and 12. It is recommended to disassemble both the front and
rear bearing to the extent as shown in Fig.15, and then mount a bisection annulus to pull out the
bearings with the bearing inner race acting as stress point. For methods of disassembly of bearings
in detail refer to related mechanical engineering handbooks.
Notice: Don’t pull out the back bearing by its outer ring, otherwise it will be damaged.

Fig.15
To keep good performance of the pump, it is necessary to clean and check all the components after
disassembly. Repair, replace or continue to use the parts according to specific conditions.
Bearings --- Check if bearings can run freely. Replace them if there is damage such as abrasion.
13
Sección 4 ~ Página 17 de 142

The front and rear distributing plates --- Smooth turning is needed if there are some deep scratches
on the working faces, which will affect the pump performance.
Shaft bushing --- It needs to be replaced if abraded seriously.
Impeller --- The impeller end face needs smooth turning, if it is abraded. Otherwise it will affect the
pump performance. As the axial clearance is formed by the difference between the impeller and the
pump casing in length, the two should be shortened in the same length when smooth turning.
8.3 ASSEMBLY OF VACUUM PUMP
Assembly of the pump is just contrary to its disassembly. Pay attention to the following matters:
1) If the pump is assembled on rough floor, the four pump feet may be not in the same horizontal
plane. Thus the clearance between the impeller and the distributing plates will decrease, which will
perhaps make impeller jammed after assembly completed. The correct method is: place the pump
casing on pump bed or the other plain surfaces after tightening the bolts between the pump casing
and the side cover. Then loosen the bolts, after making sure that the four pump feet are in good
contact with the plane surface, and re-tighten the bolts.
2) Tighten the bolts after putting the compensating washers in their original places, which control
distribution of axial clearance.
3) Re-adjust the axial clearance if the rotor is replaced or the impeller and the distributing plates are
repaired through smooth turning.
Axial Clearance Adjustment of Vacuum Pump
a) Loosen the bolts 31(shown in Fig. 2) one
by one.
b) Put a shaft clip on AS end of the shaft (See
Fig. 16).
c) Put a dial indicator on the AS end of the
shaft (See Fig. 17).
d) Pry the rotor toward AS end with a crooked
chisel to make it be in contact with the
front distributing plate.
e) Zero the dial indicator and pry the rotor
toward BS end to enable it to be in contact Fig. 16
with the rear distributing plate.
f) Then the reading of the dial indicator is the total axial clearance value µ of the pump.
g) Add washers in the places where old compensating washers locate. The washers are made
up of copper sheets of different thickness (0.1mm, 0.2mm or 0.5mm). Each group of
washers should be the same in thickness.
h) Tighten the bolts slowly, the varied dial indicator reading X is the clearance in AS end and
the clearance in BS end is (µ-X). Tighten the bolts until the reading turn to be µ/2, that is,
14
Sección 4 ~ Página 18 de 142

the clearance in AS end is equal to that in BS end. Or tighten the bolts until the reading
turn to be slightly larger than µ/2, that is, the clearance in AS end is slightly larger than that
in BS end. At last, the minimum clearance on BS end should meet the requirements
specified in attached list 6. Otherwise, paper washers will be added to both ends of the
pump casing.

Fig. 17
Play Adjustment of Axial Location Bearings
The play of axial location bearings in CBF 300~730 is determined by the thickness of the adjusting
shim between two cone bearings (shown in Fig.18).
a) If the thickness of the adjusting shim is too small, the play of the two cone bearings may be
zero after the bearing gland tightened, which will lead to the bearings running abnormally.
b) If the thickness of the adjusting shim is too big, the play of the two cone bearings may be
too big after the bearing gland tightened, which will lead to the bearings running
abnormally.
c) If two cone bears need to be replaced, the play of them should meet the requirements
(shown in attached table 6) through regulating the thickness of adjusting shims.
Spare Cone Bearings and Adjusting Shims
a) Customers can order spare cone bearings from Foshang Pump Factory Co., Ltd in groups,
which consist of two cone bearings and an adjusting shim matched according to bearings
axial deviation.
b) If customers purchase cone bearings by themselves, they should match the adjusting shim
for themselves according to the play value of two cone bearings as shown in attached table
6.

Attached Table 1 Model Code of Motor (partially listed)


Y series YB series
Motor Type 380V or 660V 380V or 660V
IP44, IP54, IP55 IP23 dI dIIBT3 dIICT4 dIIBT4
Code Y A N E P S

15
Sección 4 ~ Página 19 de 142

Attached Table 2 Supplementary Code of Drive Mode

Gears Drive Belt Drive


Direct Coupled
Drive Mode Common Belt Narrow Belt
Parallel Shaft Drive
(or antistatic) (or antistatic)
Code of Drive Mode 1 0 1 0

Attached Table 3 Packing Size


CBF 300, CBF 400, CBF 500, CBF 600, CBF 700,
Model CBF 360
310 410, 430 510, 530 610, 630 710, 730
Sectional Dimension (13×13) (15×15) (19×19) (19×19) (19×19) (19×19)
×Length Each Ring ×538 ×633 ×720 ×795 ×890 ×970

Attached Table 4 Bearing Model

Drive Shaft Bearing Non-drive Shaft Bearing


Pump Model
Code and Number Name Code and Number Name
Cylindrical Roller
CBF 300, 310 NU222(1) 30222(2) Cone Roller Bearing
Bearing
Cylindrical Roller
CBF 360 NU226(1) 30226(2) Cone Roller Bearing
Bearing
CBF 400, Cylindrical Roller
NU230(1) 30230(2) Cone Roller Bearing
410, 430 Bearing
CBF 500, Cylindrical Roller
NU234(1) 30234(2) Cone Roller Bearing
510, 530 Bearing
CBF 600, Cylindrical Roller
NU238(1) 30238(2) Cone Roller Bearing
610, 630 Bearing
CBF 700, Cylindrical Roller
NU244(1) 30244(2) Cone Roller Bearing
710, 730 Bearing

Attached Table 5 Name and Number of Spare Parts in General Order (For their mounting
positions refer to Fig.2.)

No. Pump Model Code is 24 in Fig.2 Code is 33 in Fig.2 Code is 8 in Fig.2 Code is 30 in Fig.2
V-ring: 110S(1), O-ring: φ150×φ
1 CBF300, 310 Valve Ball: Ø28(2) Valve plate:2
120S(2) 5.7(2)
V-ring: 130S(1), O-ring: φ165×φ
2 CBF360 Valve Ball: Ø28(2) Valve plate:2
140S(2) 5.3(2)
V-ring: 150S(1), O-ring: φ 205 × φ
3 CBF400, 410, 430 Valve Ball: Ø28(2) Valve plate:2
160S(2) 5.7(2)
V-ring: 170S(1), O-ring: φ218×φ
4 CBF500, 510, 530 Valve Ball: Ø28(2) Valve plate:2
190S(2) 5.3(2)
V-ring: 190S(1), O-ring: φ255×φ
5 CBF600, 610, 630 Valve Ball:Ø28(2) Valve plate:2
220A(2) 5(2)

16
Sección 4 ~ Página 20 de 142

V-ring: 220A(1), O-ring: φ280×φ


6 CBF700, 710, 730 Valve Ball: Ø28(2) Valve plate:2
250A(2) 5(2)
Note: For specified accessory items see the contract.

Attached Table 6 Total clearance, Half Clearance and Play between Two Cone Bearings
Play between Two Cone
Pump Model Total Clearance(mm) Half Clearance (mm)
Bearings (mm)
CBF300, 310 0.55--0.65 0.27—0.32 0.18---0.22
CBF360 0.60—0.75 0.30—0.37 0.20—0.24
CBF400, 410, 430 0.70—0.90 0.35—0.45 0.24—0.28
CBF500, 510, 530 0.80---1.00 0.40—0.50 0.26—0.30
CBF600, 610, 630 0.90—1.10 0.45—0.55 0.30—0.34
CBF700, 710, 730 1.00---1.20 0.50—0.60 0.34—0.40

Explanation of the Adjustment of Water Supply Amount


1. Adjustment of Water Supply for Shaft Seal
If it is packing seal with external water supply, water should be fed into water supply pipes. Adjust
the valves in water supply pipes and make the manometer reading be in the range of 0.02~0.04MPa.
For double mechanical end face seal with external water supply, the reading of pressure gauge of
water supply for shaft seal should be adjusted to about 0.09~0.12MPa.
2. Adjustment of Amount of Service Water Supply
To a specific model pump working in specific rotational speed, the amount of service water supply
of is in a certain range. But if the pump works at different vacuum point, the amount of water
supply should be adjusted in the specified range. The higher the vacuum degree is, the more water
supply will be.

WARNING
If the amount of water supply is too much, it will not only waste the water which
causes unnecessary expenses, but also the shaft power will increase. But if the
amount of water supply is not enough, it will affect the pump suction and the
stability of vacuum. Please adjust the amount of water according to the following
methods.
Since the amount of water supply for vacuum pumps is in a wide range, customers can find out its
optimum according to the following methods in order to obtain the appropriate amount of water
supply.
(1) After the pump starting, open the gate valve of water supply to a great extent.
(2) After the system vacuum gauge reading is stable, observe the reading and at the same time
close the gate valve of water supply slowly. When the amount of water supply decreases to
some degree, the vacuum gauge reading in absorbed system becomes unstable, which indicates
that the amount of water supply is not enough now and it is the minimum threshold of water

17
Sección 4 ~ Página 21 de 142

supply for vacuum pump. Open the gate valve slowly and make the vacuum gauge reading
stable. Now the reading is the optimum amount of water supply which may be much less than
that shown in attached table 7. A large amount of water could be saved for long-term run with
the optimum amount of water supply.

Attached Table 7 Amount of Water Supply for Different Models


or Rotational Speed of Vacuum Pumps
Speed Amount of water supply in different pressure Speed Amount of water supply in different pressure
Pump Pump
r/min 200--400 400--600 >600mbar r/min 200---400 400---600 >600mbar
Mode Mode
2 2 2 2 2
m /h m /h m /h m /h m /h m2/h
472 5.0--5.5 4.5--5.0 2.1---3.1 490 8.0---9.5 5.0~8.0 3.0~5.0
490 5.2--5.7 4.6---5.2 2.2--3.3 520 8.5---10.0 5.5---8.5 3.2---5.5
CBF300 CBF310
530 5.4--6.0 4.9--5.4 2.3---3.4 560 9.0---10.5 6.0---9.0 3.5---6.0
590 6.5---6.8 5.8--6.5 2.6---3.6 590 9.5---11.5 6.5---9.5 3.7---6.5
385 8.0--10.0 6.8--8.0 4.0---6.0 330 9.5---10.5 8.0---9.0 4.0---5.0
CBF360 440 9.0---11.0 5.5---9.0 5.0---7.0 CBF400 350 10.0---11.0 8.5---9.5 4.2---5.3
510 10.5---12.0 8.0---10.0 6.0---8.0 372 11.0---12.0 9.0---10.0 4.5---5.5
330 12.7---14.0 10.6---12.0 5.3---6.7 246 9.5---10.5 8.0---9.0 4.0---5.0
350 13.3---14.6 11.3---12.6 5.6---7.0 266 13.0---14.9 9.5---13.0 6.1---9.5
CBF410 372 14.6--16.0 12.0---13.3 6.0---7.3 CBF500 276 13.5---15.4 10.0---13.5 6.6---10.0
420 16.6---18.0 13.3---14.6 6.7---8.0 298 14.5---16.5 10.6---14.5 6.8---10.6
472 18.0---18.6 15.3---16.6 7.3---8.6 312 15.2---17.3 11.3---15.2 7.5---11.3
266 13.0---14.9 9.5---13.0 6.1---9.5 220 17.6---20.7 14.5---17.6 8.3---12.9
276 13.5---15.4 10.0---13.5 6.6---10.0 236 18.9---22.2 13.8---18.9 8.9---13.8
298 14.5---16.5 10.6---14.5 6.8---10.6 246 19.7---23.1 14.4---19.7 9.3---14.4
CBF510 CBF600
312 15.2---17.3 11.3---15.2 7.5--11.3 266 21.3---25.0 15.6---21.3 10---15.6
340 16.2---18.5 11.8---16.2 9.3---11.8 276 21.8---25.5 16.1---21.8 10.5---16
372 21.1---23.8 15.4---21.1 9.9---15.4 298 23.9---27.5 17.5---23.9 11---17.5
220 20.4---24.0 14.9---20.4 9.6---14.9 197 26.3---28.3 19.0---26.3 12.0---19.0
236 21.9---25.8 16.0---21.9 10.3--16.0 220 29.5---34.2 21.6---29.5 14.5---21.6
246 22.9---26.8 16.7---22.9 10.7---16.7 236 31.4--37.3 24.1--31.4 15.0--24.1
CBF 610-2 CBF 70
266 24.7---29.0 18.1---24.7 11.6---18.1 246 32.5--38.4 25.2--32.5 15.7--25.2
276 25.3--29.6 18.7---25.5 12.2---18.7 266 35.1---42.7 26.4--35.1 19.4--26.4
298 27.7--31.9 20.3--27.7 13.0--20.3 276 36.2--43.8 27.5--36.2 20.5--27.5
220 28.5--38.4 25.2--28.5 16.7--25.2
236 32.6--43.2 28.9--32.6 18.8--28.9
246 33.4--44.8 30.3--33.4 19.5--30.3
CBF 710-2
266 36.3--48.5 32.5--36.3 20.5--32.5
276 37.6--50.7 33.5--37.6 21.8--33.5
298 40.6--54.7 36.2--40.6 23.5--36.2

18
Sección 4 ~ Página 22 de 142

Note: If the type of pump is not shown in the above table, please look up its performance curve to
find out the amount of water supply.

9 TROUBLESHOOTING

No. CONDITION CAUSE REMEDY


Difficulty in 1 Over high water level in pump in start-up 1 Starting according to the specified
start-up 2 The gland plate pressed too tightly water level(Below the midline of
3 The belt stretched too tightly liquidometer)
Trip or 4 Rust of inner parts 2 Loose the gland plate
over-current of 5 Exhaust pressure increasing 3 Loosen the belt adequately
1 motor in normal 6 The current protection of the electric 4 Rotate the rotator by hand and use
load cabinet not properly adjusted clean water to wash the parts
5 Check if the discharge pipes and
valves are too small in diameter
6 Adjust the value of thermorelay to
the rated current
Lock in trial run 1 Foreign matters (welding slag, iron chips 1 Loose the bolts of front and rear
or regular etc.) absorbed into pipelines together with cover, rotate the impeller and use clean
operation gases water to wash them. Fasten them after
the impeller can rotate flexibly. In
2
2 Severe scaling case of failure, disassemble it for
checking
2 Dismantle the unit or use the acid to
wash it
Obvious 1 Speed falling down due to the belt 1 Tighten the belt
decrease of slippage 2 Add water to the specified water
aspirated gas 2 Not enough service water or over- high level. Check the feed lines for
amount water temperature clogging
3 Leakage in vacuum system 3 Check up pipelines connection for
Decrease of 4 The gap of inner parts expanding because sealing
vacuum degree of the medium containing corrosive agents 4 Purify the medium and prevent solid
3
or the abrasion of the material particles being absorbed into the
5 Leakage in packing seal pump. Replace the worn parts
6 Severe scaling in the pump 5 Fasten the gland plate slightly
7 Corrosion in pump 6 Remove the scale crust
8. Axial clearance not in conformity with 7 Replace the parts if necessary
the requirements after repair 8 Re-calibrate the axial clearance
9. The flexible valve plate damaged 9 Replace the valve plate
Abnormal sound 1 Belt too loose. 1 Tighten the belt
in pump 2 Gas etching or ejecting 2 Move the discharge opening to
operation 3 The pipe wall of inlet and discharge pipes outdoor
4
too thin 3 Use the pipes with thicker walls
4 Gas etching in too high vacuum 4 Use the cooler service water, supply
gases in the suction side or amount an

19
Sección 4 ~ Página 23 de 142

ejection
Excessive 1 Loose contact between the base and the 1 Use concrete to fill the base gap and
5 vibration bed or anchor bolts loosing tighten anchor bolts
2 Not good alignment 2 Re-align and lock
Bearings 1 Belts stretched too tightly. 1 Loosen the belt adequately
overheating 2 The motor not align to the pump 2 Make re-alignment
3 No good lubrication, grease too dry or too 3 Improve the lubrication
6 much 4 Re-adjust the location of bearings
4 Bearings not properly mounted 5 Replace the bearings
5 Bearings rusted and worn, or trucks
scratched

20
Fig.2 Water Ring Vacuum Pump Cross Section
Sección 4 ~ Página 24 de 142

1 PUMP CASING 6 FRONT DISTRIBUTING 11 OUTER COVER OF 16 LOCKWASHER 21 CONE ROLLER 26 STAFFING 31 BOLT

PLATE FRONT BEARING BEARING(2) BOX GLAND

2 IMPELLER 7 REAR DISTRIBUTING 12 OUTER COVER OF REAR 17 NUT OR SHAFT 22 CYLINDER ROLLER 27 PACKING BOX 32 AUTOMATIC

PLATE BEARING RETAINER RING BEARING(1) DRAW-OFF VALVE

3 SHAFT 8 FLEXIBLE VALVE PLATE 13 INNER CAP OF BEARING 18 OIL CUP 23 RAG FELT 28 PACKING 33 VALVE BALL

COMPONENTS RING

4 FRONT SIDE 9 FRONT BEARING 14 FRONT OIL DEFLECTOR 19 COMPENSATING 24 SHAFT SEALING 29 PACKING

COVER HOUSING RING WASHER RING(2)

5 REAR SIDE 10 REAR BEARING 15 REAR OIL DEFLECTOR 20 ADJUSTING 25 SHAFT SEALING 30 O-LOCK RING

COVER HOUSING RING WASHER RING(1)


Sección 4 ~ Página 25 de 142
Sección 4 ~ Página 26 de 142
Sección 4 ~ Página 27 de 142
FLEXOMAX GBN / GBND

DIMENSIONS AND TECHNICAL DATA / DIMENSIONES Y DATOS TÉCNICOS

2 1 4 3 7 1 4 5 8 6

I I I S1 I
S S

ØD1
ØD1

ØD2
Ød1

ØD
ØD

Ød
Ød

I1 I1 I1 I2
L L2

DESIGN / FORMA GBN DESIGN / FORMA GBND

Torque d d1 J Weight J Weight


Size Momento n max Screw
D D1 D2 L L2 l I1 I2 S S1 Thread GBND Peso GBN Peso
Tam Max (rpm) GBND GBN
Min Max Min Max Rosca (kgm2) (kgm2) (kg)
(Nm) (Kg)
170 7200 7600 15 72 15 72 182 110 110 188 216 90 60 73,5 8 36 M12 0,05 20 0,057 17
200 9000 6500 25 90 25 80 212 130 125 208 236 100 70 83,5 8 36 M12 0,15 28 0,118 25
240 12480 2900 30 95 30 80 260 135 125 270 315 130 82 107 10 55 M18 0,36 40 0,389 50
300 25920 2350 45 125 45 125 320 175 175 330 384 160 103 135 10 64 M18 1,27 91 1,092 86
350 44160 2100 90 150 80 140 370 210 205 370 424 180 121 159 10 64 M18 1,65 132 1,660 118
400 65280 1900 110 180 100 170 420 252 245 390 451 190 124 167 10 71 M20 3,16 192 3,018 180
450 87936 1700 130 210 115 200 470 300 280 410 471 200 131 177 10 71 M20 7,50 306 5,425 236
500 132480 1500 150 210 140 200 530 305 300 470 539 228 155 199 14 83 M24 10,25 331 8,284 313
550 169920 1350 160 270 150 240 580 380 350 470 539 228 152 199 14 83 M24 15,87 445 15,140 500
600 211968 1250 180 290 155 260 630 410 370 530 604 258 180 229 14 88 M24 21,54 600 22,403 637
650 253440 1150 200 320 165 290 680 450 410 530 609 258 174 225 14 93 M27 32,99 710 38,274 784
700 344448 1050 200 320 190 290 740 450 420 610 698 298 205 263 14 102 M30 45,60 1044 45,615 931
800 505728 950 250 400 205 360 840 560 505 690 778 338 245 303 14 102 M30 104,70 1400 98,820 1582
900 696960 850 260 470 225 420 940 660 590 690 784 338 233 297 14 108 M30 153,01 1807 174,125 2275
1000 840000 750 290 525 250 500 1040 730 655 764 870 375 260 330 14 120 M30 324,15 2349 270,523 3112
1200 1288800 650 300 600 300 600 1240 900 905 816 925 400 280 346 16 125 M30 636,61 4250 578,945 4010
If not indicated, consider units in mm. Donde no está indicado, considere unidades en mm.

Material: Material:
Item 1: Elastic element, polyurethane (GBN/GBND). Item 1: Elemento elástico en poliuretano (GBN/GBND).
Item 2: Hub, spheroidal graphite iron (GBN). Item 2: Cubo en hierro fundido nodular (GBN).
Item 3: Hub, spheroidal graphite iron (GBN). Item 3: Cubo en hierro fundido nodular (GBN).
Item 4: Steel ring (GBN/GBND). Item 4: Anillo en acero (GBN/GBND).
Item 5: Jaw flange, spheroidal graphite iron (GBND). Item 5: Flanche con garra en hierro fundido nodular (GBND).
Item 6: Additional hub, spheroidal graphite iron (GBND). Item 6: Cubo adicional en hierro fundido nodular (GBND).
Item 7: Hub, spheroidal graphite iron (GBND). Item 7: Cubo en hierro fundido nodular (GBND).
Item 8: Screw. Item 8: Tornillo.

4
We reserve the right of technical alterations without previous notice. Nos reservamos el derecho a las alteraciones sin previo aviso.
Sección 4 ~ Página 28 de 142

FILTRATE PUMP REV: 0


284 - FP DATE: 08/04/10

SUPPLIER KROGH
MODEL Nº 55-OH, 4x9x1 STANDAR
QUANTITY 1 per Filter
LIQUID FILTRATE SOLUTION
FLOW 50 m3/h
DELIVERY PRESSURE 15 m WATER COLUMN
VACUUM LEVEL -13.3 inch Hg ( gauge )
TEMPERATURE 20 CENTIGRADES
SPECIFIC GRAVITY 1.01
PH 10.9
PUMP SPEED 1750 RPM
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION CAST IRON
SUCTION / DELIVERY SIZES 370 / 100 mm
MOTOR kW 7.5 (10 HP)
MOTOR rpm 1750
VOLTAJE / FRECUENCY / PHASES/ POLES 460 V / 60 Hz / 3 Ph / 4
DRIVE TYPE V-BELT
ALTITUDE 2150 m
SEALING STUFFING BOX
INBOARD BEARING DOUBLE ROW
ACCESORIES INCLUDED BELT DRIVE ASSEMBLY

Filtrate Pump 28410 rev 0.doc


Sección 4 ~ Página 29 de 142
Sección 4 ~ Página 30 de 142
Sección 4 ~ Página 31 de 142

FAN REV: 0
284 – FDS DATE: 16/04/10

SUPPLIER TETLAK
MODEL Nº 10 x 14
TYPE Centrifugal
Nº OF UNITS 1 per Filter
FLOW 6000 m3/h
DELIVERY PRESSURE 250 mm water
TEMP AMBIENT 5 to 30 Celcius
DRIVE TYPE V Drive
BASE FRAME Included
V DRIVE PULLEYS Included
V DRIVE GUARDS Included
V BELTS Included
INSPECTION DOOR Included
DRAIN Included
INLET GUARD Included
SLIDE RAILS Included
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION Carbon steel
SURFACE PROTECTION SAND BLAST + EPOXY PRIMER & ENAMEL
FINISH COLOUR BLUE RAL 5005
SUCTION SIZE 500 mm DIAMETER
DELIVERY SIZE 350 x 265 mm
MOTOR kW 15 kW (20 HP)
FAN SPEED 1900 RPM
MOTOR rpm 1760
VOLTAJE / FRECUENCY / PHASES /POLES 460 V / 60 Hz / 3 Ph / 4
ALTITUDE 2150 m
Sección 4 ~ Página 32 de 142
Sección 4 ~ Página 33 de 142

DRIVE REDUCER REV: 0


284-GR DATE: 20/04/10

SUPPLIER SEW
MODEL Nº COMPACT
TYPE MC3PLSF09
QUANTITY 2
RATIO 76.35
INLET RPM 1116 to 1800
OUTLET RPM 10.4 and 16.8
OUTLET TORQUE 30000 Nm
SHAFT DIAMETER 170 mm
MOTOR kW 75 (100 HP)
MOTOR rpm 1800
VOLTAJE / FRECUENCY / PHASES / Poles 460 V / 60 Hz / 3 Ph / 4 poles
DRIVE TYPE V-BELT
V DRIVE PULLEYS RATIO 1.40
V DRIVE GUARDS INCLUDED
V BELTS INCLUDED
TORQUE ARM NOT APPLICABLE
SPEED CONTROL VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
ALTITUDE 2200 m

Drive Reducer 28410 rev 0.doc


Sección 4 ~ Página 34 de 142

Technical specification

SpecificationNo. OF1899834 1
Revision 2

1. General data Delivery date EXW 25/03/2011 3


Customer DELKOR Issued by 4

Country CHILE Date 5


Serial number 1 Revision row no. 6
Customer order no. 23601 Date 23-04-2010 Date 7

Customer ref. Designed by CMCH 8


Driven Machine / item no. Date 13/01/2011 9

2. Product description 10
Gear unit type MC3PLSF09 Shaft positio14 Manufacturing nos. RCH1916 11
Ratio i 76.3528 Weight appr.[kg] 1297 Quantity 1 12

Running data min. norm. max. Service factor Fs 1.61 13


Rotation speed HSS [1/min] 1285 1285 1285 according to Input power PK1 norm. 14

LSS [1/min] 16.8 16.8 16.8 15


Running Power Pk1 [kW] 75 75 75 Mounting position 16
Running torque Mk2 [kNm] 40.7 40.7 40.7 Anch. rod length HA 17

Rot.direction of LSS Hollow shaft nom. di 0 18


Painting system SEW-STANDARD Colour code RAL 7031 19

3. Operating conditions 20
Driving machine Type AC-motor Code IEC 280S Duration of service[h/day] 8 21

Pm [kW] /n Max load occ./hour 3 22

Connection diameters [mm] Driving machine shaft 0 Driven machine shaft 0 23


External loads [kN] Fa norm Fa max Direction Fr norm Fr max Acting point fr. shaft end[mm] 24

LSS 0 0 0 0 25

HSS 0 0 0 0 26

Electrical supply Main[V] [Hz] Instr.supply[V] [Hz] 27

Ambient temperature [ºC] min. 0 [ºC] norm. [ºC] max. 30 28


4. Lubrication 29

Lubrication method Splash lubrication Lubr. unit location 30

Lubricant Oil CLP VG 460 MINERAL 31

Ambient temperature range [ºC] [ºC] [ºC] 32

Oil level indication [mm] Oil qty appr. 90 33


Grease type Grease qty [g] 34

5. Documentation 35

Dimension drawing no. P0006272 36

Assembly drawing no. 37

Other documents 38

39

40
6. Additional equipment/other information 41
Qty 42

1 DRIVE INCLUDING: 43
1 GEAR UNIT MC3PLSF09 44
1 V-BELT DRIVE 3XSPC 400/560 45

1 OIL STICK - 46

1 OIL SIGHT GLASS - 47


1 DRAIN COCK TAJO R1 48
1 DOUBLE LIP SEALING WITH GREASE NIPPLE /HSS 49
1 DOUBLE LIP SEALING WITH GREASE NIPPLE /LSS 50

1 SEAWORTHY PACKING /MC09 51

1 LIP SEALING VITON /LSS 52


1 ACOPLAMIENTO EJE LSS GBND-450
Place of Installation: outdoors (Va=5,8m/s) 53
Ambient conditions: normal 54
55
59

60
61
Sección 4 ~ Página 35 de 142
Sección 4 ~ Página 36 de 142
Sección 4 ~ Página 37 de 142

(GLFLyQ
04/2000
5HGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&
07/2003

,QVWUXFFLRQHVGHIXQFLRQDPLHQWR
(6
Sección 4 ~ Página 38 de 142

SEW-EURODRIVE
Sección 4 ~ Página 39 de 142
ËQGLFH

 1RWDVLPSRUWDQWHV 
 1RWDVGHVHJXULGDG 
 7UDQVSRUWHGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV  
 3URWHFFLyQDQWLFRUURVLYD\FRQGLFLRQHVGHDOPDFHQDPLHQWR  
 (VWUXFWXUDGHOUHGXFWRU  
 (VWUXFWXUDJHQHUDOGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&3  
 (VWUXFWXUDJHQHUDOGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&5  
 'HVLJQDFLyQGHPRGHORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV 
 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHSRVLFLRQHVGHOHMH\VHQWLGRVGHJLUR  
 /XEULFDFLyQGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV  
 ,QVWDODFLyQPHFiQLFD  
 +HUUDPLHQWDVPDWHULDOQHFHVDULR  
 $QWHVGHFRPHQ]DU  
 7UDEDMRVSUHYLRV  
 %DVHGHOUHGXFWRU 
 0RQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVFRQHMHPDFL]R  
 0RQWDMHGHVPRQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFRFRQ FKDYHWHUD  
 0RQWDMHGHVPRQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFR
FRQ DQLOOR GH FRQWUDFFLyQ  
 0RQWDMHGHXQPRWRUFRQDGDSWDGRU  
 2SFLRQHVGHODLQVWDODFLyQPHFiQLFD  
 1RWDVLPSRUWDQWHVVREUHHOPRQWDMH  
 0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV  
 $QWLUUHWRUQR);0 
 %RPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH6+3 
 0RQWDMHFRQEDQFDGDGHDFHUR 
 %UD]RGHSDU  
 0RQWDMHGHODFFLRQDPLHQWRFRQFRUUHDV  
 &DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH 
 6RQGDWpUPLFD37  
 $GDSWDGRU630 
 9HQWLODGRU 
 &RQH[LyQGHOVLVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHDJXDSDUDHODFHLWH  
 &RQH[LyQGHOVLVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHODFHLWHSRUDLUH  
 &RQH[LyQGHODERPEDGHOPRWRU  
 3XHVWDHQPDUFKD  
 3XHVWDHQPDUFKDGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0& 
 3XHVWDHQPDUFKDGHORVUHGXFWRUHV0&FRQDQWLUUHWRUQR  
 3XHVWDIXHUDGHVHUYLFLRGHORVUHGXFWRUHV0&  
 ,QVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR 
 3HUtRGRVGHLQVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR  
 3HUtRGRVGHVXVWLWXFLyQGHOXEULFDQWHV  
 ,QVSHFFLyQPDQWHQLPLHQWRGHOUHGXFWRU  
 )DOORV 
 )DOORVHQHOUHGXFWRU  
 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH  
 6tPERORVXWLOL]DGRV  
 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&3  
 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&5 
 /XEULFDQWHV 
 5HODFLyQGHORVOXEULFDQWHVSDUDORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&  
 *UDVDSDUDMXQWDV  
 &DQWLGDGHVGHOOHQDGRGHOXEULFDQWHV 
 ËQGLFHGHSDODEUDVFODYH 

,QVWUXFFLRQHVGHIXQFLRQDPLHQWR±5HGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0& 
Sección 4 ~ Página 40 de 142

 1RWDVLPSRUWDQWHV
1RWDVGH 7HQJDHQFXHQWDODVQRWDVGHVHJXULGDG\GHDGYHUWHQFLDGHHVWDSXEOLFDFLyQ
VHJXULGDG\
DGYHUWHQFLD
3HOLJURHOpFWULFR
3XHGHRFDVLRQDUODPXHUWHROHVLRQHVJUDYHV

3HOLJURLQPLQHQWH
3XHGHRFDVLRQDUODPXHUWHROHVLRQHVJUDYHV

6LWXDFLyQSHOLJURVD
3XHGHRFDVLRQDUOHVLRQHVOHYHVRGHPHQRULPSRUWDQFLD

6LWXDFLyQSHUMXGLFLDO
3XHGHRFDVLRQDUGDxRVHQHODSDUDWR\HQHOHQWRUQRGHWUDEDMR

1RWDVLPSRUWDQWHVVREUHODSURWHFFLyQFRQWUDH[SORVLRQHV

&RQVHMRVHLQIRUPDFLyQ~WLO

$WHQHUVHDODVLQVWUXFFLRQHVGHIXQFLRQDPLHQWRHVHOUHTXLVLWRSUHYLRSDUDTXHQRVXUMDQ
SUREOHPDV1RREHGHFHUHVWDVLQVWUXFFLRQHVDQXODORVGHUHFKRVGHUHFODPDFLyQGHOD
JDUDQWtD/HDDWHQWDPHQWHHVWDVLQVWUXFFLRQHVGHIXQFLRQDPLHQWRDQWHVGHXWLOL]DUHO
DSDUDWR
0DQWHQJDHVWHPDQXDOFHUFDGHOUHGXFWRU\DTXHFRQWLHQHLQIRUPDFLyQLPSRUWDQWHSDUD
VXIXQFLRQDPLHQWR

‡ 6LODSRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMHVHPRGLILFD\GLILHUHSRUWDQWRGHODLQGLFDGDHQORV
GDWRV SDUD HO SHGLGR SyQJDVH HQ FRQWDFWR FRQ 6(:(852'5,9( GH
LQPHGLDWR
‡ /RV UHGXFWRUHV LQGXVWULDOHV GH OD VHULH 0& VH VXPLQLVWUDQ VLQ OOHQDGR GH
DFHLWH$WpQJDVHDODLQIRUPDFLyQTXHDSDUHFHHQODSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV
‡ 6LJD ODV LQGLFDFLRQHV GH ORV FDStWXORV ,QVWDODFLyQ PHFiQLFD \ 3XHVWD HQ
PDUFKD

7UDWDPLHQWRGH 2EVHUYHODQRUPDWLYDYLJHQWH
UHVLGXRV ‡ /DVSLH]DVGHODFDUFDVDHQJUDQDMHVHMHV\URGDPLHQWRVGHORVUHGXFWRUHVGHEHQ
GHVHFKDUVHFRPRFKDWDUUD/RPLVPRVHDSOLFDDODVSLH]DVGHIXQGLFLyQJULVVDOYR
VLH[LVWHXQVHUYLFLRHVSHFLDOGHUHFROHFFLyQSDUDHVWRVPDWHULDOHV
‡ 5HFRMDHODFHLWHUHVLGXDO\GHVKiJDVHGHpOVHJ~QODQRUPDWLYDORFDO

4 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 41 de 142

 1RWDVGHVHJXULGDG
2EVHUYDFLRQHV /DV VLJXLHQWHV QRWDV GH VHJXULGDG WUDWDQ SULQFLSDOPHQWH VREUH HO XVR GH UHGXFWRUHV
SUHOLPLQDUHV LQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&(QHOFDVRGHORVUHGXFWRUHVGHODVVHULHV5).\6R
ELHQ GH ORV PRWRUHV GH ODV VHULHV'5'7'9 WHQJD HQ FXHQWD WDPELpQ ODV QRWDV GH
VHJXULGDGTXHDSDUHFHQHQODVUHVSHFWLYDVLQVWUXFFLRQHVGHIXQFLRQDPLHQWR
7HQJDHQFXHQWDODVQRWDVGHVHJXULGDGVXSOHPHQWDULDVGHFDGDFDStWXORGHHVWDV
LQVWUXFFLRQHVGHIXQFLRQDPLHQWR

,QIRUPDFLyQ 'XUDQWHHOIXQFLRQDPLHQWRDVtFRPRGHVSXpVGHOPLVPRORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV\
JHQHUDO ORVPRWRUHVWLHQHQSLH]DVHQWHQVLyQ\HQPRYLPLHQWR\VXVVXSHUILFLHVSXHGHQHVWDU
FDOLHQWHV
&XDOTXLHU WUDEDMR UHODFLRQDGR FRQ HO WUDQVSRUWH HO DOPDFHQDPLHQWR OD
LQVWDODFLyQPRQWDMH OD FRQH[LyQ OD SXHVWD HQ PDUFKD HO PDQWHQLPLHQWR \ OD
UHSDUDFLyQ VyOR GHEH VHU UHDOL]DGR SRU HVSHFLDOLVWDV FXDOLILFDGRV WHQLHQGR HQ
FXHQWD
‡ (OGRFXPHQWRFRUUHVSRQGLHQWHGHODVLQVWUXFFLRQHVGHWDOODGDVGHIXQFLRQDPLHQWR\
ORVHVTXHPDVGHFRQH[LRQHV
‡ /DVVHxDOHVGHDGYHUWHQFLD\GHVHJXULGDGGHOUHGXFWRULQGXVWULDO
‡ /DQRUPDWLYD\ORVUHTXLVLWRVHVSHFtILFRVGHOVLVWHPD
‡ /DQRUPDWLYDQDFLRQDOUHJLRQDOGHVHJXULGDG\GHSUHYHQFLyQGHDFFLGHQWHV
3XHGHQ RFDVLRQDUVH OHVLRQHV JUDYHV R GDxRV HQ ODV LQVWDODFLRQHV SRU ODV
VLJXLHQWHVFDXVDV
‡ 8VRLQFRUUHFWR
‡ ,QVWDODFLyQRPDQHMRLQFRUUHFWR
‡ ([WUDFFLyQGHODVWDSDVGHSURWHFFLyQRGHODFDUFDVDFXDQGRQRHVWiDXWRUL]DGR

8VRLQGLFDGR /RV UHGXFWRUHV LQGXVWULDOHV HVWiQ GHVWLQDGRV D VLVWHPDV LQGXVWULDOHV &XPSOHQ ORV
HVWiQGDUHV \ ODV QRUPDWLYDV DSOLFDEOHV (Q OD SODFD GH FDUDFWHUtVWLFDV \ HQ OD
GRFXPHQWDFLyQ VH HQFXHQWUD OD LQIRUPDFLyQ \ ORV GDWRV WpFQLFRV UHIHUHQWHV D ODV
FRQGLFLRQHVDXWRUL]DGDV
(VIXQGDPHQWDOWHQHUHQFXHQWDWRGRVHVWRVGDWRV

7UDQVSRUWH ,QPHGLDWDPHQWH GHVSXpV GH OD UHFHSFLyQ LQVSHFFLRQH HO HQYtR HQ EXVFD GH
GDxRVGHULYDGRVGHOWUDQVSRUWH(QFDVRGHKDEHUORVLQIRUPHLQPHGLDWDPHQWHD
ODHPSUHVDWUDQVSRUWLVWD3XHGHVHUQHFHVDULRFDQFHODUODSXHVWDHQPDUFKD

3XHVWDHQPDUFKD  (QHVWDGRGHVDFRSODGRFRPSUXHEHVLHOVHQWLGRGHJLURHVHOFRUUHFWR SUHVWHDWHQFLyQ


)XQFLRQDPLHQWR DVLVHR\HQUXLGRVGHURFHSRFRKDELWXDOHVFXDQGRJLUD 
)LMHODVFKDYHWDVGHOHMHSDUDUHDOL]DUODVSUXHEDVVLQHOHPHQWRVGHVDOLGD1RGHVDFWLYH
HOHTXLSRGHYLJLODQFLD\SURWHFFLyQGXUDQWHODVSUXHEDV
'HVFRQHFWH HO PRWRU SULQFLSDO HQ FDVR GH GXGD VL VH DSUHFLDQ FDPELRV UHVSHFWR DO
IXQFLRQDPLHQWRQRUPDO SRUHMHPSORLQFUHPHQWRVGHWHPSHUDWXUDUXLGRVYLEUDFLRQHV 
'HWHUPLQHODFDXVDVLIXHUDSUHFLVRSyQJDVHHQFRQWDFWRFRQ6(:(852'5,9(

,QVSHFFLyQ 5HVSHWHODVLQGLFDFLRQHVGHOFDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR
0DQWHQLPLHQWR

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 5


Sección 4 ~ Página 42 de 142
7UDQVSRUWHGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV


 7UDQVSRUWHGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV
&iQFDPRVGH $SULHWHELHQORVFiQFDPRVGHVXVSHQVLyQ  DWRUQLOODGRV(VWiQGLVHxDGRVVyORSDUD
VXVSHQVLyQ VRSRUWDUHOSHVR GHOUHGXFWRULQGXVWULDOLQFOX\HQGRXQPRWRUFRQHFWDGRPHGLDQWHXQ
DGDSWDGRUDGHFXDGR1RDSOLTXHQLQJXQDFDUJDDGLFLRQDO

3RVLFLyQYHUWLFDO 9 3RVLFLyQUHFWD ( 3RVLFLyQKRUL]RQWDO /

[1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

$;;
)LJ 'LVSRVLFLyQGHORVFiQFDPRVGHVXVSHQVLyQ

‡ (O UHGXFWRU SULQFLSDO VyOR VH SXHGH DO]DU XWLOL]DQGR FXHUGDV R FDGHQDV GH
HOHYDFLyQTXHVHVLW~DQHQORVGRVFiQFDPRVGHVXVSHQVLyQLQFRUSRUDGRVHQ
GLFKR UHGXFWRU 3XHGH FRQVXOWDU HO SHVR GHO UHGXFWRU HQ OD SODFD GH
FDUDFWHUtVWLFDV R HQ OD KRMD GH GLPHQVLRQHV /D QRUPDWLYD \ ODV FDUJDV
GHVFULWDVGHEHUiQUHVSHWDUVHHVWULFWDPHQWH
‡ /DORQJLWXGGHODVFDGHQDVRGHODVFXHUGDVGHHOHYDFLyQGHEHUiPHGLUVHGH
PRGRTXHHOiQJXORIRUPDGRHQWUHHOODVQRVXSHUHORVƒ
‡ /RVFiQFDPRVXELFDGRVHQHOPRWRUHOPRWRUDX[LOLDURHOPRWRUUHGXFWRUGH
FRQH[LyQ HQ VHULH QR GHEHUiQ XWLOL]DUVH SDUD HO WUDQVSRUWH → ILJXUDV
VLJXLHQWHV 

$;;
)LJ 1RXWLOL]DUORVFiQFDPRVGHOPRWRU

6 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 43 de 142
7UDQVSRUWHGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV


$;;
)LJ 1RXWLOL]DUORVFiQFDPRVGHOPRWRU
‡ (QFDVRQHFHVDULRXWLOLFHHOHTXLSRGHPDQLSXODFLyQDGHFXDGR$QWHVGHOD
SXHVWDHQPDUFKDUHWLUHWRGRVORVDPDUUHVGHOWUDQVSRUWH

7UDQVSRUWHGH /RV UHGXFWRUHV LQGXVWULDOHV GH OD VHULH 0&3  0&5  FRQ DGDSWDGRU GH PRWRU
UHGXFWRUHV → ILJXUDVLJXLHQWH VyORVHSXHGHQWUDQVSRUWDUFRQFRUUHDVHOHYDGRUDV  \FXHUGDV
LQGXVWULDOHV0&  RFDGHQDVGHHOHYDFLyQTXHIRUPHQXQiQJXORGHƒ SRVLFLyQYHUWLFDO Dƒ
FRQDGDSWDGRUGH
PRWRU

[1] 90°-70°
[2] [1] [2]
<70°

$;;
)LJ 7UDQVSRUWHGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVFRQDGDSWDGRUGHPRWRUQRXWLOL]DUORVFiQFDPRVGHOPRWRU

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 7


Sección 4 ~ Página 44 de 142
7UDQVSRUWHGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV


7UDQVSRUWHGH /RVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&VREUHEDQFDGD →ILJXUDVLJXLHQWH VyORVH


UHGXFWRUHV SXHGHQWUDQVSRUWDUFRQODVFXHUGDVRFDGHQDVGHHOHYDFLyQDPDUUDGDV   iQJXOR
LQGXVWULDOHV0& GHƒ HQSRVLFLyQYHUWLFDOUHVSHFWRDODEDQFDGD
VREUHEDQFDGD
[1] [1]

90
° 90
°

$;;
)LJ 7UDQVSRUWHGHXQUHGXFWRULQGXVWULDO0&VREUHEDQFDGD

7UDQVSRUWHGH /RVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&VREUHEDQFDGDIORWDQWH → ILJXUDVLJXLHQWH


UHGXFWRUHV VyORVHSXHGHQWUDQVSRUWDUFRQFRUUHDV>@\FXHUGDVGHHOHYDFLyQ>@TXHIRUPHQXQ
LQGXVWULDOHV0& iQJXORGHƒ SRVLFLyQYHUWLFDO Dƒ
HQEDQFDGD
IORWDQWH [1] [2] [1] [2]

90°-70°
<70°

$;;
)LJ 7UDQVSRUWHGHXQUHGXFWRULQGXVWULDO0&HQEDQFDGDIORWDQWH

8 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 45 de 142
3URWHFFLyQDQWLFRUURVLYD\FRQGLFLRQHVGHDOPDFHQDPLHQWR


 3URWHFFLyQDQWLFRUURVLYD\FRQGLFLRQHVGHDOPDFHQDPLHQWR
'HVFULSFLyQ /RVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&VHVXPLQLVWUDQVLQOOHQDGRGHDFHLWH(QOD
JHQHUDO WDEODVLJXLHQWHVHHVSHFLILFDQODVFRQGLFLRQHVGHSURWHFFLyQDQWLFRUURVLYDSDUDGLVWLQWRV
SHUtRGRVGHDOPDFHQDPLHQWR5pVSHWHODVHVWULFWDPHQWH
&RQGLFLRQHVGHDOPDFHQDPLHQWR
3HUtRGRGH
DOPDFHQDPLHQWR (QHOH[WHULRUSHURDFXELHUWR (QHOLQWHULRU DLUHFiOLGR\VHFREDMR
GHPDQGDFRQFDOHIDFFLyQ
PHVHV 3URWHFFLyQHVWiQGDU 3URWHFFLyQHVWiQGDU
PHVHV &RQVXOWHFRQ6(:(852'5,9( 3URWHFFLyQHVWiQGDU
3URWHFFLyQSDUDDOPDFHQDPLHQWR
PHVHV &RQVXOWHFRQ6(:(852'5,9(
SURORQJDGR
PHVHV 3URWHFFLyQSDUDDOPDFHQDPLHQWR
&RQVXOWHFRQ6(:(852'5,9(
SURORQJDGR
7UDQVSRUWH &RQVXOWHFRQ6(:(852'5,9( 3URWHFFLyQSDUDDOPDFHQDPLHQWR
PDUtWLPR SURORQJDGR
DOPDFHQDPLHQWR
HQ]RQDV
FRVWHUDV

3URWHFFLyQ ‡ (OUHGXFWRUVHILMDHQXQSDOHW\VHVXPLQLVWUDVLQFXELHUWD
HVWiQGDU ‡ 3URWHFFLyQGHODSDUWHLQWHULRUGHOUHGXFWRUORVUHGXFWRUHVGHODVHULH0&VHVRPHWHQ
DXQDHMHFXFLyQGHSUXHEDXWLOL]DQGRXQDFHLWHSURWHFWRU
‡ /DV MXQWDV GH DFHLWH \ VXV VXSHUILFLHV VH SURWHJHQ PHGLDQWH XQD JUDVD SDUD
URGDPLHQWRV
‡ 6(:(852'5,9(VXPLQLVWUDGHIiEULFDODVVXSHUILFLHVQRODFDGDVLQFOX\HQGRODV
SLH]DVGHUHSXHVWRFRQXQUHFXEULPLHQWRSURWHFWRU$QWHVGHOPRQWDMHRDQWHVGH
LQVWDODU RWURV GLVSRVLWLYRV VREUH GLFKDV VXSHUILFLHV HOLPLQH HO UHFXEULPLHQWR
SURWHFWRUOLPSLiQGRORFRQGLVROYHQWH
‡ /DVSLH]DVVXHOWDV\ODVSLH]DVGHUHSXHVWRSHTXHxDVFRPRWRUQLOORVWXHUFDVHWF
VHHQWUHJDQHQEROVDVGHSOiVWLFRSURWHJLGDVFRQWUDFRUURVLyQ EROVDVDQWLFRUURVLyQ
9&, 
‡ /RV DJXMHURV SDUD URVFD \ ORV DJXMHURV FLHJRV HVWiQ FXELHUWRV FRQ WDSRQHV GH
SOiVWLFR
‡ /DSURWHFFLyQDQWLFRUURVLyQQRHVWiSHQVDGDSDUDXQDOPDFHQDPLHQWRSURORQJDGRQL
SDUDFRQGLFLRQHVGHKXPHGDG(OXVXDULRHVHOUHVSRQVDEOHGHPDQWHQHUHOUHGXFWRU
HQXQHVWDGROLEUHGHR[LGDFLyQ
‡ (O WDSyQ GH VDOLGD GH JDVHV SRVLFLyQ → FDStWXOR 3RVLFLRQHV GH PRQWDMH  VH
VXPLQVWUD\DPRQWDGRGHIiEULFD

10 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 46 de 142
3URWHFFLyQDQWLFRUURVLYD\FRQGLFLRQHVGHDOPDFHQDPLHQWR


3URWHFFLyQSDUD ‡ (OUHGXFWRUVHHQWUHJDHQHOLQWHULRUGHXQDFDMDPDUtWLPDGHPDGHUDFRQWUDFKDSDGD
DOPDFHQDPLHQWR VREUHXQSDOHW(VWHHPEDODMHSURWHJHDOUHGXFWRUGHODKXPHGDG\GHORVJROSHV
SURORQJDGR 6(:(852'5,9(UHFRPLHQGDHPSOHDUHVWHWLSRGHHPEDODMHVLHOUHGXFWRUYDD
SHUPDQHFHU DOPDFHQDGR GXUDQWH XQ WLHPSR SURORQJDGR R ELHQ VL HV SUHFLVR
SURWHJHUORFRQWUDHODLUHVDODGRGHODV]RQDVFRVWHUDV
‡ 3URWHFFLyQ GH OD SDUWH LQWHULRU GHO UHGXFWRU DSDUWH GH OD SURWHFFLyQ HVWiQGDU XQ
GLVROYHQWHHQIRUPDGHLQKLELGRUGHIDVHGHYDSRU 93, 9DSRU3KDVH,QKLELWRU VH
URFtDDWUDYpVGHORULILFLRSDUDOOHQDGRGHDFHLWH YDORURULHQWDWLYROLWURVHQXQD
VROXFLyQGHOSRUP /RVLQKLELGRUHVVRQVXVWDQFLDVVyOLGDV\ YROiWLOHV TXH
FXDQGRVHDSOLFDQHQHVSDFLRVFHUUDGRVVDWXUDQHODLUHFRQVXVYDSRUHV6LHQHO
LQWHULRUGHOUHGXFWRUVHFUHDXQDDWPyVIHUDGHHVWHWLSRHQODVSDUWHVLQWHUQDVGHO
PLVPR VH IRUPDUi XQD SHOtFXOD GH 93, LQYLVLEOH TXH DFWXDUi FRPR SURWHFFLyQ
DQWLFRUURVLyQ7UDVDSOLFDUHOWUDWDPLHQWRSURWHFWRUORVYDSRUHVGHORVGLVROYHQWHV
PHWDQROHWDQROHWF VHGHEHUiQKDEHUHYDSRUDGRDQWHVGHFHUUDUHOUHGXFWRU(O
WDSyQ GH VDOLGD GH JDVHV SRVLFLyQ → FDStWXOR 3RVLFLRQHV GH PRQWDMH  VH
UHHPSOD]DFRQXQWDSyQURVFDGR(OWDSyQGHVDOLGDGHJDVHVVHGHEHUiYROYHUD
HQURVFDUHQHOUHGXFWRUDQWHVGHSRQHUORHQIXQFLRQDPLHQWR5HSLWDHOWUDWDPLHQWR
SURWHFWRU SDUD DOPDFHQDPLHQWR SURORQJDGR FDGD  y  PHVHV → 'HVFULSFLyQ
JHQHUDOGHODVFRQGLFLRQHVGHSURWHFFLyQDQWLFRUURVLyQ 
‡ (VWiWHUPLQDQWHPHQWHSURKLELGRDEULUHOUHGXFWRUFHUFDGHOODPDVFKLVSDVX
REMHWRV FDQGHQWHV (VWR SRGUtD SURYRFDU OD LJQLFLyQ GH ORV YDSRUHV GH ORV
GLVROYHQWHV
‡ &XPSOD WRGDV PHGLGDV GH VHJXULGDG QHFHVDULDV SDUD SURWHJHU DO SHUVRQDO
FRQWUDORVYDSRUHVGHORVGLVROYHQWHV\DVHJ~UHVHGHTXHQRKD\DOODPDVHQ
ODVSUR[LPLGDGHVWDQWRGXUDQWHODDSOLFDFLyQFRPRGXUDQWHODHYDSRUDFLyQGHO
GLVROYHQWH
‡ 6(:(852'5,9(VXPLQLVWUDGHIiEULFDODVVXSHUILFLHVQRODFDGDVLQFOX\HQGRODV
GHODVSLH]DVGHUHSXHVWRFRQXQUHFXEULPLHQWRSURWHFWRU$QWHVGHOPRQWDMHRDQWHV
GH LQVWDODU RWURV GLVSRVLWLYRV VREUH GLFKDV VXSHUILFLHV HOLPLQH HO UHFXEULPLHQWR
SURWHFWRUOLPSLiQGROR
‡ /DVSLH]DVVXHOWDV\ODVSLH]DVGHUHSXHVWRSHTXHxDVFRPRWRUQLOORVWXHUFDVHWFVH
HQWUHJDQHQEROVDVGHSOiVWLFRSURWHJLGDVFRQWUDFRUURVLyQ EROVDVDQWLFRUURVLyQ9&, 
‡ /RV DJXMHURV SDUD URVFD \ ORV DJXMHURV FLHJRV HVWiQ FXELHUWRV FRQ WDSRQHV GH
SOiVWLFR

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 11


Sección 4 ~ Página 47 de 142
7UDQVSRUWHGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV


7UDQVSRUWHGH /RV UHGXFWRUHV LQGXVWULDOHV GH OD VHULH 0& FRQ DFFLRQDPLHQWR SRU FRUUHDV HQ
UHGXFWRUHV PRWRUHVGHWDPDxRPi[ VyORVHSXHGHQWUDQVSRUWDUFRQFXHUGDVGHHOHYDFLyQ
LQGXVWULDOHV >@/RVFiQFDPRVGHOPRWRUQRVHGHEHQXWLOL]DUSDUDHOWUDQVSRUWH
0&FRQ
DFFLRQDPLHQWR
SRUFRUUHDV

[2] [2]
[2]

$;;
)LJ 7UDQVSRUWHGH0&FRQDFFLRQDPLHQWRSRUFRUUHDV HQPRWRUHVGHWDPDxRPi[

/RV UHGXFWRUHV LQGXVWULDOHV GH OD VHULH 0& FRQ DFFLRQDPLHQWR SRU FRUUHDV HQ
PRWRUHVGHWDPDxRVFRPSUHQGLGRVHQWUH\ VyORVHSXHGHQWUDQVSRUWDUFRQ
FRUUHDV  \FXHUGDVGHHOHYDFLyQ>@TXHIRUPHQXQiQJXORGHƒ HQSRVLFLyQ
YHUWLFDO /RVFiQFDPRVGHOPRWRUQRVHGHEHQXWLOL]DUSDUDHOWUDQVSRUWH

[1] [1]
90
°

[2]
°
90

[1]
[1]

[2]

$;;
)LJ 7UDQVSRUWHGH0&FRQDFFLRQDPLHQWRSRUFRUUHDV PRWRUHVFRQWDPDxRV
FRPSUHQGLGRVHQWUH\

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 9


Sección 4 ~ Página 48 de 142
(VWUXFWXUDJHQHUDOGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&3


 (VWUXFWXUDGHOUHGXFWRU
/DVLOXVWUDFLRQHVVLJXLHQWHVGHEHQHQWHQGHUVHFRPRLOXVWUDFLRQHVGHFDUiFWHUJHQHUDO
6yORVLUYHQGHD\XGDSDUDODDVLJQDFLyQGHODVSLH]DVDODVOLVWDVFRUUHVSRQGLHQWHV(V
SRVLEOHTXHH[LVWDQGLIHUHQFLDVHQIXQFLyQGHOWDPDxRGHOUHGXFWRU\GHVXGLVHxR

 (VWUXFWXUDJHQHUDOGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&3

[070]
[010]

[180]
[199]
[195]
[110]

[025]
[299] [243]
[295]
[725] [210]

[130]
[331]
[725] [342]
[131]
[100] [395]
[310]
[301]
[110]
[195]
[231] [399] [443]
[015]
[201] [495 ]
[210] [410]
[295]
[242]

[401] MC2P..
[430]
[040] [411]
[495]
[001]
[340] [480] [075]
[434] [310] [438]
[395]
[342]

$;;
)LJ (VWUXFWXUDJHQHUDOGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&3

>@ &DUFDVD >@ &KDYHWD >@ 5XHGD >@ 5RGDPLHQWR


>@ 7DSDGHOURGDPLHQWR >@ 5HWpQ >@ ÈUEROSLxyQ >@ 5RGDPLHQWR
>@ 7DSDGHOURGDPLHQWR >@ $UDQGHODGHDMXVWH >@ 5RGDPLHQWR >@ &KDYHWD
>@ 7DSDGHOURGDPLHQWR >@ 5XHGDGHVDOLGD >@ &KDYHWD >@ 7DSD
>@ 7DSDGHOURGDPLHQWR >@ ÈUEROSLxyQ >@ 'LVWDQFLDGRU >@ &DVTXLOOR
>@ 7DSDGHOUHGXFWRU >@ 5RGDPLHQWR >@ 'LVWDQFLDGRU >@ &DVTXLOORGLVWDQFLDGRU
>@ 7DSDGHPRQWDMH >@ &KDYHWD >@ $UDQGHODGHDMXVWH >@ 5HWpQ
>@ (MHGHVDOLGD >@ 'LVWDQFLDGRU >@ 5XHGD >@ $UDQGHODGHDMXVWH
>@ 5RGDPLHQWR >@ 'LVWDQFLDGRU >@ (MHGHHQWUDGD >@ 7RUQLOORGHFiQFDPR
>@ &KDYHWD >@ $UDQGHODGHDMXVWH

12 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 49 de 142
(VWUXFWXUDJHQHUDOGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&5


 (VWUXFWXUDJHQHUDOGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&5

[070]
[010]

[180]
[199]
[195]
[130]
[110]

[131]
[100]

[243]
[110] [299] [295]
[195] [725]
[015] [210]

[331]
[342] [25]
[725]
[395]
[310]
[301]
[341]
[231] [399]
[340]
[201] [430]
[210] [410]
[295]
[242]
[495]
[401]
[001]

[310] [422]
[395]
[080]
[342]
[025]

[423]
[480]
[040]

[411]
[470]
[436]
$;;
)LJ (VWUXFWXUDEiVLFDGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&5

>@ &DUFDVD >@ &KDYHWD >@ 5XHGD >@ 5RGDPLHQWR


>@ 7DSDGHOURGDPLHQWR >@ 5HWpQ >@ ÈUEROSLxyQ >@ 5RGDPLHQWR
>@ 7DSDGHOURGDPLHQWR >@ $UDQGHODGHDMXVWH >@ 5RGDPLHQWR >@ &DVTXLOORGHFRMLQHWH
>@ 7DSDGHOURGDPLHQWR >@ 5XHGDGHVDOLGD >@ &KDYHWD >@ &DVTXLOORGHFRMLQHWH
>@ 7DSD >@ ÈUEROSLxyQ >@ 'LVWDQFLDGRU >@ &KDYHWD
>@ 7DSDGHOUHGXFWRU >@ 5RGDPLHQWR >@ 'LVWDQFLDGRU >@ %XMH
>@ 7DSDGHOURGDPLHQWR >@ &KDYHWD >@ 'LVWDQFLDGRU >@ 7XHUFDWHQVRUD
>@ (MHGHVDOLGD >@ 'LVWDQFLDGRU >@ $UDQGHODGHDMXVWH >@ 5HWpQ
>@ 5RGDPLHQWR >@ 'LVWDQFLDGRU >@ (QJUDQDMHFyQLFR >@ $UDQGHODGHDMXVWH
>@ &KDYHWD >@ $UDQGHODGHDMXVWH >@ ÈUEROSLxyQFyQLFR >@ 7RUQLOORGHFiQFDPR

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 13


Sección 4 ~ Página 50 de 142
'HVLJQDFLyQGHPRGHORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV


 'HVLJQDFLyQGHPRGHORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV
(MHPSORGHGHVLJQDFLyQGHPRGHOR

0&  5 / 6 ) 

7DPDxR

)LMDFLyQGHOUHGXFWRU
) PRQWDMHFRQSDWDV
7 EUD]RVGHSDU

'LVHxRGHOHMHGHVDOLGD /66 
6 HMHPDFL]R
+ HMHKXHFR XQLyQFRQFKDYHWDRFRQDQLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQ

3RVLFLyQGHPRQWDMH
/ KRUL]RQWDO
9 YHUWLFDO
( UHFWD

7LSRGHUHGXFWRU
5 UHGXFWRUGHSDUFyQLFR
3 UHGXFWRUFLOtQGULFR

&DQWLGDGGHWUHQHVGHOUHGXFWRU
 WUHQHV
 WUHQHV

6HULHGHOUHGXFWRULQGXVWULDO

14 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 51 de 142
'HVLJQDFLyQGHPRGHORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV


(MHPSOR3ODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDVGHOUHGXFWRULQGXVWULDOGHODVHULH0&6(:(852'5,9(

SEW-EURODRIVE Bruchsal/Germany
Typ MC3RLHF07
Nr. 1 01.3115835301.0001.02 Nr. 2 K34567
Pe kW 55 MN2 kNm 35,6
Fs 1,6 Year 2001
n r/min 1480/23,9
i 61,883 : 1
kg 780
Lubricant CLP 220 MINER.ÖL/ca. 33 liter
Number of greasing points: 4 Made by SEW 1332 359 8.10

$;;

/H\HQGD
7\S 'HVLJQDFLyQGHOPRGHOR
1U 1~PHURGHIDEULFDFLyQ
1U 1~PHURGHIDEULFDFLyQ
3H >N:@ 3RWHQFLDGHOPRWRU
)6 )DFWRUGHVHUYLFLR
Q >UPLQ@ 9HORFLGDGGHHQWUDGD9HORFLGDGGHVDOLGD
NJ >NJ@ 3HVR
L ËQGLFHGHUHGXFFLyQH[DFWR
/XEULFDQW 7LSRGHDFHLWH\FODVHGHYLVFRVLGDG&DQWLGDGGHDFHLWH
01 >N1P@ 3DUGHOUHGXFWRU
<HDU $xRGHIDEULFDFLyQ
1XPEHURIJUHDVLQJSRLQWV >SFV@ 1~PHURGHSXQWRVGHHQJUDVH

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 15


Sección 4 ~ Página 52 de 142
'HVLJQDFLyQGHPRGHORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV


(MHPSORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDVGHOUHGXFWRULQGXVWULDOGHODVHULH0&6(:(852'5,9()LQODQGLD

SEW-EURODRIVE Karkkila/Finland
-EURODRIVE
Type : MC3RLHT03 PK1: 30 kW
Nr : K2432 Fs: 2.08
n1 : 1470 rpm mass: 310 kg
i ex : 29 . 6022 : 1 YEAR: 2002
SYNT oil according to MOM
ISO VG 460EPPA0 Oil qty ~11 l
Nr. of greasing points 3 pcs
See Mounting Operating and Maintenance instructions (MOM) Made in Finland

$;;

/H\HQGD
7\SH 'HVLJQDFLyQGHOPRGHOR
3. >N:@ 3RWHQFLDGHOPRWRU
)6 )DFWRUGHVHUYLFLR
Q >UTP@ 9HORFLGDGGHHQWUDGD
PDVV >NJ@ 3HVR
LH[ ËQGLFHGHUHGXFFLyQH[DFWR
<($5 $xRGHIDEULFDFLyQ
2LOTW\ >O@ &DQWLGDGGHOOHQDGRGHDFHLWH
1URIJUHDVLQJSRLQWV >SFV@ 1~PHURGHSXQWRVGHHQJUDVH
,629* 7LSRGHDFHLWH\FODVHGHYLVFRVLGDG
1U 1~PHURGHIDEULFDFLyQGHOUHGXFWRU

(MHPSORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDVGHOUHGXFWRULQGXVWULDOGHODVHULH0&6(:(852'5,9(&KLQD

SEW-EURODRIVE
Type -EURODRIVE
MC3PLHF04
S.O. 351012345 . 01 . 35001 13IM
Pe PK1 = 55 KW Ma 6 . 65 KNM Nm
ne 1500 r / min na 65 r / min
i 23 . 2042 kg
1831208.10

ISO VG460
Refer to lubrication schedule

$;;

/H\HQGD
7\SH 'HVLJQDFLyQGHOPRGHOR
,0 3RVLFLyQGHOHMH
3H >N:@ 3RWHQFLDGHOPRWRU
0D >1P@ 3DUGHVDOLGDHQHOHMHGHVDOLGD
QH >UPLQ@ 9HORFLGDGGHHQWUDGD
QD >UPLQ@ 9HORFLGDGGHVDOLGD
L ËQGLFHGHUHGXFFLyQH[DFWR
62 1~PHURGHIDEULFDFLyQGHOUHGXFWRU

16 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 53 de 142
'HVLJQDFLyQGHPRGHORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV


(MHPSORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDVGHOUHGXFWRULQGXVWULDOGHODVHULH0&6(:(852'5,9(6LQJDSXU

SEW-EURODRIVE PTE LTD Singapore


Type -EURODRIVE
MC3PLHF04
S.O. 351012345 . 01 . 35001 13
IM
Pe PK1 = 55 KW Ma 6 . 65 KNM Nm
ne 1500 r / min na 65 r / min
i 23 . 2042 kg
1831208.10

ISO VG460
Refer to lubrication schedule Assembled in Singapore
$;;

/H\HQGD
7\SH 'HVLJQDFLyQGHOPRGHOR
,0 3RVLFLyQGHOHMH
3H >N:@ 3RWHQFLDGHOPRWRU
0D >1P@ 3DUGHVDOLGDHQHOHMHGHVDOLGD
QH >UPLQ@ 9HORFLGDGGHHQWUDGD
QD >UPLQ@ 9HORFLGDGGHVDOLGD
L ËQGLFHGHUHGXFFLyQH[DFWR
62 1~PHURGHIDEULFDFLyQGHOUHGXFWRU

(MHPSORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDVGHOUHGXFWRULQGXVWULDOGHODVHULH0&6(:(852'5,9(%UDVLO

Rod. Pres. Dutra Km 208


SEW DO BRASIL LTDA CEP07210-000 GUARUHOS-SP

-EURODRIVE
C.G.C. 46.648.061/0001-99
Typo MC3PLS07
No 7001.11383446/301.001 IM 13

Pe 148 KW Ma 19.100 Nm
ne 1780 rpm na 70.6 rpm

i 25.2024 kg

fs 1.45
1831151.10

OLEO ISO VG 460 EP _ 45 LITROS


BR1
Lubrificaçâo conforme Manual Industria Brasileira Use Mobil
$;;

/H\HQGD
7\SR 'HVLJQDFLyQGHOPRGHOR
3H >N:@ 3RWHQFLDGHOPRWRU
0D >1P@ 3DUGHVDOLGDHQHOHMHGHVDOLGD
QH >USP@ 9HORFLGDGGHHQWUDGD
QD >USP@ 9HORFLGDGGHVDOLGD
L ËQGLFHGHUHGXFFLyQH[DFWR
,0 3RVLFLyQGHOHMH
I6 )DFWRUGHVHUYLFLR
1R 1~PHURGHSHGLGR
%5 1~PHURGHIDEULFDFLyQGHOUHGXFWRU

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 17


Sección 4 ~ Página 54 de 142
'HVLJQDFLyQGHPRGHORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV


(MHPSORSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDVGHOUHGXFWRULQGXVWULDOGHODVHULH0&6(:(852'5,9(((88

SEW-EURODRIVE, INC. USA Compact Reducer


SEW -EURODRIVE
Type MC3PESF03
S.O. 870111234 . 02 . 02 . 001
In 1750 rpm Out 15 . 1 rpm

HP 15 Torque 60 . 442 Ib-in


Service
Ratio 116 . 9634 Factor 1 . 50
Shaft BER

24 Min Amb 0 °C Max Amb 40 °C M


EM O

F
Position
Lubrication SYN. ISOV6460-7EP: 8 GALS
See Operating Instructions

$;;

/H\HQGD
7\SH 'HVLJQDFLyQGHOPRGHOR
,Q >USP@ 9HORFLGDGGHHQWUDGD
2XW >USP@ 9HORFLGDGGHVDOLGD
+3 >+3@ 3RWHQFLDGHOPRWRU
7RUTXH >OELQ@ 3DUGHVDOLGD
5DWLR ËQGLFHGHUHGXFFLyQH[DFWR
6HUYLFH)DFWRU )DFWRUGHVHUYLFLR
6KDIW3RVLWLRQ 3RVLFLyQGHOHMH
0LQ$PE >ƒ&@ 7HPSHUDWXUDDPELHQWHPtQLPD
0D[$PE >ƒ&@ 7HPSHUDWXUDDPELHQWHPi[LPD
/XEULFDWLRQ 7LSR\FDQWLGDGGHDFHLWH
62 1~PHURGHIDEULFDFLyQGHOUHGXFWRU

18 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 55 de 142
3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHSRVLFLRQHVGHOHMH\VHQWLGRVGHJLUR


 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHSRVLFLRQHVGHOHMH\VHQWLGRVGHJLUR
/DV SRVLFLRQHV GH PRQWDMH       GHVFULWDV HQ ODV ILJXUDV VLJXLHQWHV \ ODV
GHSHQGHQFLDVGHOVHQWLGRGHJLURVRQYiOLGDVSDUDORVHMHVGHVDOLGD /66 FRQHOGLVHxR
GHHMHPDFL]RDVtFRPRGHHMHKXHFR6LODVSRVLFLRQHVGHHMHVRQGLVWLQWDVRELHQHQ
HOFDVRGHUHGXFWRUHVFRQDQWLUUHWRUQRSyQJDVHHQFRQWDFWRFRQ6(:(852'5,9(
(VWiQGLVSRQLEOHVODVVLJXLHQWHVSRVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH GHVFULSFLyQGHWDOODGDGHODV
SRVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH→FDStWXOR3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH \GHHMH  
3RVLFLRQHVGH
PRQWDMH\GHHMH
0&36 3RVLFLyQKRUL]RQWDO / 3RVLFLyQYHUWLFDO 9 3RVLFLyQUHFWD (

4
3
2 1

1 4 3
2
2
3 4
1
$;;
)LJ 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH\GHHMH0&36

3RVLFLRQHVGH
PRQWDMH\GHHMH
0&3+

3 4 1
2

1 4 2 3

2
3
4
1

$;;
)LJ 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH\GHHMH0&3+

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 19


Sección 4 ~ Página 56 de 142
3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHSRVLFLRQHVGHOHMH\VHQWLGRVGHJLUR


3RVLFLyQKRUL]RQWDO / 3RVLFLyQYHUWLFDO 9 3RVLFLyQUHFWD (


3RVLFLRQHVGH
PRQWDMH\GHHMH
0&56

3 0

4 3

0 0
3
4

$;;
)LJ 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH\GHHMH0&56

3RVLFLRQHVGH
PRQWDMH\GHHMH
0&5+
4
3 4
0

4 3
0 3 0
3
4
$;;
)LJ 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH\GHHMH0&5+

20 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 57 de 142
3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHSRVLFLRQHVGHOHMH\VHQWLGRVGHJLUR


6HQWLGRVGHJLUR $FRQWLQXDFLyQVHGHILQHQORVVHQWLGRVGHJLURGHOHMHGHVDOLGD /66 


'LVHxRGHOUHGXFWRU
6HQWLGRGH
JLUR 0&36 0&3+
0&56 0&5+

'HUHFKR &:

$;; $;;

,]TXLHUGR
&&:

$;; $;;

3RVLFLRQHVGHHMH /DVILJXUDVVLJXLHQWHVGHVFULEHQODVSRVLFLRQHVGHHMH\ODVGHSHQGHQFLDVGHOVHQWLGR
\GHSHQGHQFLDV GHJLURSDUDORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&3
GHOVHQWLGRGH
WUHQHV
JLURHQORV
UHGXFWRUHV
LQGXVWULDOHV 1-4 2-4
0&3
CCW
CW CW
CCW
CW
CCW
CW
CCW
$;;

CW
CCW CCW
2-3 1-3
CW

CW
CCW

CW

CCW
$;;

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 21


Sección 4 ~ Página 58 de 142
3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHSRVLFLRQHVGHOHMH\VHQWLGRVGHJLUR


3RVLFLRQHVGHHMH /DVILJXUDVVLJXLHQWHVGHVFULEHQODVSRVLFLRQHVGHHMH\ODVGHSHQGHQFLDVGHOVHQWLGR
\GHSHQGHQFLDV GHJLURSDUDORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&3
GHOVHQWLGRGH
WUHQHV
JLURHQORV
UHGXFWRUHV
LQGXVWULDOHV 1-4
0&3 2-4
CW CCW
CW CCW CW

CCW
CW
CCW
$;;

2-3 1-3
CCW
CW
CCW
CW

CW CCW

CW
CCW
$;;

22 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 59 de 142
3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHSRVLFLRQHVGHOHMH\VHQWLGRVGHJLUR


3RVLFLRQHVGHHMH /DVILJXUDVVLJXLHQWHVGHVFULEHQODVSRVLFLRQHVGHHMH\ODVGHSHQGHQFLDVGHOVHQWLGR
\GHSHQGHQFLDV GHJLURSDUDORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&5FRQGRV\WUHVWUHQHV
GHOVHQWLGRGH
\WUHQHV
JLURHQORV
UHGXFWRUHV
LQGXVWULDOHV 0-4
0&5
CW

CW
CCW
CCW
CCW CW CCW CW

$;;

0-3 CCW
CCW

CW CW

CCW CW CCW
CW
$;;

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 23


Sección 4 ~ Página 60 de 142
/XEULFDFLyQGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV


 /XEULFDFLyQGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV
(QIXQFLyQGHODSRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMHHQORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&
VH XWLOL]DUi XQD GH HVWDV FODVHV GH OXEULFDFLyQ OXEULFDFLyQ SRU EDUERWHR R
OXEULFDFLyQSRUEDxRGHDFHLWH

/XEULFDFLyQSRU (VWDFODVHGHOXEULFDFLyQVHXWLOL]DGHIRUPDHVWiQGDUHQORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGH
EDUERWHR ODVHULH0&HQSRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMHKRUL]RQWDO GHVLJQDFLyQGHOPRGHOR0&/ (QOD
OXEULFDFLyQ SRU EDUERWHR HO QLYHO GH DFHLWH HV EDMR (O HQJUDQDMH \ HO URGDPLHQWR VH
OXEULFDQFRQHODFHLWHTXHVHOHVVDOSLFD

/XEULFDFLyQSRU (VWDFODVHGHOXEULFDFLyQVHXWLOL]DHQORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&HQ
EDxRGHDFHLWH SRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMHYHUWLFDO GHVLJQDFLyQGHOPRGHOR0&9 \HQSRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMH
UHFWD GHVLJQDFLyQGHOPRGHOR0&( (QODOXEULFDFLyQSRUEDxRGHDFHLWHHOQLYHOGH
DFHLWHHVWDQHOHYDGRTXHHOHQJUDQDMH\HOURGDPLHQWRTXHGDQWRWDOPHQWHVXPHUJLGRV
HQHOOXEULFDQWH
(Q ORV UHGXFWRUHV LQGXVWULDOHV GH ODV VHULHV 0&39 0&59 \ 0&5( FRQ
OXEULFDFLyQ SRU EDxR GH DFHLWH VLHPSUH VH XWLOL]DQ GHSyVLWRV GH FRPSHQVDFLyQ
SDUDHODFHLWH(QFDVRGHTXHHOUHGXFWRUVHFDOLHQWHGXUDQWHHOIXQFLRQDPLHQWRHVWRV
GHSyVLWRVDFW~DQFRPRXQDFiPDUDGHH[SDQVLyQSDUDHODFHLWHGHOUHGXFWRU
,QGHSHQGLHQWHPHQWHGHODSRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMHVLVHHPSOD]DDODLUHOLEUH\EDMR
XQDVFRQGLFLRQHVDPELHQWDOHVGHKXPHGDGHOHYDGDVHXWLOL]DUiXQGHSyVLWRGH
H[SDQVLyQGHDFHLWH(VFRPSDWLEOHFRQHOGLVHxRGHHMHPDFL]RDVtFRPRFRQHOGH
HMH KXHFR (O DFHLWH GHO UHGXFWRU VH DtVOD GHO DLUH H[WHULRU K~PHGR PHGLDQWH XQD
PHPEUDQDVLWXDGDHQHOGHSyVLWRGHFRPSHQVDFLyQ(VWRJDUDQWL]DTXHQRVHJHQHUH
QLQJ~QWLSRGHKXPHGDGHQHOUHGXFWRU

6tPERORV /D WDEOD VLJXLHQWH PXHVWUD ORV VtPERORV XWLOL]DGRV HQ ODV ILJXUDV TXH VLJXHQ \ VX
XWLOL]DGRV VLJQLILFDGR
6tPEROR 6LJQLILFDGR

7DSyQGHVDOLGDGH
JDVHV

$SHUWXUDGHLQVSHFFLyQ

9DULOODGHQLYHOGH
DFHLWH

7DSyQGHGUHQDMHGH
DFHLWH

7DSyQGHOOHQDGRGH
DFHLWH

0LULOODGHODFHLWH

7DSyQGHVDOLGDGHO
DLUH

24 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 61 de 142
/XEULFDFLyQGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV


/XEULFDFLyQSRU /RVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&HQSRVLFLyQUHFWD GHVLJQDFLyQGHOPRGHOR


EDxRGHDFHLWHHQ 0&3(R0&5( HPSOHDQHOGHSyVLWRGHH[SDQVLyQGHDFHLWH  TXHVHPXHVWUD
SRVLFLyQUHFWD HQODILJXUDVLJXLHQWH

[6]
[2] [1]
[5]

[4]

[3]

$;;
)LJ 5HGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&3(0&5(FRQGHSyVLWRGHH[SDQVLyQGHDFHLWH

>@ 7XERGHYHQWLODFLyQ >@ 0LULOODGHODFHLWH


>@ 9DULOODGHOQLYHOGHDFHLWH >@ 7DSyQGHVDOLGDGHODLUH
>@ 7DSyQGHGUHQDMHGHODFHLWH >@ 'HSyVLWRGHH[SDQVLyQGHDFHLWH

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 25


Sección 4 ~ Página 62 de 142
/XEULFDFLyQGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV


/XEULFDFLyQSRU (QORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHOD VHULH0&HQSRVLFLyQYHUWLFDO GHVLJQDFLyQGHO


EDxRGHDFHLWHHQ PRGHOR0&390&59 HOGHSyVLWRGHH[SDQVLyQGHDFHLWH  VHHQFXHQWUDHQHO
SRVLFLyQYHUWLFDO ODGRGHODWDSDGHPRQWDMH

[2] [6] [4] [1] [5]

[3]

$;;
)LJ 5HGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&390&59FRQGHSyVLWRGHH[SDQVLyQGHDFHLWH

>@ 7XERGHYHQWLODFLyQ >@ 0LULOODGHODFHLWH


>@ 9DULOODGHOQLYHOGHDFHLWH >@ 7DSyQGHVDOLGDGHODLUH
>@ 7DSyQGHGUHQDMHGHODFHLWH >@ 'HSyVLWRGHH[SDQVLyQGHDFHLWH

6LODVFRQGLFLRQHVDPELHQWDOHVVRQVHFDVVHXWLOL]DUiXQGHSyVLWRGHH[SDQVLyQ
GHIXQGLFLyQJULV  ÒQLFDPHQWHVHXWLOL]DUiHQODSRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMHYHUWLFDOFRQHO
HMH PDFL]R GH VDOLGD PLUDQGR KDFLD DEDMR GHVLJQDFLyQ GHO PRGHOR 0&396) R
0&596) TXHHVWpHQSRVLFLyQYHUWLFDO

[2]
[1]
[3]

[4]

$;;
)LJ 5HGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&396)0&596)FRQGHSyVLWRGHH[SDQVLyQGH
IXQGLFLyQJULV

>@ 'HSyVLWRGHH[SDQVLyQGHIXQGLFLyQJULV >@ 9DULOODGHOQLYHOGHDFHLWH


>@ 7DSyQGHVDOLGDGHJDVHV >@ 7DSyQGHGUHQDMHGHDFHLWH

26 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 63 de 142
/XEULFDFLyQGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV


/XEULFDFLyQD ,QGHSHQGLHQWHPHQWHGHODSRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMH\VLDVtVHVROLFLWDWDPELpQVHSXHGH
SUHVLyQ DSOLFDUODOXEULFDFLyQDSUHVLyQFRPRRWUDDOWHUQDWLYDGHHQJUDVH
(Q OD OXEULFDFLyQ D SUHVLyQ HO QLYHO GH DFHLWH HV EDMR /D SDUWH GHO HQJUDQDMH \ GHO
URGDPLHQWRTXHQRTXHGDQFXELHUWDVSRUHOEDxRGHDFHLWHVHOXEULFDQFRQXQDERPED
GHH[WUHPRGHOHMHHQORVWDPDxRVFRPSUHQGLGRVHQWUH\ →FDStWXOR%RPEDGH
H[WUHPRGHOHMH RELHQFRQXQDERPEDGHOPRWRUVLORVWDPDxRVVHHQFXHQWUDQHQWUH
\ →FDStWXOR%RPEDGHOPRWRU 
/DOXEULFDFLyQDSUHVLyQVHXWLOL]DFXDQGR
‡ QRHVUHFRPHQGDEOHDSOLFDUODOXEULFDFLyQSRUEDxRGHDFHLWHHQODSRVLFLyQUHFWDR
YHUWLFDO
‡ H[LVWHQXQDVYHORFLGDGHVGHHQWUDGDPX\HOHYDGDV
‡ HVSUHFLVRHQIULDUHOUHGXFWRUFRQXQVLVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQH[WHUQRGHDJXDSDUD
HODFHLWH →FDStWXOR6LVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHDJXDSDUDHODFHLWH RELHQFRQ
XQRGHDLUH →FDStWXOR6LVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHODFHLWHSRUDLUH 

(QFRQWUDUiPiVGHWDOOHVDFHUFDGHORVGHSyVLWRVGHFRPSHQVDFLyQSDUDHODFHLWHHQHO
FDStWXOR3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 27


Sección 4 ~ Página 64 de 142
+HUUDPLHQWDVPDWHULDOQHFHVDULR


 ,QVWDODFLyQPHFiQLFD
 +HUUDPLHQWDVPDWHULDOQHFHVDULR
(OYROXPHQGHVXPLQLVWURQRLQFOX\HORVHOHPHQWRVVLJXLHQWHV
‡ -XHJRGHOODYHV
‡ /ODYHGLQDPRPpWULFD SDUDDQLOORVGHFRQWUDFFLyQ
‡ 'LVSRVLWLYRGHPRQWDMH
‡ 'LVWDQFLDGRUHV\DQLOORVVHSDUDGRUHVHQFDVRGHTXHVHDQQHFHVDULRV
‡ 'LVSRVLWLYRVGHILMDFLyQSDUDORVHOHPHQWRVGHHQWUDGDVDOLGD
‡ /XEULFDQWH SRUHMHPSORIOXLGR12&2ŠGH6(:(852'5,9(
‡ 3DUDUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFR →FDStWXOR0RQWDJHGHVPRQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGH
HMHKXHFRFRQXQLyQSRUFKDYHWD YiVWDJRURVFDGRWXHUFD ',1 WRUQLOORGH
ILMDFLyQWRUQLOORHVWUDQJXODGRU
‡ &RPSRQHQWHVGHILMDFLyQVHJ~QORGHVFULWRHQHOFDStWXOR%DVHGHOUHGXFWRU

7ROHUDQFLDVGH
PRQWDMH
([WUHPRGHOHMH %ULGDV
7ROHUDQFLDGLDPHWUDOHQFRQIRUPLGDGFRQ',1 7ROHUDQFLDGHSHVWDxDGHFHQWUDMH
‡ ,62NSDUDHMHVPDFL]RVFRQ∅≤PP ‡ ,62MV+
‡ ,62PSDUDHMHVPDFL]RVFRQ∅!PP
‡ ,62+SDUDHMHVKXHFRVFRQDQLOORGH
FRQWUDFFLyQ
‡ ,62+SDUDHMHVKXHFRVFRQFKDYHWHUR
‡ 2ULILFLRFHQWUDOHQFRQIRUPLGDGFRQ',1
IRUPD'6

 $QWHVGHFRPHQ]DU
(ODFFLRQDPLHQWR ‡ /RVGDWRVGHODSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDVGHOPRWRUFRLQFLGHQFRQORVGHODWHQVLyQGH
SXHGHPRQWDUVH DOLPHQWDFLyQ
VyORVL ‡ (ODFFLRQDPLHQWRQRHVWiGDxDGR QRSUHVHQWDGDxRVFDXVDGRVSRUHOWUDQVSRUWHR
HODOPDFHQDPLHQWR 
‡ 6HFXPSOHQORVUHTXLVLWRVTXHVHPHQFLRQDQDFRQWLQXDFLyQ
± (QHOFDVRGHORVUHGXFWRUHVHVWiQGDU
OD WHPSHUDWXUD DPELHQWH VH FRUUHVSRQGH FRQ OD VHxDODGD HQ OD WDEOD GH
OXEULFDQWHV GHO FDStWXOR /XEULFDQWHV YpDVH HO HVWiQGDU  \ QR KD\ DFHLWHV
iFLGRVJDVHVYDSRUHVUDGLDFLRQHVHWF
± (QHOFDVRGHGLVHxRVHVSHFLDOHV
HO DFFLRQDPLHQWR HVWi GLVHxDGR FRQIRUPH D ODV FRQGLFLRQHV DPELHQWDOHV
→ GRFXPHQWDFLyQGHOSHGLGR 

 7UDEDMRVSUHYLRV
/RVHMHVGHVDOLGD\ODVVXSHUILFLHVGHODVEULGDVGHEHQOLPSLDUVHFRPSOHWDPHQWHGH
SURGXFWRV DQWLFRUURVLYRV LPSXUH]DV R VLPLODUHV XVH XQ GLVROYHQWH FRPHUFLDO  1R
SHUPLWDTXH HOGLVROYHQWH HQWUHHQFRQWDFWRFRQ ORV ERUGHV GH FLHUUH GH ORV UHWHQHV
SRGUtDGDxDUVHHOPDWHULDO

28 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 65 de 142
%DVHGHOUHGXFWRU


 %DVHGHOUHGXFWRU
%DVHSDUD 3DUDSRGHUHIHFWXDUXQPRQWDMHUiSLGR\VHJXURGHOUHGXFWRUHVIXQGDPHQWDOHOHJLUELHQ
UHGXFWRUHV HOWLSRGHEDVH\SODQLILFDUH[KDXVWLYDPHQWHWRGRHOSURFHVRLQFOX\HQGRODHODERUDFLyQ
FRQSHGHVWDO GHSODQRVHVSHFtILFRVFRQWRGDODLQIRUPDFLyQGHGLVHxR\PHGLGDVQHFHVDULD
6(:(852'5,9( UHFRPLHQGD XWLOL]DU ODV EDVHV TXH DSDUHFHQ HQ ODV ILJXUDV
VLJXLHQWHV(QFDVRGHDSOLFDUGLVHxRVSURSLRVpVWRVGHEHUiQVHUHTXLSDUDEOHVDODV
EDVHVGHVFULWDVWDQWRGHVGHHOSXQWRGHYLVWDWpFQLFRFRPRHOFXDOLWDWLYR
6L HO UHGXFWRU VH LQVWDOD VREUH XQ GLVHxR GH DFHUR GHEHUi DVHJXUDUVH GH TXH HVWH
PDWHULDO VHD VXILFLHQWHPHQWH UtJLGR FRPR SDUD HYLWDU OD DSDULFLyQ GH YLEUDFLRQHV \
RVFLODFLRQHV SHUMXGLFLDOHV /D EDVH GHEH GLVHxDUVH FRQIRUPH DO SHVR \DO SDU GH ODV
IXHU]DVWHQLHQGRHQFXHQWDODVIXHU]DVTXHDFW~DQVREUHHOUHGXFWRU

(MHPSOR

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]

A A
$;;
)LJ %DVHGHKRUPLJyQDUPDGRSDUDUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&3/0&5/

/H\HQGD 3RV$→$SDUWDGR%DVHGHFHPHQWR

>@ 7RUQLOORGHFDEH]DKH[DJRQDORHVSiUUDJR
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDOHQFDVRGHTXH>@KD\DXQHVSiUUDJRRXQWRUQLOORGDGR
ODYXHOWD
>@ $UDQGHODVGHDMXVWH DSUR[PPGHHVSDFLR
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO
>@ %ORTXHGHODEDVH
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO\WRUQLOORGHDVLHQWR
>@ 7UDYHVDxRGHVRSRUWH

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 29


Sección 4 ~ Página 66 de 142
%DVHGHOUHGXFWRU


(MHPSOR

[1]
[2]

[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]

A A
$;;
)LJ %DVHGHKRUPLJyQDUPDGRSDUDUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&3(0&5(

/H\HQGD 3RV$→$SDUWDGR%DVHGHFHPHQWR

>@ 7RUQLOORGHFDEH]DKH[DJRQDORHVSiUUDJR
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDOHQFDVRGHTXH>@KD\DXQHVSiUUDJRRXQWRUQLOORGDGR
ODYXHOWD
>@ $UDQGHODVGHDMXVWH DSUR[PPGHHVSDFLRGLVSRQLEOH
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO
>@ %ORTXHGHODEDVH
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO\WRUQLOORGHDVLHQWR
>@ 7UDYHVDxRGHVRSRUWH

30 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 67 de 142
%DVHGHOUHGXFWRU


(MHPSOR

[1]
⭌40 mm ⭌40 mm [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]

[10] [10]

A A
$;;
)LJ %DVHGHKRUPLJyQDUPDGRSDUDUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&390&59

/H\HQGD 3RV$→$SDUWDGR%DVHGHFHPHQWR

>@ 7RUQLOORGHFDEH]DKH[DJRQDORHVSiUUDJR
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDOHQFDVRGHTXH>@KD\DXQHVSiUUDJRRXQWRUQLOORGDGR
ODYXHOWD
>@ $UDQGHODVGHDMXVWH DSUR[PPGHHVSDFLRGLVSRQLEOH
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO
>@ %ORTXHGHODEDVH
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO\WRUQLOORGHDVLHQWR
>@ 7UDYHVDxRGHVRSRUWH
>@%RPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH RSFLRQDO

7HQJDHQFXHQWDODVLQGLFDFLRQHVVLJXLHQWHVHQORVUHGXFWRUHVGHOWLSR0&39
0&59
‡ /DGLVWDQFLDPtQLPDHQWUHODWDSDGHOURGDPLHQWR\ODEDVHGHOUHGXFWRUGHEHUi
VHUGHPPHQHOOXJDUGHPRQWDMH
‡ (OOXJDUGHPRQWDMHVHGHEHUiKDEHUGLVHxDGRFRQODVPHGLGDVDGHFXDGDVVL
HOUHGXFWRUHVWiHTXLSDGRFRQXQDERPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH>@ →FDStWXOR
%RPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH 

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 31


Sección 4 ~ Página 68 de 142
%DVHGHOUHGXFWRU


%DVHGHFHPHQWR /DEDVHGHFHPHQWRSDUDHOUHGXFWRUGHEHUiHVWDUUHIRU]DGD\ELHQXQLGDDOKRUPLJyQ
PHGLDQWHVXMHFLRQHVWRUQLOORV\RWURVHOHPHQWRVGHDFHURÒQLFDPHQWHORVWUDYHVDxRV
GHVRSRUWHVHHPSRWUDQHQODEDVH 3RV$→ILJXUDVLJXLHQWH 

ØTB

[1]
[2]
[3]
ØTM KG

m
S
[4]
U

[5]
P
[6]
[7]
L
8 8 [8] Ød [8]

[9]
B s

P
C

$;;
)LJ 5HIXHU]RGHODEDVHGHFHPHQWR 3RV$

/H\HQGD

>@ 7RUQLOORGHFDEH]DKH[DJRQDORHVSiUUDJR
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDOHQFDVRGHTXH>@KD\DXQHVSiUUDJRRXQWRUQLOORGDGR
ODYXHOWD
>@ $UDQGHODVGHDMXVWH DSUR[PPGHHVSDFLRGLVSRQLEOH
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO
>@ %ORTXHGHODEDVH
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO
>@ 7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO\WRUQLOORGHDVLHQWR
>@ 6ROGDGXUD
>@7UDYHVDxRGHVRSRUWH

32 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 69 de 142
%DVHGHOUHGXFWRU


0HGLGDV
7DPDxR (VSiUUDJR %DQFDGDV 7RUQLOORVGH 7UDYHVDxRVGHVRSRUWH
GHO DVLHQWR
UHGXFWRU
∅7% ∅70 .* P 3 8 $ 6 ∅G / 3 % & V
>PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@

0  

  0   

0  

   

0  

  0   

0  


/DUHVLVWHQFLDDODWUDFFLyQPtQLPDGHORVWUDYHVDxRVGHVRSRUWH\GHORVWRUQLOORVGH
DVLHQWRGHEHUiVHUGH1PP

&RODGDSRVWHULRU /DGHQVLGDGGHODFRODGDSRVWHULRUGHEHUiFRLQFLGLUFRQODGHODEDVHGHFHPHQWR/D
FRODGDSRVWHULRUTXHGDLQFRUSRUDGDDODEDVHGHFHPHQWRPHGLDQWHGHDUPDGXUDVGH
DFHUR
/DVVROGDGXUDV>@QRVHGHEHUiQHIHFWXDUKDVWDTXH
‡ ODEDVHGHFHPHQWRTXHURGHDDOWUDYHVDxRGHVRSRUWHHVWpVHFD
‡ HO UHGXFWRU VH KD\D LQVWDODGR HQ VX XELFDFLyQ GHILQLWLYD MXQWR FRQ WRGRV VXV
FRPSRQHQWHVDGLFLRQDOHV

3DUHVGHDSULHWH
7DPDxRGHO 7RUQLOORWXHUFD 3DUGHDSULHWHWRUQLOORWXHUFD
UHGXFWRU
>1P@

0 


0 


0 


0 


Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 33


Sección 4 ~ Página 70 de 142
0RQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVFRQHMHPDFL]R


 0RQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVFRQHMHPDFL]R

$QWHV GH SURFHGHU DO PRQWDMH DVHJ~UHVH GH TXH ODV GLPHQVLRQHV GH OD EDVH
FRLQFLGHQFRQODVGHODVILJXUDVGHORVUHGXFWRUHVTXHDSDUHFHQHQHOFDStWXOR
%DVHGHOUHGXFWRU

5HDOLFHHOPRQWDMHVLJXLHQGRHVWHRUGHQ
 0RQWHODVSLH]DVVLJXLHQGRODVILJXUDVGHORVUHGXFWRUHVTXHDSDUHFHQHQHOFDStWXOR
%DVHGHOUHGXFWRU/DVDUDQGHODVGHDMXVWH>@IDFLOLWDQODVWDUHDVGHUHDMXVWHXQD
YH]FRQFOXLGRHOPRQWDMHDVtFRPRHOUHHPSOD]RGHOUHGXFWRUHQFDVRGHTXHHVWR
VHDQHFHVDULRHQHOIXWXUR
 ,QVWDOHHOUHGXFWRUHQODSRVLFLyQVHOHFFLRQDGDXWLOL]DQGRWUHVWRUQLOORVGHDVLHQWRTXH
VHVLWXDUiQDODPi[LPDGLVWDQFLDSRVLEOHHQWUHVt GRVGHHOORVHQXQPLVPRODGRGHO
UHGXFWRU \ HO RWUR HQ HO RSXHVWR  \ HQ OD SRVLFLyQ RSXHVWD D ORV WUDYHVDxRV GH
VRSRUWH$OLQHHHOUHGXFWRUGHOVLJXLHQWHPRGR
± HQVHQWLGRYHUWLFDOHOHYiQGROREDMiQGRORRLQFOLQiQGRORPHGLDQWHODVWXHUFDVGH
ORVWRUQLOORVGHDVLHQWR
± HQ VHQWLGR KRUL]RQWDO JROSHDQGR OLJHUDPHQWH ORV WRUQLOORV GH DVLHQWR HQ OD
GLUHFFLyQTXHGHVHH
 'HVSXpVGHDOLQHDUHOUHGXFWRUDSULHWHODVWUHVWXHUFDVGHORVWRUQLOORVGHDVLHQWR
XWLOL]DGRVSDUDXELFDUORFRUUHFWDPHQWH,QWURGX]FDFRQFXLGDGRHOFXDUWRWRUQLOORGH
DVLHQWRHQHOWUDYHVDxRGHVRSRUWH\DSULpWHORILUPHPHQWH6REUHWRGRDVHJ~UHVH
GHTXHODSRVLFLyQGHOUHGXFWRUQRYDUtD'DGRHOFDVRDOLQHHGHQXHYRHOUHGXFWRU
 $ FRQWLQXDFLyQ ILMH ORV H[WUHPRV GH ORV WRUQLOORV GH DVLHQWR VROGiQGRORV HQ HO
WUDYHVDxR GH VRSRUWH  SXQWRV VROGDGRV FRPR PtQLPR SRU FDGD WRUQLOOR GH
DVLHQWR  $SOLTXH XQD VROGDGXUD GLVFRQWLQXD HQ ORV GRV VHQWLGRV SDUWLHQGR GHO
FHQWUR SDUDILMDUORVWRUQLOORVGHDVLHQWRGHPRGRTXHTXHGHQVLPpWULFRVFRQODOtQHD
FHQWUDOGHOUHGXFWRU$VtVHHYLWDQORVGHVDMXVWHVSURYRFDGRVSRUODVROGDGXUD7UDV
VROGDU ORV WRUQLOORV VyOR TXHGD XQLUORV GHILQLWLYDPHQWH SRU VROGDGXUD HQ HO PLVPR
RUGHQ 'HVSXpV GH DMXVWDU ODV WXHUFDV DVHJ~UHVH GH TXH ORV WRUQLOORV GH DVLHQWR
VROGDGRVQRGHIRUPDQODFDUFDVDGHOUHGXFWRU
 7UDVVROGDUODVWXHUFDVGHORVWRUQLOORVGHILMDFLyQGHOUHGXFWRUYXHOYDDFRPSUREDU
HOPRQWDMH\DFRQWLQXDFLyQOOHQHGHFHPHQWRODLQVWDODFLyQ
 &XDQGRODFRODGDSRVWHULRUVHKD\DHQGXUHFLGRHIHFW~HHOFRQWUROILQDOGHOPRQWDMH
\HQFDVRQHFHVDULRUHDOLFHORVDMXVWHVSHUWLQHQWHV

34 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 71 de 142
0RQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVFRQHMHPDFL]R


3UHFLVLyQGH
PRQWDMHHQOD
DOLQHDFLyQ

[3]

Y
JE JE

$;;
)LJ 7ROHUDQFLDVGHPRQWDMHGHODEDVH

$OUHDOL]DUODDOLQHDFLyQDVHJ~UHVHGHTXHQRVHH[FHGHQODVWROHUDQFLDVGHPRQWDMH
YDORUHV\Pi[GHODWDEODVLJXLHQWH GHODSODQHLGDGGHODEDVH3DUDDOLQHDUHOUHGXFWRU
VREUHODSODFDEDVHVHSXHGHQXWLOL]DUDUDQGHODVGHDMXVWH  
-( \Pi[
>PP@ >PP@
 
 
 
 

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 35


Sección 4 ~ Página 72 de 142
0RQWDMHGHVPRQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFRFRQ FKDYHWHUD


 0RQWDMHGHVPRQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFRFRQ FKDYHWHUD

‡ (OYROXPHQGHVXPLQLVWURLQFOX\H →)LJXUD  
± FLUFOLSV>@SODFDWHUPLQDO>@
‡ (O YROXPHQ GH VXPLQLVWUR QR LQFOX\H ORV HOHPHQWRV VLJXLHQWHV → )LJXUD  
)LJXUD )LJXUD  
± YiVWDJRURVFDGR>@WXHUFD>@WRUQLOORGHILMDFLyQ>@WRUQLOORHVWUDQJXODGRU>@
/D VHOHFFLyQ GH OD URVFD \ OD ORQJLWXG GHO YiVWDJR URVFDGR \ GHO WRUQLOOR GH ILMDFLyQ
GHSHQGHUiQGHOGLVHxRGHOFOLHQWH

7DPDxRVGH 6(:(852'5,9(UHFRPLHQGDXWLOL]DUORVVLJXLHQWHVWDPDxRVGHURVFD
URVFD
7DPDxRGHOUHGXFWRU 7DPDxRGHURVFDSDUD
‡ YiVWDJRURVFDGR>@
‡ WXHUFD ',1 >@
‡ WRUQLOORGHILMDFLyQ>@
 0
 0

(QHOFDVRGHOWRUQLOORHVWUDQJXODGRUHOWDPDxRGHURVFDYLHQHGHWHUPLQDGRSRUODSODFD
WHUPLQDO>@
7DPDxRGHOUHGXFWRU 7DPDxRGHURVFDSDUDWRUQLOORHVWUDQJXODGRU>@
 0
 0

0RQWDMHGHO
UHGXFWRUGHHMH
KXHFRHQHOHMH [7] [1] [2] [3] [4]
GHOFOLHQWH

[5]

$;;
)LJ 0RQWDMHGHOUHGXFWRUGHHMHKXHFRFRQFKDYHWHUD
/H\HQGD

>@ (MHGHOFOLHQWH
>@ 9iVWDJRURVFDGR
>@ &LUFOLSV
>@ 3ODFDWHUPLQDO
>@ 7XHUFD
>@ (MHKXHFR
‡ (QHORULILFLRGHOHMHKXHFRFRORTXHORVFLUFOLSV>@\ODSODFDWHUPLQDO>@SDUDLQVWDODU
\VXMHWDUHOUHGXFWRU

36 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 73 de 142
0RQWDMHGHVPRQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFRFRQ FKDYHWHUD


‡ $SOLTXH HO IOXLGR 12&2Š HQ HO HMH KXHFR >@ DVt FRPR HQ HO H[WUHPR GHO HMH GHO
FOLHQWH>@
‡ 'HVSODFHHOUHGXFWRUKDVWDHOHMHGHOFOLHQWH>@$WRUQLOOHHOYiVWDJRURVFDGR>@HQ
HO HMH GHO FOLHQWH >@ $SULHWH HO HMH GHO FOLHQWH >@ FRQ OD WXHUFD >@ KDVWD TXH HO
H[WUHPRGHOHMH>@\ODSODFDWHUPLQDO>@HQWUHQHQFRQWDFWR
‡ $IORMHGHQXHYRODWXHUFD>@\GHVDWRUQLOOHHOYiVWDJRURVFDGR>@7UDVHOPRQWDMH
DVHJXUHHOHMHGHOFOLHQWH>@FRQHOWRUQLOORGHILMDFLyQ>@

[6]

$;;
)LJ 5HGXFWRUGHHMHKXHFRPRQWDGRFRQXQLyQSRUFKDYHWD

'HVPRQWDMHGHO
UHGXFWRUGHHMH
KXHFRHQHOHMH [1] [6] [3] [4]
GHOFOLHQWH

[8]

$;;
)LJ 'HVPRQWDMHGHOUHGXFWRUGHHMHKXHFRFRQXQLyQSRUFKDYHWD
/H\HQGD

>@ (MHGHOFOLHQWH
>@ &LUFOLSV
>@ 3ODFDWHUPLQDO
>@ 7RUQLOORGHILMDFLyQ
>@ 7RUQLOORHVWUDQJXODGRU
‡ ([WUDLJDHOWRUQLOORGHVXMHFLyQ>)LJXUD 3RV@
‡ 5HWLUHHOFLUFOLSH[WHULRU>@\ODSODFDWHUPLQDO>@
‡ (QURVTXHHOWRUQLOORGHILMDFLyQ>@HQHOHMHGHOFOLHQWH>@
‡ 9XHOYDDLQVWDODUODSODFDWHUPLQDO>@GDGDODYXHOWD\HOFLUFOLSH[WHULRU>@
‡ $SULHWHHOWRUQLOORHVWUDQJXODGRU>@GHODSODFDWHUPLQDO>@SDUDSRGHUGHVPRQWDUHO
UHGXFWRUGHOHMHGHOFOLHQWH>@

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 37


Sección 4 ~ Página 74 de 142
0RQWDMHGHVPRQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFR
 FRQ DQLOOR GH FRQWUDFFLyQ

 0RQWDMHGHVPRQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFRFRQ DQLOOR GH FRQWUDFFLyQ


/RV DQLOORV GH FRQWUDFFLyQ FRQVWLWX\HQ HO HOHPHQWR GH XQLyQ HQWUH HO HMH KXHFR GHO
UHGXFWRU\HOHMHGHOFOLHQWH(OWLSRGHDQLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQXWLOL]DGR GHVLJQDFLyQGHO
PRGHORR5/. VHSXHGHFRQVXOWDUHQODGRFXPHQWDFLyQGHOSHGLGR
‡ (OYROXPHQGHVXPLQLVWURLQFOX\H →)LJXUD  
± FLUFOLS>@SODFDWHUPLQDO>@
‡ (O YROXPHQ GH VXPLQLVWUR QR LQFOX\H ORV HOHPHQWRV VLJXLHQWHV → )LJXUD  
)LJXUD )LJXUD  
± YiVWDJRURVFDGR>@WXHUFD>@WRUQLOORGHILMDFLyQ>@WRUQLOORHVWUDQJXODGRU>@
/D VHOHFFLyQ GH OD URVFD \ OD ORQJLWXG GHO YiVWDJR URVFDGR \ GHO WRUQLOOR GH ILMDFLyQ
GHSHQGHUiQGHOGLVHxRGHOFOLHQWH

7DPDxRVGH 6(:(852'5,9(UHFRPLHQGDXWLOL]DUORVVLJXLHQWHVWDPDxRVGHURVFD
URVFD
7DPDxRGHOUHGXFWRU 7DPDxRGHURVFDSDUD
‡ YiVWDJRURVFDGR>@
‡ WXHUFD ',1 >@
‡ WRUQLOORGHILMDFLyQ>@
 0
 0

(QHOFDVRGHOWRUQLOORHVWUDQJXODGRUHOWDPDxRGHURVFDYLHQHGHWHUPLQDGRSRUODSODFD
WHUPLQDO>@
7DPDxRGHOUHGXFWRU 7DPDxRGHURVFDSDUDWRUQLOORHVWUDQJXODGRU>@
 0
 0

0RQWDMHGHO
UHGXFWRUGHHMH
[7] [1] [2] [9] [10] [3] [4]
KXHFRHQHOHMH
GHOFOLHQWH

[5]

$;;
)LJ 0RQWDMHGHOUHGXFWRUGHHMHKXHFRFRQDQLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQ
/H\HQGD

>@ (MHGHOFOLHQWH
>@ 9iVWDJRURVFDGR
>@ &LUFOLS
>@ 3ODFDWHUPLQDO
>@ 7XHUFD
>@(MHKXHFR
>@ $QLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQ

38 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 75 de 142
0RQWDMHGHVPRQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFR
FRQ DQLOOR GH FRQWUDFFLyQ 

>@7RUQLOORVGHEORTXHR
‡ $QWHVGHOPRQWDMHGHVHQJUDVHHORULILFLRGHOHMHKXHFR\HOHMHGHOFOLHQWH>@
‡ (QHORULILFLRGHOHMHKXHFRFRORTXHORVFLUFOLSV>@\ODSODFDWHUPLQDO>@SDUDLQVWDODU
\VXMHWDUHOUHGXFWRU
‡ 'HVSODFHHOUHGXFWRUKDVWDHOHMHGHOFOLHQWH>@$WRUQLOOHHOYiVWDJRURVFDGR>@HQ
HO HMH GHO FOLHQWH >@ $SULHWH HO HMH GHO FOLHQWH >@ FRQ OD WXHUFD >@ KDVWD TXH HO
H[WUHPRGHOHMH>@\ODSODFDWHUPLQDO>@HQWUHQHQFRQWDFWR
‡ $IORMHGHQXHYRODWXHUFD>@\GHVDWRUQLOOHHOYiVWDJRURVFDGR>@7UDVHOPRQWDMH
DVHJXUHHOHMHGHOFOLHQWH>@FRQHOWRUQLOORGHILMDFLyQ>@
[10]

[6]

$;;
)LJ 5HGXFWRUGHHMHKXHFRPRQWDGRFRQXQLyQSRUFKDYHWD

0RQWDMHGHODQLOOR ‡ 1RDSULHWHORVWRUQLOORVGHEORTXHR>@VLQWHQHULQVWDODGRHOHMHGHOFOLHQWH>@SRGUtD
GHFRQWUDFFLyQ GHIRUPDUVHHOHMHKXHFR
‡ (QODEDVHGHODQLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQ>@HQHOHMHKXHFRDSOLTXHXQSRFRGHIOXLGR
12&2Š
‡ 'HVSODFHHODQLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQ>@VXHOWRKDVWDHOPR\~GHORULILFLRGHOHMHKXHFR
8ELTXHHOHMHGHOFOLHQWH>@HQHORULILFLRGHOHMHKXHFR$FRQWLQXDFLyQGHVSODFHHO
DQLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQ>@ORHTXLYDOHQWHDODGLVWDQFLD$ →ILJXUDVLJXLHQWHVHFFLyQ
GLVWDQFLD$ GHVGHHOH[WUHPRGHOHMHKXHFR

[1]

[10]

[9 ]

$;;
)LJ 0RQWDMHGHODQLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQ
/H\HQGD

>@ (MHGHOFOLHQWH
>@ $QLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQ
>@7RUQLOORVGHEORTXHR

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 39


Sección 4 ~ Página 76 de 142
0RQWDMHGHVPRQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFR
 FRQ DQLOOR GH FRQWUDFFLyQ

'LVWDQFLD$
7DPDxRGHOUHGXFWRU $QLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQPRGHOR $QLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQPRGHOR5/.
GLVWDQFLD$ GLVWDQFLD$
>PP@ >PP@
  
 

 
 

 
 
  
 

‡ $SULHWHORVWRUQLOORVGHEORTXHR>@GHODQLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQ>@YDULDVYHFHV\GH
PDQHUD XQLIRUPH \ VXFHVLYD HQ HO VHQWLGR GH ODV DJXMDV GHO UHORM 5HStWDOR
WDQWDV YHFHV FRPR VHD QHFHVDULR KDVWD TXH WRGRV ORV WRUQLOORV GH EORTXHR >@
DOFDQFHQHOSDUGHDSULHWH →VHFFLyQ3DUHVGHDSULHWH 

3DUHVGHDSULHWH
7DPDxRGHORV $QLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQPRGHOR $QLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQPRGHOR5/.
WRUQLOORV
3DUGHDSULHWH 3DUGHDSULHWH
FODVH
>1P@ >1P@
0 
0 
0  6LODVSDUWHVIURQWDOHVGHODQLOORH[WHULRU
\GHODQLOORLQWHULRUHVWiQHQFRQWDFWR
0 
VLJQLILFDTXHHOSDUGHDSULHWH\DVHKD
0  DOFDQ]DGR
0 
0 

'HVPRQWDMH ‡ $IORMHORVWRUQLOORVGHEORTXHRXQRGHWUiVGHRWURGHPDQHUDXQLIRUPHHQYDULDV
GHODQLOORGH YHFHV \ HQ HO VHQWLGR GH ODV DJXMDV GHO UHORM SDUD HYLWDU TXH OD VXSHUILFLH GH
FRQWUDFFLyQ VXMHFLyQ VH LQFOLQH 1R UHWLUH SRU FRPSOHWR ORV WRUQLOORV GH EORTXHR \D TXH HVWR
SRGUtDKDFHUTXHHODQLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQVDOWDUD
‡ 6LORVDQLOORVQRVHDIORMDUDQUHWLUHWDQWRVWRUQLOORVFRPRURVFDVGHH[WUDFFLyQH[LVWDQ
\DSULpWHORVHQGLFKDVURVFDVKDVWDTXHHOFDVTXLOORFyQLFRGHHVFDORQDPLHQWRKD\D
VDOLGRGHODQLOORFyQLFRGHHVFDORQDPLHQWR
‡ 5HWLUHHODQLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQGHOHMHKXHFR

3DUDHOPRQWDMH\HOGHVPRQWDMHGHRWURVWLSRVGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFRFRQVXOWHOD
GRFXPHQWDFLyQFRUUHVSRQGLHQWH

40 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 77 de 142
0RQWDMHGHVPRQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFR
FRQ DQLOOR GH FRQWUDFFLyQ 

'HVPRQWDMHGHO
UHGXFWRUGHHMH
[1] [6] [3] [4]
KXHFRGHOHMHGHO
FOLHQWH

[8]

$;;
)LJ 'HVPRQWDMHGHOUHGXFWRUGHHMHKXHFRFRQDQLOORGHFRQWUDFFLyQ
/H\HQGD

>@ (MHGHOFOLHQWH
>@ &LUFOLS
>@ 3ODFDWHUPLQDO
>@ 7RUQLOORGHILMDFLyQ
>@ 7RUQLOORHVWUDQJXODGRU
‡ ([WUDLJDHOWRUQLOORGHVXMHFLyQ>)LJXUD 3RV@
‡ 5HWLUHHOFLUFOLSH[WHULRU>@\ODSODFDWHUPLQDO>@
‡ (QURVTXHHOWRUQLOORGHILMDFLyQ>@HQHOHMHGHOFOLHQWH>@
‡ 9XHOYDDLQVWDODUODSODFDWHUPLQDO>@GDGDODYXHOWD\HOFLUFOLSH[WHULRU>@
‡ (QURVTXHHOWRUQLOORHVWUDQJXODGRU>@GHODSODFDWHUPLQDO>@SDUDSRGHUGHVPRQWDU
HOUHGXFWRUGHOHMHGHOFOLHQWH>@

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 41


Sección 4 ~ Página 78 de 142
0RQWDMHGHXQPRWRUFRQDGDSWDGRU


 0RQWDMHGHXQPRWRUFRQDGDSWDGRU
/RVDGDSWDGRUHVGHPRWRU>@HVWiQGLVSRQLEOHVSDUDORVPRWRUHV,(&GHORVWDPDxRV
FRPSUHQGLGRVHQWUH\TXHVHXWLOL]DQHQORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH
0&

[1]

[2]

$;;
)LJ $GDSWDGRUGHPRWRUSDUDUHGXFWRUHV
LQGXVWULDOHV0&3

[1] [2]

$;;
)LJ $GDSWDGRUGHPRWRUSDUDUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&5
/H\HQGD

>@ $GDSWDGRUGHPRWRU
>@ $FRSODPLHQWR

$OPRQWDUORVDFRSODPLHQWRV>@REVHUYHODVLQGLFDFLRQHVGHOFDStWXOR0RQWDMH
GHDFRSODPLHQWRV

42 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 79 de 142
0RQWDMHGHXQPRWRUFRQDGDSWDGRU


$ODKRUDGHVHOHFFLRQDUXQPRWRUWHQJDHQFXHQWDHOSHVRGHOPRWRUSHUPLWLGROD
SRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMHGHOUHGXFWRU\ODFODVHGHVXMHFLyQGHOUHGXFWRUVLJXLHQGROD
LQIRUPDFLyQGHODVWDEODVVLJXLHQWHV

(QWRGDVODVWDEODVHVYiOLGR

*0 SHVRGHOPRWRU ** SHVRGHOUHGXFWRU

7LSRGHPRQWDMH 6HULHGLVHxRGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV

0&3/ 0&5/
&RQSDWDV *0≤** *0≤**
&RQHMHKXHFRIORWDQWH *0≤** *0≤**
&RQEULGD *0≤** *0≤**

7LSRGHPRQWDMH 6HULHGLVHxRGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV

0&59

0&39
&RQSDWDV *0≤** *0≤**
&RQHMHKXHFRIORWDQWH *0≤** *0≤**
&RQEULGD *0≤** *0≤**

7LSRGHPRQWDMH 6HULHGLVHxRGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV

0&3(
0&5(
&RQSDWDV *0≤** *0≤**
&RQHMHKXHFRIORWDQWH *0≤** *0≤**
&RQEULGD *0≤** *0≤**

6LVHGDQORVFDVRVVLJXLHQWHVSyQJDVHHQFRQWDFWRFRQ6(:(852'5,9(
‡ 0RQWDMHGHDGDSWDGRUGHPRWRUFRQXQYHQWLODGRUGHUHIULJHUDFLyQ QRHQORVPRWRUHV
GHOWDPDxR6\0 
‡ ,QVWDODFLyQGHPRWRUHV1(0$

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 43


Sección 4 ~ Página 80 de 142
1RWDVLPSRUWDQWHVVREUHHOPRQWDMH


 2SFLRQHVGHODLQVWDODFLyQPHFiQLFD
 1RWDVLPSRUWDQWHVVREUHHOPRQWDMH

$QWHV GH LQLFLDU ORV WUDEDMRV GH PRQWDMH HQ ORV DFRSODPLHQWRV LQWHUUXPSD OD
DOLPHQWDFLyQGHOPRWRU\DVHJ~UHORFRQWUDODFRQH[LyQLQYROXQWDULD

,QGLFDFLRQHVSDUD ‡ 3DUDLQVWDODUORVHOHPHQWRVGHHQWUDGD\GHVDOLGDYiOJDVHVyORGHXQGLVSRVLWLYRGH
HOPRQWDMH PRQWDMH3DUDDVHQWDUORVXWLOLFHHORULILFLRURVFDGRGHFHQWUDMHVLWXDGRHQHOH[WUHPR
GHOHMH
‡ 3DUDLQWURGXFLUORVHQHOH[WUHPRGHOHMHQRJROSHHQXQFDFRQXQPDUWLOORORV
DFRSODPLHQWRVORVSLxRQHVHWF ORVURGDPLHQWRVODFDUFDVD\HOHMHSRGUtDQ
VXIULUGDxRV 
‡ 5HVSHWH OD WHQVLyQ FRUUHFWD HVWDEOHFLGD SDUD ODV FRUUHDV GH ODV SROHDV GH
FRQIRUPLGDGFRQODVLQGLFDFLRQHVGHOIDEULFDQWH 
‡ /RV HOHPHQWRV GH OD WUDQVPLVLyQ LQVWDODGRV GHEHQ HVWDU HTXLOLEUDGRV \ QR GHEHQ
JHQHUDUQLQJXQDIXHU]DUDGLDORD[LDOLQDGPLVLEOH

1RWD
(OPRQWDMHHVPiVIiFLOVLVHDSOLFDDQWHVOXEULFDQWHDOHOHPHQWRGHVDOLGDRVLpVWHVH
FDOLHQWDGXUDQWHXQEUHYHHVSDFLRGHWLHPSR D ƒ& 

$OPRQWDUORVDFRSODPLHQWRVVHGHEHUiQHTXLOLEUDUORVHOHPHQWRVVLJXLHQWHV
D GHVDOLQHDPLHQWRD[LDO GLVWDQFLDVPi[LPD\PtQLPD
E GHVDOLQHDPLHQWRGHOHMH HUURUHQODPDUFKDFRQFpQWULFD
F GHVDOLQHDPLHQWRDQJXODU
a) b) c)

$;;
)LJ 'LVWDQFLD\GHVDOLQHDPLHQWRHQHOPRQWDMHGHODFRSODPLHQWR

/RV HOHPHQWRV GH HQWUDGD \ VDOLGD FRPR ORV DFRSODPLHQWRV HWF GHEHUiQ
FXEULUVHFRQXQGLVSRVLWLYRGHSURWHFFLyQFRQWUDHOFRQWDFWR

44 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 81 de 142
1RWDVLPSRUWDQWHVVREUHHOPRQWDMH


5HFXHUGH
/RV PpWRGRV GHVFULWRV HQ ORV DSDUWDGRV VLJXLHQWHV SDUD PHGLU HO
GHVDOLQHDPLHQWR DQJXODU \ D[LDO VRQ PX\ LPSRUWDQWHV SDUD FRQVHUYDU ODV
WROHUDQFLDVGHPRQWDMHLQGLFDGDVHQHOFDStWXOR0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV

0HGLFLyQGHO /D ILJXUD VLJXLHQWH PXHVWUD OD PHGLFLyQ GHO GHVDOLQHDPLHQWR DQJXODU α  XWLOL]DQGR XQD
GHVDOLQHDPLHQWR JDOJDGHHVSHVRUHV(VWHPpWRGRGHPHGLFLyQVyORSURSRUFLRQDXQUHVXOWDGRH[DFWRVLVH
DQJXODUFRQJDOJD HOLPLQDODGLYHUJHQFLDHQWUHODVSDUWHVIURQWDOHVGHODFRSODPLHQWRJLUDQGRODVGRVPLWDGHV
GHHVSHVRUHV GHODFRSODPLHQWRƒ\GHVSXpVVHFDOFXODHOSURPHGLRGHODGLIHUHQFLD D±D 

a1

α
D

a2

$;;
)LJ 0HGLFLyQGHOGHVDOLQHDPLHQWRDQJXODUFRQJDOJDGHHVSHVRUHV

0HGLFLyQGHO /D ILJXUD VLJXLHQWH PXHVWUD OD PHGLFLyQ GHO GHVDOLQHDPLHQWR DQJXODU XWLOL]DQGR XQ
GHVDOLQHDPLHQWR PLFUyPHWURFRQFXDGUDQWHLQGLFDGRU(VWHPpWRGRGHPHGLFLyQSURSRUFLRQDHOPLVPR
DQJXODUPHGLDQWH UHVXOWDGR TXH HO GH OD VHFFLyQ 0HGLFLyQ GHO GHVDOLQHDPLHQWR DQJXODU FRQ JDOJD GH
PLFUyPHWURFRQ HVSHVRUHV VL VH JLUDQ VLPXOWiQHDPHQWH ODV GRV PLWDGHV GHO DFRSODPLHQWR SRU
FXDGUDQWH HMHPSORPHGLDQWHXQSHUQRGHDFRSODPLHQWR GHPRGRTXHODSXQWDGHPHGLGDGHO
LQGLFDGRU UHORMGHFRPSDUDFLyQQRVHPXHYDGUiVWLFDPHQWHHQODVXSHUILFLHGHPHGLFLyQ

a1

α
D

f2 f1

a2

$;;
)LJ 0HGLFLyQGHOGHVDOLQHDPLHQWRDQJXODUPHGLDQWHPLFUyPHWURFRQFXDGUDQWHLQGLFDGRU
(OUHTXLVLWRSUHYLRSDUDXWLOL]DUHVWHPpWRGRHVTXHORVURGDPLHQWRVSDUDiUEROHVQRWHQJDQ
QLQJ~QMXHJRD[LDOPLHQWUDVHOHMHJLUH6LHVWDFRQGLFLyQQRVHFXPSOHSULPHURVHGHEHUi
HOLPLQDUHOMXHJRD[LDOHQWUHODVSDUWHVIURQWDOHVGHODVGRVPLWDGHVGHODFRSODPLHQWR2WUD
RSFLyQFRQVLVWHHQXWLOL]DUGRVPLFUyPHWURVFRQFXDGUDQWHLQGLFDGRUHQORVODGRVRSXHVWRV
GHODFRSODPLHQWR SDUDFDOFXODUODGLIHUHQFLDGHDPERVFXDQGRHOHMHJLUD 

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 45


Sección 4 ~ Página 82 de 142
1RWDVLPSRUWDQWHVVREUHHOPRQWDMH


0HGLFLyQGHO /DILJXUDVLJXLHQWHPXHVWUDODPHGLFLyQGHOGHVDOLQHDPLHQWRGHOHMHXWLOL]DQGRXQDUHJOD
GHVDOLQHDPLHQWR GHFDODGR1RUPDOPHQWHORVYDORUHVDGPLVLEOHVSDUDHOGHVDOLQHDPLHQWRGHOHMHVRQWDQ
GHOHMHFRQUHJOD SHTXHxRVTXHVHUHFRPLHQGDXWLOL]DUXQPLFUyPHWURFRQFXDGUDQWHLQGLFDGRU6LVHJLUD
GHFDODGR\ XQD GH ODV PLWDGHV GHO DFRSODPLHQWR MXQWR FRQ HO PLFUyPHWUR \ VH GLYLGHQ ODV
PLFUyPHWURFRQ GHVYLDFLRQHV GH PHGLGD OD GLYHUJHQFLD YLVXDOL]DGD HQ HO PLFUyPHWUR SURSRUFLRQD HO
FXDGUDQWH GHVSOD]DPLHQWR GLPHQVLyQ E  HQ HO TXH VH HQFXHQWUD HO GHVDOLQHDPLHQWR GHO HMH
LQGLFDGRU FRUUHVSRQGLHQWHDODRWUDPLWDGGHODFRSODPLHQWR

f2 f1

$;;
)LJ 0HGLFLyQGHOGHVDOLQHDPLHQWRGHOHMHFRQUHJODGHFDODGR\PLFUyPHWURFRQFXDGUDQWH
LQGLFDGRU

0HGLFLyQGHO /D ILJXUD VLJXLHQWH PXHVWUD OD PHGLFLyQ GHO GHVDOLQHDPLHQWR GHO HMH XWLOL]DQGR XQ
GHVDOLQHDPLHQWR PpWRGRGHPHGLFLyQPiVH[DFWR/DVGRVPLWDGHVGHODFRSODPLHQWRVHJLUDQDOD
GHOHMHPHGLDQWH YH]VLQTXHODSXQWDGHOPLFUyPHWURVHGHVSODFHSRUODVXSHUILFLHGHPHGLFLyQ6LVH
PLFUyPHWURFRQ GLYLGHODGLYHUJHQFLDYLVXDOL]DGDHQHOPLFUyPHWURVHREWLHQHHOGHVDOLQHDPLHQWRGHOHMH
FXDGUDQWH GLPHQVLyQE
LQGLFDGRU

f2 f1

$;;
)LJ 0HGLFLyQGHOGHVDOLQHDPLHQWRGHOHMHPHGLDQWHPLFUyPHWURFRQFXDGUDQWHLQGLFDGRU

46 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 83 de 142
0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV


 0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV
$FRSODPLHQWR
527(;

[1]

[2]

[1]
$;;
)LJ (VWUXFWXUDGHODFRSODPLHQWR527(;

>@ 0R\~GHDFRSODPLHQWR
>@ &RURQDGHQWDGD

(O DFRSODPLHQWR HOiVWLFR 527(; UHTXLHUH XQ PDQWHQLPLHQWR PtQLPR \ SHUPLWH


FRPSHQVDUHOGHVSOD]DPLHQWRUDGLDO\HODQJXODU(ODOLQHDPLHQWRDGHFXDGR\H[DFWR
GHOHMHJDUDQWL]DQHOFLFORGHYLGDHOHYDGRGHODFRSODPLHQWR

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 47


Sección 4 ~ Página 84 de 142
0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV


0RQWDMHGHODV
PLWDGHVGHO
L1
DFRSODPLHQWR
HQHOHMH

ØdW
ØdH
s s
E

$;;
)LJ 'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMHSDUDHODFRSODPLHQWR527(;

'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMH 7RUQLOORSULVLRQHUR
7DPDxRGHO
DFRSODPLHQWR ( V G+ G: / $OX***** / DFHUR * 3DUGHDSULHWH
>PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >1P@
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 
       0 

3DUD JDUDQWL]DU HO MXHJR D[LDO GHO DFRSODPLHQWR DVHJ~UHVH GH UHVSHWDU GH PDQHUD
H[DFWDODGLVWDQFLDGHOHMH GLPHQVLyQ( 

48 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 85 de 142
0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV


'LPHQVLRQHV $SULHWHORVWRUQLOORVSULVLRQHURV $ SDUDLPSHGLUHOMXHJRD[LDOGHODFRSODPLHQWR


GHPRQWDMHGHO
E
DFRSODPLHQWR
527(;HQHO
DGDSWDGRUGHO
PRWRU

A A
L1
L2
L3

$;;
)LJ 'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHODFRSODPLHQWR527(;HQHO+66 HMHGHHQWUDGD ±
DGDSWDGRUGHOPRWRU

/DVGLPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMHTXHDSDUHFHQHQODWDEODVLJXLHQWHVyORVRQYiOLGDVSDUD
ODLQVWDODFLyQGHXQDFRSODPLHQWR527(;HQXQDGDSWDGRUGHPRWRU5HVXOWDQYiOLGDV
SDUDWRGRVORVGLVHxRVGHUHGXFWRUHV\ODVPXOWLSOLFDFLRQHV

7DPDxRGH 'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMH
7DPDxRGH
DFRSODPLHQWR ( / / /
PRWRU,(&
527(; >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@
5    ± 
5     
5   ±  
5    ± 
5    ± 
5    ± 
5    ± 
5   ±  

3DUDJDUDQWL]DUHOMXHJRD[LDOGHODFRSODPLHQWRUHVSHWHFRQH[DFWLWXGODGLVWDQFLDGHO
HMH GLPHQVLyQ( 

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 49


Sección 4 ~ Página 86 de 142
0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV


$FRSODPLHQWR /RVDFRSODPLHQWRV1RU0H[PRGHORV*\(SUHFLVDQXQPDQWHQLPLHQWRPtQLPRVRQ
1RU0H[ HOiVWLFRVDODWRUVLyQ\SHUPLWHQFRPSHQVDUORVGHVSOD]DPLHQWRVD[LDOHVDQJXODUHV\
PRGHORV*\( UDGLDOHV (O SDU VH WUDQVPLWH PHGLDQWH XQ DQLOOR LQWHUPHGLR HOiVWLFR FRQ DOWDV
SURSLHGDGHVGHDPRUWLJXDFLyQ\UHVLVWHQWHDODFHLWH\DOFDORU(VWRVDFRSODPLHQWRVVH
SXHGHQ XWLOL]DU HQ FXDOTXLHU VHQWLGR GH JLUR R SRVLFLyQ GH PRQWDMH (O GLVHxR GHO
DFRSODPLHQWR1RU0H[PRGHOR*SHUPLWHUHHPSOD]DUHODQLOORLQWHUPHGLRHOiVWLFR>@
VLQGHVDOLQHDUHOHMH

Nor-Mex E [1] Nor-Mex G


[2] [6]

[1]
[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]
[1]

$;;
)LJ (VWUXFWXUDGHORVDFRSODPLHQWRV1RU0H[(*

>@ 0R\~GHDFRSODPLHQWR >@ 7RUQLOORGHFDEH]DKH[DJRQDOLQWHULRU


>@ $QLOORLQWHUPHGLRHOiVWLFR >@ $UDQGHODGHVHJXULGDG
>@ $QLOORGHJDUUDV
>@ &XERDEULGDGR
>@ $QLOORLQWHUPHGLRHOiVWLFR
>@ 0R\~GHDFRSODPLHQWR

50 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 87 de 142
0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV


,QGLFDFLRQHV 'HVSXpVGHPRQWDUODVPLWDGHVGHODFRSODPLHQWRDVHJ~UHVHGHTXHVHFXPSOHHOMXHJR
GHPRQWDMH UHFRPHQGDGR GLPHQVLyQ6HQHOPRGHOR*GLPHQVLyQ6HQHOPRGHOR( RODORQJLWXG
GLPHQVLRQHVGH WRWDO GLPHQVLRQHV/*HQHOPRGHOR*/(HQHOPRGHOR( FRQIRUPHDODLQIRUPDFLyQGH
PRQWDMHGHO ODVWDEODVVLJXLHQWHV/DDOLQHDFLyQH[DFWDGHODFRSODPLHQWR →VHFFLyQ7ROHUDQFLDVGH
DFRSODPLHQWR PRQWDMH JDUDQWL]DXQFLFORGHYLGDSURORQJDGR
1RU0H[*

IE S2 IG

LG

$;;
)LJ 'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMHSDUDHODFRSODPLHQWR1RU0H[*

'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMH
7DPDxRGHO
DFRSODPLHQWR O( O* /* 7ROHUDQFLDSHUPLWLGD 3HVR
1RU0H[* >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ 6 >NJ@
>PP@
     ±  
    ±  
    ±  
    ±  
    ±  
    ±  
    ±  
     ± 
    ±  
    ±  
    ±  
    ±  
    ±  
    ±  
    ±  
    ±  

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 51


Sección 4 ~ Página 88 de 142
0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV


'LPHQVLRQHVGH
PRQWDMHGHO
DFRSODPLHQWR
1RU0H[(

IE S1 IE

LE

$;;
)LJ 'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHODFRSODPLHQWR1RU0H[(

7DPDxRGHO 'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMH
DFRSODPLHQWR O( /( 7ROHUDQFLDSHUPLWLGD6 3HVR
1RU0H[( >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >NJ@
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 
    ± 
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 
   ± 

52 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 89 de 142
0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV


'LPHQVLRQHVGH $SULHWHORVWRUQLOORVSULVLRQHURV $ SDUDLPSHGLUHOMXHJRD[LDOGHODFRSODPLHQWR


PRQWDMHGHO
DFRSODPLHQWR S2
1RU0H[HQHO
DGDSWDGRUGHO A A
PRWRU

L2
L1
L3

$;;
)LJ 'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHODFRSODPLHQWR1RU0H[HQHO+66 HMHGHHQWUDGD ±
DGDSWDGRUGHOPRWRU

/DVGLPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMHTXHDSDUHFHQHQODWDEODVLJXLHQWHVyORVRQYiOLGDVSDUD
ODLQVWDODFLyQGHXQDFRSODPLHQWR1RU0H[HQXQDGDSWDGRUGHPRWRU

7DPDxRGHODFRSODPLHQWR1250(;(*        


7DPDxRGHO 7DPDxRGHOPRWRU,(&        
UHGXFWRU
'LPHQVLyQGH
ËQGLFHL >PP@
PRQWDMH

7RGRV 6        
7RGRV /        
0&5 /        
L 
/     ±   ±
0&5 /        
L 
/       ± ±
0&5 /        
L 
/        ±
2WURV0& / ±       
L 
/ ±       ±

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 53


Sección 4 ~ Página 90 de 142
0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV


7ROHUDQFLDVGH
PRQWDMH
'HVDOLQHDPLHQWRGHOHMH 'HVDOLQHDPLHQWRDQJXODU

a1

b
D D

a2

$;;
)LJ 7ROHUDQFLDVGHPRQWDMH

/DVWROHUDQFLDVGHPRQWDMHTXH VH LQGLFDQ HQ OD WDEOD VLJXLHQWH VRQ YiOLGDV SDUD ORV
DFRSODPLHQWRVHOiVWLFRV1RU0H[\527(;

7ROHUDQFLDVGHPRQWDMH>PP@
'LiPHWURH[WHULRU'
VLQPLQ± VLQPLQ± VLQ!PLQ±
>PP@
D±D E D±D E D±D E
≤      
'≤      
'≤      
'≤      

D±D GHVDOLQHDPLHQWRDQJXODUPi[LPR
E GHVDOLQHDPLHQWRPi[LPRGHOHMH

54 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 91 de 142
0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV


0RQWDMHGHODFRSODPLHQWRUtJLGRDODWRUVLyQ*0*0'\*0;

[9,8] [1] [6] [3] [11] [12] [2] [1] [1] [6] [17] [9,8] [4] [11] [10] [13,14] [5] [7]

[15,16]

[1]

GM 42-260 GM 280-800

$;;
)LJ (VWUXFWXUDGHODFRSODPLHQWR*0

/H\HQGD

>@ 0R\~GHDFRSODPLHQWR >@-XQWD


>@ 0DQJXLWR >@7RUQLOOR
>@0DQJXLWR >@7XHUFDDXWRILMDGRUD
>@ 0LWDGGHOPDQJXLWR >@$UDQGHODGHVHJXULGDG
>@ 0LWDGGHOPDQJXLWR >@7XHUFD
>@ $QLOORGHREWXUDFLyQRMXQWDWyULFD >@3HUQR
>@ 7DSD >@$UDQGHODGHVHJXULGDG
>@ 7DSyQGHOOXEULFDQWH >@-XQWDWyULFD
>@ 2ULILFLRVGHOXEULFDFLyQ
‡ $QWHV GH SURFHGHU DO PRQWDMH OLPSLH D IRQGR FDGD XQD GH ODV SLH]DV GHO
DFRSODPLHQWRHQHVSHFLDOHOHQJUDQDMH
‡ (QJUDVHOLJHUDPHQWHODVMXQWDVWyULFDV>@HLQWURGX]FDORVPDQJXLWRV>@HQODV
UDQXUDVSUHYLVWDV
‡ (QJUDVH OLJHUDPHQWH HO HQJUDQDMH GH ORV PDQJXLWRV > @ \ D FRQWLQXDFLyQ
LQWURGX]FDORVPDQJXLWRVHQORVH[WUHPRVGHOHMHVLQGDxDUODVMXQWDVWyULFDV>@
‡ 0RQWHORVPR\~VGHDFRSODPLHQWR>@HQHOHMH(OH[WUHPRGHOPR\~GHEHWHUPLQDU
HQHOUHVDOWHGHOHMH
‡ $OLQHH OD PiTXLQD SRU DFRSODU \ FRPSUXHEH OD GLVWDQFLD GHO HMH GLPHQVLyQ
D → DSDUWDGR'LVWDQFLDGHOHMHSDUGHDSULHWH 
‡ $OLQHH ORV GRV HMHV \ FRPSUXHEH ORV YDORUHV SHUPLWLGRV FRQ XQ PLFUyPHWUR /DV
WROHUDQFLDV GH PRQWDMH → DSDUWDGR 7ROHUDQFLDV GH PRQWDMH  GHSHQGHQ GH OD
YHORFLGDGGHDFRSODPLHQWR
‡ 'HMHTXHORVPR\~VGHDFRSODPLHQWR>@VHHQIUtHQ\HQJUDVHHOHQJUDQDMHDQWHVGH
DWRUQLOODUORVPDQJXLWRV>@
‡ &RORTXHODMXQWD>@\DFRQWLQXDFLyQDWRUQLOOHODVPLWDGHVGHORVPDQJXLWRVFRQHO
SDUGHDSULHWHHVSHFLILFDGR →DSDUWDGR'LVWDQFLDGHOHMHSDUGHDSULHWH 3DUD
IDFLOLWDUHOPRQWDMHHQJUDVHXQSRFRODMXQWD
‡ $VHJ~UHVHGHTXHORVRULILFLRVGHOXEULFDFLyQ>@GHODVGRVPLWDGHVGHOPDQJXLWR
> @PDQWLHQHQXQDGLVWDQFLDGHƒHQWUHVtGHVSXpVGHDWRUQLOODUORV

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 55


Sección 4 ~ Página 92 de 142
0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV


7ROHUDQFLDVGH
PRQWDMH
'HVDOLQHDPLHQWRGHOHMH 'HVDOLQHDPLHQWRDQJXODU

a1

bmax

a2

$;;
)LJ 7ROHUDQFLDVGHPRQWDMHGHODFRSODPLHQWR*0

7ROHUDQFLDVGHPRQWDMH>PP@
7LSRGH
QPLQ± QPLQ± QPLQ± QPLQ± QPLQ±
DFRSODPLHQWR
D±D EPi[ D±D EPi[ D±D EPi[ D±D EPi[ D±D EPi[
*0          
*0          
*0          
*0          
*0          

D±D GHVDOLQHDPLHQWRDQJXODUPi[LPR
EPi[ GHVDOLQHDPLHQWRPi[LPRGHOHMH

'LVWDQFLDGHOHMH
SDUGHDSULHWH

a
$;;
)LJ 'LVWDQFLDGHOHMHD

7LSRGHDFRSODPLHQWR             
'LVWDQFLDGHOHMHD>PP@             
3DUGHDSULHWHGHO
            
WRUQLOOR>1P@

56 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 93 de 142
$QWLUUHWRUQR);0


 $QWLUUHWRUQR);0
(O DQWLUUHWRUQR LPSLGH TXH VH SURGX]FDQ VHQWLGRV GH JLUR QR GHVHDGRV 'XUDQWH HO
IXQFLRQDPLHQWRVyORHVSRVLEOHHOVHQWLGRGHOJLURHVSHFLILFDGR

‡ 1RVHGHEHDUUDQFDUHOPRWRUHQHOVHQWLGRGHEORTXHR'XUDQWHODFRQH[LyQ
SUHVWH DWHQFLyQ D OD VHFXHQFLD GH IDVHV FRUUHFWD (O IXQFLRQDPLHQWR HQ HO
VHQWLGRGHEORTXHRSXHGHGDxDUHODQWLUUHWRUQR
‡ 6LVHSURGXFHDOJ~QFDPELRHQHOVHQWLGRGHEORTXHRFRQVXOWHVLQIDOWDD6(:
(852'5,9(

(OPRGHOR);0GHDQWLUUHWRUQRSUHFLVDXQPDQWHQLPLHQWRPtQLPRVHDFFLRQDPHGLDQWH
IXHU]DFHQWUtIXJDHLQFRUSRUDXQRVVRSRUWHVTXHVHSXHGHQOHYDQWDU6LVHDOFDQ]DHO
UpJLPHQ GH YHORFLGDG GH GHVSHJXH HVWRV VRSRUWHV VH OHYDQWDQ SRU FRPSOHWR GH OD
VXSHUILFLHGHFRQWDFWRGHODQLOORH[WHULRU/DOXEULFDFLyQGHODQWLUUHWRUQRVHHIHFW~DFRQ
HODFHLWHGHOUHGXFWRU(OVHQWLGRGHJLURSHUPLWLGR>@VHLQGLFDHQODFDUFDVDGHOUHGXFWRU
→ILJXUDVLJXLHQWH 
[1]

[1]

$;;
)LJ ,GHQWLILFDFLyQGHOVHQWLGRGHJLURSHUPLWLGRHQODFDUFDVDGHOUHGXFWRU

0RGLILFDFLyQGHO 3DUDFDPELDUHOVHQWLGRGHEORTXHRJLUHƒHODQLOORLQWHULRUFRQORVVRSRUWHV3DUD
VHQWLGRGH KDFHUOR HO DQLOOR LQWHULRU MXQWR FRQ ORV VRSRUWHV VH GHEHUi H[WUDHU XWLOL]DQGR XQ
EORTXHR GLVSRVLWLYRGHGHVPRQWDMH QRLQFOXLGRHQHOYROXPHQGHVXPLQLVWUR \DFRQWLQXDFLyQ
VHGHEHUiYROYHUDPRQWDUJLUiQGRORƒ

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 57


Sección 4 ~ Página 94 de 142
$QWLUUHWRUQR);0


FRQDQWLUUHWRUQR
PRQWDGRIXHUDGHO
UHGXFWRU

[1]
[4]

[2]

[3]

$;;
)LJ 0RGLILFDFLyQGHOVHQWLGRGHEORTXHRFRQDQWLUUHWRUQRPRQWDGRIXHUDGHOUHGXFWRU
/H\HQGD

>@ $QLOORH[WHULRU >@ 7RUQLOORVGHILMDFLyQ


>@ &LUFOLS >@ $QLOORLQWHULRUFRQFDMD\VRSRUWHV
‡ ([WUDLJDHODFHLWHGHOUHGXFWRU →FDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR 
‡ $IORMHORVWRUQLOORVGHILMDFLyQ>@GHODQWLUUHWRUQR
‡ 5HWLUHHODQLOORH[WHULRU>@3DUDIDFLOLWDUHOGHVPRQWDMHJLUHXQSRFRHODQLOORH[WHULRU
>@HQHOVHQWLGRGHUXHGDOLEUH
‡ 5HWLUHHOFLUFOLS>@DVtFRPRHODQLOORLQWHULRUMXQWRFRQODFDMD\ORVVRSRUWHV>@
‡ *LUHHODQLOORLQWHULRU>@MXQWRFRQORVVRSRUWHVƒ\YXHOYDDPRQWDUWRGDVODV
SLH]DVHQHOVHQWLGRLQYHUVR/DVIXHU]DVTXHDFW~DQGXUDQWHHOPRQWDMH~QLFDPHQWH
GHEHUiQDSOLFDUVHDODQLOORLQWHULRU>@SHURQRDODFDMDQLDORVVRSRUWHV'XUDQWHHO
PRQWDMHXWLOLFHORVDJXMHURVGHURVFDGHODQLOORLQWHULRU>@
‡ $SULVLRQHHODQLOORLQWHULRU>@FRQHOFLUFOLS>@HQVHQWLGRD[LDO9XHOYDDPRQWDUHO
DQLOORH[WHULRU>@FRQORVWRUQLOORVGHILMDFLyQ>@5HVSHWHORVSDUHVGHDSULHWHTXHVH
LQGLFDQHQODWDEODVLJXLHQWH
3DUGHDSULHWH
7DPDxRGHWRUQLOOR
>1P@
0 
0 
0 
0 
0 
0 
0 
0 
0 

‡ 0RGLILTXHODLQGLFDFLyQGHOVHQWLGRGHOJLURHQODFDUFDVDGHOUHGXFWRU )LJXUD  
‡ 9XHOYDDOOHQDUGHDFHLWHHOUHGXFWRU →FDStWXOR/XEULFDQWHV &RPSUXHEHHOQLYHO
GHDFHLWH
‡ 8QDYH]FRQFOXLGRHOPRQWDMHFRPSUXHEHTXHHODQWLUUHWRUQRIXQFLRQDVLQSUREOHPD

58 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 95 de 142
$QWLUUHWRUQR);0


FRQDQWLUUHWRUQR
LQFRUSRUDGRHQHO
UHGXFWRU
[4] [1] [2]

[7] [6]
[5]

[3] [8]

$;;
)LJ 0RGLILFDFLyQGHOVHQWLGRGHEORTXHRFRQDQWLUUHWRUQRLQFRUSRUDGRHQHOUHGXFWRU

/H\HQGD

>@ $QLOORH[WHULRU >@ 0DQJXLWR


>@ &LUFOLS >@7DSDGHOURGDPLHQWR
>@ $QLOORLQWHULRUFRQFDMD\VRSRUWHV >@ $UDQGHODVGHDMXVWH
>@ $UDQGHODGHDSR\R >@ 'LVSRVLWLYRGHGHVPRQWDMH
‡ ([WUDLJDHODFHLWHGHOUHGXFWRU →FDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR 
‡ 5HWLUH OD WDSD GHO URGDPLHQWR >@ ODV DUDQGHODV GH DMXVWH >@ \ HO PDQJXLWR >@
3URFXUHQRPH]FODUODVDUDQGHODVGHDMXVWH>@\HOPDQJXLWR>@HQWUHODWDSDGHO
URGDPLHQWR>@\HODQLOORH[WHULRU>@SRUTXHVHGHEHUiQYROYHUDPRQWDUHQHORUGHQ
FRUUHFWR
‡ ([WUDLJDHOFLUFOLS>@GHOHMHGHHQWUDGD
‡ 'HVPRQWH HO DQLOOR LQWHULRU MXQWR FRQ OD FDMD \ ORV VRSRUWHV >@ XWLOL]DQGR XQ
GLVSRVLWLYRGHGHVPRQWDMH>@DGHFXDGR'XUDQWHHOGHVPRQWDMHXWLOLFHORVDJXMHURV
FRQURVFDHQHODQLOORLQWHULRU>@
‡ *LUHHODQLOORLQWHULRU>@MXQWRFRQORVVRSRUWHVƒ\YXHOYDDPRQWDUWRGDVODV
SLH]DVHQHOVHQWLGRLQYHUVR/DVIXHU]DVTXHDFW~DQGXUDQWHHOPRQWDMH~QLFDPHQWH
GHEHUiQDSOLFDUVHDODQLOORLQWHULRU>@SHURQRDODFDMDQLDORVVRSRUWHV
‡ &XDQGRYXHOYDDPRQWDUORJLUHHODQWLUUHWRUQRHQHOVHQWLGRGHUXHGDOLEUHSDUDTXH
ORVVRSRUWHVVHGHVOLFHQKDFLDHODQLOORH[WHULRU
‡ )LMHHODQLOORLQWHULRU>@FRQHOFLUFOLS>@HQVHQWLGRD[LDO
‡ 0RQWHHOPDQJXLWR>@ODVDUDQGHODVGHDMXVWH>@\ODWDSDGHOURGDPLHQWR>@HQHO
RUGHQLQYHUVR
‡ 0RGLILTXHODLQGLFDFLyQGHOVHQWLGRGHOJLURHQODFDUFDVDGHOUHGXFWRU
‡ 9XHOYDDOOHQDUGHDFHLWHHOUHGXFWRU →FDStWXOR/XEULFDQWHV &RPSUXHEHHOQLYHO
GHDFHLWH
‡ 8QDYH]FRQFOXLGRHOPRQWDMHFRPSUXHEHTXHHODQWLUUHWRUQRIXQFLRQDVLQSUREOHPD

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 59


Sección 4 ~ Página 96 de 142
%RPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH6+3


 %RPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH6+3
/DERPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH6+3QRSUHFLVDQLQJ~QWLSRGHPDQWHQLPLHQWR3HUPLWH
OXEULFDUODVSDUWHVGHOUHGXFWRUTXHQRTXHGDQVXPHUJLGDVGXUDQWHHOEDxRGHDFHLWH
HQORVUHGXFWRUHVGHWDPDxRVFRPSUHQGLGRVHQWUH\/DERPEDGHH[WUHPRGHO
HMHSXHGHIXQFLRQDUHQORVGRVVHQWLGRVGHJLUR

'LPHQVLRQHVGH
PRQWDMH0&39
FRQERPEDGH
H[WUHPRGHOHMH

Ymax
X1

X JW

$;;

7DPDxRGHO 'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMH>PP@
UHGXFWRU -: ; <Pi[ ;
  
  

  

  
   
   

60 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 97 de 142
%RPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH6+3


'LPHQVLRQHVGH
PRQWDMH0&39
FRQERPEDGH
H[WUHPRGHOHMH

max
Y
X1
X JW

$;;

7DPDxRGHO 'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMH>PP@
UHGXFWRU -: ; <Pi[ ;
  
  

  

  
   
   

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 61


Sección 4 ~ Página 98 de 142
%RPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH6+3


$EVRUFLyQGHOD /D FRQH[LyQ GH OD PDQJXHUD GH DVSLUDFLyQ \ GH OD PDQJXHUD R WXER GH SUHVLyQ VH
ERPED UHDOL]D LQGHSHQGLHQWHPHQWH GHO VHQWLGR GH JLUR GHO HMH GH VDOLGD \ QR HV SRVLEOH
PRGLILFDUOD6LVHJXQGRVGHVSXpVGHDUUDQFDUHOUHGXFWRUODERPEDGHH[WUHPRGHO
HMHQRJHQHUDQLQJXQDSUHVLyQ →YLJLODQFLDGHFDXGDOPHGLDQWHODPLULOODGHOUHGXFWRU 
SURFHGDGHOPRGRVLJXLHQWH

[1]

PRE
SUC

[1]

$;;
)LJ %RPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH

/H\HQGD

>@ &RQHFWRUHQFKXIDEOH
>68&@ &DQDOGHDVSLUDFLyQ
>35(@ 7XEHUtDGHSUHVLyQ

‡ $IORMH HO FRQHFWRU >@ MXQWR D OD PDQJXHUD GH DVSLUDFLyQ HQ HO DORMDPLHQWR GH OD
YiOYXOD/OHQHHOFDQDOGHDVSLUDFLyQ>68&@\ODERPEDFRQDFHLWH
‡ +DJDJLUDUODERPEDSDUDTXHODERPEDGHOUHGXFWRUVHOXEULTXHFRQDFHLWH
‡ $VHJ~UHVH GH TXH OD ERPED SXHGH JHQHUDU XQ YDFtR HQ HO FDQDO GH DVSLUDFLyQ
>68&@\DTXHVLQRQRVHSRGUiDVSLUDUHODFHLWH

‡ &RPSUXHEHTXHHOUHGXFWRUHVWpVXILFLHQWHPHQWHOXEULFDGRGHVGHHOSULQFLSLR
‡ /DFRQH[LyQGHODPDQJXHUD\GHOWXERQRVHGHEHPRGLILFDU
‡ 1RDEUDODWXEHUtDGHSUHVLyQ>35(@

62 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 99 de 142
0RQWDMHFRQEDQFDGDGHDFHUR


 0RQWDMHFRQEDQFDGDGHDFHUR
3DUD ORV UHGXFWRUHV LQGXVWULDOHV GH OD VHULH 0& HQ SRVLFLyQ KRUL]RQWDO 0&3/
0&3/0&5/0&5/ 6(:(852'5,9(RIUHFHXQRVSDTXHWHVSUHPRQWDGRV
GHDFFLRQDPLHQWRVVREUHXQDHVWUXFWXUDGHDFHUR EDQFDGDREDQFDGDIORWDQWH 

%DQFDGDIORWDQWH (V XQD HVWUXFWXUD GH DFHUR >@ TXH DORMD FRQMXQWDPHQWH HO UHGXFWRU HO
KLGUR DFRSODPLHQWR \ HO PRWRU GDGR HO FDVR WDPELpQ HO IUHQR  3RU QRUPD JHQHUDO
VXHOHHVWDUIRUPDGDSRU
‡ HOUHGXFWRUGHHMHKXHFRR
‡ HOUHGXFWRUGHHMHPDFL]RFRQDFRSODPLHQWRILMRFRQEULGDVHQHOHMHGHVDOLGD
(O VRSRUWH GH HVWD HVWUXFWXUD GH DFHUR >@ VH UHDOL]D PHGLDQWH EUD]R GH SDU >@
→ FDStWXOR%UD]RGHSDU 

[1]

[2]

$;;
)LJ 5HGXFWRULQGXVWULDOGHODVHULH0&VREUHEDQFDGDIORWDQWH\FRQEUD]RVGHSDU

>@ %DQFDGDIORWDQWH
>@ %UD]RGHSDU

7HQJDSUHVHQWH
‡ TXHODHVWUXFWXUDGHEHUiGLPHQVLRQDUVHGHPRGRTXHSXHGDLQFOXLUHOSDUGH
ORVEUD]RV →FDStWXOR%DVHGHOUHGXFWRU
‡ TXHODEDQFDGDIORWDQWHQRVH IXHUFHGXUDQWHHOPRQWDMH ULHVJRGH GDxDU HO
UHGXFWRU\HODFRSODPLHQWR

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 63


Sección 4 ~ Página 100 de 142
0RQWDMHFRQEDQFDGDGHDFHUR


%DQFDGD (V XQD HVWUXFWXUD GH DFHUR >@ TXH DORMD FRQMXQWDPHQWH HO UHGXFWRU HO
KLGUR DFRSODPLHQWR \ HO PRWRU GDGR HO FDVR WDPELpQ HO IUHQR  (O VRSRUWH GH HVWD
HVWUXFWXUDVHFRQVLJXHPHGLDQWHYDULRVPRQWDMHVFRQSDWDV>@1RUPDOPHQWHVHWUDWD
GHXQUHGXFWRUGHHMHPDFL]RFRQDFRSODPLHQWRHOiVWLFRHQHOHMHGHVDOLGD

[1] [2]

$;;
)LJ 5HGXFWRULQGXVWULDO0&VREUHEDQFDGDFRQPRQWDMHVFRQSDWD

>@ %DQFDGD
>@0RQWDMHFRQSDWD

7HQJDSUHVHQWH
‡ TXHODLQIUDVWUXFWXUDGHORVPRQWDMHVFRQSDWDVGHEHUiVHUORVXILFLHQWHPHQWH
JUDQGH →FDStWXOR%DVHGHOUHGXFWRU
‡ TXH OD EDQFDGD QR VH IXHUFH GHELGR D XQD DOLQHDFLyQ LQFRUUHFWD ULHVJR GH
GDxDUHOUHGXFWRU\HODFRSODPLHQWR

64 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 101 de 142
%UD]RGHSDU


 %UD]RGHSDU
2SFLRQHVGH 2WUDRSFLyQHVHOEUD]RGHSDUTXHVHHQFXHQWUDGLVSRQLEOHSDUDPRQWDUORGLUHFWDPHQWH
PRQWDMH HQHOUHGXFWRURELHQHQODEDVHRVFLODQWH

0RQWDMHGLUHFWR 0RQWHVLHPSUHHOEUD]RGHSDUHQHOODGRGHODPiTXLQDDFFLRQDGD
HQHOUHGXFWRU

$;;
)LJ 2SFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHOEUD]RGHSDU
(OEUD]RGHSDUVHSXHGHLQVWDODUGLUHFWDPHQWHHQHOUHGXFWRUFRQFDUJDGHWUDFFLyQR
FRQ FDUJD SRU FRPSUHVLyQ /DV WHQVLRQHV R ODV FDUJDV DGLFLRQDOHV GHO UHGXFWRU VH
SXHGHQJHQHUDUDFDXVDGH
‡ XQDGHVYLDFLyQGHODPDUFKDFRQFpQWULFDGXUDQWHHOIXQFLRQDPLHQWR
‡ XQDH[SDQVLyQSRUFDORUGHODPiTXLQDDFFLRQDGD
3DUD HYLWDUOR VH KD LQFRUSRUDGR XQ EXOyQ GH DQFODMH >@ FRQ HOHPHQWRV GH XQLyQ
GREOHVTXHSHUPLWHQTXHH[LVWDXQMXHJR>@VXILFLHQWHWDQWRODWHUDOFRPRUDGLDOPHQWH

0° ±1°


-5 °
+5
°

[1]
°
90

[5418]

[5416] [5416]

$;;
)LJ 0RQWDMHGLUHFWRGHOEUD]RGHSDUHQHOUHGXFWRU

$QWHWRGRDVHJ~UHVHGHTXHHQWUHHOEUD]RGHSDU\ODSODFDGHDQFODMH>@DVtFRPR
HQWUHHOEUD]RGHSDU\HOUHGXFWRUH[LVWDHOMXHJRVXILFLHQWH>@(QHVWHFDVRQRVH
DSOLFDQLQJXQDIXHU]DGHIOH[LyQDOEUD]RGHSDU\ORVURGDPLHQWRVGHOHMHGHVDOLGDQR
VHYHQVRPHWLGRVDQLQJXQDFDUJDDGLFLRQDO

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 65


Sección 4 ~ Página 102 de 142
%UD]RGHSDU


%DVHSDUDEUD]R 3DUDIRUPDUODEDVHSDUDHOEUD]RGHSDU\PRQWDUORGLUHFWDPHQWHHQHOUHGXFWRURHQOD
GHSDU FRUUHGHUDGHOPRWRUSURFHGDGHOPRGRVLJXLHQWH
‡ &RORTXH ORV WUDYHVDxRV GH VRSRUWH KRUL]RQWDOPHQWH HQ ORV SXQWRV PHGLGRV FRQ
DQWHULRULGDG&RORTXHODEDVHGHFHPHQWR $ 
‡ 5HIXHUFHODEDVHGHFHPHQWR $ PH]FOiQGRODFRQDFHURGHDUPDGXUD/DEDVHGH
FHPHQWR $  GHEHUi VRSRUWDU FRPR PtQLPR OD PLVPD FDUJD TXH OD XQLyQ SRU
VROGDGXUDGHORVWRUQLOORVGHODEDVH
‡ 'HVSXpVGHLQVWDODUHOEUD]RGHSDUDSOLTXHODFRODGDSRVWHULRU % \DVHJ~UHODHQ
ODEDVHGHFHPHQWR $ PHGLDQWHDFHURGHDUPDGXUD

[5412]
[5422]
[5410]
[5420]
[5414]
HA

[5424]
[5418]

[5416]
ØMT
B

A
JS JT

$;;
)LJ %DVHGHOEUD]RGHSDUDPRQWDUORHQODFRUUHGHUDGHOPRWRU

>$@ %DVHGHFHPHQWR >@3ODFDGHDQFODMH


>%@ &RODGDSRVWHULRU >@%XOyQGHDQFODMH
>@$QFODMH >@7XHUFDKH[DJRQDO
>@%XOyQGHDQFODMH >@$QLOORGHVRSRUWH
>@&iQFDPR >@$QLOORGHVRSRUWH

([FHSWXDQGRODVSRVLFLRQHV$\%HOUHVWRGHORVFRPSRQHQWHQLQGLFDGRVVHLQFOX\HQ
HQHOYROXPHQGHVXPLQLVWUR

/DORQJLWXG+$GHOEUD]RGHSDU →WDEODVLJXLHQWH VHSXHGHHOHJLUOLEUHPHQWHGHQWUR


GHXQPDUJHQFRPSUHQGLGRHQWUH+$PtQ\+$Pi[(QFDVRGHTXH+$GHEDVHUVXSHULRU
D+$Pi[HOEUD]RGHSDUVHVXPLQLVWUDUiFRPRGLVHxRHVSHFLDO
7DPDxRGHO +$ -7 -6 ∅07
UHGXFWRU >PP@ >PP@ >PP@ >PP@
PtQPi[
 
    
 
    

66 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 103 de 142
0RQWDMHGHODFFLRQDPLHQWRFRQFRUUHDV


 0RQWDMHGHODFFLRQDPLHQWRFRQFRUUHDV
(O DFFLRQDPLHQWR FRQ FRUUHDV VH XWLOL]D FXDQGR HV SUHFLVR HTXLOLEUDU HO tQGLFH GH
PXOWLSOLFDFLyQWRWDO(OYROXPHQGHVXPLQLVWURHVWiQGDULQFOX\HODSODWDIRUPDGHOPRWRU
ODVSROHDVGHODVFRUUHDVODVFRUUHDV\VXSURWHFFLyQ

5HVSHWHHOSHVRGHOPRWRUSHUPLWLGRTXHVHLQGLFDHQODWDEODVLJXLHQWH

7LSRGHPRQWDMH 3RVLFLyQGHPRQWDMHGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&3 5 
/ 9 (
&RQSDWDV *0≤** *0≤**
&RQHMHKXHFRIORWDQWH *0≤** *0≤**
&RQEULGD *0≤** *0≤**

*0 SHVRGHOPRWRU ** SHVRGHOUHGXFWRU

d1 [5214]
[5260]
[5210]
[5110]

[5218]

[5112] [5262]

[5114]

[5212]

[5216]

$;;
)LJ $FFLRQDPLHQWRSRUFRUUHDV

>@3ODWDIRUPDGHOPRWRU >@3ROHDVSDUDFRUUHDV
>@ÈQJXORGHILMDFLyQ >@&RUUHDV
>@&DVTXLOORFyQLFR >@&XELHUWDGHODVFRUUHDV
0RQWDMH ‡ ,QVWDOHHOPRWRUVREUHODSODWDIRUPDGHOPRWRU ORVWRUQLOORVGHILMDFLyQQRVHLQFOX\HQ
HQHOYROXPHQGHVXPLQLVWUR 
‡ )LMHODSODFDSRVWHULRUGHODFXELHUWDGHODVFRUUHDV>@FRQWRUQLOORVHQODFRQVROD
GHO PRWRU > @ GHO UHGXFWRU &RPSUXHEH TXH OD FXELHUWD GH ODV FRUUHDV
>@VHDEUHHQODGLUHFFLyQGHVHDGD3DUDUHJXODUHOWHQVDGRGHODVFRUUHDVHV
QHFHVDULRDIORMDUHOWRUQLOORVXSHULRU  GHODSODFDSRVWHULRUGHODFXELHUWDGHODV
FRUUHDV
‡ ,QVWDODFLyQGHORVFDVTXLOORVFyQLFRV>@
± 0RQWHODVSROHDVGHODVFRUUHDV>@HQHOHMHGHOPRWRU\GHOUHGXFWRU
ORPiVFHUFDSRVLEOHGHOUHVDOWHGHOHMH
± 'HVHQJUDVH ORV FDVTXLOORV FyQLFRV > @ \ ODV SROHDV GH ODV FRUUHDV
> @ &RORTXH ORV FDVTXLOORV FyQLFRV HQ ODV SROHDV > @ \
FRPSUXHEHTXHORVRULILFLRVVHHQFXHQWUDQDOLQHDGRVFRUUHFWDPHQWH
± (QJUDVHORVWRUQLOORVGHILMDFLyQ\DFRQWLQXDFLyQDSULHWHODURVFDGHOPR\~GH
ODVSROHDVGHODVFRUUHDV

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 67


Sección 4 ~ Página 104 de 142
0RQWDMHGHODFFLRQDPLHQWRFRQFRUUHDV


± /LPSLHHOHMHGHOPRWRU\GHOUHGXFWRUHLQWURGX]FDODVSROHDV>@SRU
FRPSOHWR
± $SULHWH ORV WRUQLOORV *ROSHH VXDYHPHQWH HO PDQJXLWR \ YXHOYD D DSUHWDU ORV
WRUQLOORV5HSLWDHVWDRSHUDFLyQYDULDVYHFHV
± $VHJ~UHVH GH TXH ODV SROHDV GH ODV FRUUHDV > @ HVWiQ DOLQHDGDV
FRUUHFWDPHQWH &RPSUXHEH OD DOLQHDFLyQ → ILJXUD VLJXLHQWH  HQ ORV FXDWUR
SXQWRVFRQXQDUHJODGHDFHUR

$;;

± /OHQHORVRULILFLRVFRQJUDVDSDUDHYLWDUTXHHQWUHVXFLHGDG
‡ 3DVHODVFRUUHDV>@SRUODVSROHDV>@\WpQVHODVFRQORVWRUQLOORVGH
DMXVWHGHODFRQVRODGHOPRWRU →DSDUWDGR6XMHFLyQGHODVFRUUHDV 
‡ (OHUURUPi[LPRSHUPLWLGRHVGH PPSRUFDGD PPGHFRUUHDWHQVDGD6yOR
DVtVHSXHGHJDUDQWL]DUXQDWUDQVPLVLyQGHIXHU]DPi[LPD\HYLWDUFDUJDVH[FHVLYDV
HQORVHMHVGHOUHGXFWRU\GHOPRWRU
‡ &RPSUXHEHHOWHQVDGRGHODFRUUHDFRQXQDSDUDWRGHPHGLFLyQDSURSLDGR
± 0LGDHOWHQVDGRGHODFRUUHD ORQJLWXGGHFRUUHDGLVSRQLEOH 
± 0LGDODIXHU]DYHUWLFDOTXHSURYRFDXQDGHIOH[LyQGH PPSRUFDGD PP
GH OD FRUUHD &RPSDUH ORV YDORUHV PHGLGRV FRQ ORV YDORUHV GHO DSDUWDGR
6XMHFLyQGHODVFRUUHDV
‡ 9XHOYD D DSUHWDU ORV WDSRQHV URVFDGRV GH OD FUHPDOOHUD GHO PRWRU \ GH OD SODFD
SRVWHULRUGHODFXELHUWDGHODVFRUUHDV
‡ 0RQWHODWDSDGHGLFKDFXELHUWDXWLOL]DQGRORVSHUQRVGHELVDJUD$VHJXUHORVSHUQRV
GHELVDJUD

6XMHFLyQGHODV
FRUUHDV
3HUILOGHFRUUHD ∅G>PP@ )XHU]DQHFHVDULDSDUDGHVSOD]DUODFRUUHD
 PPSRUFDGDPPGHWHQVDGR>1@
 
63=
 
 
63$
 
 
63%
 
 
63&
 

68 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 105 de 142
&DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH


 &DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH
/DFDOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWHJDUDQWL]DODOXEULFDFLyQDOLQLFLRHQHOFDVRGHWHPSHUDWXUDV
DPELHQWDOHVPX\EDMDV SRUHMHPSORDUUDQTXHHQIUtRGHOUHGXFWRU 
&RPSDUWDPLHQWR /DFDOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH
GHFRQH[LyQ\ ‡ VHDFWLYDFXDQGRVHDOFDQ]DODWHPSHUDWXUDDMXVWDGDGHIiEULFD
GHVFRQH[LyQ
‡ VHGHVDFWLYDFXDQGRKD\XQDGLIHUHQFLDGHWHPSHUDWXUDGHD ƒ&SRUHQFLPDGH
ODWHPSHUDWXUDSUHGHWHUPLQDGD

$QWHVGHODSXHVWDHQPDUFKDFRPSUXHEHVLHPSUHODFDOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH
‡ FRQH[LyQHOpFWULFDFRUUHFWDVHJ~QODVFRQGLFLRQHVDPELHQWDOHV →DSDUWDGR
&RQH[LyQHOpFWULFD
‡ FDQWLGDG \ WLSR GH DFHLWH FRUUHFWRV SDUD HO UHGXFWRU → SODFD GH
FDUDFWHUtVWLFDV
6L OD FRQH[LyQ QR HV OD FRUUHFWD R ELHQ VL GXUDQWH HO IXQFLRQDPLHQWR OD
FDOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWHVHHQFXHQWUDSRUHQFLPDGHODVXSHUILFLHGHODFHLWHH[LVWH
HOULHVJRGHTXHVHSURGX]FDQH[SORVLRQHV

[3]

[2] [1]
$;;
)LJ &DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWHSDUDUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&
/H\HQGD

>@ &DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH
>@ 6RQGDWpUPLFD
>@ 7HUPRVWDWR

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 69


Sección 4 ~ Página 106 de 142
&DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH


[3]

[2]
[1]

$;;
)LJ 3RVLFLyQGHODVRQGDWpUPLFDHQORVUHGXFWRUHVGHORVWDPDxRV
/H\HQGD

>@ &DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH
>@ 6RQGDWpUPLFD
>@ 7HUPRVWDWR

[3]

[2] [1]

$;;
)LJ 3RVLFLyQGHODVRQGDWpUPLFDHQORVUHGXFWRUHVGHORVWDPDxRV

/H\HQGD

>@ &DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH
>@ 6RQGDWpUPLFD
>@ 7HUPRVWDWR

70 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 107 de 142
&DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH


&RQH[LyQ
HOpFWULFD
N
A B
L1
L1

L3

N L2

L1
N L1 N L2
L3
$;;
)LJ 2SFLRQHVGHFRQH[LRQHVHOpFWULFDVSDUDODFDOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH
$PRQRIiVLFD%WULIiVLFD

'DWRVWpFQLFRV
3RWHQFLDGHODFDOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH 7HQVLyQGHDOLPHQWDFLyQ
7DPDxRGHOUHGXFWRU
>:@ >9&$@
 
aa
 

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 71


Sección 4 ~ Página 108 de 142
6RQGDWpUPLFD37


 6RQGDWpUPLFD37
3DUDPHGLUODWHPSHUDWXUDGHODFHLWHHQHOUHGXFWRUVHSXHGHXWLOL]DUODVRQGDWpUPLFD
37

'LPHQVLRQHV

150 24 PG9, PG11


35

Ø8

34
R1/2

$;;

&RQH[LyQ
HOpFWULFD

3
2 1

$;;

'DWRVWpFQLFRV ‡ 7ROHUDQFLD GH OD VRQGD ±    [ W  FRQIRUPH D ',1 ,(&  FODVH % 
W WHPSHUDWXUDGHODFHLWH
‡ &RQHFWRUHQFKXIDEOH',13* ,3
‡ 3DUGHDSULHWHSDUDHOWRUQLOORGHILMDFLyQGHODSDUWHSRVWHULRUGHOFRQHFWRUHQFKXIDEOH
SDUDODFRQH[LyQHOpFWULFD 1P

72 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 109 de 142
$GDSWDGRU630


 $GDSWDGRU630
3DUD PHGLU OD FDUJD GH LPSDFWR GHO URGDPLHQWR GHO UHGXFWRU VH SXHGHQ XWLOL]DU
DGDSWDGRUHV630/DFDUJDGHLPSDFWRVHPLGHPHGLDQWHVHQVRUHVHVSHFtILFRVTXH
VHHQFXHQWUDQILMDGRVDODGDSWDGRU630

3RVLFLyQGH
PRQWDMH
0&5VLVHXWLOL]DXQDEULGD 0&5ORVDGDSWDGRUHV630>@\>@VH 0&3ORVDGDSWDGRUHV630>@\
GHPRWRURXQYHQWLODGRUVH HQFXHQWUDQHQHOODWHUDOGHOUHGXFWRUPLHQWUDVTXH >@VHHQFXHQWUDQHQHOODWHUDOGHO
GHEHXWLOL]DUXQDGDSWDGRU HODGDSWDGRU630>@HVWiXELFDGRHQHOODGRGH UHGXFWRU
630DPSOLDGR>@ HQWUDGD

[3] [3] [2] [1] [2] [1]

$;;
)LJ 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHORVDGDSWDGRUHV630

[1]

[2]

$;
)LJ 0RQWDMHGHOVHQVRUGHLPSXOVRVGHFKRTXHHQHODGDSWDGRU630

0RQWDMHGHO ‡ 5HWLUHODFDUFDVDSURWHFWRUDGHODGDSWDGRU630>@&RPSUXHEHTXHHODGDSWDGRU
VHQVRUGH 630>@HVWpOLPSLR\ELHQDSUHWDGR
LPSXOVRVGH ‡ )LMHHOVHQVRUGHLPSXOVRVGHFKRTXH>@DODGDSWDGRU630>@
FKRTXH

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 73


Sección 4 ~ Página 110 de 142
9HQWLODGRU


 9HQWLODGRU
6L OD SRWHQFLD WpUPLFD SUHYLVWD SDUD HO UHGXFWRU VH VREUHSDVD VH SXHGH XWLOL]DU XQ
YHQWLODGRU6LODVFRQGLFLRQHVDPELHQWDOHVKDQFDPELDGRGHVSXpVGHSRQHUHQPDUFKD
HOUHGXFWRUWDPELpQHVSRVLEOHDxDGLUXQYHQWLODGRUSRVWHULRUPHQWH(OVHQWLGRGHJLUR
GHOUHGXFWRUQRLQIOX\HHQHOIXQFLRQDPLHQWRGHOYHQWLODGRU

B1 B1

A1
Ød3

A1
30°
Y4

Y1

$;;
)LJ 'LPHQVLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHOYHQWLODGRU

/DHQWUDGDGHDLUH iUHDVRPEUHDGD VLHPSUHGHEHUiHVWDUOLEUHGHREVWiFXORV

7LSRGH $ % < < (QWUDGDGHDLUH


UHGXFWRU >PP@ ∅G>PP@ ÈQJXOR
0&5/     
0&5/     
0&5/     
0&5/     
ƒ
0&5/     
0&5/     
0&5/     
0&5/     

74 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 111 de 142
&RQH[LyQGHOVLVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHDJXDSDUDHODFHLWH


 &RQH[LyQGHOVLVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHDJXDSDUDHODFHLWH

&RQVXOWHODGRFXPHQWDFLyQHVSHFtILFDGHOIDEULFDQWHDFHUFDGHODFRQH[LyQGHOVLVWHPD
GHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHDJXDSDUDHODFHLWH

 &RQH[LyQGHOVLVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHODFHLWHSRUDLUH

&RQVXOWHODGRFXPHQWDFLyQHVSHFtILFDGHOIDEULFDQWHDFHUFDGHODFRQH[LyQGHOVLVWHPD
GHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHODFHLWHSRUDLUH

 &RQH[LyQGHODERPEDGHOPRWRU

&RQVXOWHODGRFXPHQWDFLyQHVSHFtILFDGHOIDEULFDQWHDFHUFDGHODFRQH[LyQGHODERPED
GHOPRWRU

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 75


Sección 4 ~ Página 112 de 142
I 3XHVWDHQPDUFKDGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&

0

 3XHVWDHQPDUFKD
 3XHVWDHQPDUFKDGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0&
‡ (V LPSUHVFLQGLEOH VHJXLU ODV QRWDV GH VHJXULGDG GHO FDStWXOR 1RWDV GH
VHJXULGDG
‡ 1RUHDOLFHQLQJXQDWDUHDHQHOUHGXFWRUTXHSXHGDSURYRFDUOODPDVRFKLVSDV
‡ $SOLTXHWRGDVODVPHGLGDVGHVHJXULGDGQHFHVDULDVSDUDSURWHJHUDOSHUVRQDO
GHORVYDSRUHVGHORVGLVROYHQWHVTXHGHVSUHQGHQORVLQKLELGRUHVGHODIDVH
GHYDSRU
‡ $QWHVGHODSXHVWDHQPDUFKDFRPSUXHEHTXHHOQLYHOGHDFHLWHVHDFRUUHFWR
/DV FDQWLGDGHV GH OOHQDGR GHO OXEULFDQWH VH HVSHFLILFDQ HQ HO FDStWXOR
/XEULFDQWHV
‡ (Q ORV UHGXFWRUHV FRQ SURWHFFLyQ SDUD DOPDFHQDPLHQWR SURORQJDGR
UHHPSODFHHOWDSyQURVFDGRHQHOSXQWRPDUFDGRGHOUHGXFWRUSRUXQWDSyQGH
VDOLGDGHJDVHV SRVLFLyQ→FDStWXOR3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH 

$QWHVGHOD ‡ (Q UHGXFWRUHV FRQ SURWHFFLyQ SDUD DOPDFHQDPLHQWR SURORQJDGR ([WUDLJD HO


SXHVWDHQPDUFKD UHGXFWRUGHODFDMDPDUtWLPD
‡ 5HWLUHHOSURGXFWRDQWLFRUURVLYRGHODVGLVWLQWDVSDUWHVGHOUHGXFWRU0LHQWUDVORKDFH
DVHJ~UHVH GH TXH ODV MXQWDV \ ORV ODELRV GH ORV UHWHQHV QR VH GDxHQ SRU IULFFLyQ
PHFiQLFDHWF
‡ $QWHVGHOOHQDUORFRQODFDQWLGDG\HOWLSRGHDFHLWHDGHFXDGRVH[WUDLJDORVUHVWRV
GHODFHLWHSURWHFWRUGHOUHGXFWRU3DUDKDFHUORVDTXHHOWDSyQGHGUHQDMHGHDFHLWH
\YDFtHORVUHVWRVGHDFHLWHSURWHFWRU$FRQWLQXDFLyQYXHOYDDSRQHUHOWDSyQGH
GUHQDMHGHDFHLWH
‡ 5HWLUHHOWDSyQGHOOHQDGRGHDFHLWH SRVLFLyQ→FDStWXOR3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH 
3DUD OOHQDUOR GH DFHLWH XWLOLFH XQ ILOWUR HVSHFLDO GH OOHQDGR GLiPHWUR Pi[LPR GHO
ILOWUR  μP  /OHQH GH DFHLWH HO UHGXFWRU XWLOL]DQGR OD FDQWLGDG \ HO WLSR FRUUHFWRV
→ FDStWXOR3ODFD GHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV /D FDQWLGDGGHDFHLWHTXH VH LQGLFDHQOD
SODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDVHVXQYDORURULHQWDWLYR1RREVWDQWHODYDULOODGHOQLYHOGH
MAX DFHLWHVtTXHUHVXOWDIXQGDPHQWDOSDUDREWHQHUODFDQWLGDGFRUUHFWDGHDFHLWH
MIN
&RPSUXHEHTXHHOQLYHOGHDFHLWHHVFRUUHFWR SRUGHEDMRGHODPDUFDPi[GHOD
YDULOODGHOQLYHOGHDFHLWH FRQGLFKDYDULOOD'HVSXpVGHOOHQDUORYXHOYDDFRORFDUHQ
VXVLWLRHOWDSyQGHOOHQDGRGHDFHLWH
‡ (Q ORV UHGXFWRUHV FRQ PLULOOD RSFLRQDO  FRPSUXHEH TXH HO QLYHO GH DFHLWH HV
FRUUHFWR HODFHLWHVHSXHGHYHUDWUDYpVGHODPLULOOD FRQXQFRQWUROYLVXDO
‡ (QUHGXFWRUHVFRQGHSyVLWRGHH[SDQVLyQGHDFHLWH$QWHVGHOOHQDUORGHDFHLWH
DEUDHOWDSyQGHVDOLGDGHODLUHVLWXDGRGHEDMRGHOGHSyVLWRGHFRPSHQVDFLyQSDUD
HODFHLWH
‡ $VHJ~UHVHGHTXHORVHMHV\ORVDFRSODPLHQWRVJLUDWRULRVGLVSRQHQGHODVFXELHUWDV
SURWHFWRUDVDGHFXDGDV
‡ (QXQUHGXFWRUFRQERPEDGHPRWRUFRPSUXHEHHOIXQFLRQDPLHQWRGHOVLVWHPDGH
OXEULFDFLyQDSUHVLyQ$VHJ~UHVHGHTXHODFRQH[LyQGHORVGLVSRVLWLYRVGHYLJLODQFLD
VHDFRUUHFWD
‡ 'HVSXpVGHXQSHUtRGRGHDOPDFHQDPLHQWRSURORQJDGR Pi[DSUR[DxRV GHMH
HO UHGXFWRU HQ PDUFKD VLQ QLQJXQD FDUJD \ FRQ HO OOHQDGR GH DFHLWH FRUUHFWR
→ FDStWXOR 3ODFD GH FDUDFWHUtVWLFDV  $Vt VH JDUDQWL]D TXH HO VLVWHPD GH
OXEULFDFLyQ\VREUHWRGRODERPEDGHDFHLWHIXQFLRQDQSHUIHFWDPHQWH
‡ (Q XQ UHGXFWRU FRQ YHQWLODGRU LQFRUSRUDGR HQ HO HMH GH HQWUDGD FRPSUXHEH OD
HQWUDGDOLEUHGHDLUHGHQWURGHOiQJXORLQGLFDGR →FDStWXOR9HQWLODGRU 

76 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 113 de 142
3XHVWDHQPDUFKDGHORVUHGXFWRUHV0&FRQDQWLUUHWRUQR I

0

3HUtRGRGHURGDMH 6(:(852'5,9(UHFRPLHQGDGHMDUIXQFLRQDQGRHOUHGXFWRUHQODSULPHUDIDVHGHOD
SXHVWDHQPDUFKD$XPHQWHODFDUJD\ODYHORFLGDGGHOFLFORHQDWUHQHVKDVWDHO
Pi[LPR(VWDRSHUDFLyQGHURGDMHGXUDKRUDVDSUR[
7HQJDHQFXHQWDORVSXQWRVVLJXLHQWHVGXUDQWHODIDVHGHURGDMH
‡ 0LHQWUDV HVWp HQ PDUFKD FRPSUXHEH ODV SRWHQFLDV HVSHFLILFDGDV HQ OD SODFD GH
FDUDFWHUtVWLFDV \D TXH VX IUHFXHQFLD \ PDJQLWXG UHVXOWDQ IXQGDPHQWDOHV SDUD
JDUDQWL]DUXQFLFORGHYLGDSURORQJDGRSDUDHOUHGXFWRU
‡ ¢(OUHGXFWRUIXQFLRQDGHPDQHUDXQLIRUPH"
‡ ¢6HSURGXFHYLEUDFLRQHVRUXLGRVVRVSHFKRVRVGXUDQWHHOIXQFLRQDPLHQWR"
‡ ¢6HDSUHFLDQIXJDV OXEULFDFLyQ HQHOUHGXFWRU"

(QFRQWUDUi PiV LQIRUPDFLyQ \ FRQVHMRV SDUD VROXFLRQDU SUREOHPDV HQ HO FDStWXOR
)DOORV

 3XHVWDHQPDUFKDGHORVUHGXFWRUHV0&FRQDQWLUUHWRUQR

(QORVUHGXFWRUHVFRQDQWLUUHWRUQRHVPX\LPSRUWDQWHTXHVHFHUFLRUHGHTXHHO
PRWRUJLUDHQHOVHQWLGRDGHFXDGR

 3XHVWDIXHUDGHVHUYLFLRGHORVUHGXFWRUHV0&

'HVFRQHFWHHODFFLRQDPLHQWR\SURWpMDORIUHQWHDXQSRVLEOHDUUDQTXHDFFLGHQWDO

6LHOUHGXFWRUQRVHYDDDFWLYDUGXUDQWHXQSHUtRGRSURORQJDGRSyQJDORHQPDUFKD
UHJXODUPHQWHFDGDVHPDQDV
6LHOUHGXFWRUQRVHYDDXWLOL]DUFRPRPtQLPRHQPHVHVVHUHTXLHUHQPHGLGDVGH
FRQVHUYDFLyQDGLFLRQDOHV
‡ &RQVHUYDFLyQ LQWHULRU GH ORV UHGXFWRUHV FRQ OXEULFDFLyQ SRU EDUERWHR R
OXEULFDFLyQSRUEDxRGHDFHLWH
/OHQH HO UHGXFWRU KDVWD HO WDSyQ GH VDOLGD GH JDVHV FRQ HO WLSR GH DFHLWH TXH VH
HVSHFLILFDHQODSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV
‡ &RQVHUYDFLyQLQWHULRUGHORVUHGXFWRUHVFRQOXEULFDFLyQDSUHVLyQGHDFHLWH
(QHVWHFDVRSyQJDVHHQFRQWDFWRFRQ6(:(852'5,9(
‡ &RQVHUYDFLyQH[WHULRU
$SOLTXHXQUHFXEULPLHQWRSURWHFWRUHQORVH[WUHPRVGHOHMH\HQODVVXSHUILFLHVVLQ
ODFDU FRQ XQD EDVH GH FHUD (QJUDVH ORV ERUGHV GH FLHUUH GH ORV UHWHQHV SDUD
SURWHJHUORVGHORVDQWLR[LGDQWHV

$QWHVGHYROYHUORDSRQHUHQPDUFKDUHVSHWHODVLQGLFDFLRQHVGHOFDStWXOR3XHVWDHQ
PDUFKD

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 77


Sección 4 ~ Página 114 de 142
3HUtRGRVGHLQVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR


 ,QVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR
 3HUtRGRVGHLQVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR

,QWHUYDORGHWLHPSR ¢4XpKDFHU"
‡ 'LDULDPHQWH ‡ &RPSUXHEHODWHPSHUDWXUDGHODFDUFDVD
± FRQDFHLWHPLQHUDOPi[ ƒ&
± FRQDFHLWHVLQWpWLFRPi[ ƒ&
‡ &RQWUROHORVUXLGRVGHOUHGXFWRU
‡ 5HYLVHVLHOUHGXFWRUSUHVHQWDIXJDV
‡ 'HVSXpVGHKRUDVGH ‡ 3ULPHUFDPELRGHDFHLWHWUDVODSULPHUDSXHVWDHQPDUFKD
VHUYLFLRGHODPiTXLQD
‡ 'HVSXpVGHKRUDVGHVHUYLFLR ‡ &RPSUXHEHHOQLYHOGHDFHLWHGDGRHOFDVROOpQHORGH
GHODPiTXLQD DFHLWH →SODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV
‡ &DGDKRUDVGHVHUYLFLRGH ‡ &RPSUXHEHHODFHLWHVLHOUHGXFWRUVHXWLOL]DDODLUHOLEUHR
ODPiTXLQDFRPRPtQLPRFDGD HQXQHQWRUQRK~PHGRYHULILTXHHOGHSyVLWRGHDJXDGHO
PHVHV DFHLWH1RSXGHVXSHUDUHO SSP 
‡ (QJUDVHODVMXQWDVGHOODEHULQWRGHOXEULFDFLyQ(QFDGD
OXEULFDGRUDSOLTXHDSUR[JJUDVDSDUDODVMXQWDV
‡ /LPSLHHOWDSyQGHVDOLGDGHJDVHV
‡ (QIXQFLyQGHODVFRQGLFLRQHVGH ‡ &DPELHHODFHLWHPLQHUDO →FDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ\
VHUYLFLRFDGDPHVHVPi[LPR PDQWHQLPLHQWRGHOUHGXFWRU
‡ &RPSUXHEHTXHORVWRUQLOORVGHILMDFLyQHVWiQELHQ
FRORFDGRV
‡ &RQWUROHVLKD\VXFLHGDG\HOQLYHOGHOVLVWHPDGH
UHIULJHUDFLyQGHODFHLWHSRUDLUH
‡ &RPSUXHEHHOHVWDGRGHOVLVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHDJXD
SDUDHODFHLWH
‡ /LPSLHHOILOWURGHDFHLWHGDGRHOFDVRVXVWLWX\DHOILOWUR
‡ (QIXQFLyQGHODVFRQGLFLRQHVGH ‡ &DPELHHODFHLWHVLQWpWLFR →FDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ
VHUYLFLRFDGDDxRVPi[LPR PDQWHQLPLHQWRGHOUHGXFWRU
‡ 'HSHQGH HQIXQFLyQGHODV ‡ 5HWRTXHRDSOLTXHQXHYDPHQWHODFDSDDQWLFRUURVLYDGHOD
LQIOXHQFLDVH[WHUQDV VXSHUILFLH
‡ /LPSLHODFDUFDVDH[WHULRUGHOUHGXFWRU\HOYHQWLODGRU
‡ &RPSUXHEHODFDOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH
‡ ¢7RGRVORVFDEOHV\ODVERUQDVGHFRQH[LyQHVWiQ
FRQHFWDGRVILUPHPHQWH\QRHVWiQR[LGDGRV"
‡ /LPSLHORVHOHPHQWRVFRQLQFUXVWDFLRQHV SRUHMHPSOR
HOHOHPHQWRFDOHIDFWRU \GDGRHOFDVRVXVWLW~\DORV
→ FDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQPDQWHQLPLHQWRGHOUHGXFWRU

78 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 115 de 142
3HUtRGRVGHVXVWLWXFLyQGHOXEULFDQWHV


 3HUtRGRVGHVXVWLWXFLyQGHOXEULFDQWHV
(QORVGLVHxRVHVSHFLDOHVTXHHVWiQVRPHWLGRVDXQDVFRQGLFLRQHVDPELHQWDOHVPX\
GXUDVDJUHVLYDVHODFHLWHVHGHEHUiFDPELDUPiVDPHQXGR

(QODOXEULFDFLyQVHXWLOL]DQOXEULFDQWHVPLQHUDOHV&/3\OXEULFDQWHVVLQWpWLFRVFRQXQD
EDVH GH DFHLWHV 3$2 SROLDOIDROHILQD  (O OXEULFDQWH VLQWpWLFR &/3 +& FRQIRUPH D
',1  TXHVHUHSUHVHQWDHQHOGLDJUDPDVLJXLHQWHFRUUHVSRQGHDORVDFHLWHV3$2

$;;
)LJ ,QWHUYDORVGHFDPELRSDUDOXEULFDQWHVHQUHGXFWRUHV0&EDMRFRQGLFLRQHVDPELHQWDOHV
QRUPDOHV

 +RUDVGHVHUYLFLR
 (YROXFLyQGHWHPSHUDWXUDGHOEDxRGHDFHLWH
• 9DORUPHGLRVHJ~QHOWLSRGHDFHLWHD ƒ&

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 79


Sección 4 ~ Página 116 de 142
,QVSHFFLyQPDQWHQLPLHQWRGHOUHGXFWRU


 ,QVSHFFLyQPDQWHQLPLHQWRGHOUHGXFWRU
‡ 1R PH]FOH GLVWLQWRV OXEULFDQWHV VLQWpWLFRV QL WDPSRFR ORV FRPELQH FRQ
OXEULFDQWHVPLQHUDOHV
‡ /DSRVLFLyQGHOWDSyQGHQLYHOGHDFHLWHGHOWDSyQGHGUHQDMHGHODFHLWH\GHO
WDSyQGHVDOLGDGHJDVHVGHSHQGHGHODSRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMH3DUDREWHQHUPiV
LQIRUPDFLyQFRQVXOWHODVLOXVWUDFLRQHVGHOFDStWXOR3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH

&RPSUREDFLyQ  'HVFRQHFWHHOPRWRU\DVHJ~UHVHGHTXHQRSXHGDDUUDQFDUDFFLGHQWDOPHQWH
GHOQLYHOGHDFHLWH (VSHUHDTXHHOUHGXFWRUVHKD\DHQIULDGR±SHOLJURGHHQFHQGLR
 (QUHGXFWRUHVFRQYDULOODGHQLYHOGHDFHLWH
‡ 'HVHQURVTXHODYDULOODGHQLYHOGHDFHLWH\H[WUiLJDOD/LPSLHODYDULOOD\YXHOYDD
FRORFDUODHQHOUHGXFWRU SHURQRODDWRUQLOOH 
‡ 9XHOYD D H[WUDHU OD YDULLOD FRPSUXHEH HO QLYHO GH OOHQDGR \ GDGR HO FDVR
UHFWLItTXHOR HO QLYHO GH DFHLWH FRUUHFWR VH HQFXHQWUD HQWUH OD PDUFD QLYHO
Pi[LPRGHDFHLWH \HOH[WUHPRGHODYDULOOD QLYHOPtQLPRGHDFHLWH 
 (QUHGXFWRUHVFRQPLULOOD RSFLRQDO UHDOLFHXQFRQWUROYLVXDOSDUDFRPSUREDUHOQLYHO
MAX FRUUHFWRGHDFHLWH FHQWURGHODPLULOOD 
MIN

&RPSUREDFLyQ  'HVFRQHFWHHOPRWRU\DVHJ~UHVHGHTXHQRSXHGDDUUDQFDUDFFLGHQWDOPHQWH
GHODFHLWH (VSHUHDTXHHOUHGXFWRUVHKD\DHQIULDGR±SHOLJURGHHQFHQGLR
 6DTXHXQSRFRGHDFHLWHSRUHOWDSyQGHGUHQDMH
 &RPSUXHEHODFRQVLVWHQFLDGHODFHLWH
± 9LVFRVLGDG
± 6LHODFHLWHPXHVWUDXQJUDGRHOHYDGRGHVXFLHGDGVHUHFRPLHQGDFDPELDUHO
DFHLWHVLQWHQHUHQFXHQWDORVSHUtRGRVGHPDQWHQLPLHQWRGHVFULWRVHQHOFDStWXOR
3HUtRGRVGHLQVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR

&DPELRGHDFHLWH &XDQGRFDPELHHODFHLWHOLPSLHODFDUFDVDGHOUHGXFWRUGHFXDOTXLHUUHVWRGHDFHLWHR
PDWHULDO GHVJDVWDGR 3DUD KDFHUOR XWLOLFH HO PLVPR WLSR GH DFHLWH TXH HO UHGXFWRU
HPSOHDGXUDQWHHOVHUYLFLR
 'HVFRQHFWHHOPRWRU\DVHJ~UHVHGHTXHQRSXHGDDUUDQFDUDFFLGHQWDOPHQWH
(VSHUH D TXH HO UHGXFWRU VH KD\D HQIULDGR ± SHOLJUR GH HQFHQGLR (Q ORV
UHGXFWRUHVFRQGHSyVLWRVGHFRPSHQVDFLyQSULPHURGHMHTXHHOUHGXFWRUVH
HQIUtHKDVWDDOFDQ]DUODWHPSHUDWXUDDPELHQWH\DTXHHVSRVLEOHTXHD~QKD\D
DFHLWHHQHOGHSyVLWR\VDOGUtDSRUHORULILFLRGHOOHQDGRGHDFHLWH
1RWDHOUHGXFWRUGHEHVHJXLUFDOLHQWHGHORFRQWUDULRODIDOWDGHIOXLGH]GHELGD
DXQDFHLWHH[FHVLYDPHQWHIUtRSXHGHGLILFXOWDUHOYDFLDGR
 &RORTXHXQUHFLSLHQWHGHEDMRGHOWDSyQGHGUHQDMHGHDFHLWH
 5HWLUHHOWDSyQGHOOHQDGRGHDFHLWHHOWDSyQGHVDOLGDGHJDVHV\ORVWDSRQHVGH
GUHQDMH(QORVUHGXFWRUHVFRQGHSyVLWRVWDPELpQGHEHUiUHWLUDUHOWDSyQGHVDOLGD
GHO DLUH XELFDGR HQ HO GHSyVLWR 3DUD YDFLDUOR GHO WRGR OOHQH HO GHSyVLWR GH
FRPSHQVDFLyQ FRQ DLUH D WUDYpV GHO WXER GH YHQWLODFLyQ (VWR SURYRFD TXH OD
PHPEUDQD GH FDXFKR GHVFLHQGD \ VH HOLPLQHQ WRGRV ORV UHVWRV GH DFHLWH (VWH
GHVFHQVRSURGXFHXQDFRPSHQVDFLyQGHSUHVLyQORTXHIDFLOLWDHOOOHQDGRSRVWHULRU
GHDFHLWH
 9DFtHSRUFRPSOHWRFXDOTXLHUUHVWRGHDFHLWH
 0RQWHORVWDSRQHVGHGUHQDMHGHDFHLWH

80 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 117 de 142
,QVSHFFLyQPDQWHQLPLHQWRGHOUHGXFWRU


 3DUDOOHQDUORGHDFHLWHXWLOLFHXQILOWURHVSHFLDOGHOOHQDGR GLDPHWURPi[GHOILOWUR
μP ,QWURGX]FDSRUHOWDSyQGHOOHQDGRDFHLWHQXHYRGHOPLVPRWLSR RFRQVXOWH
DOVHUYLFLRGHDWHQFLyQDOFOLHQWH 
± /OpQHORFRQODFDQWLGDGLQGLFDGDHQODSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV →FDStWXOR3ODFD
GH FDUDFWHUtVWLFDV  /D FDQWLGDG GH DFHLWH TXH DSDUHFH HQ OD SODFD GH
MAX FDUDFWHUtVWLFDVHVXQYDORURULHQWDWLYR/DPDUFDGHODYDULOODGHOQLYHOGHDFHLWH
MIN
VtTXHUHVXOWDIXQGDPHQWDO
± &RPSUXHEHHOQLYHOFRUUHFWRGHDFHLWHFRQODYDULOOD
 0RQWH HO WDSyQ GH OOHQDGR GH DFHLWH (Q ORV UHGXFWRUHV FRQ GHSyVLWRV WDPELpQ
GHEHUiPRQWDUHOWDSyQGHVDOLGDGHODLUH
 &RORTXHHQVXVLWLRHOWDSyQGHVDOLGDGHJDVHV
 /LPSLHHOILOWURGHDFHLWH\GDGRHOFDVRVXVWLWX\DHOILOWUR VLVHXWLOL]DXQVLVWHPDGH
UHIULJHUDFLyQH[WHUQRGHDLUHRGHDJXDSDUDHODFHLWH 

$OUHWLUDUODWDSDGHOUHGXFWRUVHGHEHUiDSOLFDURWURSURGXFWRVHOODQWHHQODVXSHUILFLH
GH HVWDQTXHLGDG 'H OR FRQWUDULR QR TXHGDUi JDUDQWL]DGD OD HVWDQTXHLGDG GHO
UHGXFWRU(QWDOFDVRSyQJDVHHQFRQWDFWRFRQ6(:(852'5,9(

/LPSLH]DGHOD 6LVHIRUPDQLQFUXVWDFLRQHVGHDFHLWHHQODFDOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWHGHEHUiGHVPRQWDUOD
FDOHIDFFLyQGHO \OLPSLDUOD
DFHLWH

$VHJ~UHVH GH TXH OD UHVLVWHQFLD GH FDOHIDFFLyQ HVWi GHVFRQHFWDGD DQWHV GH
VDFDU WRGR HO DFHLWH 8QD UHVLVWHQFLD FDOLHQWH SXHGH SURYRFDU TXH HO DFHLWH HQ
HYDSRUDFLyQH[SORWH

'HVPRQWDMHGHOD
FDOHIDFFLyQGHO
DFHLWH

[3]

[2] [1]
$;;
)LJ &DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWHSDUDUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&

>@ &DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH
>@ 6RQGDWpUPLFD
>@ 7HUPRVWDWR
‡ 'HVPRQWHODFDOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH  \ODMXQWDGHOUHGXFWRU
‡ 'HVPRQWHHO]yFDORGHODFDMDGHERUQDV
‡ /LPSLHORVHOHPHQWRVFDOHIDFWRUHVHQIRUPDGHWXERFRQGLVROYHQWH

3UHVWH PXFKD DWHQFLyQ SDUD QR GDxDU ORV HOHPHQWRV FDOHIDFWRUHV \D VHD FRQ
UD\DGXUDVRDUDxD]RV

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 81


Sección 4 ~ Página 118 de 142
,QVSHFFLyQPDQWHQLPLHQWRGHOUHGXFWRU


0RQWDMHGHOD ‡ 0RQWH OD FDOHIDFFLyQ GHO DFHLWH   \ OD MXQWD HQ HO UHGXFWRU /RV HOHPHQWRV
FDOHIDFFLyQGHO FDOHIDFWRUHVHQIRUPDGHWXERVLHPSUHGHEHUiQHVWDUHQYXHOWRVSRUOtTXLGR
DFHLWH ‡ ,QVWDOH HO ]yFDOR GH OD FDMD GH ERUQDV PHGLDQWH XQ DQLOOR GH VXMHFLyQ HQ OD EDUUD
FDOHIDFWRUD
‡ $VHJ~UHVHGHTXHODMXQWDTXHGHFRORFDGDFRUUHFWDPHQWHHQWUHODFDMDGHERUQDV\
HOH[WUHPRVXSHULRUGHOHOHPHQWRFDOHIDFWRU
‡ ,QWURGX]FDODVRQGDWpUPLFD  HQHOFiUWHUGHDFHLWH&RPSUXHEHODWHPSHUDWXUDGH
FRQH[LyQGHVHDGDHQHOWHUPRVWDWR  

$SOLFDFLyQGH /D WDSD SURWHFWRUD FRQWUD SROYR R ODV MXQWDV GH ODEHULQWR 7DFRQLWH  RSFLRQDOHV VH
JUDVDSDUDMXQWDV SXHGHQ HQJUDVDU SRVWHULRUPHQWH HQ HO HMH GH HQWUDGD \ VDOLGD 3DUD OXEULFDUODV VH
SXHGHQ XWLOL]DU JUDVDV GH OD FRQVLVWHQFLD 1/*, → FDStWXOR /XEULFDQWHV VHFFLyQ
*UDVDSDUDMXQWDV 
/DSRVLFLyQGHORVSXQWRVGHOXEULFDFLyQSRVWHULRUVHHQFXHQWUDHQODVKRMDVGHFRWDV
GH SHGLGR $SOLTXH  J DSUR[ GH JUDVD OXEULFDQWH HQ FDGD OXEULFDGRU SRVWHULRU
LQGHSHQGLHQWHPHQWH GH OD SRVLFLyQ GH ORV SXQWRV GH OXEULFDFLyQ \ GHO WDPDxR GHO
UHGXFWRU

7HQJDSUHVHQWHTXHHQORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&9FRQHOGLVHxR'U\:HOOVH
GHEHUiOXEULFDUSHUtyGLFDPHQWHHOURGDPLHQWRLQIHULRUVLWXDGRHQHOODGRGHVDOLGD/D
FDQWLGDG\ORVLQWHUYDORVGHOXEULFDFLyQSRVWHULRUVHHQFXHQWUDQHQODGRFXPHQWDFLyQ
HVSHFtILFDGHOSHGLGR

82 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 119 de 142
)DOORVHQHOUHGXFWRU


 )DOORV
 )DOORVHQHOUHGXFWRU
)DOOR &DXVDSRVLEOH 6ROXFLyQ
5XLGRLQXVXDO\FRQVWDQWH $ 5XLGRGHURFHVRFKLUULGRV $ &RPSUXHEHHODFHLWH →FDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ\
GXUDQWHHOVHUYLFLR 5RGDPLHQWRGDxDGR PDQWHQLPLHQWR VXVWLWX\DORVURGDPLHQWRV
% 5XLGRGHJROSHWHR,UUHJXODULGDG % &RQWDFWHFRQHOVHUYLFLRWpFQLFR
HQORVHQJUDQDMHV
5XLGRVGHIXQFLRQDPLHQWR &XHUSRVH[WUDxRVHQHODFHLWH ‡ &RPSUXHEHHODFHLWH YpDVHHOFDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ\
LQXVXDOHV\GLVFRQWLQXRV PDQWHQLPLHQWR
‡ 3DUHHODFFLRQDPLHQWROODPHDOVHUYLFLRWpFQLFR
5XLGRVLQXVXDOHVHQHOiUHD /DVXMHFLyQGHOUHGXFWRUVHKD ‡ $SULHWHORVWRUQLOORVWXHUFDVGHVXMHFLyQFRQHOSDU
GHVXMHFLyQGHOUHGXFWRU DIORMDGR HVSHFLILFDGR
‡ 6XVWLWX\DODVWXHUFDVWRUQLOORVGHVXMHFLyQGDxDGRV
GHIHFWXRVRV
7HPSHUDWXUDGHVHUYLFLR $ ([FHVRGHDFHLWH $ &RPSUXHEHHOQLYHOGHDFHLWH\GDGRHOFDVRUHFWLItTXHOR
GHPDVLDGRDOWD % $FHLWHPX\DQWLJXR →FDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR
& $FHLWHPX\VXFLR % &RPSUXHEHOD~OWLPDYH]TXHVHFDPELyHODFHLWH\
' (QUHGXFWRUHVFRQYHQWLODGRU GDGRHOFDVRFDPELHHODFHLWH →FDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ
2ULILFLRGHHQWUDGDGHDLUH \PDQWHQLPLHQWR
FDUFDVDGHOUHGXFWRUFRQPXFKD & &DPELHHODFHLWH →FDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR
VXFLHGDG ' &RPSUXHEHHORULILFLRGHHQWUDGDGHDLUH\GDGRHOFDVR
( %RPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH OtPSLHOROLPSLHODFDUFDVDGHOUHGXFWRU
DYHULDGD ( &RPSUXHEHODERPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH\HQFDVR
) )DOORVHQHOVLVWHPDGH QHFHVDULRVXVWLW~\DOD
UHIULJHUDFLyQGHDJXDRSRUDLUH ) &RQVXOWHODVLQVWUXFFLRQHVGHIXQFLRQDPLHQWRHVSHFtILFDV
GHOVLVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHDJXDRSRUDLUH
7HPSHUDWXUDGHPDVLDGR $ $FHLWHLQVXILFLHQWH $ &RPSUXHEHHOQLYHOGHDFHLWH\GDGRHOFDVRUHFWLItTXHOR
DOWDHQORVSXQWRVGH % $FHLWHPX\DQWLJXR YpDVHHOFDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR
URGDPLHQWR & %RPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH % &RPSUXHEHOD~OWLPDYH]TXHVHFDPELyHODFHLWH\
GHIHFWXRVD GDGRHOFDVRFDPELHHODFHLWH →FDStWXOR,QVSHFFLyQ
' 5RGDPLHQWRGDxDGR \PDQWHQLPLHQWR
& &RPSUXHEHODERPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH\HQFDVR
QHFHVDULRVXVWLW~\DOD
' &RPSUXHEHHOURGDPLHQWR\HQFDVRQHFHVDULRSyQJDVH
HQFRQWDFWRFRQHOVHUYLFLRWpFQLFR
)XJDVGHDFHLWH $ -XQWDQRHVWDQFDHQODWDSDGH $ $SULHWHODWDSDFRUUHVSRQGLHQWH\REVHUYHHOUHGXFWRU
‡ SRUODWDSDGHPRQWDMH PRQWDMH 0&3 UHGXFWRU 6LFRQWLQ~DQODVIXJDVGHDFHLWH&RQWDFWHFRQHOVHUYLFLR
‡ SRUODWDSDGHOUHGXFWRU URGDPLHQWREULGDGHPRQWDMH WpFQLFR
‡ SRUODWDSDGHO % /DELRGHOUHWpQLQYHUWLGR % 9HQWLOHHOUHGXFWRU →FDStWXOR3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH 
URGDPLHQWR & 5HWpQGDxDGRGHVJDVWDGR 2EVHUYHHOUHGXFWRU6LFRQWLQ~DQODVIXJDVGHDFHLWH
‡ SRUODEULGDGHPRQWDMH FRQWDFWHFRQHOVHUYLFLRWpFQLFR
‡ SRUHOUHWpQGHOHMHGH & &RQWDFWHFRQHOVHUYLFLRWpFQLFR
HQWUDGDRVDOLGD
)XJDGHDFHLWH $ ([FHVRGHDFHLWH $ 5HFWLILTXHODFDQWLGDGGHDFHLWH YpDVHHOFDStWXOR
‡ SRUHOWDSyQGHGUHQDMH % $FFLRQDPLHQWRHQSRVLFLyQGH ,QVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWR
GHDFHLWH PRQWDMHLQFRUUHFWD % &RORTXHHOWDSyQGHVDOLGDGHJDVHVFRUUHFWDPHQWH
‡ SRUHOWDSyQGHVDOLGD & $UUDQTXHVHQIUtRIUHFXHQWHV YpDVHHOFDStWXOR3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH \UHFWLILTXH
GHJDVHV HVSXPDHQHODFHLWH \RQLYHOGH HOQLYHOGHDFHLWH YpDVHODSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV
DFHLWHHOHYDGR FDStWXOR/XEULFDQWHV
)DOORGHOVLVWHPDGH &RQVXOWHODVLQVWUXFFLRQHVGHIXQFLRQDPLHQWRHVSHFtILFDV
UHIULJHUDFLyQGHDJXDRDLUH GHOVLVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHDJXDRDLUHSDUDHODFHLWH
SDUDHODFHLWH
7HPSHUDWXDGHVHUYLFLR $QWLUUHWRUQRGDxDGRGHIHFWXRVR ‡ &RPSUXHEHHODQWLUUHWRUQR\HQFDVRQHFHVDULRVXVWLW~\DOR
HOHYDGDHQHODQWLUUHWRUQR ‡ &RQWDFWHFRQHOVHUYLFLRWpFQLFR
 'XUDQWHODIDVHGHURGDMHLQLFLDO KRUDVGHURGDMH HVQRUPDOTXHVHHVFDSHQSHTXHxDVFDQWLGDGHVGHDFHLWHRJUDVDSRUHOUHWpQ
YpDVHWDPELpQ',1 

6HUYLFLRDOFOLHQWH
&XDQGRUHTXLHUDODDVLVWHQFLDGHQXHVWURVHUYLFLRGHDWHQFLyQDO&OLHQWHGHEHUi
SURSRUFLRQDUOHORVVLJXLHQWHVGDWRV
‡ 'DWRVFRPSOHWRVGHODSODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV
‡ 7LSR\JUDYHGDGGHOIDOOR
‡ 0RPHQWR\FLUFXQVWDQFLDVGHOIDOOR
‡ &DXVDSRVLEOH

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 83


Sección 4 ~ Página 120 de 142
6tPERORVXWLOL]DGRV


 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH
 6tPERORVXWLOL]DGRV
/D WDEOD VLJXLHQWH PXHVWUD ORV VtPERORV XWLOL]DGRV HQ ODV ILJXUDV TXH VLJXHQ \ VX
VLJQLILFDGR
6tPEROR 6LJQLILFDGR

7DSyQGHVDOLGDGH
JDVHV

7DSyQGHVDOLGDGHO
DLUH

$SHUWXUDGHLQVSHFFLyQ

7DSyQGHOOHQDGRGH
DFHLWH

7DSyQGHGUHQDMHGH
DFHLWH

9DULOODGHOQLYHOGH
DFHLWH

0LULOOD

84 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 121 de 142
3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&3


 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&3
3RVLFLyQGH
PRQWDMH
KRUL]RQWDO
0&3/

$;;

(Q OD SRVLFLyQ GH PRQWDMH KRUL]RQWDO HO WDSyQ GH GUHQDMH GH DFHLWH VLHPSUH VH
HQFXHQWUDHQHOODGRRSXHVWRDOHMHGHVDOLGD

3RVLFLyQGH
PRQWDMHYHUWLFDO
0&39

$;;

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 85


Sección 4 ~ Página 122 de 142
3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&3


3RVLFLyQGH
PRQWDMHUHFWD
0&3(

$;;

(QODSRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMHUHFWDHOWDSyQGHGUHQDMHGHDFHLWHVLHPSUHVHHQFXHQWUDHQ
HOODGRRSXHVWRDOHMHGHVDOLGD

86 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 123 de 142
3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&5


 3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&5
3RVLFLyQGH
PRQWDMH
KRUL]RQWDO
0&5/

$;;

(Q OD SRVLFLyQ GH PRQWDMH KRUL]RQWDO HO WDSyQ GH GUHQDMH GH DFHLWH VLHPSUH VH
HQFXHQWUDHQHOODGRRSXHVWRDOHMHGHVDOLGD

3RVLFLyQGH
PRQWDMHYHUWLFDO
0&59

$;;

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 87


Sección 4 ~ Página 124 de 142
3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMHGHORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&5


3RVLFLyQGH
PRQWDMHUHFWD
0&5(

$;;

(QODSRVLFLyQGHPRQWDMHUHFWDHOWDSyQGHGUHQDMHGHDFHLWHVLHPSUHVHHQFXHQWUDHQ
HOODGRRSXHVWRDOHMHGHVDOLGD

88 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 125 de 142
5HODFLyQGHORVOXEULFDQWHVSDUDORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0& kVA n
f 
i
P Hz

 /XEULFDQWHV
 5HODFLyQGHORVOXEULFDQWHVSDUDORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&
/XEULFDQWHV
PLQHUDOHV
&ODVH 1~PHUR 3URYHHGRU 7LSRGHOXEULFDQWH 9LVFRVLGDG 3XQWRGHGHV
,629* $*0$ F6W ƒ& FRQJHODFLyQ
ƒ&
$UDO 'HJRO%*  ±
%3 (QHUJRO*5;3  ±
&DVWURO $OSKD63  ±
&DVWURO $OSKDPD[  ±
&KHYURQ ,QGXVWULDO2LO(3  ±
'HD )DOFRQ&/3  ±
(VVR 6SDUWDQ(3  ±
([[RQ 6SDUWDQ(3  ±
)XFKV 5HQROLQ&/33OXV  ±
*XOI *XOI(3/XEULFDQW+'  ±
 (3 .OEHU .OYEHURLO*(0  ±
.XZDLW 4*R\D  ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU  ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU;03  ±
0ROXE$OOR\ 0$  ±
2SWLPRO 2SWLJHUD%0  ±
3HWUR&DQDGD 8OWLPD(3  ±
6KHOO 2PDOD2LO)  ±
7H[DFR 0HURSD  ±
7RWDO &DUWHU(3  ±
7ULERO 7ULERO  ±
$UDO 'HJRO%*  ±
%3 (QHUJRO*5;3  ±
&DVWURO $OSKD63  ±
&DVWURO $OSKDPD[  ±
&KHYURQ ,QGXVWULDO2LO(3  ±
'HD )DOFRQ&/3  ±
(VVR 6SDUWDQ(3  ±
([[RQ 6SDUWDQ(3  ±
)XFKV 5HQROLQ&/33OXV  ±
*XOI *XOI(3/XEULFDQW+'  ±
 (3 .OEHU .OEHURLO*(0  ±
.XZDLW 4*R\D  ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU  ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU;03  ±
0ROXE$OOR\ 0$  ±
2SWLPRO 2SWLJHDU%0  ±
3HWUR&DQDGD 8OWLPD(3  ±
6KHOO 2PDOD2LO)  ±
7H[DFR 0HURSD  ±
7RWDO &DUWHU(3  ±
7ULERO 7ULERO  ±

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 89


Sección 4 ~ Página 126 de 142
kVA n 5HODFLyQGHORVOXEULFDQWHVSDUDORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&
 f
i
P Hz

&ODVH 1~PHUR 3URYHHGRU 7LSRGHOXEULFDQWH 9LVFRVLGDG 3XQWRGHGHV


,629* $*0$ F6W ƒ& FRQJHODFLyQ
ƒ&
$UDO 'HJRO%*  ±
%3 (QHUJRO*5;3  ±
&DVWURO $OSKD63  ±
&DVWURO $OSKDPD[  ±
&KHYURQ ,QGXVWULDO2LO(3  ±
'HD )DOFRQ&/3  ±
(VVR 6SDUWDQ(3  ±
([[RQ 6SDUWDQ(3  ±
)XFKV 5HQROLQ&/33OXV  ±
*XOI *XOI(3/XEULFDQW+'  ±
 (3 .OEHU .OEHURLO*(0  ±
.XZDLW 4*R\D  ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU  ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU;03  ±
0ROXE$OOR\ 0$  ±
2SWLPRO 2SWLJHDU%0  ±
3HWUR&DQDGD 8OWLPD(3  ±
6KHOO 2PDOD2LO)  ±
7H[DFR 0HURSD  ±
7RWDO &DUWHU(3  ±
7ULERO 7ULERO  ±
$UDO 'HJRO%*  ±
%3 (QHUJRO*5;3  ±
&DVWURO $OSKD63  ±
&DVWURO $OSKDPD[  ±
&KHYURQ ,QGXVWULDO2LO(3  ±
'HD )DOFRQ&/3  ±
(VVR 6SDUWDQ(3  ±
([[RQ 6SDUWDQ(3  ±
)XFKV 5HQROLQ&/33OXV  ±
*XOI *XOI(3/XEULFDQW+'  ±
 (3 .OEHU .OEHURLO*(0  ±
.XZDLW 4*R\D  ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU  ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU;03  ±
0ROXE$OOR\ 0$  ±
2SWLPRO 2SWLJHDU%0  ±
3HWUR&DQDGD 8OWLPD(3  ±
6KHOO 2PDOD2LO)  ±
7H[DFR 0HURSD  ±
7RWDO &DUWHU(3  ±
7ULERO 7ULERO  ±

90 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 127 de 142
5HODFLyQGHORVOXEULFDQWHVSDUDORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0& kVA n
f 
i
P Hz

&ODVH 1~PHUR 3URYHHGRU 7LSRGHOXEULFDQWH 9LVFRVLGDG 3XQWRGHGHV


,629* $*0$ F6W ƒ& FRQJHODFLyQ
ƒ&
$UDO 'HJRO%*  ±
%3 (QHUJRO*5;3  ±
&DVWURO $OSKD63  ±
'HD )DOFRQ&/3  ±
(VVR 6SDUWDQ(3  ±
([[RQ 6SDUWDQ(3  ±
)XFKV 5HQROLQ&/33OXV  ±
*XOI *XOI(3/XEULFDQW+'  ±
 (3 .OEHU .OEHURLO*(0  ±
.XZDLW 4*R\D  ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU  ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU;03  ±
0ROXE$OOR\ 0$:  ±
2SWLPRO 2SWLJHDU%0  ±
3HWUR&DQDGD 8OWLPD(3  ±
7RWDO &DUWHU(3  ±
7ULERO 7ULERO  ±

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 91


Sección 4 ~ Página 128 de 142
kVA n 5HODFLyQGHORVOXEULFDQWHVSDUDORVUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV0&
 f
i
P Hz

/XEULFDQWHV /RVOXEULFDQWHVVLQWpWLFRVFRQEDVHSROLDOIDROHILQDFRUUHVSRQGHQDORVDFHLWHV&/3+&
VLQWpWLFRV FRQIRUPHD',1 
FRQEDVH
&ODVH 1~PHUR 3URYHHGRU 7LSRGHOXEULFDQWH 9LVFRVLGDG 3XQWRGHGHV
SROLDOIDROHILQD ,629* $*0$ F6W FRQJHODFLyQ
3$2 ƒ&
 ƒ&  ƒ&
'HD ,QWRU+&/3   ±
)XFKV 5HQROLQ8QLV\Q&/3   ±
.OEHU .OEHUV\QWK(*   ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU6+&;03   ±
 (3
6KHOO 2PDOD2LO+'   ±
7H[DFR 3LQDFOH(3   ±
7RWDO &DUWHU(3+7   ±
7ULERO 7ULERO   ±
'HD ,QWRU+&/3   ±
(VVR 6SDUWDQ6\QWKHWLF(3   ±
([[RQ 6SDUWDQ6\QWKWLF(3   ±
)XFKV 5HQROLQ8QLV\Q&/3   ±
.OEHU .OEHUV\QWK(*   ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU6+&;03   ±
 (3 0RELO 0RELOJHDU6+&   ±
2SWLPRO 2SWLJHDU6\QWKLF$   ±
6KHOO 2PDOD2LO+'   ±
7H[DFR 3LQQDFOH(3   ±
7RWDO &DUWHU(3+7   ±
7ULERO 7ULERO   ±
7ULERO 7ULERO   ±
'HD ,QWRU+&/3   ±
(VVR 6SDUWDQ6\QWKHWLF(3   ±
([[RQ 6SDUWDQ6\QWKWLF(3   ±
)XFKV 5HQROLQ8QLV\Q&/3   ±
.OEHU .OEHUV\QWK(*   ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU6+&;03   ±
 (3 0RELO 0RELOJHDU6+&   ±
2SWLPRO 2SWLJHDU6\QWKLF$   ±
6KHOO 2PDOD2LO+'   ±
7H[DFR 3LQQDFOH(3   ±
7RWDO &DUWHU(3+7   ±
7ULERO 7ULERO   ±
7ULERO 7ULERO   ±

92 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 129 de 142
*UDVDSDUDMXQWDV kVA n
f 
i
P Hz

&ODVH 1~PHUR 3URYHHGRU 7LSRGHOXEULFDQWH 9LVFRVLGDG 3XQWRGHGHV


,629* $*0$ F6W FRQJHODFLyQ
ƒ&
 ƒ&  ƒ&
'HD ,QWRU+&/3   ±
(VVR 6SDUWDQ6\QWKHWLF(3   ±
([[RQ 6SDUWDQ6\QWKWLF(3   ±
)XFKV 5HQROLQ8QLV\Q&/3   ±
.OEHU .OEHUV\QWK(*   ±
0RELO 0RELOJHDU6+&;03   ±
 (3 0RELO 0RELOJHDU6+&   ±
2SWLPRO 2SWLJHDU6\QWKLF$   ±
6KHOO 2PDOD2LO+'   ±
7H[DFR 3LQQDFOH(3   ±
7RWDO &DUWHU(3+7   ±
7ULERO 7ULERO   ±
7ULERO 7ULERO   ±

 *UDVDSDUDMXQWDV
(Q OD WDEOD VLJXLHQWH VH LQGLFDQ ODV JUDVDV GH OXEULFDFLyQ UHFRPHQGDGDV SRU 6(:
(852'5,9(SDUDXQDVWHPSHUDWXUDVGHVHUYLFLRFRPSUHQGLGDVHQWUHORV± ƒ&\ORV
 ƒ&
3URYHHGRU 7LSRGHOXEULFDQWH 3HQHWUDFLyQ 1/*, (3
SXQWRGHJRWHR ƒ&
$UDO $UDOXE+/3  
%3 (QHUJUHDVH/6(36  
&DVWURO 6SKHHURO(3/  
&KHYURQ 'XUD/LWK(3  
(OI (SH[D(3  
(VVR %HDFRQ(3  
([[RQ %HDFRQ(3  
*XOI *XOIFURZQ*UHDVH  
.OEHU &HQWRSOH[(3  
.XZDLW 45HPEUDQGW(3  
0RELO 0RELOX[(3  
0ROXE $OOR\%5%  
2SWLPRO 2OLVWD/RQJWLPH  
6KHOO $OYDQLD(3  
7H[DFR 0XOWLIDN(3  
7RWDO 0XOWLV(3  
7ULERO 7ULERO  

Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC.. 93


Sección 4 ~ Página 130 de 142
kVA n &DQWLGDGHVGHOOHQDGRGHOXEULFDQWHV
 f
i
P Hz

 &DQWLGDGHVGHOOHQDGRGHOXEULFDQWHV
/DV FDQWLGDGHV GH OOHQDGR LQGLFDGDV VRQ YDORUHV RULHQWDWLYRV /RV YDORUHV H[DFWRV
YDUtDQHQIXQFLyQGHOtQGLFHGHUHGXFFLyQ
0&3
&DQWLGDGGHDFHLWH>O@

7DPDxRGHO WUHQHV WUHQHV


7LSRGHOXEULFDFLyQ
UHGXFWRU 3RVLFLyQGHPRQWDMH
/ 9 ( / 9 (
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      

0&5
&DQWLGDGGHDFHLWH>O@

7DPDxRGHO WUHQHV WUHQHV


7LSRGHOXEULFDFLyQ
UHGXFWRU 3RVLFLyQGHPRQWDMH
/ 9 ( / 9 (
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      
%DUERWHR      

%DxR      

(Q OD OXEULFDFLyQ D SUHVLyQ HV LPSUHVFLQGLEOH FRQVXOWDU ORV GDWRV GH OD SODFD GH
FDUDFWHUtVWLFDV\ODGRFXPHQWDFLyQHVSHFtILFDGHSHGLGR

94 Instrucciones de funcionamiento – Reductores industriales de la serie MC..


Sección 4 ~ Página 131 de 142

ËQGLFHGHSDODEUDVFODYH 

 ËQGLFHGHSDODEUDVFODYH
$ 0
$GDSWDGRU630 0RQWDMHGHDFRSODPLHQWRV
0RQWDMHGHOVHQVRUGHLPSXOVRVGHFKRTXH DFRSODPLHQWR1RU0H[ PRGHORV*( 
3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH DFRSODPLHQWR527(;
$QWLUUHWRUQR);0 DFRSODPLHQWRV*0*0'*0;
0RGLILFDFLyQGHOVHQWLGRGHEORTXHR 0RQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVFRQHMHPDFL]R
0RQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFRFRQDQLOOR
% GHFRQWUDFFLyQ
%DVHGHOUHGXFWRU 0RQWDMHGHUHGXFWRUHVGHHMHKXHFRFRQXQLyQSRU
%RPEDGHH[WUHPRGHOHMH6+3 FKDYHWD
%RPEDGHOPRWRU 0RQWDMHGHXQPRWRUFRQDGDSWDGRU
%UD]RGHSDU 0RQWDMHGHODFFLRQDPLHQWRFRQFRUUHDV
%DVH
2SFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH 1
1RWDVGHVHJXULGDG
&
&DOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH 2
&DPELRGHDFHLWH 2SFLRQHVGHODLQVWDODFLyQPHFiQLFD
%DVHGHFHPHQWR
3
&RODGDSRVWHULRU
3HUtRGRVGHLQVSHFFLyQ
&RPSUREDFLyQGHODFHLWH
3HUtRGRVGHPDQWHQLPLHQWR
&RPSUREDFLyQGHOQLYHOGHDFHLWH
3ODFDGHFDUDFWHUtVWLFDV
%DQFDGDIORWDQWH
3RVLFLRQHVGHPRQWDMH
' 3RVLFLRQHVGHOHMH
'HSHQGHQFLDVGHOVHQWLGRGHJLUR 3URJUDPDGHVXVWLWXFLyQGHOXEULFDQWHV
'HSyVLWRGHFRPSHQVDFLyQGHIXQGLFLyQJULV 3XHVWDHQPDUFKD
'HSyVLWRGHFRPSHQVDFLyQSDUDHODFHLWHGHDFHUR 3HUtRGRGHURGDMH
5HGXFWRUHVFRQDQWLUUHWRUQR
'HVLJQDFLyQGHPRGHOR
3XHVWDIXHUDGHVHUYLFLRGHORVUHGXFWRUHV
( LQGXVWULDOHV0&
(VWUXFWXUDGHORVUHGXFWRUHV0&3
6
(VWUXFWXUDGHORVUHGXFWRUHV0&5
6HQWLGRVGHJLUR
) 6LVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHDJXDSDUDHODFHLWH
)DOORVHQHOUHGXFWRU 6LVWHPDGHUHIULJHUDFLyQGHODFHLWHSRUDLUH
&DXVDVSRVLEOHV 6RQGDWpUPLFD37
6ROXFLRQHV 6XMHFLyQGHODVFRUUHDV
, 7
,QGLFDFLRQHVSDUDHOPRQWDMH 7ROHUDQFLDVGHPRQWDMH
,QVSHFFLyQPDQWHQLPLHQWRGHOUHGXFWRU 7UDEDMRVGHLQVSHFFLyQ\PDQWHQLPLHQWRGHOUHGXFWRU
,QVWDODFLyQPHFiQLFD $SOLFDFLyQGHJUDVDSDUDMXQWDV
&DPELRGHDFHLWH
/ &RPSUREDFLyQGHODFHLWH
/XEULFDFLyQDSUHVLyQ &RPSUREDFLyQGHOQLYHO
/XEULFDFLyQGHUHGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHV /LPSLH]DGHODFDOHIDFFLyQGHODFHLWH
/XEULFDFLyQSRUEDxRGHDFHLWH 7UDQVSRUWHVREUHFRQVWUXFFLyQGHDFHUR
/XEULFDFLyQSRUEDUERWHR 7UDQVSRUWHVREUHHVWUXFWXUDGHDFHUR
/XEULFDQWHV
8
&DQWLGDGHVGHOOHQDGRGHOXEULFDQWHV
*UDVDSDUDMXQWDV 8VRLQGLFDGR
/XEULFDQWHVPLQHUDOHV
9
/XEULFDQWHVVLQWpWLFRV
9HQWLODGRU

,QVWUXFFLRQHVGHIXQFLRQDPLHQWR±5HGXFWRUHVLQGXVWULDOHVGHODVHULH0& 
Sección 4 ~ Página 132 de 142

Servicio y piezas de repuesto

Servicio y piezas de repuesto


$OHPDQLD
&HQWUDO %UXFKVDO 6(:(852'5,9(*PE+ &R.* 7HOpIRQR
)DEULFDFLyQ (UQVW%OLFNOH6WU 7HOHID[
9HQWDV '%UXFKVDO 7HOH[
6HUYLFLR 32%R[ KWWSZZZVHZHXURGULYHGH
3RVWIDFKÂ'%UXFKVDO VHZ#VHZHXURGULYHGH
0RQWDMH *DUEVHQ 6(:(852'5,9(*PE+ &R.* 7HOpIRQR  
6HUYLFLR FHUFDGH $OWH5LFNOLQJHU6WUD‰H 7HOHID[  
+DQQRYHU '*DUEVHQ
32%R[
3RVWIDFKÂ'*DUEVHQ
.LUFKKHLP 6(:(852'5,9(*PE+ &R.* 7HOpIRQR  
FHUFDGH 'RPDJNVWUD‰H 7HOHID[  
0XQLFK '.LUFKKHLP
/DQJHQIHOG 6(:(852'5,9(*PE+ &R.* 7HOpIRQR  
FHUFDGH 6LHPHQVVWUD‰H 7HOHID[  
'VVHOGRUI '/DQJHQIHOG
0HHUDQH 6(:(852'5,9(*PE+ &R.* 7HOpIRQR  
FHUFDGH 'lQNULW]HU:HJ 7HOHID[  
=ZLFNDX '0HHUDQH
)UDQFLD
)DEULFDFLyQ +DJXHQDX 6(:862&20(6$6 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV URXWHGH6RXIIOHQKHLP 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR %3 KWWSZZZXVRFRPHFRP
)+DJXHQDX&HGH[ VHZ#XVRFRPHFRP
0RQWDMH %XUGHRV 6(:862&20(6$6 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV 3DUFG¶DFWLYLWpVGH0DJHOODQ 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR DYHQXHGH0DJHOODQ%3
)3HVVDF&HGH[
/\RQ 6(:862&20(6$6 7HOpIRQR
3DUFG¶$IIDLUHV5RRVHYHOW 7HOHID[
5XH-DFTXHV7DWL
)9DXO[HQ9HOLQ
3DUtV 6(:862&20(6$6 7HOpIRQR
=RQHLQGXVWULHOOH 7HOHID[
UXH'HQLV3DSLQ
)9HUQHXLO,¶(WDQJ
ÈIULFDGHO6XU
0RQWDMH -RKDQQHVEXUJR 6(:(852'5,9( 35235,(7$5< /,0,7(' 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV (XURGULYH+RXVH 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR &QU$GFRFN,QJUDPDQG$HURGURPH5RDGV
$HURWRQ([W
-RKDQQHVEXUJ
32%R[
%HUWVKDP
&DSHWRZQ 6(:(852'5,9( 35235,(7$5< /,0,7(' 7HOpIRQR
5DLQERZ3DUN 7HOHID[
&QU5DFHFRXUVH 2PXUDPED5RDG 7HOH[
0RQWDJXH*DUGHQV&DSH7RZQ
32%R[
5DFHFRXUVH3DUN&DSH7RZQ
'XUEDQ 6(:(852'5,9( 35235,(7$5< /,0,7(' 7HOpIRQR
0RQDFHR3ODFH 7HOHID[
3LQHWRZQ
'XUEDQ
32%R[$VKZRRG
0RQWDMH -RKDQQHVEXUJR 6(:(852'5,9( 35235,(7$5< /,0,7(' 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV (XURGULYH+RXVH 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR &QU$GFRFN,QJUDPDQG$HURGURPH5RDGV
$HURWRQ([W
-RKDQQHVEXUJ
32%R[
%HUWVKDP

11/2003
Sección 4 ~ Página 133 de 142

Servicio y piezas de repuesto

$UJHOLD
2ILFLQDWpFQLFD $UJHO 5pGXFRP 7HOpIRQR
UXHGHV)UqUHV=DJKQRXQ 7HOHID[
%HOOHYXH(O+DUUDFK
$OJHU
$UJHQWLQD
0RQWDMH %XHQRV$LUHV 6(:(852'5,9($5*(17,1$6$ 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV &HQWUR,QGXVWULDO*DULQ/RWH 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR 5XWD3DQDPHULFDQD.P VHZDU#VHZHXURGULYHFRPDU
*DULQ

$XVWULD
0RQWDMH :LHQ 6(:(852'5,9(*HVPE+ 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV 5LFKDUG6WUDXVV6WUDVVH 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR $:LHQ VHZ#VHZHXURGULYHDW

%DQJODGHVK
'KDND 7ULDQJOH7UDGH,QWHUQDWLRQDO 7HOpIRQR
%OGJ5RDG6HF 7HOHID[
8WWDUD0RGHO7RZQ
'KDND%DQJODGHVK
%pOJLFD
0RQWDMH %UXVHODV &$5219(&7256$ 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV $YHQXH(LIIHO 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR %:DYUH KWWSZZZFDURQYHFWRUEH
LQIR#FDURQYHFWRUEH

%ROLYLD
/D3D] /$5&2665/ 7HOpIRQR
&DOOH%DWDOORQ&RORUDGRV1R3LVR 7HOHID[
/D3D]

%UDVLO
)DEULFDFLyQ 6DR3DXOR 6(:'2%5$6,/ 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV 0RWRUHV5HGXWRUHV/WGD 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR 5RGRYLD3UHVLGHQWH'XWUDNP VHZ#VHZFRPEU
&(3*XDUXOKRV63

%XOJDULD
9HQWDV 6RItD %(9(5'5,9(*0%+ 7HOpIRQR  
%RJGDQRYHW]6WU 7HOHID[  
%*6RILD EHYHU#PER[LQIRWHOEJ
&DPHU~Q
2ILFLQDWpFQLFD 'RXDOD (OHFWUR6HUYLFHV 7HOpIRQR
5XH'URXRW$NZD 7HOHID[
%3
'RXDOD

&DQDGi
0RQWDMH 7RURQWR 6(:(852'5,9(&22)&$1$'$/7' 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV :DONHU'ULYH 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR %UDPDOHD2QWDULR/7:
9DQFRXYHU 6(:(852'5,9(&22)&$1$'$/7' 7HOpIRQR  
+RQH\PDQ6WUHHW 7HOHID[  
'HOWD%&9*(
0RQWUHDO 6(:(852'5,9(&22)&$1$'$/7' 7HOpIRQR  
5XH/HJHU6WUHHW 7HOHID[  
/D6DOOH4XHEHF+19

&KLOH
0RQWDMH 6DQWLDJRGH 6(:(852'5,9(&+,/( 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV &KLOH 0RWRUHV5HGXFWRUHV/7'$ 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR 3DQDPHULFDQD1RUWH1R
&DVLOOD&RUUHR4XLOLFXUD
5&+6DQWLDJRGH&KLOH
2ILFLQDWpFQLFD &RQFHSFLyQ 6(:(852'5,9(&+,/( 7HOpIRQR  
6HUUDQR1R'HSWR&RQFHSFLyQ 7HOHID[  

11/2003
Sección 4 ~ Página 134 de 142

Servicio y piezas de repuesto

&KLQD
)DEULFDFLyQ 7LDQMLQ 6(:(852'5,9( 7LDQMLQ &R/WG 7HOpIRQR  
0RQWDMH 1RWK$YHQXH7('$ 7HOHID[  
9HQWDV 7LDQMLQ
6HUYLFLR
&RORPELD
0RQWDMH %RJRWi 6(:(852'5,9(&2/20%,$/7'$ 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV &DOOH1R 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR %RGHJD0DQ]DQD% VHZFRO#DQGLQHWFRP
6DQWDIpGH%RJRWi

&RVWDGH0DUILO
2ILFLQDWpFQLFD $ELGMDQ 6,&$ 7HOpIRQR
6WHLQGXVWULHOOHHWFRPPHUFLDOHSRXUO¶$IULTXH 7HOHID[
%OGGH0DUVHLOOH
%3$ELGMDQ

&RUHD
0RQWDMH $QVDQ&LW\ 6(:(852'5,9(.25($&2/7' 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV %%DQZHRO,QGXVWULDO(VWDWH 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR 8QLW6KLQJLO'RQJ
$QVDQ
&URDFLD
9HQWDV =DJUHE .203(.6GRR 7HOpIRQR
6HUYLFLR 3,7(UG|G\,, 7HOHID[
+5=DJUHE

5HS~EOLFD&KHFD
9HQWDV 3UDJD 6(:(852'5,9(652 7HOpIRQR
%XVLQHVV&HQWUXP3UDKD 7HOHID[
/XQi VHZ#VHZHXURGULYHF]
3UDKD

'LQDPDUFD
0RQWDMH &RSHQKDJXH 6(:(852'5,9($6 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV *HPLQLYHM32%R[ 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR '.*UHYH KWWSZZZVHZHXURGULYHGN
VHZ#VHZHXURGULYHGN

(JLSWR
(O&DLUR &RSDP(J\SW 7HOpIRQR  
IRU(QJLQHHULQJ $JHQFLHV 7HOHID[  
(,+HJD]67+HOLRSROLV&DLUR
(VORYHQLD
9HQWDV &HOMH 3DNPDQ3RJRQVND7HKQLNDGRR 7HOpIRQR
6HUYLFLR 8,;,9GLYL]LMH 7HOHID[
6/2±&HOMH SDNPDQ#VLROQHW

(VSDxD
0RQWDMH %LOEDR 6(:(852'5,9((63$f$6/ 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV 3DUTXH7HFQROyJLFR(GLILFLR 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR (=DPXGLR 9L]FD\D VHZVSDLQ#VHZHXURGULYHHV
2ILFLQDWpFQLFDV %DUFHORQD 'HOHJDFLyQ%DUFHORQD 7HOpIRQR
$YHQLGD)UDQFHVF0DFLi2ILFLQD 7HOHID[
(6DEDGHOO %DUFHORQD
/XJR 'HOHJDFLyQ1RURHVWH 7HOpIRQR
$SDUWDGR 7HOHID[
(/XJR
0DGULG 'HOHJDFLyQ0DGULG 7HOpIRQR
*UDQ9LDƒ$' 7HOHID[
(0DMDGDKRQGD 0DGULG

(VWRQLD
9HQWDV 7DOOLQ $/$6.88/$6 7HOpIRQR
3DOGLVNLPQW 7HOHID[
((7DOOLQ

11/2003
Sección 4 ~ Página 135 de 142

Servicio y piezas de repuesto

)LOLSLQDV
2ILFLQDWpFQLFD 0DQLOD 6(:(852'5,9(3WH/WG 7HOpIRQR
0DQLOD/LDLVRQ2IILFH 7HOHID[
6XLWH*URXQG)ORRU VHZPOD#LQH[WQHW
&RPIRRGV%XLOGLQJ
6HQDWRU*LO3X\DW$YHQXH
0DNDWL&LW\
)LQODQGLD
0RQWDMH /DKWL 6(:(852'5,9(2< 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV 9HVLPlHQWLH 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR ),1+ROOROD

*DEyQ
2ILFLQDWpFQLFD /LEUHYLOOH (OHFWUR6HUYLFHV 7HOpIRQR
%3 7HOHID[
/LEUHYLOOH

*UDQ%UHWDxD
0RQWDMH 1RUPDQWRQ 6(:(852'5,9(/WG 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV %HFNEULGJH,QGXVWULDO(VWDWH 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR 32%R[1R
*%1RUPDQWRQ:HVW<RUNVKLUH:)45
*UHFLD
9HQWDV $WHQDV &KULVW%R]QRV 6RQ6$ 7HOpIRQR
6HUYLFLR 0DYURPLFKDOL6WUHHW 7HOHID[
32%R[*53LUDHXV %R]QRV#RWHQHWJU

+RQJ.RQJ
0RQWDMH +RQJ.RQJ 6(:(852'5,9(/7' 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV 8QLW1RWK)ORRU 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR +RQJ/HRQJ,QGXVWULDO&RPSOH[ VHZ#VHZKNFRP
1R:DQJ.ZRQJ5RDG
.RZORRQ+RQJ.RQJ

+XQJUtD
9HQWDV %XGDSHVW 6(:(852'5,9(.IW 7HOpIRQR
6HUYLFLR +%XGDSHVW 7HOHID[
.XQLJXQGDX

,QGLD
0RQWDMH %DURGD 6(:(852'5,9(,QGLD3YW/WG 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV 3ORW1R*LGF 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR 3RU5DPDQJDPGLÂ%DURGD VHZEDURGD#JHFVOFRP
*XMDUDW
,QGRQHVLD
2ILFLQDWpFQLFD <DNDUWD 6(:(852'5,9(3WH/WG 7HOpIRQR  
-DNDUWD/LDLVRQ2IILFH 7HOHID[  
0HQDUD*UDKD.HQFDQD
-O3HUMXDQJDQ1R/7%.HEXQ-HUXN
-DNDUWD

,VODQGLD
+DIQDUILUGL 9$50$9(5.HKI 7HOpIRQR  
'DOVKUDXQL 7HOHID[  
,6+DIQDUILUGL YDUPDYHUN#YDUPDYHUNLV

,UODQGD
9HQWDV 'XEOtQ $OSHUWRQ(QJLQHHULQJ/WG 7HOpIRQR  
6HUYLFLR 0R\OH5RDG 7HOHID[  
'XEOLQ,QGXVWULDO(VWDWH
*ODVQHYLQ'XEOLQ
,VUDHO
7HO$YLY /LUD]+DQGDVD/WG 7HOpIRQR
3HWDFK7LNYD5G 7HOHID[
7HO$YLY

,WDOLD
0RQWDMH 0LOiQ 6(:(852'5,9(GL5%OLFNOH &RVDV 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV 9LD%HUQLQL 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR ,6RODUR 0LODQR

11/2003
Sección 4 ~ Página 136 de 142

Servicio y piezas de repuesto

-DSyQ
0RQWDMH 7R\RGDFKR 6(:(852'5,9(-$3$1&2/7' 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV 6KLPRPDQQR 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR 7R\RGDFKR,ZDWDJXQ
6KL]XRNDSUHIHFWXUH32%R[
/tEDQR
2ILFLQDWpFQLFD %HLUXW *DEULHO$FDU )LOVVDUO 7HOpIRQR  
%3  
%RXUM+DPPRXG%HLUXW  
7HOHID[  [
*DFDU#EHLUXWFRP

/X[HPEXUJR
0RQWDMH %UVVHO &$5219(&7256$ 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV $YHQXH(LIIHO 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR %:DYUH KWWSZZZFDURQYHFWRUEH
LQIR#FDURQYHFWRUEH

0DFHGRQLD
9HQWDV 6NRSMH 6*66NRSMH0DFHGRQLD 7HOpIRQR  
7HRGRVLM6LQDFWDVNL´ 7HOHID[  
6NRSMH0DFHGRQLD
0DODVLD
0RQWDMH -RKRUH 6(:(852'5,9(6'1%+' 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV 1R-DODQ6HURMD7DPDQ-RKRU-D\D 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR -RKRU%DKUX-RKRU
:HVW0DOD\VLD

0p[LFR
7XOWLWODQ 6(:(852'5,9(6DOHVDQG'LVWULEXWLRQ 7HOpIRQR
6$GH&9 7HOHID[
%RXOHYDUG7XOWLWODQ2ULHQWH* VFPH[LFR#VHZHXURGULYHFRPP[
&RORQLD([5DQFKRGH6DQWLDJXLWR
7XOWLWODQ(VWDGRGH0H[LFR0H[LFR

0DUUXHFRV
&DVDEODQFD 650 7HOpIRQR  
6RFLpWpGH5pDOLVDWLRQV0pFDQLTXHV 7HOHID[  
UXH(PLU$EGHONDGHU 650#PDURFQHWQHWPD
&DVDEODQFD

1RUXHJD
0RQWDMH 0RVV 6(:(852'5,9($6 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV 6ROJDDUGVNRJ 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR 10RVV VHZ#VHZHXURGULYHQR
1XHYD=HODQGD
0RQWDMH $XFNODQG 6(:(852'5,9(1(:=($/$1'/7' 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV 32%R[ 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR *UHHQPRXQWGULYH VDOHV#VHZHXURGULYHFRQ]
(DVW7DPDNL$XFNODQG
&KULVWFKXUFK 6(:(852'5,9(1(:=($/$1'/7' 7HOpIRQR  
6HWWOHUV&UHVFHQW)HUU\PHDG 7HOHID[  
&KULVWFKXUFK VDOHV#VHZHXURGULYHFRQ]

3DtVHV%DMRV
0RQWDMH 5RWWHUGDP 9(&725$DQGULMIWHFKQLHN%9 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV ,QGXVWULHZHJ 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR 1/$65RWWHUGDP
3RVWEXV
1/$%5RWWHUGDP

3DNLVWiQ
2ILFLQDWpFQLFD .DUDFKL 6(:(852'5,9(3WH/WG 7HOpIRQR
.DUDFKL/LDLVRQ2IILFH$VW)ORRU 7HOH[
&HQWUDO&RPPHUFLDO$UHD
6XOWDQ$KPHG6KDK5RDG
%ORFN.&+68QLRQ/WG.DUDFKL

11/2003
Sección 4 ~ Página 137 de 142

Servicio y piezas de repuesto

3DUDJXD\
$VXQFLyQ (48,665/ 7HOpIRQR  
$YGD0DGDPH/\QFK\\6XFUH 7HOHID[  
$VXQFLyQ
3HU~
0RQWDMH /LPD 6(:'(/3(5802725(65('8&725(6 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV 6$& 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR /RV&DOGHURV VHZSHUX#WHUUDFRPSH
8UEDQL]DFLRQ,QGXVWULDO9XOFDQR$7(/LPD

3RORQLD
9HQWDV /RG] 6(:(852'5,9(3ROVND6S]RR 7HOpIRQR  
XO3RMH]LHUVND 7HOHID[  
/RG] VHZ#VHZHXURGULYHSO
2ILFLQDWpFQLFD .DWRZLFH 6(:(852'5,9(3ROVND6S]RR 7HOpIRQR  
XO1DG-H]LRUHP 7HOHID[  
7\FK\ 

3RUWXJDO
0RQWDMH &RLPEUD 6(:(852'5,9(/'$ 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV $SDUWDGR 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR 30HDOKDGD LQIRVHZ#VHZHXURGULYHSW
5XPDQLD
9HQWDV %XFDUHVW 6LDOFR7UDGLQJ65/ 7HOpIRQR  
6HUYLFLR VWU0DGULGQU 7HOHID[  
%XFXUHVWL VLDOFR#PHGLDVDWUR

5XVLD
9HQWDV 6DQ =$26(:(852'5,9( 7HOpIRQR  
3HWHUVEXUJR 32%R[ 7HOHID[  
6W3HWHUVEXUJ VHZUXV#SRVWVSEQLWUX
2ILFLQDWpFQLFD 0RVF~ =$26(:(852'5,9( 7HOpIRQR  
0RVNDX 7HOHID[  

6HQHJDO
'DNDU 6(1(0(&$ 7HOpIRQR
0pFDQLTXH*pQpUDOH 7HOHID[
.P5RXWHGH5XILVTXH 7HOH[
%3'DNDU

6LQJDS~U
0RQWDMH 6(:(852'5,9(37(/7' 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV 1R7XDV'ULYH 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR -XURQJ,QGXVWULDO(VWDWH 7HOH[
6LQJDSRUH
6UL/DQND
&RORPER 60,QWHUQDWLRQDO 3WH /WG 7HOpIRQR
*DOOH5DRG 7HOHID[
&RORPER6UL/DQND

6XHFLD
0RQWDMH -|QN|SLQJ 6(:(852'5,9($% 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV *QHMVYlJHQ 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR 6-|QN|SLQJ ZZZVHZHXURGULYHVH
%R[6-|QN|SLQJ

6XL]D
0RQWDMH %DVHO $OIUHGOPKRI$* 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV -XUDVWUDVVH 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR &+0QFKHQVWHLQEHL%DVHO KWWSZZZLPKRIVHZFK
LQIR#LPKRIVHZFK
7DLODQGLD
0RQWDMH &KRQ%XUL 6(:(852'5,9( 7KDLODQG /WG 7HOpIRQR
9HQWDV %DQJSDNRQJ,QGXVWULDO3DUN 7HOHID[
6HUYLFLR 0RR7DPERO'RQKXDURK
0XDQJ'LVWULFW
&KRQ%XUL

11/2003
Sección 4 ~ Página 138 de 142

Servicio y piezas de repuesto

7DLZDQ 52&
1DQ7RX 7LQJ6KRX7UDGLQJ&R/WG 7HOpIRQR
1R.XQJ<HK15RDG 7HOHID[
,QGXVWULDO'LVWULFW
1DQ7RX
7DLSHL 7LQJ6KRX7UDGLQJ&R/WG 7HOpIRQR  
)1R6HF 7HOHID[  
7XQJ+ZD6RXWK5RDG7DLSHL 7HOH[
7~QH]
7~QH] 7067HFKQLF0DUNHWLQJ6HUYLFH 7HOpIRQR  
UXH,EQ(,+HLWKHP 7HOHID[  
=,6007
0pJULQH(UULDGK

7XUTXtD
0RQWDMH (VWDPEXO 6(:(852'5,9( 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV +DUHNHW6LVWHPOHUL6DQYH7LF/WG6WL 
6HUYLFLR %DJGDW&DG.RUXPD&LNPD]L1R 7HOHID[  
750DOWHSH,67$1%8/ VHZHXURGULYH#VXSHURQOLQHFRPWU

8UXJXD\
0RQWHYLGHR 6(:(852'5,9(6$6XFXUVDO8UXJXD\ 7HOpIRQR
*HUPDQ%DUEDWR 7HOHID[
&30RQWHYLGHR VHZX\#VHZHXURGULYHFRPX\
86$
)DEULFDFLyQ *UHHQYLOOH 6(:(852'5,9(,1& 7HOpIRQR  
0RQWDMH 2OG6SDUWDQEXUJ+LJKZD\ 7HOHID[6DOHV  
9HQWDV 32%R[ 7HOHID[0DQXI  
6HUYLFLR /\PDQ6& 7HOHID[$VV  
7HOH[
0RQWDMH 6DQ)UDQFLVFR 6(:(852'5,9(,1& 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV 6DQ$QWRQLR6W 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR +D\ZDUG&DOLIRUQLD
)LODGHOILD3$ 6(:(852'5,9(,1& 7HOpIRQR  
3XUHODQG,QG&RPSOH[ 7HOHID[  
+LJK+LOO5RDG32%R[
%ULGJHSRUW1HZ-HUVH\
'D\WRQ 6(:(852'5,9(,1& 7HOpIRQR  
:HVW0DLQ6WUHHW 7HOHID[  
7UR\2KLR
'DOODV 6(:(852'5,9(,1& 7HOpIRQR  
3ODWLQXP:D\ 7HOHID[  
'DOODV7H[DV
9HQH]XHOD
0RQWDMH 9DOHQFLD 6(:(852'5,9(9HQH]XHOD6$ 7HOpIRQR  
9HQWDV $Y1RUWH6XU1R*DOSRQ 7HOHID[  
6HUYLFLR =RQD,QGXVWULDO0XQLFLSDO1RUWH VHZYHQWDV#FDQWUQHW
9DOHQFLD VHZILQDQ]DV#FDQWUQHW

11/2003
Sección 4 ~ Página 139 de 142
Sección 4 ~ Página 140 de 142
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG · P.O. Box 3023 · D-76642 Bruchsal/Germany
Phone +49 7251 75-0 · Fax +49 7251 75-1970
http://www.sew-eurodrive.com · sew@sew-eurodrive.com
Sección 4 ~ Página 141 de 142

AGITATOR DATA SHEET REV: 0


1037 DATE: 20/04/11

SUPPLIER MIXTEC
MODEL Nº 1000
TYPE 1037
QUANTITY 1
RATIO 7,1
INLET RPM 1750
OUTLET RPM 211
OUTLET TORQUE 341 Nm
SHAFT DIAMETER 170 mm
MOTOR kW 1,1 (1,4 HP)
MOTOR rpm 1800
VOLTAJE / FRECUENCY / PHASES / Poles 460 V / 60 Hz / 3 Ph
V DRIVE PULLEYS RATIO 1.40
V DRIVE GUARDS NOT APPLICABLE
V BELTS NOT APPLICABLE
TORQUE ARM NOT APPLICABLE
SPEED CONTROL NOT APPLICABLE
ALTITUDE 2200 m

Agitador 28410 rev 0.doc


Sección 4 ~ Página 142 de 142
Sección 5 ~ Página 1 de 8

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION

SECCION 5

SISTEMA DE CENTRADO DE TELAS

LL.M. A.S. MAYO 10 0


PREPARO REVISO FECHA REVISION

BELT FILTER 2x73m²

NOMBRE DEL EQUIPO TAG MODELO


COMPAÑIA
73M² BELT FILTER #1 05-820-4223-003 MINERA MILPO

32B / 08-30V
MILPO II
73M² BELT FILTER #2 05-820-4223-004

CONTRATO ORDEN DECOMPRA


DOCUMENTO DELKOR
DELKOR- No:
No: D284-HBF-MO-01
No: 28410 LMCO-0000000794
Sección 5 ~ Página 2 de 8

UNIDAD DELKOR DEL CENTRADOR DE TELA DE PANTALLA LINEAL

FIG. 1
Sección 5 ~ Página 3 de 8

INSTRUCCIÓN DE INSTALACIÓN

• MONTE EL PASADOR DE AJUSTE.


• MONTE EL DISCO DE ALINEACIÓN SOBRE LA MARCA .
• MONTE LA PALMA DEL SENSOR TOCANDO EL PASADOR (16°)
• SAQUE EL PASADOR

FIG. 2
Sección 5 ~ Página 4 de 8

5.1. INSTRUCCIONES DE MONTAJE

5.1.1 VÁLVULA DE CONTROL

• El montaje de la válvula de control se hace de acuerdo con el diagrama de


montaje (Fig.2).

FIG. 3
Sección 5 ~ Página 5 de 8

• En el lado de la válvula de control neumática hay una marca central roja.


Una marca roja adicional puede encontrarse en el eje de la válvula de
control. Las dos marcas deben estar alineadas girando el eje de la válvula
de control por consiguiente. En esta posición el suministro de aire a los
fuelles es de igual presión a través tanto de la línea “C” y línea “D”
(consulte a la fig.3). Los fuelles permanecen estacionarios como un
resultado de la presión igual en las dos cámaras de aire.

• Soltando el tornillo de fijación en el brazo del sensor de la válvula de


control y empujando el último hacia el eje de la válvula de control. El
pasador de 6mm de diámetro debe ser empujado ahora hacia uno de los
dos agujeros provistos en la válvula de control dependiendo de sí el brazo
del sensor es para analizar el lado de la mano derecha o el lado de la mano
izquierda de la tela. El brazo del sensor se gira ahora hasta que descanse
contra el pasador.

• En esta posición, el brazo del sensor se desvía del eje central en 16° y las
dos marcas rojas deberían ahora cubrirse una con otra. Asegure el tornillo
de fijación y saque el pasador.

• En la base de la válvula de control hay dos agujeros enroscados M6 de tal


manera que al aparato puede montarse. La unidad de control neumática
completa con disposición fija y el brazo del sensor colgante pueden
entonces ser movido contra el borde de la tela hasta que las dos marcas
rojas estén nuevamente en alineación. La unidad de control debería
entonces asegurarse en esta posición (Ver Fig.2).

5.1.2. UNIDAD DE CENTRAR

• La unidad de Centrar está equipada con dos conectores para el suministro


de aire.

• Dependiendo de la posición y peso de los rodillos de centrar,


la unidad de centrar funciona con aire comprimido entre 200- 300 kPa. Un
atomizador de aceite será requerido para asegurar que el flujo reducido de
aire sea suficientemente lubricado. Debería tenerse cuidado de que este
atomizador se instale cerca del regulador para evitar que se deposite la
neblina de aceite dentro de la línea.
Sección 5 ~ Página 6 de 8

5.1.3 CONECTANDO LA UNIDAD NEUMÁTICA

• La conexión de aire se lleva a cabo correctamente cuando se hace de


acuerdo con el diagrama 3 de montaje.

• Conecte la línea “A” que viene de la línea de aire del instrumento a través
de una válvula de reducción de presión.

• Conecte la línea “ B” desde la válvula de reducción hacia el lado de la


superficie de la válvula de control.

• Desde el lado de la unidad de la válvula de control neumática, haga


funcionar las líneas “C” y “D” respectivamente a los fuelles y conecte a las
bases de aire.

• La dirección del movimiento del brazo puede alterarse al intercambiar las


líneas “C” y “D” en la válvula de control.

• Dependiendo de la dirección de la operación del brazo una cierta cantidad


de aire fluirá de vuelta a través de la línea “C” o “D” hacia la válvula de
control y automáticamente se ventilará a través del escape “E”.

• La velocidad lineal del brazo puede ajustarse a las condiciones deseadas


aumentando la presión de aire de la válvula de reducción. La variación de
presión máxima de la unidad de control es 0- 400 kPa. En consideración sin
embargo de la durabilidad de las bases de aire se sugiere se mantenga la
presión de aire si es posible entre 200 kPa y 300 kPa.

• Atención: La calibración máxima de presión para las bases de aire de la


unidad de centrar es 400 kPa.

• NO EXCEDA LA PRESIÓN MÁXIMA NOMINAL

5.1.4 INSTRUCCIONES DE OPERACIÓN PARA LA UNIDAD DE CENTRAR

• Antes de poner en marcha la unidad de centrar, revise que el rodillo del


centrador esté en posición neutra (paralela a los rodillos de alimentación
de la tela).
Sección 5 ~ Página 7 de 8

• Cambie la válvula de control a una posición donde la paleta del sensor


centre el borde de la tela y las marcas rojas en la válvula de control
coincidan. En otras palabras, la paleta sensora y la válvula de control estén
en cero (neutro)

• Revise que el suministro de aire esté encendido y la presión indique un


máximo de 300 kPa.

• Mueva la paleta del sensor manualmente en ambas direcciones y revise si el


rodillo del centrador responde correctamente.

5.1.5 FILTRO/REGULADOR-UNIDAD DE LUBRICACION

a) Información técnica:
Presión máxima: 6 Bar (60 Kpa)
Temperatura de operación: 5-60°C
Puerto de conexión: Acceso paralelo a BPS a ISO
228/1 y BS 2779

b) Instalación:
Instale la unidad con el vaso en una posición vertical en la línea de la
cañería, para que el aire fluya en dirección de las flechas ubicadas sobre
el cuerpo.

c) Operación:
Destornille la manilla de drenaje periódicamente para vaciar todo el
líquido colectado antes que llegue al nivel del plato deflector.
Atornillando el perno de ajuste en el sentido del reloj, la presión
secundaria aumenta. Después de ajustar la presión, apriete la
contratuerca.

d) Mantención:
Cuando el aparato no funciona correctamente:
• Asegúrese que el flujo esté en la correcta dirección:
• Asegúrese que la presión de entrada es más alta que la presión de
salida ajustada.
• Verifique que el asiento principal esté limpio.
• Verifique que el diagrama o el resorte esté dañado.

Cuando el aire se escape de manera continua por la perforación de


alivio, el diafragma puede estar dañado.

Cuando hay gran disminución de flujo de aire o una gran caida de


presión, el filtro tiene que ser limpiado o reemplazado.

• Verifique el nivel de aceite. El nivel de aceite debería estar entre las


indicaciones “min oil level” y “max oil level”.
• Limpie la boquilla de regulación de aceite sacando el tornillo.
Sección 5 ~ Página 8 de 8

Si hay una fuga de aceite alrededor del tornillo, verifique:


• Si el tornillo está demasiado abierto. Si es así, cierrelo a su posición
correcta.
• Si el O-ring está dañado.

PRECAUCIÓN

Para la limpieza no use solventes orgánicos como Lacquer Thinners,


alcoholes, etc. Utilice solo líquidos neutros. Si un adhesivo anaerobio es
utilizado para los fittings, asegúrese que no esté tocando el vaso.
La temperatura y la presión de operación no deberían exceder los
límites marcados.
Sección 6 ~ Página 1 de 275

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION

SECCION 6

INSTRUMENTACION

RB A.S. MAYO 10 0
PREPARO REVISO FECHA REVISION

BELT FILTER 2x73m²

NOMBRE DEL EQUIPO TAG MODELO


COMPAÑIA
73M² BELT FILTER #1 05-820-4223-003 MINERA MILPO

32B / 08-30V
MILPO II
73M² BELT FILTER #2 05-820-4223-004

CONTRATO ORDEN DECOMPRA


DOCUMENTO DELKOR
DELKOR- No:
No: D284-HBF-MO-01
No: 28410 LMCO-0000000794
Sección 6 ~ Página 2 de 275

LISTADO INSTRUMENTOS Y VALVULAS


COMPAÑÍA MINERA MILPO S.A.A.

DOC. Nro. F284-HBF-005

CN 28410

FILTROS BANDA HORIZONTAL 2 x 73m2


32B / 08 – 30 V

DG FA ISSUED FOR 21/06/10 0


COMMENT
PREPARED CHECKED REASON FOR DATE REV
REVISION

DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA LTDA.


1

ITEM TAG Servicio Instrumento Fabricante Alcance Modelo Salida Alarma ó


Rango

HBF Nº3 TAG: 05-850-4223-003

01 FS 01 Agua sello Bomba Vacío Switch de Flujo Cliente 10m3/h


HBF#3
Diam. 3”

02 PS 01 Agua lavado Tela Switch de Presión Cliente 250 kPa

03 PS 02 Aire soplador Switch de Presión BARKSDALE Delkor D1H-H2SS Digital 1kPa

04 PS 03 Vacío Switch de Presión DANFOSS Delkor RT-121 Digital -30kPa

05 PS 04 Aire Instrumentación Switch de Presión Cliente 400kPa

06 LS 01 Receptor de Filtrado Switch de Nivel E+H Delkor LIQUIPHANT M Digital 1/0

FTL50
Delkor ZCK-J1 / ZCK-
07 ZS 01 Descentrado Tela Switch de Carrera TELEMECANIQUE E08 Digital 1/0
Sección 6 ~ Página 3 de 275

08 ZS 02 Descentrado Tela Switch de Carrera TELEMECANIQUE Delkor ZCK-J1 / ZCK- Digital 1/0
E08

09 ZS 03 Descentrado Banda Switch de Carrera TELEMECANIQUE Delkor ZCK-J1 / ZCK- Digital 1/0
E08

10 ZS 04 Descentrado Banda Switch de Carrera TELEMECANIQUE Delkor ZCK-J1 / ZCK- Digital 1/0
E08

11 ZS 05 Alargamiento Tela Switch de Carrera TELEMECANIQUE Delkor ZCK-J1 / ZCK- Digital 1/0
E08

12 HS 01 Emergencia Pull Cord Switch ELMEC Delkor FL512 Digital 1/0


2

13 HS 02 Emergencia Pull Cord Switch ELMEC Delkor FL512 Digital 1/0

14 FIT 01 Agua Lavado Tela/Banda Flujómetro 2 ½” Cliente Promag W50 o Análoga 0 – 10 V


similar 120
3.6 – 120 m3/h 3.6 – 120 m3/h
VAC

15 FIT 02 Agua sello caja vacío Flujómetro 1 ½” E+H Delkor Promag 35 Análoga 0 – 10 V
120
VAC

16 PI 01 Manifold de Vacío Vacuómetro / ½” NPT ITEC Delkor 100P60- N.A. -29 a 0” Hg.
0410057
Diam. 100 mm

17 PI 02 Receptor de Filtrado Vacuómetro / ½” NPT ITEC Delkor 100P60- N.A. -29 a 0” Hg.
0410057
Diam. 100 mm

18 PI 03 Aire Soplador Manómetro BOURDON Delkor MTA-0410476 N.A. 0-6 kPa


HAENNI
Sección 6 ~ Página 4 de 275

19 PI 04 Agua de lavado Manómetro Cliente N.A. 0-1000 kPa

20 LIT 01 Altura de Pulpa Medidor de nivel E+H Delkor FMU 40 Análogo 4 -20 mA
Ultrasónico

21 PN 01 Aire Instrumentación Filtro y Regulador de FESTO Delkor LFR ¼” NPT NA 0 a 1000 kPa
Deltracker Presión manual

22 PN 02 Aire Instrumentación Filtro y Regulador de FESTO Delkor LFR ¼” NPT NA 0 a 1000 kPa
Cilindros Levante Caja Presión manual
Vacío

23 V 01 Agua Lavado Banda Válvula con Actuador BIFFI Delkor 2” FLANGE Digital 120 Vac
3

24 V 02 Agua Lavado Tela Válvula con Actuador BIFFI Delkor 2” FLANGE Digital 120 Vac

25 V 03 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Válvula de Globo Delkor 2” FLANGE N/A N/A


Tela

26 V 04 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Válvula de Globo Delkor 2” FLANGE N/A N/A


Tela

27 V 05 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Válvula de Globo Delkor 2” FLANGE N/A N/A


Tela

28 V 06 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Válvula de Globo Delkor 2” FLANGE N/A N/A


Banda

29 V 07 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Válvula de Globo Cliente N/A N/A

30 V 08 Línea # 12 Air Fan Válvula de Bola Delkor ½” NPT N/A N/A

31 V 09 Línea # 12 Air Fan Válvula de Bola Delkor ½” NPT N/A N/A

32 V 10 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Válvula de Bola Cliente N/A N/A


Sección 6 ~ Página 5 de 275

33 V 11 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Válvula de Bola Cliente N/A N/A

34 V 12 Línea # 5 Agua de sello Válvula de Globo Delkor 1 ½” NPT N/A N/A

35 V 13 Línea # 6 Válvula de Bola Cliente N/A N/A


Instrumentación

36 V 14 Línea # 6 Válvula de Bola Cliente N/A N/A


Instrumentación

37 V 15 Línea# 7 Torre Válvula de Globo Cliente 3” N/A N/A


enfriamiento
4

38 V 16 Línea # 9 Bomba de Válvula de Bola Delkor ½” NPT N/A N/A


Vacío

39 V 17 Línea # 11 Agua de Sello Válvula No Retorno Cliente ½” N/A N/A

40 V 18 Línea # 11 Agua de Sello Válvula Bola Cliente ½” N/A N/A

41 V 19 Línea # 2 Receiver Válvula No Retorno Cliente 4” N/A N/A

42 V 20 Receiver Válvula Bola Delkor ½” NPT N/A N/A

43 V 21 Vaccum Manifold Válvula Bola Cliente ½” NPT N/A N/A

44 V 22 Strainer Válvula Bola Cliente N/A N/A

45 V 23 Strainer Válvula Bola Cliente N/A N/A

46 V 24 Strainer Válvula Bola Cliente N/A N/A

47 V 25 Strainer Válvula Bola Cliente N/A N/A

48 WS 01 Agua Lavado de Strainer Cliente N/A N/A


Sección 6 ~ Página 6 de 275

Tela/Banda

49 WS 02 Agua Lavado de Tela / Strainer Cliente N/A N/A


Banda (Stand by)

50 M2-8517 Temperatura del motor RTD WEG Delkor Pt-100 Análogo 0 – 100 ºC
Fase 1
3 Hilos

51 M2-8517 Temperatura del motor RTD WEG Delkor Pt-100 Análogo 0 – 100 ºC
Fase 2
3 Hilos

52 M2-8517 Temperatura del motor RTD WEG Delkor Pt-100 Análogo 0 – 100 ºC
5

Fase 3
3 Hilos

53 M2-8517 Buje lado ventilador RTD WEG Delkor Pt-100 Análogo 0 – 100 ºC

3 Hilos

54 M2-8517 Buje lado reductor RTD WEG Delkor Pt-100 Análogo 0 – 100 ºC

3 Hilos
Sección 6 ~ Página 7 de 275
6

ITEM TAG Servicio Instrumento Fabricante Alcance Modelo Salida Alarma ó


Rango

HBF Nº3 TAG: 05-850-4223-004

55 FS 02 Agua sello Bomba Vacío Switch de Flujo Cliente 10m3/h

Diam. 3”

56 PS 05 Agua lavado Tela Switch de Presión Cliente 250kPa

57 PS 06 Aire soplador Switch de Presión BARKSDALE Delkor D1H-H2SS Digital 1kPa

58 PS 07 Vacío Switch de Presión DANFOSS Delkor RT-121 Digital -30kPa

59 PS 08 Aire Instrumentación Switch de Presión Cliente 400kPa

60 LS 02 Receptor de Filtrado Switch de Nivel E+H Delkor LIQUIPHANT M Digital 1/0

FTL50
Delkor ZCK-J1 / ZCK-
61 ZS 06 Descentrado Tela Switch de Carrera TELEMECANIQUE E08 Digital 1/0
Sección 6 ~ Página 8 de 275

62 ZS 07 Descentrado Tela Switch de Carrera TELEMECANIQUE Delkor ZCK-J1 / ZCK- Digital 1/0
E08

63 ZS 08 Descentrado Banda Switch de Carrera TELEMECANIQUE Delkor ZCK-J1 / ZCK- Digital 1/0
E08

64 ZS 09 Descentrado Banda Switch de Carrera TELEMECANIQUE Delkor ZCK-J1 / ZCK- Digital 1/0
E08

65 ZS 10 Alargamiento Tela Switch de Carrera TELEMECANIQUE Delkor ZCK-J1 / ZCK- Digital 1/0
E08

66 HS 03 Emergencia Pull Cord Switch ELMEC Delkor FL512 Digital 1/0


7

67 HS 04 Emergencia Pull Cord Switch ELMEC Delkor FL512 Digital 1/0

68 FIT 03 Agua Lavado Tela/Banda Flujómetro 2 ½” Cliente Promag W50 o Análoga 0 – 10 L/h
similar 120
3.6 – 120 m3/h 3.6 – 120 m3/h
VAC

69 FIT 04 Agua sello caja vacío Flujómetro 1 ½” E+H Delkor Promag 35 Análoga 0 – 10 V
120
VAC

70 PI 05 Manifold de Vacío Vacuómetro / ½” ITEC Delkor 100P60- N.A. -29 a 0” Hg.


NPT 0410057

Diam. 100 mm

71 PI 06 Receptor de Filtrado Vacuómetro / ½” ITEC Delkor 100P60- N.A. -29 a 0” Hg.


NPT 0410057

Diam. 100 mm

72 PI 07 Aire Soplador Manómetro BOURDON Delkor MTA-0410476 N.A. 0-6 kPa


Sección 6 ~ Página 9 de 275

HAENNI

73 PI 08 Agua de lavado Manómetro Cliente N.A. 0-1000 kPa

74 LIT 02 Altura de Pulpa Medidor de nivel E+H Delkor FMU 40 Análogo 4 -20 mA
Ultrasonico

75 PN 03 Aire Instrumentación Filtro y Regulador de FESTO Delkor LFR ¼” NPT NA 0 a 1000 kPa
Deltracker Presión manual

76 PN 04 Aire Instrumentación Filtro y Regulador de FESTO Delkor LFR ¼” NPT NA 0 a 1000 kPa
Cilindros Levante Caja Vacío Presión manual
8

77 V 26 Agua Lavado Banda Válvula con Actuador BIFFI Delkor 2” FLANGE Digital 120 Vac

78 V 27 Agua Lavado Tela Válvula con Actuador BIFFI Delkor 2” FLANGE Digital 120 Vac

79 V 28 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Tela Válvula de Globo Delkor 2” FLANGE N/A N/A

80 V 29 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Tela Válvula de Globo Delkor 2” FLANGE N/A N/A

81 V 30 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Tela Válvula de Globo Delkor 2” FLANGE N/A N/A

82 V 31 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Banda Válvula de Globo Delkor 2” FLANGE N/A N/A

83 V 32 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Válvula de Globo Cliente N/A N/A

84 V 33 Línea # 12 Air Fan Válvula de Bola Delkor ½” NPT N/A N/A

85 V 34 Línea # 12 Air Fan Válvula de Bola Delkor ½” NPT N/A N/A

86 V 35 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Válvula de Bola Cliente N/A N/A

87 V 36 Línea # 4 Agua Lavado Válvula de Bola Cliente N/A N/A

88 V 37 Línea # 5 Agua de sello Válvula de Globo Delkor 1 ½” NPT N/A N/A


Sección 6 ~ Página 10 de 275

89 V 38 Línea # 6 Instrumentación Válvula de Bola Cliente N/A N/A

90 V 39 Línea # 6 Instrumentación Válvula de Bola Cliente N/A N/A

91 V 40 Línea# 7 Torre enfriamiento Válvula de Globo Cliente 3” N/A N/A

92 V 41 Línea # 9 Bomba de Vacío Válvula de Bola Delkor ½” NPT N/A N/A

93 V 42 Línea # 11 Agua de Sello Válvula No Retorno Cliente ½” N/A N/A

94 V 43 Línea # 11 Agua de Sello Válvula Bola Cliente ½” NPT N/A N/A


9

95 V 44 Línea # 2 Receiver Válvula No Retorno Cliente 4” N/A N/A

96 V 45 Receiver Válvula Bola Delkor ½” NPT N/A N/A

97 V 46 Vaccum Manifold Válvula Bola Cliente ½” NPT N/A N/A

98 V 47 Strainer Válvula Bola Cliente N/A N/A

99 V 48 Strainer Válvula Bola Cliente N/A N/A

100 V 49 Strainer Válvula Bola Cliente N/A N/A

101 V 50 Strainer Válvula Bola Cliente N/A N/A

102 WS 03 Agua Lavado de Tela/Banda Strainer Cliente N/A N/A

103 WS 04 Agua Lavado de Tela / Banda Strainer Cliente N/A N/A

(Stand by)

104 M2-8537 Temperatura del motor RTD WEG Delkor Pt-100 Análogo 0 – 100 ºC
Fase 1
3 Hilos
Sección 6 ~ Página 11 de 275

105 M2-8537 Temperatura del motor RTD WEG Delkor Pt-100 Análogo 0 – 100 ºC
Fase 2
3 Hilos

106 M2-8537 Temperatura del motor RTD WEG Delkor Pt-100 Análogo 0 – 100 ºC
Fase 3
3 Hilos

107 M2-8537 Buje lado ventilador RTD WEG Delkor Pt-100 Análogo 0 – 100 ºC

3 Hilos
10

108 M2-8537 Buje lado reductor RTD WEG Delkor Pt-100 Análogo 0 – 100 ºC

3 Hilos
Sección 6 ~ Página 12 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 13 de 275

VIGNOLA S.A.
Santiago:Tel 7758385 Fax 7732036 vignosan@vignola.cl
Valparaíso:Tel.351111 Fax 351128 vignoval@vignola.cl
1 ELECTRICA 1-02-01
Talcahuano:Tel.588858 Fax 589102 vignotal@vignola.cl
Antofagasta:Tel 453030 Fax 453039 vignoant@vignola.cl
Marzo 2003

INTERRUPTORES DE PRESION DE ALTA CALIDAD


BARKSDALE CONTROLS DIVISION – U.S.A.

D1X

D1H
DPD1T
B1T 9048

CARACTERISTICAS ELECTRICAS: Actuación por Microswitch, 1 polo, doble efecto, 15 Amp. Ca., 220 ó 380
Volts. Conexión de 1/4". Corta o conecta un circuito con un aumento de presión, en sistemas de fluidos líquidos
o gaseosos.
1. TIPO DIAFRAGMA: Gran sensibilidad, vida 1.000.000 operaciones, conexión 1/4" NPT. HI
Dígito Modelo Escala regulación en PSI Presión Presión Material Cant.
Descendiendo Ascendiendo Prop. psi máxima Actuador switch
Mín. Máx, Mín. Máx. Prop.psi psi
0102001-3 D1H-H2SS 0,018 1,65 0,068 1,7 0,02 a 0,05 3 Inox.17-7 1
0102004-8 D1H-A3SS 0,03 2,89 0,14 3,0 0,07 a 0,15 10 Cu.Berilio 1
0102007-2 D1H-H18SS 0,4 17,80 0,6 18,0 0,12 a 0,26 60 Inox.17-7 1
0102010-2 D1H-A80SS 0,5 76,60 3,9 80,0 1,6 a 3,4 160 Inox.17-7 1
0102013-7 D1H-A150SS 1,5 144,00 7,5 150,0 2,3 a 6,0 300 Inox.17-7 1
0102014-5 D2H-A150SS 1,5 144,00 7,5 150,0 2,3 a 6,0 300 inox.17-7 2
*0102060-9 DIX-A15055-UL 1,5 144,00 7,5 150,0 2,3 a 6,0 300 inox.17-7 1
? Presostato a prueba de explosión para localizaciones peligrosas
? CLASE I: Grupo B; C y D; CLASE II: Grupo E, F y G ? Nema 4,7,9 (para localizaciones 4,7 y 9)

2. TIPO DE TUBO BOURDON. Conexión 1/4" NPT, Para control de equipos de Alta presión. Vida 1.000.000
operaciones.
0102021-8 B21T-H12 50 1180 70 1200 10 a 20 1800 Bronce 1
0102022-8 B2T-H12SS 50 1180 70 1200 10 a 20 1800 Inox.316 2
0102015-3 B2T-H32 160 3170 190 3200 15 a 30 4800 Bronce 2
0102024-2 B1T-H32 160 3170 190 3200 15 a 30 4800 Bronce 1
0102018-8 B2T-A48SS 240 4715 325 4800 40 a 85 7200 Inox.316 2
0102027-7 B1T-A48SS 240 4715 325 4800 40 a 85 7200 Inox.316 1
0102030-7 B1T-A65SS 325 6385 440 6500 54 a 115 9750 Inox. 316 1

3. TIPO DE PISTON: Conexión 1/4" NPT, para control y protección en equipos hidráulicos de alta presión. Alta
frecuencia y larga vida.
0102033-1 9048-5 350 4650 395 5000 43 a 350 10000 Ac.Inox. 1
0102036-6 9048-6 700 9450 815 10000 115 a 550 15000 Ac.Inox. 1

4. TIPO DE PRESION DIFERENCIAL: Conexión 1/4" NPT, entre una presión fija y una variable, entre dos
variables, uso en filtros industriales, calderas rápidas, etc.
0102050-1 DPD1T-H18 0,40 17,75 0,65 18,0 0,1 a 0,25 60 Cu.Berilio 1
0102053-6 DPD1T-A80 0,50 76,50 4,00 80,0 1,6 a 3,5 160 Cu.Berilio 1
0102057-9 DPD1T-A150 1,50 143,50 8,00 150 2,9 a 6,5 300 Cu.Berilio 1
Sección 6 ~ Página 14 de 275

 '.'%64+%# 
+06'4472614'5&'24'5+10
 &+0#/#4%#
5'4+'46
&GUETKREKQP
#EVWCEKÎPRQT/KETQUYKVEJ
RQNQFQDNGGHGEVQ
%QTVCQEQPGEVCWPEKTEWKVQ
EQPWPCWOGPVQFGRTGUKÎP
GPUKUVGOCUFGƀWKFQU
NÈSWKFQUQICUGQUQU
%CRCEKFCF
#8EQPECTICQJOKEC
#8EQPECTICKPFWEVKXC
98EQPEQTTKGPVGEQPVKPWC
6GORGTCVWTCO¶ZKOCFGNƀWKFQ
%
46%
)TCFQFG2TQVGEEKÎP
+2
7UQ
DQODCUFGCIWC
EQORTGUQTGUFGCKTG
ECNFGTCU  (KLCFQTFGRGTKNNC
EQPVTQNFGPKXGN  4CPIQ'UECNC
RTQVGEEKÎPEQPVTCUQDTGRTGUKQPGU  &KUEQ<QPC0GWVTCN
KPUVCNCEKQPGUKPFWUVTKCNGUGVE 46
+06'4472614'5&'24'5+10
4CPIQ &KHGTGPEKC %QPGZKÎPJKNQ
&ÈIKVQ /QFGNQ %ÎFKIQ 7UQ
2TGUKÎP
2UK
2UK OCEJQ$52
 46  C C Π+PFWUVTKCN)GPGTCN
- 46  C C Π+PFWUVTKCN)GPGTCN
 46#  C C Π+PFWUVTKCN)GPGTCN
 
 46  C C Π+PFWUVTKCN)GPGTCN
 46  C C Π+PFWUVTKCN)GPGTCN
 469  C C Π+PFWUVTKCN)GPGTCN
 46  C C Π+PFWUVTKCN)GPGTCN

- 46  C C Π+PFWUVTKCN)GPGTCN
 4$  C (KLQ Π2NCPVCU8CRQT

 46#9  C (KLQ Π2NCPVCU8CRQT
 
 469  C (KLQ Π2NCPVCU8CRQT
 
- 46  C C Π+PFWUVTKCN)GPGTCN
#RVQRCTCVTCDCLCTEQP
COQPÈCEQ &KOGPUKQPGU
2WGFGVTCDCLCTEQOQ
8CEWQUVCVQQ2TGUQUVCVQ

2CTCRTGUKÎPFGUEGPFGPVG

 2CTCRTGUKÎPCUEGPFGPVG

+06'4472614'5&'8#%+1 46
4CPIQ &KHGTGPEKC %QPGZKÎPJKNQ
&ÈIKVQ /QFGNQ %ÎFKIQ 7UQ
2TGUKÎP
2UK
2UK OCEJQ$52
 46  Œ*IC ŒCŒ*I Œ +PFWUVTKCN)GPGTCN
  %QPVCEVQGNÃEVTKEQFGTGRWGUVQ
EQPTGUGVOCPWCN

8#.2#4#+51 5#06+#)1 6#.%#*7#01 #061(#)#56# 27'461/1066


6GN(CZ 6GN(CZ 6GN(CZ 6GN(CZ 6GN(CZ
'OCKNXKIPQXCN"XKIPQNCEN 'OCKNXKIPQUCP"XKIPQNCEN 'OCKNXKIPQVCN"XKIPQNCEN 'OCKNXKIPQCPV"XKIPQNCEN 'OCKNXKIPQOQPVV"XKIPQNCEN
Sección 6 ~ Página 15 de 275

Operating Instructions

Liquiphant M FTL50/51-########7#
de - Füllstandgrenzschalter
en - Level Limit Switch
fr - Détecteur de niveau
es - Detector de nivel
it - Interruttore di livello
nl - Niveauschakelaar

KA163F/00/a6/03.06
52007095

de - Inhalt en - Contents fr - Sommaire


Sicherheitshinweise 4 Notes on Safety 4 Conseils de sécurité 4
Behandlung 6 Handling 6 Manipulation 6
Geräte-Identifikation 8 Device Identification 8 Dénomination 8
Verwendung 14 Application 14 Utilisation 14
Messeinrichtung 15 Measuring system 15 Ensemble de détection de niveau 15
Einbau 19 Installation 19 Montage 19
Einstellungen 28 Setting-up 28 Réglage 28
Lichtsignale 33 Light signals 33 Signaux lumineux 33
Anschluss 34 Connections 34 Raccordement 34
Wartung, Reinigung 56 Maintenance, Cleaning 56 Entretien, Nettoyage 56
Technische Daten 57 Technical Data 57 Caractéristiques techniques 57
Zubehör 59 Accessories 59 Accessoires 59
Fehlersuche 64 Trouble-shooting 65 Recherche de défauts 66
Ersatzteile 72 Spare parts 72 Pièces de rechange 72
Reparatur 74 Repair 74 Réparations 74
Ergänzende Dokumentation 75 Supplementary Documentation 75 Documentation complémentaire 75

" Achtung!
= verboten;
führt zu fehlerhaftem Betrieb
" Caution!
= forbidden;
leads to incorrect operation
" Attention!
= interdit; peut provoquer
des dysfonctionnements
oder Zerstörung. or destruction. ou la destruction.
2 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 16 de 275
es - Indice it - Indice nl - Inhoud
Notas sobre seguridad 5 Note sulla sicurezza 5 Veiligheidsinstructies 5
Modo de empleo 6 Accorgimenti 6 Behandeling 6
Identificación del equipo 8 Identificazione dello strumento 8 Instrument- identificatie 8
Aplicación 14 Applicazione 14 Toepassing 14
Sistema de medida 15 Sistema di misura 15 Meetopstelling 15
Montaje 19 Montaggio 19 Inbouw 19
Ajuste 28 Messa in servizio 28 Instellingen 28
Señales luminosas 33 Segnali luminosi 33 Lichtsignalen 33
Conexiones 34 Collegamenti elettrici 34 Aansluiting 34
Mantenimiento, Limpieza 56 Manutenzione, Pulizia 56 Onderhoud, Reiniging 56
Datos técnicos 57 Dati tecnici 57 Technische gegevens 57
Accesorios 59 Accessori 59 Toebehoren 59
Identificación de fallos 67 Individuazione e eliminazione Fout zoeken 69
Repuestos 72 delle anomalie 68 Reserve-onderdelen 72
Reparaciones 74 Ricambi 72 Reparatie 74
Documentación suplementaria 75 Riparare 74 Aanvullende documentatie 75
Documentazione supplementare 75

" Atención!
= Prohibido; peligro
de mal funcionamiento
" Attenzione!
= Vietato; pericolo
di malfunzionamento
" Opgelet!
= verboden;
leidt tot foutieve werking
o de destrucción. o di distruzione. of storing.
Endress+Hauser 3

de - Sicherheitshinweise en - Notes on Safety fr - Conseils de sécurité


Der Liquiphant M FTL50, FTL51 The Liquiphant M FTL50, FTL51 Le Liquiphant M FTL50, FTL51
darf nur als Füllstandgrenzschalter is designed for level limit detection doit être exclusivement utilisé
für Flüssigkeiten verwendet in liquids. comme détecteur de niveau pour
werden. If used incorrectly it is possible that liquides.
Bei unsachgemäßem Einsatz application-related dangers may Il peut être source de danger en
können Gefahren von ihm arise. cas d’utilisation non conforme aux
ausgehen. The level limit switch prescriptions.
Das Gerät darf nur von Liquiphant M FTL50, FTL51 may L’appareil ne doit être installé,
qualifiziertem und be installed, connected, raccordé, mise en service et
autorisiertem Fachpersonal commissioned, operated and entretenu que par un personnel
unter strenger Beachtung dieser maintained by qualified and qualifié et autorisé, qui tiendra
Betriebsanleitung, authorised personnel only, compte des indications contenues
der einschlägigen Normen, under strict observance of dans la présente mise en service,
der gesetzlichen Vorschriften these operating instructions, des normes en vigueur
und der Zertifikate any relevant standards, et des certificats disponibles
(je nach Anwendung) legal requirements, and, (selon l’application).
eingebaut, angeschlossen, where appropriate, the certificate. Installer un commutateur réseau à
in Betrieb genommen und Install an easily accessible power proximité immédiate de l’appareil,
gewartet werden. switch in the proximity of the en veillant à ce qu’il soit facilement
In der Gebäudeinstallation ist ein device. accessible.
Netzschalter für das Gerät leicht Mark the power switch as a Marquer ce commutateur comme
erreichbar in dessen Nähe zu disconnector for the device. prise de coupure de l’appareil.
installieren.
Er ist als Trennvorrichtung für das
Gerät zu kennzeichnen.

4 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 17 de 275
es - Notas sobre seguridad it - Note sulla sicurezza nl - Veiligheidsinstructies
El detector de nivel Il Liquiphant M FTL50, FTL51 Gebruik de Liquiphant M
Liquiphant M FTL50, FTL51 è particolarmente studiato per FTL50, FTL51 alleen als
ha sido diseñado para la detección l'impiego come soglia di livello in niveauschakelaar voor vloeistoffen.
de límite en fluidos. liquidi. Indien niet correct gebruikt
Su empleo inapropiado puede Un'installazione non corretta può kunnen gevaarlijke situaties
resultar peligroso. determinare pericolo. ontstaan.
El equipo deberá ser montado, Lo strumento può essere montato Het instrument alleen door
conectado, instalado y mantenido solamente da personale gekwalificeerd en
única y exclusivamente por qualificato ed autorizzato. geautoriseerd personeel laten
personal cualificado y La messa in esercizio e la inbouwen, aansluiten, in bedrijf
autorizado, bajo rigurosa manutenzione devono rispettare nemen en onderhouden.
observación de las presentes le indicazioni di collegamento, Neem de instructies in deze
instrucciones de servicio, le norme e i certificati di seguito Inbedrijfstellingsvoorschriften,
de las normativas y riportati. de desbetreffende normen,
legislaciones vigentes, Installare un interuttore per de wettelijke voorschriften en
así como de los certificados l'alimentazione in prossimità del eventuele certificaten in acht.
(dependiendo de la aplicación). dispositivo. Installeer een makkelijk bereikbare
Instalar un interruptor de fácil Marcare l'interuttore come voedingschakelaar in de nabijheid
acceso en las proximidades del disconnessione del dispositivo. van het instrument.
equipo. Kenmerk de voedingschakelaar
Identificar el interruptor como specifiek voor het instrument.
desconectador del equipo.

Endress+Hauser 5

de - Behandlung
Am Gehäuse, Flansch oder
Verlängerungsrohr anfassen.
en - Handling
Hold by housing, flange or
extension tube.
fr - Manipulation
Tenir par le boîtier, la bride ou
le tube prolongateur.
es - Modo de empleo
Coger por el cabezal, brida o
tubo de extensión.
it - Accorgimenti
Afferrare la custodia,
per la flangia o
per il tubo di estensione.
nl - Behandeling
Vastpakken via behuizing,
flens of verlengbuis.

6 Endress+Hauser
8
Endress+Hauser
ENDRESS+HAUSER

strumento
LIQUIPHANT M

fr - Dénomination
Order Code
FTL51
FTL5#–########## #### mm

it - Identificazione dello
en - Device Identification
de - Geräte-Identifikation
in

nl - Instrument-identificatie
es - Identificación del equipo
L

1
A *
B ATEX II 3 G EEx nC II T6, WHG
3
ATEX II 3 D T85°C*
C ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6, WHG
3
ATEX II 3 D T85°C*
1
D * , WHG
E ATEX II 1/2 G EEx de IIC T6, WHG
F ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6, WHG
3
ATEX II 1/2 D T80°C*
Sección 6 ~ Página 18 de 275

G ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6


3
ATEX II 1/2 D T80°C*
H ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6
I ATEX II 1/2 G EEx de IIC T6
J ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6, WHG
K ATEX II 1/2 G EEx d IIC T6
L ATEX II 1/2 G EEx d IIC T6, WHG
P FM IS, Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1, Gr. A-G
Q FM XP, Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1, Gr. B-G, E5 => Gr. A-G
R FM NI, Cl. I, Div. 2, Gr. A-D
es - No torcer

No alargar
No acortar

S CSA IS, Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1, Gr. A-G


Non piegare
en - Do not bend
Nicht kürzen

Niet inkorten

T CSA XP, Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1, Gr. A-G


Niet verlengen
nl - Niet verbuigen
Do not shorten

U CSA General purpose


de - Nicht verbiegen

Do not lengthen

Ne pas rallonger
Nicht verlängern

fr - Ne pas déformer
Ne pas raccourcir

V TIIS Ex ia IIC T3
W TIIS Ex d IIB T3
X TIIS Ex ia IIC T6
TIIS Ex d IIC T3
it - Non stringere o allargare

7
Non accorciare o allungare

8 TIIS Ex d IIC T6
Y 2
*
7

Endress+Hauser
10
A##
B##
C##
Flansche / Flanges / Brides / 12 13

Endress+Hauser
D##
ENDRESS+HAUSER Brida / Flangia / Flens
LIQUIPHANT M F##
K##
N##
Order Code GE2 R ¾, DIN 2999, 316L
FTL51 GE5 R ¾, DIN 2999, AlloyC4
FTL5#–########## #### mm GF2 R 1, DIN 2999, 316L
in GF5 R 1, DIN 2999, AlloyC4 max. 100 bar,
bar, 150 °C
GM2 NPT ¾, ANSI, 316L
GM5 NPT ¾, ANSI, AlloyC4
L GN2 NPT 1, ANSI, 316L
GN5 NPT 1, ANSI, AlloyC4
GQ2 G ¾, ISO 228, 316L
GQ5 G ¾, ISO 228, AlloyC4
GR2 max. 100 bar
bar,, 150 °C
G 1, ISO 228, 316L
2 GR5 G 1, ISO 228, AlloyC4
AA *, Ra < 3.2 μm/80 grit (FTL50)
BB ……. mm, 316L, Ra < 3.2 μm/80 grit
BE ……. mm, AlloyC4, Ra < 3.2 μm/80 grit "T"
CB ……. in, 316L, Ra < 3.2 μm/80 grit "p" GW2 G 1, ISO 228, 316L max. 25 bar
bar,, 150 °C
CE ……. in, AlloyC4, Ra < 3.2 μm/80 grit
DB "L II", 316L, Ra < 3.2 μm/80 grit max. 40 bar,
bar, 100 °C
DE "L II", AlloyC4, Ra < 3.2 μm/80 grit
2
IA *, + "T" (FTL50)
JB ……. mm, 316L + "T" TC2 DN25-38 (1...1½"), ISO 2852, 316L

L
JE ……. mm, AlloyC4 + "T" Tri-Clamp max. 16 bar
bar,, 120 °C

(FTL51)
KB ……. in, 316L + "T" TE2 DN40-51 (2"), ISO 2852, 316L max. 2 bar,
bar, 150 °C
KE ……. in, AlloyC4 + "T" Tri-Clamp
LB "L II", 316L + "T" 2
LE "L II", AlloyC4 + "T" YY9 *
Sección 6 ~ Página 19 de 275

2
QA *, + "p" (FTL50)
RB ……. mm, 316L + "p"
RE ……. mm, AlloyC4 + "p"
SB ……. in, 316L + "p" 10 11
SE ……. in, AlloyC4 + "p"
TB "L II", 316L + "p"
TE "L II", AlloyC4 + "p"
2
YY *

A FEL50A, PROFIBUS PA
1 FEL51, 19…253 V AC
2 FEL52, 10… 55 V DC, PNP 1
4 FEL54, 19…253 V AC, 19…55 V DC, DPDT * ohne / without / sans / sin / senza / zonder
5 FEL55, 11… 36 V DC, 8/16 mA 2
* andere / others / autres / otros / altri / andere
6 FEL56, NAMUR, L-H
36. . . . 55 3
7 FEL57, PFM * nicht gültig für PBT / not valid for PBT / non valable pour PBT /
8 FEL58, NAMUR, H-L no es válido para
para PBT / non valido per PBT / niet geldig voor PBT
9 2
*
9

Endress+Hauser
12
E7 T13, IP66, NPT ¾ T13
F7 T13, IP66, G½ Alu/sep.

nl - Flens
es - Brida
fr - Brides

it - Flangia
G7 T13, IP66, M20

en - Flanges
2

de - Flansche
Endress+Hauser
Y9 *

#3 Kompakt-Gehäuse
Komp akt-Gehäuse / compact
compact housing / KA220
boîtier compact
compact / cabezal compacto /
compacto
testa
testa compatt
compatta
a / compacte
compacte behuizing

#4 PBT
#5 Alu KA143
#6 316L

ANSI B 16.5 1
A *
C EN 10204 - 3.1, 316L
AA2 1¼", 150 lbs, RF
RF,, 316/316L
N EN 10204 - 3.1, NACE MR0175, 316L
AB2 1¼", 300 lbs, RF,
RF, 316/316L (FTL51)
P 100 bar (FTL51)
AC2 1½", 150 lbs, RF
RF,, 316/316L
R 100 bar 100 bar,
bar, EN 10204 - 3.1, NACE MR0175, 316L (FTL51)
AD2 1½", 300 lbs, RF, 316/316L (FTL51)
S GL/ABS marine certificate (FTL51: max. 1600 mm)
AE2 2", 150 lbs, RF
RF,, 316/316L 2
AE5 Y *
2", 150 lbs, RF,
RF, AlloyC4 >316/316L
AF2 2", 300 lbs, RF
RF,, 316/316L
AG2 2", 600 lbs, RF
RF,, 316/316L (FTL51)
AJ2 2½", 300 lbs, RF
RF,, 316/316L (FTL51)
AL2 3", 150 lbs, RF
RF,, 316/316L
AM2 3", 300 lbs, RF, 316/316L (FTL51)
Sección 6 ~ Página 20 de 275

AN2 3”, 600 lbs, RF,


RF, 316/316L (FTL51)
AP2 4", 150 lbs, RF
RF,, 316/316L
AQ2 4", 300 lbs, RF
RF,, 316/316L (FTL51)
AR2 4", 600 lbs, RF
RF,, 316/316L (FTL51)
A82 1", 150 lbs, RF,
RF, 316/316L 1
* ohne / without / sans / sin / senza / zonder
2
* andere / others / autres / otros / altri / andere
EN 1092-1
“L II” Schaltpunkt / Switchpoint / Point de commutation
commutation /
BA2 DN32, PN6 A, 316L
Punto de conmutación
conmutación / Punto di commutazione
commutazione / Schakelpunt
BB2 DN32, PN25/40 A, 316L
BC2 DN40, PN6 A, 316L Liquiphant II FTL 360/365, FDL 30/35
BD2 DN40, PN25/40 A, 316L
BE2 DN50, PN6 A, 316L
“T” Temperaturdist
emperaturdistanzstück
anzstück / Temperature spacer
spacer /
BG2 DN50, PN25/40 A, 316L
Elément de refroidissement / Tramo disipador
disipador detemperatura /
BH2 DN65, PN6 A, 316L
Distanziale
Distanziale per temperatura / Temperatuurreductiestuk
BJ2 DN50, PN100 A, 316L (FTL51)
BK2 DN65, PN25/40 A, 316L
“p” Druckdichte Durchführung / Pressure sealed bushing /
BM2 DN80, PN10/16 A, 316L
Entrée résistant
résistant à la pression / Extensión resistente a la presión /
BN2 DN80, PN25/40 A, 316L
Passacavo a tenutadi
tenutadi pressione / Gasdichte doorvoering
BQ2 DN100, PN10/16 A, 316L
BR2 DN100, PN25/40 A, 316L
11

Endress+Hauser
14
B12 DN80, PN100 A, 316L (FTL51)
B82 DN25, PN25/40 A, 316L
CA2 DN32, PN6 B1, 316L
CA5 DN32, PN6, AlloyC4 >316L

liquides
CE2 DN50, PN6 B1, 316L

Endress+Hauser
CE5 DN50, PN6, AlloyC4 >316L

fr - Utilisation

es - Aplicación

nl - Toepassing
Flüssigkeiten
en - Application
CG2 DN50, PN25/40 B1, 316L

de - Verwendung

it - Applicazione
CG5 DN50, PN25/40, AlloyC4 >316L
CJ2 DN50, PN100 B2, 316L (FTL51)
CN2 DN80, PN25/40 B1, 316L
CN5 DN80, PN25/40, AlloyC4 >316L

Grenzstanddetektion in
CQ2 DN100, PN10/16 B1, 316L
CQ5 DN100, PN10/16, AlloyC4 >316L

Controllo livello nei liquidi


C12 DN80, PN100 B2, 316L (FTL51)

Détection de niveau dans les

Niveaudetectie in vloeistoffen
Detección de nivel en líquidos
Level limit detection in liquids
C82 DN25, PN25/40 B1, 316L
C85 DN25, PN25/40, AlloyC4 >316L
DG2 DN50, PN40 B1, 316L
DN2 DN80, PN40 B1, 316L
D82 DN25, PN40 B1, 316L
FG2 DN50, PN40 C, 316L
NG2 DN50, PN40 D, 316L

JIS B2220

KA2 10K 25, RF,


RF, 316L
KC2 10K 40, RF,
RF, 316L
KE2 10K 50, RF,
RF, 316L
KE5 10K 50, RF,
RF, AlloyC4 >316L
KL2 10K 80, RF,
RF, 316L
KP2 10K 100, RF,
RF, 316L
Sección 6 ~ Página 21 de 275

"T"
13

Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 22 de 275
de - Messeinrichtung
Order code:
FTL5# - # ### ## # ## #
für direkten Anschluss
en - Measuring system
for direct connection
fr - Ensemble de détection
de niveau
pour raccordement direct
Elektronikeinsätze es - Sistema de medida
Electronic inserts FEL51 para conexión directa
Electronique FEL52
Electrónica FEL54 it - Sistema di misura
Inserti elettronici per connessione diretta
Elektronica-insert
nl - Meetopstelling
voor directe aansluiting

*) *) Externe Last
External load
Charge externe
Carga externa
Carico esterno
Externe belasting

Endress+Hauser 15

de - Messeinrichtung
für Anschluss über Schaltgerät
en - Measuring system Order code:
for connection via switching unit FTL5# - # ### ## # ## #
fr - Ensemble de détection
de niveau
pour raccordement via détecteur
es - Sistema de medida
para conexión vía interruptores
it - Sistema di misura Elektronikeinsätze
per connessione mediante Electronic inserts FEL55
unità di commutazione Electronique FEL56
Electrónica FEL57
nl - Meetopstelling Inserti elettronici FEL58
voor aansluiting aan een Elektronica-insert
schakelversterker

16 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 23 de 275

Ex i

*)
FTL…,
SIF…, SIN…,
FXN…


EX EX

*) Schaltgerät, SPS, Trennverstärker


Switching unit, PLC, isolating amplifier
Détecteur, API, convertisseur/séparateur
Interruptor, PLC, amplificador aislado
Unità di commutazione, PLC, barriera di separazione
Schakelversterker, PLC, scheidingsversterker

Endress+Hauser 17

de - Messeinrichtung
Order code:
für Anschluss an PROFIBUS PA FTL5# - # ### ## # ## #
en - Measuring system
for connection to PROFIBUS PA
fr - Ensemble de détection
de niveau
pour le raccordement à
PROFIBUS PA Elektronikeinsatz
Electronic insert
es - Sistema de medida Electronique FEL50A
para conexión a PROFIBUS PA Electrónica
Inserto elettronico
it - Sistema di misura Elektronica-insert
per connessione a PROFIBUS PA
nl - Meetopstelling
voor aansluiting aan PROFIBUS PA
Ex i
Segmentkoppler
Segment coupler
Coupleur
SPS,
de segments
PLC,
Acoplador segmento API
Segment coupler
Segment koppeling

EX EX

18 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 24 de 275
de - Einbau
Schaltpunkt in Abhängigkeit
vom Einbau
en - Installation

(0.51 in)
Switchpoint depends

~13 mm
on mounting position
fr - Montage

(1.42 in)
~36 mm
Point de commutation
en fonction de l’implantation
es - Montaje
Punto de conmutación
dependiendo de la posición
de montaje
it - Montaggio
Punto di commutazione
in funzione della posizione
(0.16 in)

di montaggio
~ 4 mm

nl - Inbouw
Schakelpunt afhankelijk
van inbouw

Endress+Hauser 19

de - Einbaubeispiele
ν = 0…2000 mm²/s
in Abhängigkeit von der
(ν = 0…2000 cSt)
Viskosität Q der Flüssigkeit
en - Mounting examples
as a function of liquid viscosity Q
fr - Exemples d’implantation
dépendant de la viscosité Q
du liquide *
es - Ejemplos de montaje min. DN 50
*
dependiendo de la viscosidad Q (min. 2")
del líquido
min. 25 mm
it - Esempi di montaggio (min. 1 in)
come funzione di viscosità Q
del liquido *entgraten / deburr / ébarber / libre / sbavare / ontbramen

nl - Inbouwvoorbeelden ν = 0…10000 mm²/s


afhankelijk van de viscositeit Q (ν = 0…10000 cSt)
van de vloeistof

min. 40 mm
(min. 1.6 in)

20 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 25 de 275
de - Ansatzbildung berücksichtigen.
Schwinggabel darf Ansatz nicht
berühren.
en - Consider build-up.
Fork may not contact the build-up.
fr - Tenir compte du colmatage.
Fourche ne doit pas entrer en

*
* contact avec le dépôt.
es - Tener en cuenta las adherencias.
Las horquillas no deben estar en
contacto con las adherencias.
*Abstand! / Distance! / Distance! / ¡Distancia! / Distanza! / Afstand! it - Tenere conto dei depositi.
La forcella non deve entrare in
contatto con i depositi.
nl - Rekening houden met aangroei.
Trilvork mag de aangroei niet
aanraken.

Endress+Hauser 21

de - Bei dynamischer Belastung


abstützen
en - In cases of dynamic forces support
fr - En cas de contraintes dynamiques,
étayer le tube
es - En caso de cargas dinámicas altas
debe ser apoyado
it - In caso di carichi dinamici,
rinforzare con un supporto
meccanico
nl - Bij mechanische belasting
verstevigen

22 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 26 de 275
de - Freiraum vorsehen
"T" = mit Temperaturdistanzstück für isolierten Tank en - Allow clearance
"T" = with temperature spacer for insulated tanks
fr - Prévoir un espace libre
"T" = avec élément de refroidissement pour réservoir isolé
"T" = con tramo disipador de temperatura para tanques aislados es - Prever espacio
"T" = con distanziale di temperatura per serbatoi isolati
"T" = met temperatuurreductiestuk voor geïsoleerde tanks it - Lasciare spazio per estrazione
nl - Ruimte vrijhouden
.. .... ..
........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..................
.. ...................................................................................................... ...... ...... ...... .... .. .. .

.. ......................
.. .. .. ..
.. ......
.. ......
......
......
......
.. ..
......
"T"

.. ..
......
......
.. ..
......
.... ..
.. ..
......
.... ..
.. ..
......
.... ..
..
......
..
..
Endress+Hauser 23

de - Schwinggabel ausrichten:
Markierung oben oder unten
en - Orientation of fork tines:
Marking above or below
fr - Orientation des lames vibrantes:
Repères en haut ou en bas
es - Orientación de la horquilla:
Marca arriba o abajo
it - Allineamento della forcella:
Marcatura in alto o in basso
nl - Vork uitrichten:
Markering boven of onder

24 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 27 de 275
de - Liquiphant einschrauben.
G ¾, 32 mm (1¼")* Nicht am Gehäuse drehen.
G 1, 41 mm (15 8")*
en - Screw Liquiphant into
process connection.
Don’t use housing to turn.
fr - Visser le Liquiphant.
Ne pas se servir du boîtier.
*
es - Roscar el Liquiphant a la conexión
a proceso.

41
No girar el cabezal.
it - Avvitare il Liquiphant all'attacco
di processo.
Allo scopo non utilizzare la
custodia.
NPT ¾, R ¾, G ¾, 32 mm (1¼")*
NPT 1, R 1, G 1, 41 mm (1 5 8")*
! oben oder unten
above or below nl - Schroef de Liquiphant in
en haut ou en bas de procesaansluiting.
arriba o abajo
sopra o sotto Draai hierbij niet aan de behuizing.
boven of onder

41

PT FE *
TE
F LO N
A B

Endress+Hauser 25

de - Ausrichten in Rohrleitungen:
Markierung in Fließrichtung
en - Orientation in pipes:
Marking in direction of flow
fr - Orientation dans une conduite:
Repère dans le sens de
l’écoulement
es - Montaje y orientación dentro
de tuberías:
Marca en dirección del caudal ø min. 50 mm max. 5 m/s
(ø min. 2")
it - Allineamento per montaggio (max. 200 in/s)
in tubazioni:
Marcatura nella direzione
del flusso
nl - Opstelling in leidingen:
Markering in de stroomrichting

26 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 28 de 275
de - Kabeleinführung ausrichten
en - Cable gland orientation
fr - Positionnement de l’entrée
de câble
es - Ajuste del prensaestopa
it - Posizionamento del passacavo
nl - Kabelinvoer uitrichten

°
00
3

°
00

3

Endress+Hauser 27

de - Einstellungen
Elektronikraum öffnen 1. 2.
en - Setting-up FTL50, FTL51
Open the electronics compartment
fr - Réglage
Ouvrir le compartiment de FEL.. Ex d:
l’électronique
es - Ajuste
Abrir el compartimento electrónico
min.
it - Messa in servizio 17 min
Aprire il compartimento
elettronico
nl - Instellingen
Elektronicaruimte openen
3.

U= 0 V

28 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 29 de 275
de - Minimum-/Maximum-
Sicherheitsschaltung
en - Minimum/maximum
fail-safe mode
fr - Sécurité minimum/maximum.
es - Conmutador de seguridad
mín./máx.
it - Selezione della modalità
di sicurezza min./max.
nl - Minimum/maximum
veiligheidsschakeling
Max.
Max.

U= 0 V

Min.
Min.

Endress+Hauser 29

de - Dichte der Flüssigkeit.


Dichte U gemessen in g/cm³ FEL51, FEL52, FEL54,
oder in kg/l. FEL55, FEL56, FEL57, FEL58

en - Liquid density.
Density U measured in g/cm³
or in kg/l.
fr - Densité du liquide. 
0.7
Unité de mesure de la densité U : kg
> 0.7 1l
g/cm³ ou kg/l.
es - Densidad de líquidos. 1 l (1 dm³) = min 0.7 kg
Densidad U medida en g/cm³ (1 imp.gal = min. 7.0 lbs)
o en kg/l. (1 US. gal = min. 5.9 lbs)
it - Densità del liquido. Standard / Standard / Standard /
Densità U misurata in g/cm³ Estándar / Standard / Standaard
o in kg/l.
nl - Dichtheid van de vloeistof.
Dichtheid U gemeten in g/cm³
U= 0 V

of in kg/l. 0.5
kg
1l

> 0.5 1 l (1 dm³) = 0.5…0.7 kg


( 0.5…0.7) (1 imp.gal = 5.0…0.7 lbs)
(1 US. gal = 4.2…5.9 lbs)

z.B. Propan / e. g. Propane / Exemple: Propane /


Ejemplo: propano / Esempio: propano / bijv. propaan

30 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 30 de 275
de - Selbsttest FEL57
FEL57 (Funktion siehe Seite 48, 49
und Schaltgerät)
en - Selftest FEL57
(see page 48, 49 and
STD Standard switching unit for sequence)
Standard
Standard
fr - Auto-test FEL57
Estándar (voir pages 48, 49 et détecteur)
Standard es - Prueba automática FEL57
Standaard
(ver pág. 48, 49 e interruptor
~8s para secuencia)
it - Prova automatica FEL57
Ex d: (vds. pag. 48, 49 e
unità di commutazione)
U= 0 V nl - Functietest FEL57
– + Mit Korrosionsprüfung (zie voor functie pag 48, 49
With corrosion test en schakelversterker)
Schaltgerät ~ 41 s Avec test de corrosion
Switching unit Con prueba de corrosión
Détecteur Con test di corrosione
Interruptor Met corrosietest
Unità di
commutazione
Schakelversterker EXT
– +

Endress+Hauser 31

de - Geräteadresse einstellen
(Einstellung der Parameter FEL50A
siehe BA141F)
en - Setting Device Address
(Setting the parameters,
see BA141F)
fr - Réglage de l’adresse d’appareil
ON 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 SW
(Réglage des paramètres
OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 HW
voir BA141F)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
es - Configuración de la dirección
del equipo
Beispiel / Example / Exemple / Ejemplo /
(Ver configuración parámetros Esempio / Bijv. :
en BA141F)
2 + 8 = 10 = Adresse
it - Impostare indirizzo del dispositivo Address
(Per impostazione parametri Adresse
vds. BA141F) Segmentkoppler Dirección
Segment coupler Indirizzo
nl - Instrumentadres instellen Coupleur de segments Adres
(Parameter instelling zie BA141F) Acoplador segmento
Segment coupler
Segment koppeling

z. B. SPS / e. g. PLC /
p. e. API / por ej. PLC /
p. e. PLC / bijv. PLC

32 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 31 de 275
de - Lichtsignale
Füllstand variieren en - Light signals
Vary level FEL
Varier le niveau fr - Signaux lumineux
Nivel variable
Variare livello
es - Señales luminosas
Niveau variëren it - Segnali luminosi
nl - Lichtsignalen

GN RD
Leuchtdioden / LEDs / DEL / LEDs / LED / LED’s
(YE)

Betrieb / Stand-by / Fonctionnement /


Reposo / Attesa / stand-by
Kontrolle
Schaltzustand / Switching status / Etat de commutation / Check
Estado conexión / Stato di commutazione / schakelstand Contrôle
Comprobar
FEL57, FEL50A: Bedeckung / Covering / Recouvrement / Controllo
EX
Cubierto / Copertura / bedekking Controle

leuchtet / on / allumée / iluminado / on / aan

blinkt / flashes / clignote / parpadea / lampeggia / knippert


EX
aus / off / éteinte / apagado / off / uit

Ausgangssignal / Output signal / Signal de sortie /


Señal de salida / Segnale uscita / uitgangssignaal

EX
Störung / Fault / Défaut / Fallo / Guasto / storing

Endress+Hauser 33

de - Anschluss
en - Connections Nationale Normen und Vorschriften beachten!
Note national regulations!
fr - Raccordement Respecter les lois et règles locales en vigueur!
Considere reglamentaciones nacionales
es - Conexiones Osservare le norme nazionali!
it - Collegamenti elettrici Nationale voorschriften in acht nemen!
nl - Aansluiting

max. 4 mm²

max. 2.5 mm² (max. AWG 12)

(max. AWG 14)

M20x1.5

max. 4 mm²
ø 5…9 mm
(ø 0.2…0.35 in) (max. AWG 12)

34 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 32 de 275
de - Eingebauter Elektronikeinsatz
en - Integrated electronic insert
Siehe Typenschild X FEL..
See nameplate X FEL.. fr - Electronique intégrée
Voir plaque signalétique X FEL.. es - Electrónica integrada
Ver placa de indentificación X FEL.. it - Inserto elettronico integrato
Vedere targhetta X FEL..
Zie typeplaatje X FEL.. nl - Ingebouwde elektronica-unit

FEL..

Endress+Hauser 35

de - Anschluss FEL51
Zweileiter-
Wechselstromanschluss
* Externe Last R muss
angeschlossen werden
External load R must
en - Connections FEL51 be connected
Two-wire AC connection
Charge externe R doit
fr - Raccordement FEL51 être raccordée
Raccordement 2 fils La carga externa R
1 2

courant alternatif debe estar conectada


es - Conexiones FEL51 Il carico esterno R
Conexión a corriente alterna deve essere connesso
a dos hilos Externe belasting R
moet aangesloten
it - Collegamenti elettrici FEL51 EX worden
Collegamento bifilare
con corrente alternata min.
19 V
nl - Aansluiting FEL51
EX
2- draads
R
wisselspanningsaansluiting
R ILmax. 1.5 A
F *
1A t
IL 40 ms

" Zerstörung
Destruction
Destruction
ILmax. 350 mA
permanent
max. 89 VA / 253 V
t

L1 N N PE max. 8.4 VA / 24 V
Destrucción
(Ground)
Distruzione min. 2.5 VA / 253 V (10 mA)
U~ max. 253 V (AC)
Storing 50/60 Hz
min. 0.5 VA / 24 V (20 mA)

36 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 33 de 275
de - Funktion FEL51
FEL51
en - Function FEL51
fr - Fonction FEL51
es - Funcionamiento FEL51
12
it - Funzione FEL51
nl - Functie FEL51

GN RD FEL51

IL
L1 1 2 N
U R

Max. < 3.8 mA


L1 1 2 N
R
IL
L1 1 2 N
U R

Min.
< 3.8 mA
L1 1 2 N
R

< 3.8 mA
L1 1 2 N
R 'UFEL51 max. 12 V
Endress+Hauser 37

de - Anschluss FEL52
Gleichstromanschluss (PNP) auch für DI-Module
also for DI modules
en - Connections FEL52
DC connection (PNP) également pour des
modules DI
fr - Raccordement FEL52
también para módulos DI
Courant continu (PNP)
anche per DI modules
es - Conexiones FEL52
1 2 3 (+) aan de DI- module
Alimentación CC (PNP)
it - Collegamenti elettrici FEL52 EN 61131- 2
Collegamento CC (PNP)
nl - Aansluiting FEL52 EX
Gelijkspanningsaansluiting (PNP)

F
0.5A R
EX

R = externe Last
external load
charge externe
carga exterior
carico esterno
L+ L– IL externe belasting

U–
… 10…55 V (DC)
Imax. 350 mA
Umax. 55 V

38 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 34 de 275
de - Funktion FEL52
FEL52
en - Function FEL52
fr - Fonction FEL52
es - Funcionamiento FEL52
12 3
it - Funzione FEL52
nl - Functie FEL52

GN RD FEL52

IL +
L+ 1 3 (L–)
U R

Max. < 100 μA


L+ 1 3 (L–)
R
IL +
L+ 1 3 (L–)
U R

Min. < 100 μA


L+ 1 3 (L–)
R
< 100 μA
L+ 1 3 (L–)
R

1 < 100 μA
+ 1 3 –
U 0V
2 R 'UFEL52 max. 3 V
Endress+Hauser 39

de - Anschluss FEL54
Allstromanschluss
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Relaisausgang
en - Connections FEL54
Universal connection
Relay output
fr - Raccordement FEL54
Tous courants
Sorties relais
es - Conexiones FEL54
Conexión universal
Salida por relé
EX NO C NC NO C NC
it - Collegamenti elettrici FEL54 a u r a u r
Collegamento corrente universale
Uscita relè F
nl - Aansluiting FEL54
EX 0.5A

Universele spanningsaansluiting
Relaisuitgang

L1 N PE
(Ground) * *
U~ 19…253 V (AC) U~ max. 253 V, I~ max. 6 A
P~ max. 1500 VA, cos  = 1
L+ L– P~ max. 750 VA, cos  > 0.7
U–
… 19… 55 V (DC)
* I–
… max. 6 A, U–
… < 30 V
I–
… max. 0.2 A, U–
… < 125 V

40 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 35 de 275
de - Funktion FEL54
FEL54
en - Function FEL54
fr - Fonction FEL54
es - Funcionamiento FEL54
12 345678
it - Funzione FEL54
nl - Functie FEL54

GN RD FEL54

3 4 5 6 7 8

Max.
3 4 5 6 7 8

3 4 5 6 7 8

Min.
3 4 5 6 7 8

3 4 5 6 7 8

1
U 0V
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Endress+Hauser 41

de - Anschluss FEL55
Ausgang
8/16 mA
en - Connections FEL55
Output
8/16 mA
fr - Raccordement FEL55
Sortie 1 2
8/16 mA
es - Conexiones FEL55
Salida EEx ia
EX
8/16 mA
it - Collegamenti elettrici FEL55
Uscita
8/16 mA EX
nl - Aansluiting FEL55 – +
Uitgang z.B. SPS, AI-Module
8/16 mA e. g. PLC, AI modules
U – 11
11 V p. e. API, modules AI
R Rmax. =
max.
16.8 mA por ej. PLC, módulos AI
p. e. PLC, AI modules
bijv.. PLC, AI-module
bijv

U–
... 11…36
11…36 V (DC) 4...20 mA
EN 61131-
61131- 2

42 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 36 de 275
de - Funktion FEL55
FEL55
en - Function FEL55
fr - Fonction FEL55
es - Funcionamiento FEL55
12
it - Funzione FEL55
nl - Functie FEL55

GN RD FEL55

~ 16 mA
+ 2 1

Max. ~ 8 mA
+ 2 1

~ 16 mA
+ 2 1

Min.
~ 8 mA
+ 2 1

< 3.6 mA
+ 2 1

Endress+Hauser 43

de - Anschluss FEL56
NAMUR- Ausgang L-H
< 1,0 mA / > 2,2 mA
en - Connections FEL56
NAMUR output L-H
< 1.0 mA / > 2.2 mA
fr - Raccordement FEL56
Sortie NAMUR L-H 1 2
< 1,0 mA / > 2,2 mA
es - Conexiones FEL56
Salida NAMUR L-H EEx ia
< 1,0 mA / > 2,2 mA EX
it - Collegamenti elettrici FEL56 H H 2.2…2.8 mA
NAMUR uscita L-H I
< 1,0 mA / > 2,2 mA L EX L 0.6…1.0 mA
nl - Aansluiting FEL56 Trennverstärker nach
– +
NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)
NAMUR uitgang L-H
z.B. / e. g. / p. e. / por ej. / p. e. / bijv. Isolating amplifier to
< 1,0 mA / > 2,2 mA FXN421, FXN422, SIN100, SIN110, NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)
FTL325N, FTL375N
Convertisseur / séparateur
selon NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)
Multiplexer: Taktzeit min. 2 s
Multiplexer: duty pulse cycle min. 2 s Amplificador aislado según
Multiplexeur: cycle d’impulsions min 2 s NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)
Multiplexer: ciclo de impulso mín. 2 s Barriera di separazione
Multiplexer: tempo di ciclo min. 2 s secondo NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)
Multiplexer: pulstijd min. 2 s
Scheidingsversterker conform
NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)

44 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 37 de 275
de - Funktion FEL56
FEL56
en - Function FEL56
fr - Fonction FEL56
es - Funcionamiento FEL56
12
it - Funzione FEL56
nl - Functie FEL56

GN RD FEL56

0.6…
1.0 mA
+ 2 1

Max. 2.2…
2.8 mA
+ 2 1

0.6…
1.0 mA
+ 2 1

Min. 2.2…
2.8 mA
+ 2 1

2.2…
2.8 mA
+ 2 1

Endress+Hauser 45

de - Anschluss FEL57
Ausgang PFM Funktion beachten!
150 Hz / 50 Hz Note function!
Voir fonction!
en - ConnectionsFEL 57 ¡Atención función!
PFM output Note di funzionamento!
150 Hz / 50 Hz Let op functie!
fr - Raccordement FEL57 1 2 48 49
Sortie PFM
150 Hz / 50 Hz
es - Conexiones FEL57 EEx ia
Salida PFM EX
150 Hz / 50 Hz
H H 150 Hz
it - Collegamenti elettrici FEL57 f
PFM uscita EX
L L 50 Hz
150 Hz / 50 Hz
– +
nl - Aansluiting FEL57 7 8 Nivotester FTL325P (CH1), FTL320, FTL120Z
PFM uitgang 33 34 Nivotester FTL325P (CH3)
150 Hz / 50 Hz 37 38

d4 d2 Nivotester FTL375P (CH1), FTL370/372, FTL170Z

z4 z2 Nivotester FTL375P (CH2), FTL372, FTL170Z

z6 d6 Nivotester FTL375P (CH3)

2 1 Commutec S SIF101, SIF11


SIF111

46 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 38 de 275
de - Funktion FEL57
FEL57
FEL 57
en - Function FEL57
fr - Fonction FEL57
es - Funcionamiento FEL57
it - Funzione FEL57
nl - Functie FEL57

FEL57
FEL57
GN YE
I 150 Hz

t
I 50 Hz

t
I
0 Hz
t
* U 0V
1 I
0 Hz
2 t
48 49
* Einschaltverhalten / Switch-on behaviour /
Comportement à la mise sous tension / Comportamiento
Comportamiento del cambio de estado
estado /
Comportamento
Comportamento accensione / Inschakelgedrag

Endress+Hauser 47

de - Funktion FEL57
FEL57
FEL57
Einschaltverhalten STD
en - Function FEL57 STD
Switch-on behaviour STD
fr - Fonction FEL57
Comportement à la mise
sous tension STD
es - Funcionamiento FEL57 Simulation / Simulation / Simulation /
Comportamiento del cambio Simulación / Simulazione / Simulatie
de e stado STD
it - Funzionamento FEL57
Comportamento in fase di
accensione STD
nl - Functie FEL57 1s 4s 3s
Inschakelgedrag STD FEL57 0 Hz 150 Hz 50 Hz 150 Hz

Simulation / Simulation / Simulation /


Simulación / Simulazione / Simulatie

1s 7s
FEL57 0 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz

48 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 39 de 275
de - Funktion FEL57
FEL57
FEL57
Einschaltverhalten EXT
en - Function FEL57
EXT Switch-on behaviour EXT
fr - Fonction FEL57
Comportement à la mise
sous tension EXT
Simulation / Simulation / Simulation / es - Funcionamiento FEL57
Simulación / Simulazione / Simulatie Comportamiento del cambio
de e stado EXT
it - Funzionamento FEL57
Comportamento in fase di
accensione EXT
1s 4s 30 s 6s nl - Functie FEL57
FEL57 0 Hz 150 Hz 50 Hz 0 Hz 150 Hz Inschakelgedrag EXT

Simulation / Simulation / Simulation /


Simulación / Simulazione / Simulatie

1s 34 s 6s
FEL57 0 Hz 50 Hz 0 Hz 50 Hz

Endress+Hauser 49

de - Anschluss FEL50A
en - Connections FEL50A
fr - Raccordement FEL50A
es - Conexiones FEL50A
it - Collegamenti elettrici FEL50A
nl - Aansluiting FEL50A
1 2

PA– PA+
U... 9...32 V (DC)

Segmentkoppler
Segment coupler
Coupleur de segments
Acoplador segmento
Segment coupler
Segment koppeling

z.B. SPS / e. g. PLC /


p. e. API / por ej. PLC /
p. e. PLC / bijv. PLC

50 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 40 de 275
de - Funktion FEL50A
FEL50A
en - Function FEL50A
fr - Fonction FEL50A
FEL50A
es - Funcionamiento FEL50A
PA-Bussignal / PA Bus Signal /
12
Signal bus PA / Señal Bus PA / it - Funzione FEL50A
GN YE Segnale bus PA / PA bussignaal
nl - Functie FEL50A
nicht invertiert
not inverted OUT_D = 0
non inversé
no invertido
non invertito OUT_D = 1
niet geïnverteerd
invertiert
inverted OUT_D = 0
inversé
invertido
invertito OUT_D = 1
geïnverteerd

Kommunikation / Communication /
SPS – Communication / Comunicación /
12 Commuwin II Comunicazione / Communicatie
Status siehe BA141F
Status, see BA141F
Etat, voir BA141F

Estado, ver BA141F
Stato, vedere BA141F
Status, zie BA141F

1 ../..
U 0V 2

Endress+Hauser 51

de - Anschluss FEL58
NAMUR- Ausgang H-L
> 2,2 mA / < 1,0 mA
en - Connections FEL58
NAMUR output H-L
> 2.2 mA / < 1.0 mA
fr - Raccordement FEL58
Sortie NAMUR H-L 1 2
> 2,2 mA / < 1,0 mA
es - Conexiones FEL58
Salida NAMUR H-L EEx ia
> 2,2 mA / < 1,0 mA
EX
it - Collegamenti elettrici FEL58 H H 2.2…3.5 mA
NAMUR uscita H-L I
> 2,2 mA / < 1,0 mA L EX L 0.6…1.0 mA
nl - Aansluiting FEL58 Trennverstärker nach
– +
NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)
NAMUR uitgang H-L
z.B. / e. g. / p. e. / por ej. / p. e. / bijv. Isolating amplifier to
> 2,2 mA / < 1,0 mA FXN421, FXN422, SIN100, SIN110, NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)
FTL325N, FTL375N
Convertisseur / séparateur
selon NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)
Multiplexer: Taktzeit min. 2 s
Multiplexer: duty pulse cycle min. 2 s Amplificador aislado según
Multiplexeur: cycle d’impulsions min 2 s NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)
Multiplexer: ciclo de impulso mín. 2 s Barriera di separazione
Multiplexer: tempo di ciclo min. 2 s secondo NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)
Multiplexer: pulstijd min. 2 s
Scheidingsversterker conform
NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6)

52 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 41 de 275
de - Funktion FEL58
FEL58
en - Function FEL58
fr - Fonction FEL58
es - Funcionamiento FEL58
12
it - Funzione FEL58
nl - Functie FEL58

GN YE FEL58

2.2…
3.5 mA
1 Hz + 2 1

Max. 0.6…
1.0 mA
+ 2 1
1 Hz
2.2…
3.5 mA
+ 2 1
1 Hz
Min. 0.6…
1.0 mA
1 Hz + 2 1

< 1.0 mA
+ 2 1
0.3 Hz
Endress+Hauser 53

de - Funktion Prüftaste FEL58


Sicherheitsschaltung MAX
MAX + T
en - Function test button FEL58
Fail-safe mode MAX
fr - Fonction touche test FEL58 1. Normaler Betrieb /
Normal operation / GN YE GN YE
Sécurité MAX
Fonctionnement normal /
es - Funcionamiento Funcionamiento normal /
1 Hz 1 Hz
botón de prueba FEL58 Funzionamento normale /
Normaal bedrijf 2.2… 0.6…
Conmutador de seguridad MAX + 3.5 mA + 1.0 mA
it - Funzione pulsante test FEL58 2 1 2 1
Selezione della modalità di 2. Prüft
Prüftaste drücken / >3 s GN YE GN YE
sicurezza MAX Press test button /
Appuyer sur la touche test /
nl - Functie testknop FEL58 Pulse el botón de prueba /
Veiligheidsschakeling MAX Premere il pulsante test /
Testknop indrukken
+ 0 mA + 0 mA
2 1 2 1
3. Prüft
Prüftaste loslassen,
nach ~2 s normaler Betrieb / GN YE GN YE
Release the test button,
after
after ~2 s normal operation /
1 Hz 1 Hz
Relâcher la touche test,
*T après ~2 s fonctionnement normal / 2.2… 0.6…
Deje de presionar el botón de prueba, + 3.5 mA + 1.0 mA
después de ~2 s funcionamiento normal / 2 1 2 1
T Rilasciare il pulsante test,
dopo ~2 s funzionamento normale /
De testknop loslaten,
na ~2 s normaal bedrijf

54 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 42 de 275
de - Funktion Prüftaste FEL58
Sicherheitsschaltung MIN
MIN + T en - Function test button FEL58
Fail-safe mode MIN
1. Normaler Betrieb / fr - Fonction touche test FEL58
Normal operation / GN YE GN YE
Sécurité MIN
Fonctionnement normal /
Funcionamiento normal /
1 Hz 1 Hz es - Funcionamiento
Funzionamento normale / botón de prueba FEL58
Normaal bedrijf 2.2… 0.6…
+ 3.5 mA + 1.0 mA Conmutador de seguridad MIN
2 1 2 1 it - Funzione pulsante test FEL58
2. Prüft
Prüftaste drücken / Selezione della modalità di
>3 s GN YE GN YE
Press test button / sicurezza MIN
Appuyer sur la touche test /
Pulse el botón de prueba / nl - Functie testknop FEL58
Premere il pulsante test / Veiligheidsschakeling MIN
Testknop indrukken
+ 0 mA + 0 mA
2 1 2 1
3. Prüft
Prüftaste loslassen,
nach ~2 s normaler Betrieb / GN YE GN YE
Release the test button,
after
after ~2 s normal operation /
1 Hz 1 Hz
Relâcher la touche test,
après ~2 s fonctionnement normal / 2.2… 0.6… *T
Deje de presionar el botón de prueba, + 3.5 mA + 1.0 mA
después de ~2 s funcionamiento normal / 2 1 2 1
Rilasciare il pulsante test, T

dopo ~2 s funzionamento normale /


De testknop loslaten,
na ~2 s normaal bedrijf

Endress+Hauser 55

de - Wartung, Reinigung
Dicke Krusten entfernen
en - Maintenance, Cleaning
Removal of thick encrustation
fr - Entretien, Nettoyage
Enlever les dépôts et incrustations
es - Mantenimiento, Limpieza
Eliminación de adherencias
it - Manutenzione, Pulizia
Rimozione di depositi consistenti
nl - Onderhoud, Reiniging
Aangroei verwijderen

Nicht besteigen!
Don’t use as a step!
Ne pas marcher
sur les lames vibrantes!
No usar como peldaño!
Non usare come scalino!
Niet op staan!

56 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 43 de 275
de - Technische Daten
Umgebungstemperatur Ta
Ta Prozesstemperatur Tp
en - Technical Data
Ambient temperature Ta
Process temperature Tp
fr - Caractéristiques techniques
Tp Température ambiante Ta
Température de process Tp

Ta
es - Datos técnicos
°C
Temperatura ambiente Ta
(°F) + "T" / "p" 10 11 Temperatura del proceso Tp
it - Dati tecnici
70 Temperatura ambiente Ta
(158)
50 Temperatura di processo Tp
(122)
nl - Technische gegevens
Omgevingstemperatuur Ta
0 Tp Procestemperatuur Tp
–50 (32) 0 90 150 °C
(–58) (32) (194) (300) (°F)

–50
(–58)

Endress+Hauser 57

de - Prozessdruck pe
Prozesstemperatur Tp
en - Process pressure pe
Process temperature Tp
fr - Pression de process pe
Température de process Tp
es - Presión del proceso pe
Temperatura del proceso Tp pe
it - Pressione di processo pe bar FTL51-# ### ## # #7 P 11
(psi)
(psi) FTL51-# ### ## # #7 R
Temperatura di processo Tp
nl - Procesdruk pe 100
(1450)
Procestemperatuur Tp
64
(928)

Tp
–1 °C
–50 (–14.5) 0 (°F)
150
(–58) (32) (300)

58 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 44 de 275
de - Zubehör
26 mm G¾ max. 25 bar / 150 °C
Einschweißadapter
21 mm (max. 360 psi / 300 °F)
52001052
en - Accessories
max. 40 bar / 100 °C Welding neck
(max. 580 psi / 210 °F)

ø55 –0.4 mm
ø32 mm

ISO 228 fr - Accessoires


Adaptateur à souder
es - Accesorios
Adaptador para soldar
it - Accessori
29.6 mm G1 Adattatore saldato
24.6 mm
52001051 nl - Toebehoren
Inlasadapter
ø60 –0.4 mm
ISO 228

1.4435 (AISI 316L)


ø41 mm
G1

26 mm G1
52001221
ø65 –0.3 mm

5 mm
100 mm = 3. 94 in
Endress+Hauser 59

de - Lose Flansche Gewinde G1


1.4301 2 mm 92 mm x 92 mm
en - Lap joint flanges with (AISI 304) (3.2 in x 3.2 in)
BSP 1 (G1) thread
max. 40 bar
fr - Brides avec filetage G1 (max. 580 psi)
92 mm
14 mm

es - Bridas con resalte y 92


rosca BSP 1 (G1) 918158-0000

it - Flangia di connessione con


filetto BSP 1 (G1)
G1 12 mm
nl - Blindflens met G1 draadgat

1.4571 DN50, PN40, DIN 2527 B


(AISI 316Ti) 918143-0000

2", 150 psi, RF, ANSI B 16.5


918144-0000

100 mm = 3. 94 in
60 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 45 de 275
de - Schiebemuffen
G1 NPT 1 - 1
11½

52003978 52003979 für drucklosen Betrieb
en - Sliding sleeves
for unpressurised operation

mm
19
fr - Manchons coulissants

mm
18
M6 (3x) pour applications sans pression
es - Manguitos deslizantes
para operación sin presión
.8 1.4435 it - Manicotto scorrevole

mm
ø21

41
(AISI 316L) per impieghi privi di pressione
mm
nl - Schuifmof
voor drukloze toepassing
G 1½ NPT 1½ - 11½
11½
52003980 52003981
mm
19

pe = 0 bar
(pe = 0 psi)
psi)
mm
22

M6 (3x)

siehe / see / voir / ver / vedi / zie :


1.4435
(AISI 316L)
KA153F (G 1, NPT 1)
.8
ø21
mm

KA154F (G 1½, NPT 1½)


55

mm

100 mm = 3. 94 in
Endress+Hauser 61

de - Hochdruck-Schiebemuffen
G1 NPT 1 - 11½
11½
en - High pressure sliding sleeves 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 1.4435 (AISI 316L)
52003663 52003667
fr - Manchons coulissants
AlloyC4 AlloyC4
haute pression 52003664 52003668
es - Manguitos deslizantes
para alta presión
it - Manicotto scorrevole
ø60 mm
~70
mm

per impieghi ad alta pressione


nl - Schuifmof
voor toepassing onder druk
mm
mm

21
mm

18
2

G 1½ NPT 1½ - 11½
11½
1.4435 (AISI 316L) 1.4435 (AISI 316L)
52003665 52003669
AlloyC4 AlloyC4
52003666 52003670

ø60 mm
~72
mm

siehe / see / voir / ver / vedi / zie :


KA153F (G 1, NPT 1)
KA154F (G 1½, NPT 1½)
mm
mm

mm

25
22
2

100 mm = 3. 94 in
62 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 46 de 275
de - Hochdruck-Schiebemuffen:
Prozessdruck pe
Prozesstemperatur Tp
en - High pressure sliding sleeves:
Process pressure pe
Process temperature Tp
fr - Manchons coulissants
haute pression:
pe Pression de process pe
bar Température de process Tp
(psi)
(psi) Liquiphant S
es - Manguitos deslizantes
100 para alta presión:
(1450)
80
Presión del proceso pe
(1160)
(1160) Temperatura del proceso Tp
64
(928) it - Manicotto scorrevole
per impieghi ad alta pressione:
Liquiphant M
Pressione di processo pe
Temperatura di processo Tp
Tp
–1 °C nl - Schuifmof
–60 –50 (–14.5) 0 voor toepassing onder druk:
150 260 280 (°F)
76)(–58)
(–76) (32) (300) (500) (540) Procesdruk pe
Procestemperatuur Tp

Endress+Hauser 63

de - Fehlersuche Fehlfunktion Ursache Maßnahme


Schaltet nicht Versorgungsspannung fehlt Versorgung prüfen
Signalleitung defekt Signalleitung prüfen
Elektronikeinsatz defekt Austauschen
- FEL51 direkt an L1 und N - FEL51 immer über externe Last
angeschlossen anschließen
Dichte der Flüssigkeit zu gering Am Elektronikeinsatz Dichte auf
> 0,5 einstellen
Schwinggabel verkrustet Schwinggabel säubern
Schwinggabel korrodiert Schwinggabel komplett mit Prozessan-
(Anzeige am FEL: rot/gelb blinkt, schluss austauschen
FEL58: grün blinkt 0,3 Hz)
FEL51: Relais mit zu großem Geeignetes Relais anschließen
Innenwiderstand angeschlossen
FEL51: Relais mit zu geringem Widerstand parallel zum Relais
Haltestrom angeschlossen anschließen
FEL54: Kontakte verschweißt FEL54 austauschen;
(nach einem Kurzschluss) Sicherung in den Kontaktstromkreis
Schaltet falsch Minimum-/Maximum- Am Elektronikeinsatz Sicherheitsschaltung
Sicherheitsschaltung vertauscht richtig einstellen
Fehlschaltung, Dichter schwerer Schaum, Liquiphant im Bypass montieren
sporadisch wilde Turbulenzen,
aufgeschäumte Flüssigkeit
Extreme Funkstörung Verbindungskabel abschirmen
Extreme Vibrationen Entkoppeln, dämpfen,
Schwinggabel 90° drehen
Wasser im Gehäuse Deckel und Kabeldurchführungen fest
zuschrauben
FEL52: Ausgang überlastet Last, (Leitungs-) Kapazität verringern
Fehlschaltung FEL57, Verhalten beim Einschalttest Schaltverhalten FEL57 beachten;
nach Netzausfall (wiederkehrende Prüfung) Anlagensteuerung nach Netzausfall bis
ca. 45 s blockieren

64 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 47 de 275
Fault Reason Remedy en - Trouble-shooting
Does not switch No power Check power
Faulty signal line Check signal line
Faulty electronic insert Exchange
- FEL51 connected directly to L1 and N - always connect FEL51 via external load
Density of liquid too low Set density to > 0.5 at electronic insert
Fork encrusted Clean fork
Fork corroded Exchange fork and process connection
(Indication on FEL: red/yellow flashes,
FEL58: green flashes 0.3 Hz)
FEL51: Internal resistance of connected Connect suitable relay
relay too large
FEL51: Holding current of connected relay Connected resistor in parallel with relay
too low
FEL54: Contacts welded together Exchange FEL54; put fuse in contact circuit
(after short-circuit)
Switches Min-/Max- fail-safe mode set wrongly Set correct mode at electronic insert
incorrectly
Sporadic faulty Thick heavy foam, Mount Liquiphant in bypass
switching very turbulent conditions,
foaming liquid
Extreme RFI Use screened cable
Extreme vibration Decouple, damp, turn fork 90°
Water in housing Screw cover and cable gland tight
FEL52: Output overloaded Reduce load,(cable) capacitance
Switches FEL57, behaviour during switch-on test Observe switching behaviour of FEL57;
incorrectly after (functional test) After power failure blockplant control
power failure for up to 45 s

Endress+Hauser 65

fr - Recherche de défauts Défaut Cause Mesure


Ne commute pas Tension d’alimentation manquante Vérifier la tension d’alimentation
Câble de signal défectueux Vérifier le câble de signal
Electronique défectueuse Remplacer
- FEL51 relié directement á L1 et N - Relier FEL51 toujours via la charge
externe
Densité du liquide trop faible Régler la densité sur > 0,5 sur l’électronique
Lames vibrantes encroûtées Nettoyer les lames vibrantes
Lames vibrantes corrodées Remplacer les lames vibrantes ainsi que
(Sur FEL: rouge/jaune clignote, le raccord process
FEL58: vert clignote 0,3 Hz)
FEL51: relais avec résistance interne Raccorder un relais approprié
trop élevée
FEL51: relais avec courant de maintien Raccorder une résistance en parallèle au
trop faible relais
FEL54: contacts soudés Remplacer FEL54; fusible dans le circuit
(après un court-circuit) courant
Mauvaise Sécurité min/max inversée Régler correctement le circuit de sécurité
commutation sur l’électronique
Mauvaise Mousse dense et lourde, Monter le Liquiphant en bypass
commutation, fortes turbulences,
sporadique liquide émulsionné
Parasites puissants Blinder le câble de liaison
Vibrations importantes Découpler, amortir,
tourner la fourche de 90°
Eau dans le boîtier Visser fermement le couvercle et les entrées
de câble
FEL52: surcharge de la sortie Réduire la charge et la capacité (de ligne)
Mauvaise FEL57, comportement lors du test de mise Observer le comportement du FEL57
commutation sous tension (test cyclique) à la mise sous tension;
après coupure bloquer la commande de l’installation après
coupure de courant pendant max. 45 s

66 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 48 de 275
Fallo Causa Solución es - Identificación de fallos
No conmuta No hay alimentación Comprobar alimentación
Señal defectuosa Comprobar cable de señal
Electrónica defectuosa Cambio
- FEL51 conectada directamente a L1 y N - Siempre conectar FEL51 vía una
carga externa
Densidad del líquido demasiado baja Fijar densidad a > 0.5 en la electrónica
Horquillas con adherencias Limpiar horquillas
Horquillas corroidas Cambiar la horquilla y la conexión
(En FEL: rojo/amarillo parpadea, a proceso
FEL58: verde parpadea 0.3 Hz)
FEL51: Relé con resistencia interna Conectar un relé adecuado
demasiado grande
FEL51: El relé conectado retiene muy Resistencia conectada en paralelo
poca corriente con el relé
FEL54: Contactos soldados juntos Cambiar FEL54;
(después del corto circuito) poner fusible en el circuito de contacto
Conmuta El modo de fallo mín./máx. Ajustar el modo correcto en la electrónica
incorrectamente está mal ajustado
Fallos de Espuma muy densa, Montar el Liquiphant en bypass
conmutación turbulencias,
esporádicos líquidos espumosos
RFI extremo Utilizar cable apantallado
Vibraciones extremas Desacoplar, amortiguar y
girar las horquillas 90°
Agua en el cabezal Roscar la cubierta y el prensaestopas
firmemente
FEL52: Salida con sobretensión Reducir carga, capacidad (cable)
Conmuta FEL57, comportamiento durante Observar el comportamiento de
incorrectamente la comprobación de conmutación conmutación del FEL57;
después de un fallo (test de funcionamiento) del fallo de alimentación, bloqueo del
de alimentación control de la planta durante 45 s aprox.

Endress+Hauser 67

it - Individuazione e Guasto Motivo Rimedio


eliminazione delle anomalie Non commuta Mancanza alimentazione Controllare l’alimentazione
Linea segnale guasta Controllare segnale linea
Inserto elettronico guasto Sostituire
- FEL51 connesso direttamente a L1 e N - connettere sempre FEL51 mediante
carico esterno
Densità del liquido troppo bassa Impostare la densità a > 0.5 sull’inserto
elettronico
Forcella incrostata Pulire la forcella
Forcella corrosa Sostituire la forcella e la connessione
(Sul FEL: rosso/giallo lampeggiano, al processo
FEL58: verde lampeggiano 0.3 Hz)
FEL51: resistenza interna del relè connesso Collegare il relè adeguato
troppo grande
FEL51: corrente di mantenimento del relè Connettere resistenza in parallelo al relè
connesso troppo grande
FEL54: contatti saldati insieme Sostituire FEL54;
(dopo il corto circuito) mettere il fusibile nel circuito di contatto
Commuta non Modalità di sicurezza min-/max- Impostare la modalità corretta nell’inserto
correttamente impostata in modo errato elettronico
Commutazione Schiuma pesante e torbida condizioni molto Montare il Liquiphant nel bypass
sporadicamente turbolente, liquido che produce schiuma
difettosa RFI forte Usare cavo schermato
Forte vibrazione Disaccoppiare, smorzare,
ruotare la forcella di 90°
Acqua nella custodia Avvitare correttamente il coperchio
e il passacavi
FEL52: Uscita sovraccaricata Ridurre il carico, capacità (cavo)
Commutazione FEL57, comportamento durante la fase Osservare il comportamento di
non corretta di test all’accensione commutazione del FEL57; dopo il ripristino
dopo la mancanza (test di funzionamento) di una mancanza di alimentazione inibire
alimentazione il controllo dell’impianto per 45 s

68 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 49 de 275
Fout Oorzaak Maatregel nl - Fout zoeken
Schakelt niet Voeding ontbreekt Voeding kontroleren
Signaalleiding defect Signalleiding kontroleren
Insert defect Ver vangen
- FEL51 direct op L1 en N aangesloten - FEL51 altijd via een belasting aansluiten
Dichtheid van de vloeistof te gering Op elektronica-insert dichtheid
op > 0,5 instellen
Trilvork te veel vervuild Trilvork reinigen
Trilvork gecorrodeerd Trilvork compleet met procesaansluiting
(LED op FEL knippert rood/geel, vervangen
FEL58: groen knippert 0,3 Hz)
FEL51: Relais met te groteinwendige Passender relais aansluiten
weerstand aangesloten
FEL51: Relais met te geringe houdstroom Weerstand parallel aan relais aansluiten
aangesloten
FEL54: Contacten verkleeft FEL54 vervangen;
(na een kortsluiting) zekering in circuit aanbrengen
Schakelt foutief Minimum- /Maximum- FEL fail-safe keuze correct instellen
fail-safe instelling verwisseld
Sporadische Dik zwaar schuim, Liquiphant in by-pass monteren
foutschakeling wilde turbulentie,
opgeschuimde vloeistof
Extreme RFI invloed Verbindingskabel afschermen
Extreme vibraties Ontkoppelen, dempen,
vork 90° draaien
Water in de behuizing Deksel en wartels vast aandraaien
FEL52: uitgang overbelast Schakelbelasting verminderen
Foutmelding FEL57, gedrag bij inschakelen na netuitval Schakelgedrag FEL57 controleren;
(periodieke testfunctie) procesherstart na netuitval ca. 45 s
blokkeren

Endress+Hauser 69

de - Ergänzung Fehlersuche en - Trouble-shooting Supplement fr - Additif recherche de défauts


Ist das Schaltverhalten der Gabel If the switching behaviour of the Si la commutation de la fourche
ungewöhnlich, kann an PIN 4 der fork is abnormal, the fork est inhabituelle, il est possible de
Diagnosebuchse die Gabel- frequency can be measured at mesurer la fréquence de cette
frequenz gemessen werden. PIN 4 of the diagnosis socket. dernière au PIN 4 de la prise
Bei den Elektronikeinsätzen With electronic inserts diagnostic.
FEL51/52/54/55/56/57/58 FEL51/52/54/55/56/57/58 Pour l es électroniques
ist dies eine sinusförmige this is a sinusoidal vibration whose FEL51/52/54/55/56/57/58
Schwingung deren Amplitude amplitude makes it possible to il s’agit d’une oscillation
einen Rückschluss auf den determine the condition of the sinusoïdale dont l’amplitude
Gabelzustand zulässt. fork. permet d’évaluer l’état de la
Bei FEL50A ist aufgrund eines With FEL50A, only the fork fourche.
Rechtecksignals nur noch die frequency measurement is possible Pour FEL50A, le signal
Gabelfrequenzmessung möglich. due to a rectangular pulse signal. rectangulaire ne permet qu’une
mesure de la fréquence de fourche.

70 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 50 de 275
es - Suplemento para la it - Supplemento alla ricerca nl - Bijlage problemen oplossen
identificación de fallos dei malfunzionamenti
Indien het schakelgedrag van de
Si el comportamiento de Se le condizioni di commutazione trilvork niet normaal verloopt kan
conmutación de la horquilla es dei rebbi non è normale la de frequentie van de vork
anormal, puede medir la frequenza di vibrazione può gemeten worden op pen 4 van de
frecuencia de la misma en el essere misurata al PIN 4 del diagnoseconnector.
PIN 4 del interruptor de diagnosis. connettore per la diagnosi. Bij de elektronica inserts van de
Con las electrónicas Con gli inserti elettronici FEL 51, 52, 54, 55, 56, 57 en 58
FEL51/52/54/55/56/57/58 FEL51/52/54/55/56/57/58 is dit een sinusvormige trilling
se consigue una vibración è possibile determinare la waarvan de amplitude een beeld
sinusoidal cuya amplitud hace condizione dei rebbi anche tramite geeft van de conditie van de vork.
posible determinar la condición de l'ampiezza dell'onda sinusoidale. Bij de FEL 50 A is alleen de
la horquilla. Con FEL50A il segnale è un onda vorkfrequentie te meten als gevolg
Con FEL50A, sólo es posible quadra, per cui è possibile valutare van een rechthoekig pulssignaal.
medir la frecuencia de la horquilla solo il valore di frequenza.
debido a una señal de impulsos
rectangular.

Endress+Hauser 71

de - Ersatzteile
Elektronikeinsätze FEL51 52002304
FEL52 52002305
en - Spare parts FEL54 52002306
Electronic inserts FEL55 52002307
FEL56 52002308
fr - Pièces de rechange FEL57 52002309
Electroniques FEL58 52006454
FEL50A 52010527
es - Repuestos
Electrónicas
Installationsregel: Bei der Installation ist zu beachten, dass elektrische
it - Ricambi Betriebsmittel (Elektronikeinsätze) die mit nichteigensicheren Stromkreisen
Inserti elettronici gespeist wurden, grundsätzlich nicht mehr mit eigensicheren Stromkreisen
zusammengeschaltet werden dürfen.
nl - Reserve-onderdelen
Installation specification: During installation, please keep in mind that
Elektronica inserts electrical resources (electronic inserts) which are powered by non-intrinsically-
safe circuits may no longer be interconnected with intrinsically-safe circuits.
Directive d’installation : Lors de l’installation, tenir compte du fait que les
matériels électriques (électroniques) alimentés par des circuits sans sécurité
intrinsèque ne doivent plus être connectés à des circuits à sécurité intrinsèque.
Normas de instalación: Durante la instalación, tenga en cuenta que
los elementos eléctricos (electrónicas) alimentadas por circuitos no
instrínsecamente seguros, no podrán estar interconectadas con circuitos
intrínsecamente seguros.
Specifiche di installazione: Durante l’installazione è necessario tenere
presente che gli impianti elettrici (inserti elettronici) alimentati da circuiti elettrici
non a sicurezza intrinseca non possono più essere collegati con circuiti
elettrici a sicurezza intrinseca.
Installatievoorschrift: Bij de installatie moet erop worden gelet, dat elektrisch
materieel (elektronica-units) die via niet-intrinsiekveilige circuits worden
gevoed, in principe niet meer met intrinsiekveilige circuits mogen worden
samengeschakeld.

72 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 51 de 275
de - Gehäusedeckel,
Dichtungen
52006903 en - Housing covers,
seals
* 52007103
fr - Couvercles de boîtier,
joints
es - Cubiertas del cabezal,
juntas
it - Coperture custodia,
guarnizioni
nl - Behuizing deksels,
dichtingen

* Mit Silikonfett oder Graphit schmieren


Lubricate with silicone grease or graphite
Lubrifier avec de la graisse silicone ou du graphite
Lubricar con grasa de silicona o grafito
Lubrificare con olio di silicone o grafite
Met siliconenvet of grafietvet insmeren

Endress+Hauser 73

de - Reparatur
bei Endress+Hauser
1.
en - Repair säubern
at Endress+Hauser clean
nettoyer
fr - Réparations limpio
chez Endress+Hauser pulire
reinigen
es - Reparaciones
en Endress+Hauser
it - Riparare
presso la Endress+Hauser Transportschutz
2. Transport protection
nl - Reparatie
Protection de
bij Endress+Hauser transport
Protección para el
transporte
Protezione trasporto
Transport
bescherming

3.

Endress+Hauser

74 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 52 de 275
Technische Information / Technical Information / Information technique / de - Ergänzende
Información técnica / Informazioni tecniche / Technische Informatie Dokumentation
TI328F Liquiphant FTL50, FTL50H, FTL51, FTL51H en - Supplementary
Documentation
fr - Documentation
Betriebsanleitung / Operating Instruction / Mise en service / complémentaire
Instrucciones de funcionamiento / Istruzioni operative / Inbedrijfstellingsvoorschrift es - Documentación
BA141F FEL50A, PROFIBUS PA adicional
it - Documentazione
supplementare
Sicherheitshinweise / Notes on Safety / Conseils de sécurité / nl - Aanvullende
Notas sobre seguridad / Note sulla sicurezza / Veiligheidsinstructies documentatie
XA031F 40 II 1/2 G, EEx d IIC/IIB
XA063F 40 II 1/2 G, II 1/2 D, EEx ia/ib IIC/IIB
XA064F 40 II 1 G, EEx ia IIC/IIB
XA108F 40 II 1/2 G, EEx de IIC/IIB
XA154F 40 II 1/2 G, II 1/2 D, EEx ia/ib IIC/IIB
XA159F 40 II 1 G, EEx ia IIC/IIB
XA182F 40 II 3 G, II 3 D, EEx nA/nC II

Endress+Hauser 75

www.endress.com/worldwide

KA163F/00/a6/03.06, 52007095, CCS/FM6 52007095


Sección 6 ~ Página 53 de 275

References, Limit switches 

characteristics 3
Osiswitch Classic
Metal, conforming to CENELEC EN 50041, type XCK J
Complete switches, fixed body
1 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry

Type of head Plunger (fixing by the body) Rotary (fixing by the body)
(switches supplied for actuation from left AND right)
Form B (1) Form C (1) Form A (1) Form D (1)

Type of operator Metal end Steel roller Thermoplastic roller Steel roller lever (4) Variable length Round thermoplastic
plunger plunger lever (4) thermoplastic roller rod lever, Ø 6 mm
lever (4) (4) (5)
References (2) (3)
2-pole N/C + N/O XCK J161H29 XCK J167H29 XCK J10511H29 XCK J10513H29 XCK J10541H29 XCK J10559H29
13

21

snap action
(XE2S P2151) 2 4,7(P) 3,2(A) 8,1(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 23˚
14

22

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22


13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 6 0 mm 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚
0,9 mm 1,5 11˚ 11˚ 11˚ 11˚

2-pole N/C + N/O XCK J561H29 XCK J567H29 XCK J50511H29 XCK J50513H29 XCK J50541H29 XCK J50559H29
13

21

break before
make, slow 2 3,4(P) 3,2(A) 5,9(P) 23˚ 40˚(P) 23˚ 40˚(P) 23˚ 23˚
14

22

21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22


break 21-22
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 3,2 6 0 5,3 mm 0 33˚ 90˚ 0 33˚ 90˚ 0 33˚ 90˚ 0 33˚ 90˚
(XE2N P2151) mm

2-pole N/C + N/C ZCK J9H29 + ZCK J9H29 + ZCK J9H29 + ZCK J9H29 + ZCK J9H29 + ZCK J9H29 +
11

21

snap action ZCK E61 ZCK E67 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y11 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y13 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y41 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y59
(XE2S P2141)
12

22

2 4,7(P) 3,2(A) 8,1(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 23˚


11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 6 0 mm 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚
0,9 mm 1,5 11˚ 11˚ 11˚ 11˚

2-pole N/C + N/C ZCK J7H29 + ZCK J7H29 + ZCK J7H29 + ZCK J7H29 + ZCK J7H29 + ZCK J7H29 +
11

21

simultaneous, ZCK E61 ZCK E67 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y11 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y13 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y41 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y59
slow break
12

22

(XE2N P2141) 3,4(P) 5,9(P) 62˚(P) 62˚(P)


11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
0 2 6 0 3,5(A) mm 0 28˚ 90˚ 0 28˚ 90˚ 0 28˚ 90˚ 0 28˚ 90˚
mm

3-pole ZCK JD39H29 + ZCK JD39H29 + ZCK JD39H29 + ZCK JD39H29 + ZCK JD39H29 + ZCK JD39H29 +
13
31

21

N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK E61 ZCK E67 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y11 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y13 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y41 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y59
snap action
14
32

22

(XE3S P2141) 2 4,7(P) 3,2(A) 8,1(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚ 58˚(P) 23˚
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22 21-22
31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32 31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
0 6 0 mm 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚ 0 90˚
0,9 mm 1,5 11˚ 11˚ 11˚

3-pole ZCK JD37H29 + ZCK JD37H29 + ZCK JD37H29 + ZCK JD37H29 + ZCK JD37H29 + ZCK JD37H29 +
13
31

21

N/C + N/C + N/O ZCK E61 ZCK E67 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y11 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y13 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y41 ZCK E05 + ZCK Y59
break before
14
32

22

make, slow 2 3,4(P) 3,2(A) 5,9(P) 23˚ 40˚(P) 23˚ 40˚(P) 23˚
break 21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
21-22
31-32
13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14 13-14
(XE3N P2141) 0 3,2 6 0 5,3 mm 0 33˚ 90˚ 0 33˚ 90˚ 0 33˚ 90˚
mm

Weight (kg) 0.430 0.455 0.480 0.490 0.485 0.485


Contact operation contact closed (A) = cam displacement N/C contact with positive opening operation
contact open (P) = positive opening point
Characteristics
Switch actuation On end By 30° cam By any moving part
Type of actuation

Maximum actuation speed 0.5 m/s 1 m/s 1.5 m/s


Mechanical durability (6) 30 25 30
(in millions of operating
cycles)
Minimum For tripping 20 N 16 N 0.25 N.m
force or For positive 50 N 40 N 0.50 N.m –
torque opening
Cable entry (3) 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm
(1) Form conforming to EN 50041, see page 31900/9.
(2) Switches with gold contacts or eyelet type connections: please consult your Regional Sales Office.
(3) For an entry tapped for a Pg 13 cable gland, delete H29 from the end of the reference. Example: XCK J161H29 becomes XCK J161.
For an entry tapped for 1/2" NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit, replace H29 at the end of the reference by H7. Example: XCK J161H29 becomes XCK J161H7.
(4) Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 45° steps by reversing the lever or its mounting.
(5) Value taken with actuation by moving part at 100 mm from the fixing.
(6) Limited to 15 million operating cycles for switches with contacts XE3/P.

37633-EN_Ver2.1.fm/2
Sección 6 ~ Página 54 de 275

Dimensions 3
Limit switches 

Osiswitch Classic
Metal, conforming to CENELEC EN 50041, type XCK J
Complete switches, fixed body
1 ISO M20 x 1.5 cable entry

XCK J/61H29 XCK J/67H29 XCK J/051/H29


ZCK J/ + ZCK E61 ZCK J/ + ZCK E67 ZCK J/ + ZCK E05 + ZCK Y11 or Y13

57
17
5 41
5
17

41
63
50
37

133
120
107

60

60
60
(1) (1) (1)

33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 =


44 40 44 40 62 40

XCK J/0541H29 XCK J/0559H29


ZCK J/ + ZCK E05 + ZCK Y41 ZCK J/ + ZCK E05 + ZCK Y59

52
48 26,2
5,5 44
(2)
40…85
62…107

(4)
(5)
132…177

(3)
60

60

(1) (1)

33,5 = 30 = 33,5 = 30 =
60 40 60 40

(1) 1 tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13 cable gland or 1/2" NPT.
(2) Ø 6 rod, length 200 mm.
(3) 282 max.
(4) 190 max.
(5) 212 max.
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3.

37633-EN_Ver2.1.fm/3
Sección 6 ~ Página 55 de 275

 +05647/'06#%+10+0&7564+#. 
/#01/'6415;8#%71/'6415
 (4#0%+# &'&+#(4#)/#2#4#4#0)15$#,15
/#01/'641;8#%71/'6415&'&+#(4#)/#1%#257.#
%CLC#EGTQKPQZHQUHCVCFC[RKPVCFC
%QPGEVQT$TQPEG'UVCORCFQ
$QWTFQP#EGTQKPQZKFCDNG
8KUQTRQNKECTDQPCVQ
)TCFQ2TQVGEEKÎP+2
6GORGTCVWTCƀWKFQC%

5'4+'/6#/6#
4CPIQFG2TGUKÎP
&ÈIKVQ &KCN %QPGZKÎP
OO*1 /KNKDCT
 C C  Œ
 C C  
 C C  
 C C  
 C C  
 C C  
 C C  
 C C  
 C C  
 C C  
 C C  

5'4+'/%&KCNOO
%CLC#EGTQKPQZKFCDNG
%QPGEVQT$TQPEG'UVCORCFQ
2CTCOGFKTDCLCURTGUKQPGUENCUG
/QF&EQPRTQVGEEKÎPFGUQDTGRTGUKÎP /6#/6#
4CPIQFG2TGUKÎP
&ÈIKVQ %QPGZKÎP
OO*1 /KNKDCT
 C C Œ
- C C Œ
 C C Œ
 C C Œ
 C C Œ
 C C Œ

5'4+'/%&KCNOO
%CLC#EGTQKPQZKFCDNG
%QPGEVQT$TQPEG'UVCORCFQ
2CTCOGFKTDCLCURTGUKQPGUENCUG
/QF&EQPRTQVGEEKÎPFGUQDTGRTGUKÎP
4CPIQFG2TGUKÎP
&ÈIKVQ %QPGZKÎP
OO*1 /KNKDCT
 C C Œ
 C C Œ
 C C Œ
 C C Œ
- C C Œ
 C C Œ
/(
5'4+'/(
2CTCTGHTKIGTCEKQP
&ÈIKVQ 4CPIQFG2TGUKÎP2UK 6GORGTCVWTC 2CTCWUCTEQP
 Œ*IC C% (TGÎP
 Œ*IC C% (TGÎP
8#.2#4#+51 5#06+#)1 6#.%#*7#01 #061(#)#56# 27'461/1066
6GN(CZ 6GN(CZ 6GN(CZ 6GN(CZ 6GN(CZ
'OCKNXKIPQXCN"XKIPQNCEN 'OCKNXKIPQUCP"XKIPQNCEN 'OCKNXKIPQVCN"XKIPQNCEN 'OCKNXKIPQCPV"XKIPQNCEN 'OCKNXKIPQOQPVV"XKIPQNCEN
Sección 6 ~ Página 56 de 275

4 INSTRUMENTACION INDUSTRIAL 4-10-00


MANOMETROS 63 mm / 2 1/2” -100 mm / 4”
07-04 ITALIA ACERO INOXIDABLE / BRONCE
MANOMETROS 63P60 / 100P60, llenables con glicerina
Uso: Para la medición de presión de fluidos no corrosivos y ambientes agresivos
Características Materiales de construcción
Dial: 63mm; 100mm Caja: acero inox. 304
Conexión: - 63mm: 1/4” Npt; - 100mm: 1/2” Npt. Visor: Policarbonato
Precisión: 1% de toda la escala Conector: Latón
Temperatura máxima de operación: 60ºC Bourdon: Aleación de cobre.
Grado de Protección: IP65 * Nota: Sin glicerina (puede llenarse)
1.- Conexión Abajo
- 63 mm. - 100 mm. Rango
Dígito Dígito Bar Psi
0410000-K 0410057-3 -1a 0 -29” a 0” Hg
- 0410054-9 -1 a 3 -30”Hg a 40
- 0410055-7 -1 a 15 -30”Hg a 210
- 0410053-0 0 a 0,6 0 a 8,6
0410002-6 0410058-1 0a1 0 a 15
- 0410051-4 0 a 1,6 0 a 23
0410003-4 0410059-K 0a2 0 a 30
0410005-0 0410060-3 0a4 0 a 60
0410006-9 0410061-1 0a7 0 a 100
0410007-7 0410062-K 0 a 11 0 a 160
0410008-5 0410063-8 0 a 14 0 a 200
0410009-3 - 0 a 20 0 a 300
0410010-7 0410064-6 0 a 27 0 a 400
0410011-5 0410066-2 0 a 40 0 a 580
- 0410068-9 0 a 60 0 a 800
0410012-3 - 0 a 70 0 a 1000
0410017-4 0410069-7 0 a 100 0 a 1500
- 0410070-0 0 a 140 0 a 2000 Dial 100 mm
0410018-2 - 0 a 200 0 a 3000
- 0410071-9 0 a 250 0 a 3500
0410021-2 - 0 a 270 0 a 4000
0410023-9 0410072-7 0 a 400 0 a 6000
0410022-0 - 0 a 600 0 a 8000
0410024-7 0410073-5 0 a 680 0 a 10000
- 0410065-4 0 a 1000 0 a 14000
2.- Conexión Atrás
- 63 mm. - 100 mm. Rango
Dígito Dígito Bar Psi
0410025-5 0410076-K -1 a 0 -29 a 0” Hg
0410026-3 0410077-8 0a1 0 a 15
0410028-K - 0a2 0 a 30
0410027-1 0410079-4 0a4 0 a 60
Dial 100 mm
0410030-1 0410080-8 0a7 0 a 100
0410031-K 0410081-6 0 a 11 0 a 160
0410033-6 0410083-2 0 a 14 0 a 200
0410034-4 0410084-0 0 a 27 0 a 400
0410040-9 0410086-7 0 a 40 0 a 600
0410035-2 0410085-9 0 a 110 0 a 1500
0410050-6 - 0 a 200 0 a 3000
0410041-7 0410087-5 0 a 270 0 a 4000
0410042-5 0410089-1 0 a 400 0 a 6000
0410043-3 - 0 a 600 0 a 8000
- 0410090-5 0 a 700 0 a 10000
- 0410078-6 0 a 1000 0 a 14000
Dial 63 mm
Nota: 63 mm conexión al centro / 100 mm conexión inferior (ver fotos)
VALPARAISO * SANTIAGO TALCAHUANO ANTOFAGASTA PUERTO MONTT
Tel.: 32-351111 / Fax: 32-351128 Tel.: 2-7758385 / Fax: 2-7732036 Tel.: 41-588858 / Fax : 41-589102 Tel.: 55-453030 / Fax: 55-453039 Tel.: 65-350150 / Fax: 65-350144
Email: vignoval@vignola.cl Email: vignosan@vignola.cl Email: vignotal@vignola.cl Email: vignoant@vignola.cl Email: vignomontt@vignola.cl
Sección 6 ~ Página 57 de 275




 
  
    
 
   
      
   
       
     
 

   
    
 


   



 

   

 
 
          
    
   
          
!     #$%&' #$%&' #$%&'
$ 

  + <>? Q  W?
+ <>? Q  W?
+ <>? Q  W?

$ 

   < # W
# W
# W


 YZ
        
[< + <>? + <>? + <>?
 
+ <>? + <>? + <>?
$  [  
> [  
> [  
>
  Y +  
\  +  
\  +  
\ 
$    + <? + <? + <?
$
 ]Q'^\ `Q&^\ `Q&^\

 
  

+ 

k {| 
? k {| 
? k {| 
?
} |  ~+~ |  > ~+~ |  > ~+~ |  >
  | 
 ~€ + < € ‚ ~€ + < € ‚ ~€ + < € ‚
<  „  ~ < † ‡ 
 !+k ~ < † ‡ 
 !+k ~ < † ‡ 
 !+k


   

 


 +   | ˆ~€+ < € ‚‰ | $  Y  Œ\   Q  
ˆ
‰ Œ\ˆ
‰ ˆ
‰ ˆ
‰  ˆ
‰

] +  ] | ˆ~€+ < € ‚‰ |`

 Q Œ
 Œ\ 
 \„ ~  ˆ~+ < '€ ‚‰ |]    
 \„ ~ k$Š‹ ˆ~+ < '€ ‚‰ |' [<Ž 
<  „   
 $‹ | ˆ Z?  
+ 
    
 Y
‰
    
 Y |$
 
  < +#k# `€] |
$ 
„     ˆ
 ‰

 !"#$%&'!"#$%$'!"#&%*$'!"#&%;< !"#&%*=>
?##

    ! 


      

%'~  Z?   \‘ ? ' ˆ|€€'‰ $ ~
  Z k Q ~~€  [$ `~~€%€'€   ’  |!  

@?
?
Q[   % ‹ '' ˆ`~‰ `]~%]“”” | `]]%'“'' +• '' ˆ`~‰ `]]%'€'` ––– Y
Sección 6 ~ Página 58 de 275


Q!\]#^_`@\j@#Q\


 ?v{|
— +
Z?
  \‘ %'~ 
 

   


   Š?
  
   
   ?  

 ˜   <
  Y     ™ Y ? >   ?  


 


 
Q
         Z?
— ™ Y    „   ~|“š  
Q       ?  Z    
 ?
   +
    ‘%  
 Z
 Z? 
>   \  ~
— Š? <

 
   Y   ˆ\ ‰   `  

— + Z? ?
        Y
 
Q Q   ?Q
     Z
 ˆ~|]š‰  Y

— +
Z?
?
 

  ><    '  


  
    Q
 
? 
Q    \
Q  \  \  Q Q    
  
Z?

— $     ~`›]Q  
{   
Z?
?
  „ '
— $     ~`›'”Q ?%
 
   
Z?
%'~  ˆ?œ 

 Y  „ ~]‰


}~  |
— +
Y 
?
 
       

  
 $    ?
 


\
 <W?
 [ 
 
  W
Q „ 
 Z>?  
  
  œ ˜ Z?
— ™
 
?  
  Y  ><  <Q' ž ˆ‰  <~Q' ž ˆY    ‰
— + Z? ?            
    ? \ |
\      

&

—   ‘   \‘Q     


   ? <       Y   ™ <  Z?

 > 
  \  > ”€Ÿ  ? 

 

— $  ?   Z? ˜ 
   Q  Q \ 
?  Y     
  
  [   Z > 
<   ? > 
 
     \   Y   
  
  \ >%  k  Y    
    ?    
Y
Q  > 
 
  

$ > 


|
— +
Z?

 Y 
 \ <  Y

    Y‘  
  
    \   
?> 

 ™
  ? 
 ?
˜       Y 
— +


Y 

 

  
  [[ $    
Y
Q %
   Z?
œ ? 
    
— ™ Q  Z? 
 ? ˜ [[   

 ?~

\ ~ \ 


\ `

    ! 


      

%'~  Z?   \‘ ? ' ˆ|€€'‰ $ 
  Z k Q ~~€  [$ `~~€%€'€   ’  |!  

@?
?
Q[   % ‹ '' ˆ`~‰ `]~%]“”” | `]]%'“'' +• '' ˆ`~‰ `]]%'€'` ––– Y
Sección 6 ~ Página 59 de 275

Technical Information
Proline Promag 50P, 53P
Electromagnetic Flow Measuring System
Flow rate measurement in chemical or process applications

Application Your benefits


Electromagnetic flowmeter for bidirectional Promag measuring devices offer you cost-effective flow
measurement of liquids with a minimum conductivity measurement with a high degree of accuracy for a wide
of ≥ 5 µS/cm: range of process conditions.
• Acids and caustic solutions
• Paints The Proline transmitter concept comprises:
• Pastes, mashes • Modular device and operating concept resulting in a
• Water, wastewater etc. higher degree of efficiency
• Software options for batching, electrode cleaning and
• Flow measurement up to 9600 m3/h
for measuring pulsating flow.
• Fluid temperature up to +180 °C
• Uniform operating concept
• Process pressures up to 40 bar
• Fitting lengths to DVGW/ISO
The tried-and-tested Promag sensors offer:
Application-specific lining materials: • No pressure loss
• PTFE und PFA • Not sensitive to vibrations
• Simple installation and commissioning
Approvals for hazardous area:
• ATEX, FM, CSA, TIIS
Connection to process control system:
• HART, PROFIBUS DP/PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus,
MODBUS RS485

TI047D/06/en/07.05
50096459
Sección 6 ~ Página 60 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Function and system design


Measuring principle Faraday’s law of induction states that a voltage is induced in a conductor moving in a magnetic field.
In electromagnetic measuring, the flowing medium corresponds to the moving conductor. The induced voltage
is proportional to the flow velocity and is detected by two measuring electrodes and transmitted to the ampli-
fier. Flow volume is computed on the basis of the pipe's diameter. The constant magnetic field is generated by
a switched direct current of alternating polarity.

Ue

V
B
I
L

A0003191
Ue = B · L · v
Q=A·v

Ue = induced voltage
B = magnetic induction (magnetic field)
L = electrode gap
v = flow velocity
Q = volume flow
A = pipe cross-section
I = current strength

Measuring system The measuring system consists of a transmitter and a sensor.


Two versions are available:
• Compact version: transmitter and sensor form a single mechanical unit.
• Remote version: transmitter and sensor are installed separately.

Transmitter:
• Promag 50 (user interface with push buttons for operation, two-line display)
• Promag 53 (“Touch Control” without opening the housing, four-line display)

Sensor:
• DN 15…600

2 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 61 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Input
Measured variable Flow rate (proportional to induced voltage)

Measuring range Typically v = 0.01...10 m/s with the specified measuring accuracy

Operable flow range Over 1000 : 1

Input signal Status input (auxiliary input):


U = 3…30 V DC, Ri = 5 kΩ, galvanically isolated.
Configurable for: totalizer(s) reset, measured value suppression, error-message reset.

Status input (auxiliary input) with PROFIBUS DP and MODBUS RS485:


U = 3…30 V DC, Ri = 3 kΩ, galvanically isolated
Switching level: 3...30 V DC, independent of polarity
Configurable for: totalizer(s) reset, measured value suppression, error-message reset,
batching start/stop (optional), batch totalizer reset (optional)

Current input (for Promag 53 only):


Active/passive selectable, galvanically isolated, full scale value selectable, resolution: 3 µA,
temperature coefficient: typ. 0.005% o.r./°C (o.r. = of reading)
active: 4...20 mA, Ri ≤ 150 Ω, Uout = 24 V DC, short-circuit-proof
passive: 0/4...20 mA, Ri ≤ 150 Ω, Umax = 30 V DC

Output
Output signal Promag 50
Current output:
active/passive selectable, galvanically isolated, time constant selectable (0.01...100 s),
full scale value selectable, temperature coefficient: typ. 0.005% o.r./°C (o.r. = of reading),
resolution: 0.5 µA
• active: 0/4…20 mA, RL < 700 Ω (HART: RL ≥ 250 Ω)
• passive: 4…20 mA, operating voltage VS 18...30 V DC, Ri ≤ 150 Ω

Pulse/frequency output:
passive, open collector, 30 V DC, 250 mA, galvanically isolated.
• Frequency output: full scale frequency 2...1000 Hz (fmax = 1250 Hz), on/off ratio 1:1,
pulse width max. 10 s.
• Pulse output: pulse value and pulse polarity selectable, max. pulse width configurable
(0.5...2000 ms)

PROFIBUS DP interface:
• Transmission technology (Physical Layer): RS485 in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-485-A: 1998,
galvanically isolated
• Profile version 3.0
• Data transmission rate: 9.6 kBaud...12 MBaud
• Automatic data transmission rate recognition
• Function blocks: 1 x analog input, 3 x totalizer
• Output data: volume flow, totalizer
• Input data: positive zero return (ON/OFF), totalizer control, value for local display
• Cyclic data transmission compatible with previous model “Promag 33”
• Bus address adjustable via miniature switches or local display (optional) at the measuring device

Endress+Hauser 3
Sección 6 ~ Página 62 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

PROFIBUS PA interface:
• Transmission technology (Physical Layer): IEC 61158-2 (MBP), galvanically isolated
• Profile version 3.0
• Current consumption: 11 mA
• Permissible supply voltage: 9...32 V
• Bus connection with integrated reverse polarity protection
• Error current FDE (Fault Disconnection Electronic): 0 mA
• Function blocks: 1 x analog input, 1 x totalizer
• Output data: volume flow, totalizer
• Input data: positive zero return (ON/OFF), control totalizer, value for local display
• Cyclic data transmission compatible with previous model “Promag 33”
• Bus address adjustable via miniature switches or local display (optional) at the measuring device

Promag 53

Current output:
active/passive selectable, galvanically isolated, time constant selectable (0.01...100 s),
full scale value selectable, temperature coefficient: typically 0.005% o.r./°C (o.r. = of reading),
resolution: 0.5 µA
• active: 0/4…20 mA, RL < 700 Ω (HART: RL ≥ 250 Ω)
• passive: 4…20 mA, operating voltage VS 18...30 V DC, Ri ≤ 150 Ω

Pulse/frequency output:
active/passive selectable, galvanically isolated (Ex i version: only passive)
• active: 24 V DC, 25 mA (max. 250 mA during 20 ms), RL > 100 Ω
• passive: open collector, 30 V DC, 250 mA

• Frequency output: full scale frequency 2...10000 Hz (fmax = 12500 Hz), EEx-ia: 2...5000 Hz;
on/off ratio 1:1; pulse width max. 10 s.
• Pulse output: pulse value and pulse polarity adjustable, pulse width configurable
(0.05...2000 ms)

PROFIBUS DP interface:
• Transmission technology (Physical Layer): RS485 in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-485-A:
1998, galvanically isolated
• Profile version 3.0
• Data transmission rate: 9.6 kBaud...12 MBaud
• Automatic data transmission rate recognition
• Function blocks: 2 x analog input, 3 x totalizer
• Output data: volume flow, calculated mass flow, totalizer 1...3
• Input data: positive zero return (ON/OFF), totalizer control, value for local display
• Cyclic data transmission compatible with previous model “Promag 33”
• Bus address adjustable via miniature switches or local display (optional) at the measuring device
• Available output combination → Page 7 ff.

PROFIBUS PA interface:
• Transmission technology (Physical Layer): IEC 61158-2 (MBP), galvanically isolated
• Profile version 3.0
• Current consumption: 11 mA
• Permissible supply voltage: 9...32 V
• Bus connection with integrated reverse polarity protection
• Error current FDE (Fault Disconnection Electronic): 0 mA
• Function blocks: 2 x analog input, 3 x totalizer
• Output data: volume flow, calculated mass flow, totalizer 1...3
• Input data: positive zero return (ON/OFF), totalizer control, value for local display
• Cyclic data transmission compatible with previous model “Promag 33”
• Bus address adjustable via miniature switches or local display (optional) at the measuring device

4 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 63 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

MODBUS interface:
• Transmission technology (Physical Layer): RS485 in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-485-A:
1998, galvanically isolated
• MODBUS device type: Slave
• Adress range: 1...247
• Bus address adjustable via miniature switches or local display (optional) at the measuring device
• Supported MODBUS function codes: 03, 04, 06, 08, 16, 23
• Broadcast: supported with the function codes 06, 16, 23
• Transmission mode: RTU oder ASCII
• Supported baudrate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 Baud
• Response time:
Direct data access = typically 25...50 ms
Auto-scan buffer (data range) = typically 3...5 ms
• Available output combination → Page 7 ff.

FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface:


• FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1
• Transmission technology (Physical Layer): IEC 61158-2 (MBP), galvanically isolated
• ITK version 4.01
• Current consumption: 12 mA
• Error current FDE (Fault Disconnection Electronic): 0 mA
• Bus connection with integrated reverse polarity protection
• Function blocks: 5 x analog input, 1 x discrete output, 1 x PID
• Output data: volume flow, calculated mass flow, temperature, totalizer 1...3
• Input data: positive zero return (ON/OFF), reset totalizer
• Link Master (LM) functionality is supported

Signal on alarm • Current output → failure response selectable (e.g. in accord. with NAMUR Recom. NE 43)
• Pulse/frequency output → failure response selectable
• Status output (Promag 50) → non-conductive by fault or power supply failure
• Relay output (Promag 53) → de-energized by fault or power supply failure

Load See “Output signal”

Switching output Status output (Promag 50, Promag 53):


Open collector, max. 30 V DC / 250 mA, galvanically isolated.
Configurable for: error messages, Empty Pipe Detection (EPD), flow direction, limit values.

Relay outputs (Promag 53):


Normally closed (NC or break) or normally open (NO or make) contacts available
(default: relay 1 = NO, relay 2 = NC)
max. 30 V / 0.5 A AC; 60 V / 0.1 A DC, galvanically isolated.
Configurable for: error messages, Empty Pipe Detection (EPD), flow direction, limit values, batching contacts.

Low flow cutoff Switch points for low flow cutoff are selectable

Galvanic isolation All circuits for inputs, outputs, and power supply are galvanically isolated from each other.

Endress+Hauser 5
Sección 6 ~ Página 64 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Power supply
Electrical connection
Measuring unit A B C

d d
g g
b b

a
a
a
b d/(g) (d)

HART* PROFIBUS PA*


FOUNDATION Fieldbus*

– 27 PA(–)/FF(–) 27
+ 26 PA(+)/FF(+) 26
– 25 d – 25 d
+ 24 + 24
f – 23 e f – 23 e
+ 22 + 22
– 21 – 21
+ 20 + 20

N (L-) 2 c N (L-) 2 c
L1 (L+)1 L1 (L+) 1
b b

PROFIBUS DP* PROFIBUS DP**


MODBUS RS485**

A (RxD/TxD-N) 27 A (RxD/TxD-N) 27
B (RxD/TxD-P) 26 B (RxD/TxD-P) 26
– 25 d – 25 d
+ 24 + 24
f – 23 e f – 23 e
+ 22 + 22
– 21 – 21
+ 20 g + 20 g

N (L-) 2 c N (L-) 2
c
L1 (L+) 1 L1 (L+) 1
b b

a0002441
Anschließen des Messumformers, Leitungsquerschnitt max. 2,5 mm2
AView A (field housing)
BView B (stainless steel field housing)
CView C (wall-mount housing)
*) not changeable communication board
**) changeable communication board
a Cover of the connection compartment
b Cable for power supply: 85...260 V AC, 20...55 V AC,16...62 V DC
Terminal No. 1: L1 for AC, L+ for DC
Terminal No. 2: N for AC, L- for DC
c Ground terminal for protective conductor
d Signal cable: see Terminal assignment → Page 7 ff.
Fieldbus cable:
Terminal No. 26: DP (A) / PA (+) / FF (+) / MODBUS RS485 (A) / (PA, FF: with reverse polarity protection)
Terminal No. 27: DP (B) / PA (-) / FF (-) / MODBUS RS485 (B) / (PA, FF: with reverse polarity protection)
e Ground terminal for signal-cable shield / Fieldbus cable / RS485 line
f Service connector for connecting service interface FXA 193 (Fieldcheck, Tof Tool - Fieldtool Package)
g Signal cable: see Terminal assignment → Page 7 ff.
Cable for external termination (only for PROFIBUS DP with fixed assignment communication board):
Terminal No. 24: +5 V
Terminal No. 25: DGND

6 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 65 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Terminal assignment, Promag 50

Terminal No. (inputs / outputs)


Order variant 20 (+) / 21 (–) 22 (+) / 23 (–) 24 (+) / 25 (–) 26 (+) / 27 (–)
Current output
50***-***********W − − −
HART
Current output
50***-***********A − − Frequency output
HART
Current output
50***-***********D Status input Status output Frequency output
HART
PROFIBUS PA
50***-***********H – – –

+5 V (external PROFIBUS DP
50***-***********J – –
termination)
Frequency output Current output Ex i
50***-***********S – –
Ex i, passive active, HART
Frequency output Current output Ex i
50***-***********T – –
Ex i, passive passive, HART
Ground connection, power supply → Page 6

Terminal assignment, Promag 53


The inputs and outputs on the communication board can be either permanently assigned or variable, depending
on the version ordered (see table). Replacements for modules which are defective or which have to be replaced
can be ordered as accessories.

Terminal No. (inputs / outputs)


Order variant 20 (+) / 21 (–) 22 (+) / 23 (–) 24 (+) / 25 (–) 26 (+) / 27 (–)
Fixed communication boards (fixed assignment)
Current output
53***-***********A − − Frequency output
HART
Current output
53***-***********B Relay output 2 Relay output 1 Frequency output
HART
PROFIBUS PA
53***-***********F – – –
Ex i
FOUNDATION
53***-***********G – – –
Fieldbus, Ex i
PROFIBUS PA
53***-***********H – – –

PROFIBUS DP
53***-***********J – – –

FOUNDATION
53***-***********K − − −
Fieldbus
MODBUS RS485
53***-***********Q − − Status input

Frequency output Current output Ex i


53***-***********S − −
Ex i active, HART
Frequency output Current output Ex i
53***-***********T − −
Ex i passive, HART
Flexible communication boards
Current output
53***-***********C Relay output 2 Relay output 1 Frequency output
HART
Current output
53***-***********D Status input Relay output Frequency output
HART
Current output
53***-***********L Status input Relay output 2 Relay output 1
HART

Endress+Hauser 7
Sección 6 ~ Página 66 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Terminal No. (inputs / outputs)


Order variant 20 (+) / 21 (–) 22 (+) / 23 (–) 24 (+) / 25 (–) 26 (+) / 27 (–)
Current output
53***-***********M Status input Frequency output Frequency output
HART
53***-***********N Current output Frequency output Status input MODBUS RS485
53***-***********P Current output Frequency output Status input PROFIBUS DP
53***-***********V Relay output 2 Relay output 1 Status input PROFIBUS DP
Current output
53***-***********2 Relay output Current output Frequency output
HART
Current output
53***-***********4 Current input Relay output Frequency output
HART
Current output
53***-***********5 Status input Current input Frequency output
HART
53***-***********7 Relay output 2 Relay output 1 Status input MODBUS RS485
Ground connection, power supply → Page 6

Electrical connection remote


version Electrode circuit Coil circuit

Meas. signal Pipe EPD

S1 E1 E2 S2 GND E S

6 5 7 8 4 37 36 42 41
yellow
brown

green
white

2
1
n.c. n.c. n.c.

5 7 4 37 42 41

E1 E2 GND E

F06-5xFxxxxx-04-xx-xx-de-001
n.c. = isolated cable shields, not connected

Cable entry Power-supply and signal cables (inputs/outputs):


• Cable entry M20 x 1.5 (8…12 mm)
• Sensor cable entry for armoured cables M20 x 1.5 (9.5...16 mm)
• Threads for cable entries 1/2" NPT, G 1/2"

Connecting cable for remote version:


• Cable entry M20 x 1.5 (8…12 mm)
• Sensor cable entry for armoured cables M20 x 1.5 (9.5...16 mm)
• Threads for cable entries 1/2" NPT, G 1/2"

8 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 67 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Cable specifications Coil cable:


remote version • 2 x 0.75 mm2 PVC cable with common, braided copper shield (Ø approx. 7 mm)
• Conductor resistance: ≤ 37 Ω/km
• Capacitance: core/core, shield grounded: ≤ 120 pF/m
• Permanent operating temperature: –20…+80 °C
• Cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm2

Signal cable:
• 3 x 0.38 mm2 PVC cable with common, braided copper shield (Ø approx. 7 mm) and individually
shielded cores
• With Empty Pipe Detection (EPD): 4 x 0.38 mm2 PVC cable with common, braided copper shield
(Ø approx. 7 mm) and individually shielded cores.
• Conductor resistance: ≤ 50 Ω/km
• Capacitance: core/shield: ≤ 420 pF/m
• Permanent operating temperature: –20…+80 °C
• Cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
a b

A0003194
a = signal cable, b = coil current cable (cross-section: max. 2.5 mm2)
1 = core, 2 = core insulation, 3 = core shield, 4 = core jacket, 5 = core strengthening,
6 = cable shield, 7 = outer jacket

Optionally, Endress+Hauser also supplies reinforced connecting cables with an additional, metal strenghtening
braid. We recommend such cables for the following cases:
• Cables laid underground
• Danger of rodent attack
• Device used with ingress protection IP 68

Operation in zones of severe electrical interference:


The measuring device complies with the general safety requirements in accordance with EN 61010,
the EMC requirements of EN 61326/A1, and NAMUR recommendation NE 21.

Caution!
Grounding is by means of the ground terminals provided for the purpose inside the connection housing.
Keep the stripped and twisted lengths of cable shield to the terminals as short as possible.

Endress+Hauser 9
Sección 6 ~ Página 68 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Supply voltage 85…260 V AC, 45…65 Hz


20…55 V AC, 45…65 Hz
16…62 V DC

PROFIBUS PA and FOUNDATION Fieldbus


Non-Ex: 9...32 V DC
Ex i: 9...24 V DC
Ex d: 9...32 V DC

Power consumption AC: <15 VA (including sensor)


DC: <15 W (including sensor)

Switch-on current:
• max. 13.5 A (< 50 ms) at 24 V DC
• max. 3 A (< 5 ms) at 260 V AC

Power supply failure Lasting min. 1 power cycle:


• EEPROM or T-DAT (Promag 53 only) retain the measuring system data in the event of a power supply failure
• S-DAT: exchangeable data storage chip which stores the data of the sensor (nominal diameter, serial number,
calibration factor, zero point, etc.)

Potential equalisation Standard case


Perfect measurement is only ensured when the medium and the sensor have the same electrical potential. Most
Promag sensors have a standard installed reference electrode which guarantees the required connection. This
usually means that additional potential matching measures are unnecessary.

Note!
For installation in metal pipes, it is advisable to connect the ground terminal of the transmitter housing to the
piping. Also, observe company-internal grounding guidelines.

A0004375

Caution!
For sensors without reference electrodes or without metal process terminals, carry out potential matching as
per the instructions for special cases described below. These special measures are particularly important when
standard grounding practice cannot be ensured or extremely strong matching currents are expected.

10 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 69 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Metal, ungrounded piping


In order to prevent outside influences on measurement, it is advisable to use ground cables to connect each
sensor flange to its corresponding pipe flange and ground the flanges. Connect the transmitter or sensor con-
nection housing, as applicable, to ground potential by means of the ground terminal provided for the purpose.

Caution!
Also, observe company-internal grounding guidelines.

Note!
The ground cable for flange-to-flange connections can be ordered separately as an accessory from
Endress+Hauser.
• DN ≤ 300: The ground cable is in direct connection with the conductive flange coating and is secured by
the flange screws.
• DN ≥ 350: The ground cable connects directly to the metal transport bracket.

6 mm² Cu

DN £ 300 DN ³ 350

A0004376

Endress+Hauser 11
Sección 6 ~ Página 70 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Plastic pipes and isolating lined pipes


Normally, potential is matched using the reference electrodes in the measuring tube. However, in exceptional
cases it is possible that, due to the grounding plan of a system, large matching currents flow over the reference
electrodes. This can lead to destruction of the sensor, e.g. through electrochemical decomposition of the elec-
trodes. In such cases, e.g. for fibre-glass or PVC piping, it is recommended that you use additional ground disks
for potential matching.

When using ground disks, note the following points:


• Ground disks (DN 15...300) can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser as an accessory.
• Ground disks (incl. seals) increase the installation length. You can find the dimensions of ground disks on
Page 31.

Caution!
• Risk of damage from electrochemical corrosion. Note the electrochemical insulation rating, if the ground
disks and measuring electrodes are made of different materials.
• Also, observe company-internal grounding guidelines.

6 mm² Cu

A0004377

Pipes with cathodic protection


In such cases, install the measuring instrument without potential in the piping:
• When installing the measuring device, make sure that there is an electrical connection between the two
piping runs (copper wire, 6 mm2).
• Make sure that the installation materials do not establish a conductive connection to the measuring device
and that the installation materials withstand the tightening torques applied when the threaded fasteners are
tightened.
• Also comply with the regulations applicable to potential-free installation.

2 2
1

6 mm² Cu

A0004378
1 = isolation transformer, 2 = electrically isolated

12 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 71 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Performance characteristics
Reference operating To DIN EN 29104 and VDI/VDE 2641:
conditions • Medium temperature: +28 °C ± 2 K
• Ambient temperature: +22 °C ± 2 K
• Warm-up period: 30 minutes

Installation:
• Inlet run >10 x DN
• Outlet run > 5 x DN
• Sensor and transmitter grounded.
• Sensor centered relative to the pipe.

Maximum measured error Promag 50:


Pulse output: ± 0.5% o.r. ± 1 mm/s (o.r. = of reading)
Current output: plus typically ± 5 µA

Promag 53:
Pulse output: ± 0.2% o.r. ± 2 mm/s (o.r. = of reading)
Current output: plus typically ± 5 µA

Supply voltage fluctuations have no effect within the specified range.

[%]
2.5

2.0
0.5 %
1.5
0.2 %
1.0

0.5

0
0 1 2 4 6 8 10
v [m/s]

F06-5xxxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-000
Max. measured error in % of reading

Repeatability max. ± 0.1% o.r. ± 0.5 mm/s (o.r. = of reading)

Endress+Hauser 13
Sección 6 ~ Página 72 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Operating conditions

Installation conditions
Installation instructions Mounting location
Correct measuring is possible only if the pipe is full. Avoid the following locations:
• Highest point of a pipeline. Risk of air accumulating.
• Directly upstream of a free pipe outlet in a vertical pipe.

F06-5xxxxxxx-11-00-00-xx-000

Installation of pumps
Do not install the sensor on the intake side of a pump. This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the conse-
quent risk of damage to the lining of the measuring tube. Information on the lining's resistance to partial vac-
uum can be found on Page 21.
It might be necessary to install pulse dampers in systems incorporating reciprocating, diaphragm or peristaltic
pumps. Information on the measuring system's resistance to vibration and shock can be found on Page 20.

F06-5xxxxxxx-11-00-00-xx-001

14 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 73 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Partially filled pipes


Partially filled pipes with gradients necessitate a drain-type configuration. The Empty Pipe Detection (EPD)
function offers additional protection by detecting empty or partially filled pipes.

Caution!
Risk of solids accumulating. Do not install the sensor at the lowest point in the drain. It is advisable to install a
cleaning valve.

F06-5xxxxxxx-11-00-00-xx-002

Vertical pipes
Install a siphon (b) or a vent valve (a) downstream of the sensor in vertical pipes longer than 5 meters. This
precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk of damage to the lining of the measuring tube.
These measures also prevent the system losing prime, which could cause air inclusions. Information on the lin-
ing’s resistance to partial vacuum can be found on Page 21.

F06-5xxxxxxx-11-00-00-xx-003
a = vent valve, b = siphon

Endress+Hauser 15
Sección 6 ~ Página 74 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Orientation
An optimum orientation helps avoid gas and air accumulations and deposits in the measuring tube. Promag,
nevertheless, supplies a range of options and accessories for correct measuring of problematic mediums:
• Electrode Cleaning Circuitry (ECC) to remove electrically conductive deposits in the measuring tube, e.g. in
accretive mediums.
• Empty Pipe Detection (EPD) for recognition of partially filled measuring tubes, or for degassing mediums or
for applications with fluctuating process pressure.

Vertical orientation:
This orientation is ideal for self-emptying piping systems and for use in conjunction with Empty Pipe Detection.

F06-5xxxxxxx-11-00-00-xx-004

Horizontal orientation:
The measuring electrode-plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief insulation of the two electrodes by
entrained air bubbles.

Caution!
Empty Pipe Detection functions correctly only when the measuring device is installed horizontally and the
transmitter housing is facing upward. Otherwise there is no guarantee that Empty Pipe Detection will respond
if the measuring tube is only partially filled or empty.

F06-5xxxxxxx-11-00-xx-xx-000
1 = EPD electrode (Empty Pipe Detection)
2 = Measuring electrodes (signal detection)
3 = Reference electrode (potential equalisation)

16 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 75 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Vibrations
Secure the piping and the sensor if vibration is severe.

Caution!
It is advisable to install sensor and transmitter separately if vibration is excessively severe.
Information on resistance to vibration and shock can be found on Page 20.

> 10 m

F06-5xxxxxxx-11-00-00-xx-006

Foundations, supports
If the nominal diameter is DN ≥ 350, mount the transmitter on a foundation of adequate load-
bearing strength.

Caution!
Do not allow the casing to take the weight of the sensor. This would buckle the casing and
damage the internal magnetic coils.

F06-5xFxxxxx-11-05-xx-xx-000

Endress+Hauser 17
Sección 6 ~ Página 76 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Inlet and outlet runs If possible, install the sensor well clear of fittings such as valves, T-pieces, elbows, etc. Compliance with the
following requirements for the inlet and outlet runs is necessary in order to ensure measuring accuracy:
• Inlet run ≥ 5 x DN
• Outlet run ≥ 2 x DN

F06-5xxxxxxx-11-00-00-xx-005

Adapters Suitable adapters to DIN EN 545 (double-flange junction sections) can be used to install the sensor in larger-
diameter pipes. The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring accuracy with very slow-moving
fluids.
The nomogram shown here can be used to calculate the pressure loss caused by reducers and expanders.
The nomogram applies only to fluids of viscosity similar to water:

1. Calculate the ratio of the diameters d/D.


2. From the nomogram read off the pressure loss as a function of flow velocity (downstream from the reduc-
tion) and the d/D ratio.

[mbar]
100

8 m/s

7 m/s

6 m/s

10
5 m/s

4 m/s
max. 8°
3 m/s
d D
2 m/s
1

1 m/s

0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9


d/D

F06-5xFxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-000

18 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 77 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Length of connecting cable Permissible cable length Lmax depends on the conductivity of the medium. A minimum conductivity of
20 µS/cm is required for measuring demineralized water.

[µS/cm]

200

L max 100

5
[m]
10 100 200

L max

F06-5xxxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-006
Gray shaded area = permissible range for medium conductivity
Lmax = length of connecting cable in [m]
Medium conductivity in [µS/cm]

In order to ensure measuring accuracy, moreover, comply with the following instructions when installing the
remote version:
• Secure the cable run or route the cable in a conduit. Movement of the cable can falsify the measuring signal,
particularly if the conductivity of the medium is low.
• Route the cable well clear of electrical machines and switching elements.
• Ensure potential equalisation between sensor and transmitter, if necessary.

Environment
Ambient temperature Transmitter:
• Standard: –20...+60 °C
• Optional: –40...+60 °C

Note!
At ambient temperatures below –20 °C the readability of the display may be impaired.

Sensor:
• Flange material carbon steel: –10...+60 °C
• Flange material stainless steel: –40...+60 °C

Caution!
It is not allowed to use the device beyond the min. and max. lining specified temperature values
(→ “Medium temperature range”).

Note the following points:


• Install the device at a shady location. Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
• If both fluid and ambient temperatures are high, install the transmitter at a remote location from the sensor
(→ “Medium temperature range”).

Storage temperature • The storage temperature corresponds to the ambient temperature range of the transmitter and sensor
(see “Ambient temperature”).
• The measuring device must be protected against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid unacceptably
high surface temperatures.
• Choose a storage location where moisture does not collect in the measuring device. This will help prevent
fungus and bacteria infestation which can damage the liner.
• Do not remove the protective plates or caps on the process connections until the device is ready to install.
This is particularly important in the case of sensors with PTFE linings.

Endress+Hauser 19
Sección 6 ~ Página 78 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Degree of protection • Standard: IP 67 (NEMA 4X) for transmitter and sensor


• Optional: IP 68 (NEMA 6P) for sensor in remote version

Shock and vibration resistance Acceleration up to 2 g by analogy with IEC 60068-2-6


(high-temperature version: no data available)

Electromagnetic compatibility To EN 61326/A1 and NAMUR recommendation NE 21


(EMC)

Process conditions
Medium temperature range The permissible medium temperature depends on the measuring-tube lining:
• −40…+130 °C for PTFE (DN 15…600), for restrictions → refer to diagrams
• −20…+180 °C for PFA (DN 25…200), for restrictions → refer to diagrams

Compact version (PFA and PTFE lining)


TA = ambient temperature, TF = fluid temperature, HT = high-temperature version, with insulation
m = temperature range from -10 °C to -40 °C only applies for flanges made of stainless steel

HT

TA [°C]

60

40

20

PFA
-20
m
PTFE
-40
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 TF [°C]

A0002660

Remote version (PFA and PTFE lining)


TA = ambient temperature, TF = fluid temperature, HT = high-temperature version, with insulation
m = temperature range from -10 °C to -40 °C only applies for flanges made of stainless steel

HT

TA [°C]

60

40

20

PFA
-20
m
PTFE
-40
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 TF [°C]

A0002671

20 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 79 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Conductivity Minimum conductivity:


≥ 5 µS/cm for fluids generally
≥ 20 µS/cm for demineralised water

Note that in the case of the remote version, the minimum conductivity is also influenced by the length of the
connecting cable → see “Length of connecting cable”

Medium pressure range EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501):


(nominal pressure) PN 10 (DN 200…600)
PN 16 (DN 65…600)
PN 25 (DN 200…600)
PN 40 (DN 15…150)

ANSI B16.5:
Class 150 (1/2…24")
Class 300 (1/2…6")

JIS B2238:
10K (DN 50…300)
20K (DN 15…300)

AS2129:
Table E (DN 25, 50)

AS4087:
Cl. 14 (DN 50)

Pressure tightness
Nominal Measuring tube Resistance to partial vacuum of measuring tube lining
(liner) diameter lining Limit values for abs. pressure [mbar] at various fluid temperatures

[mm] [inch] 25 °C 80 °C 100 °C 130 °C 150 °C 180 °C

15 1/2" PTFE 0 0 0 100 − −

25 1" PTFE / PFA 0/0 0/0 0/0 100 / 0 −/0 −/0


32 − PTFE / PFA 0/0 0/0 0/0 100 / 0 −/0 −/0

40 1 1/2" PTFE / PFA 0/0 0/0 0/0 100 / 0 −/0 −/0

50 2" PTFE / PFA 0/0 0/0 0/0 100 / 0 −/0 −/0


65 − PTFE / PFA 0/0 * 40 / 0 130 / 0 −/0 −/0

80 3" PTFE / PFA 0/0 * 40 / 0 130 / 0 −/0 −/0

100 4" PTFE / PFA 0/0 * 135 / 0 170 / 0 −/0 −/0


125 − PTFE / PFA 135 / 0 * 240 / 0 385 / 0 −/0 −/0

150 6" PTFE / PFA 135 / 0 * 240 / 0 385 / 0 −/0 −/0

200 8" PTFE / PFA 200 / 0 * 290 / 0 410 / 0 −/0 −/0


250 10" PTFE 330 * 400 530 − −

300 12" PTFE 400 * 500 630 − −

350 14" PTFE 470 * 600 730 − −

400 16" PTFE 540 * 670 800 − −

450 18" PTFE

500 20" PTFE No vacuum is permissible!

600 24" PTFE

* No value can be specified.

Endress+Hauser 21
Sección 6 ~ Página 80 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Limiting flow The diameter of the pipe and the flow rate determine the nominal diameter of the sensor. The optimum velocity
of flow is 2...3 m/s. The velocity of flow (v), moreover, has to be matched to the physical properties of the
medium:
• v < 2 m/s: for abrasive mediums such as potter's clay, lime milk, ore slurry etc.
• v > 2 m/s: for accretive mediums such as wastewater sludge, etc.

Flow characteristics (SI units)

Nominal Recommended Factory settings


diameter flow rate

Min./max. full scale value Full scale value Pulse weighting Creepage
[mm] [inch] (v ~ 0.3 or 10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s) (~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)

15 1/2" 4…100 dm3/min 25 dm3/min 0.20 dm3 0.5 dm3/min

25 1" 9…300 dm3/min 75 dm3/min 0.50 dm3 1 dm3/min

32 1 1/4" 15…500 dm3/min 125 dm3/min 1.00 dm3 2 dm3/min

40 1 1/2" 25…700 dm3/min 200 dm3/min 1.50 dm3 3 dm3/min

50 2" 35…1100 dm3/min 300 dm3/min 2.50 dm3 5 dm3/min

65 2 1/2" 60…2000 dm3/min 500 dm3/min 5.00 dm3 8 dm3/min

80 3" 90…3000 dm3/min 750 dm3/min 5.00 dm3 12 dm3/min


100 4" 145…4700 dm3/min 1200 dm3/min 10.00 dm3 20 dm3/min

125 5" 220…7500 dm3/min 1850 dm3/min 15.00 dm3 30 dm3/min

150 6" 20…600 m3/h 150 m3/h 0.025 m3 2.5 m3/h


200 8" 35…1100 m3/h 300 m3/h 0.05 m3 5.0 m3/h

250 10" 55…1700 m3/h 500 m3/h 0.05 m3 7.5 m3/h

300 12" 80…2400 m3/h 750 m3/h 0.10 m3 10 m3/h


350 14" 110…3300 m3/h 1000 m3/h 0.10 m3 15 m3/h

400 16" 140…4200 m3/h 1200 m3/h 0.15 m3 20 m3/h

450 18" 180…5400 m3/h 1500 m3/h 0.25 m3 25 m3/h


500 20" 220…6600 m3/h 2000 m3/h 0.25 m3 30 m3/h

600 24" 310…9600 m3/h 2500 m3/h 0.30 m3 40 m3/h

22 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 81 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Flow characteristics (US units)

Nominal Recommended Factory settings


diameter flow rate
Min./max. full scale value Full scale value Pulse weighting Creepage
[inch] [mm] (v ~ 0.3 or ~ 10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s) (~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)

1/2" 15 1.0…27 gal/min 6 gal/min 0.05 gal 0.10 gal/min


1" 25 2.5…80 gal/min 18 gal/min 0.20 gal 0.25 gal/min

1 1/4" 32 4…130 gal/min 30 gal/min 0.20 gal 0.50 gal/min

1 1/2" 40 7…190 gal/min 50 gal/min 0.50 gal 0.75 gal/min

2" 50 10…300 gal/min 75 gal/min 0.50 gal 1.25 gal/min

2 1/2" 65 16…500 gal/min 130 gal/min 1 gal 2.0 gal/min

3" 80 24…800 gal/min 200 gal/min 2 gal 2.5 gal/min


4" 100 40…1250 gal/min 300 gal/min 2 gal 4.0 gal/min

5" 125 60…1950 gal/min 450 gal/min 5 gal 7.0 gal/min

6" 150 90…2650 gal/min 600 gal/min 5 gal 12 gal/min

8" 200 155…4850 gal/min 1200 gal/min 10 gal 15 gal/min

10" 250 250…7500 gal/min 1500 gal/min 15 gal 30 gal/min

12" 300 350…10600 gal/min 2400 gal/min 25 gal 45 gal/min

14" 350 500…15000 gal/min 3600 gal/min 30 gal 60 gal/min

16" 400 600…19000 gal/min 4800 gal/min 50 gal 60 gal/min

18" 450 800…24000 gal/min 6000 gal/min 50 gal 90 gal/min

20" 500 1000…30000 gal/min 7500 gal/min 75 gal 120 gal/min

24" 600 1400…44000 gal/min 10500 gal/min 100 gal 180 gal/min

Pressure loss • No pressure loss if the sensor is installed in a pipe of the same nominal diameter.
• Pressure losses for configurations incorporating adapters to DIN EN 545 → Page 18

Endress+Hauser 23
Sección 6 ~ Página 82 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Measuring tube specifications


Nominal diameter Pressure rating Inside diameter of
measuring tube

EN (DIN) AS 2129 AS 4087 ANSI JIS with PFA with PTFE


[mm] [inch] [bar] [lbs] [mm] [mm]

15 1/2" PN 40 − − Cl 150 20K − 15

25 1" PN 40 Table E − Cl 150 20K 23 26

32 − PN 40 − − − 20K 32 35

40 1 1/2" PN 40 − − Cl 150 20K 36 41

50 2" PN 40 Table E Cl.14 Cl 150 10K 48 52

65 − PN 16 − − − 10K 63 67

80 3" PN 16 − − Cl 150 10K 75 80

100 4" PN 16 − − Cl 150 10K 101 104

125 − PN 16 − − − 10K 126 129

150 6" PN 16 − − Cl 150 10K 154 156

200 8" PN 10 − − Cl 150 10K 201 202

250 10" PN 10 − − Cl 150 10K − 256

300 12" PN 10 − − Cl 150 10K − 306

350 14" PN 10 − − Cl 150 − − 337

400 16" PN 10 − − Cl 150 − − 387

450 18" PN 10 − − Cl 150 − − 432

500 20" PN 10 − − Cl 150 − − 487

600 24" PN 10 − − Cl 150 − − 593

24 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 83 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Mechanical construction
Design / dimensions Dimensions: Wall-mount housing (non hazardous area and II3G / zone 2)

mm (inch)

159.5 (6.28)

250 (9.84)
Esc
- + E

90.5 (3.56)
90 (3.54) 45 (1.77)

215 (8.46) 135 (5.32)

53 (2.09)
> 50 (1.97) 81 (3.19) 81 (3.19)

102 (4.02)
8 x M5

53 (2.09)
95 (3.74)
81.5 (3.21)
11.5 (0.45) 192 (7.56) 11.5 (0.45)

A0001150

Dimensions: Remote field housing (II2GD / zone 1)

265
242
240 206
217 186

ter Spannu
ht un ng
Nic öffnen

Nicht-eigensichere
Kee ircuits are alive ile

Kee ircuits are ali hile

Stromkreise durch
p cover tight wh

IP40-Abdeckung geschützt
p cover tight w

167

Non-intrinsically safe
circuits Ip40 protected
Esc
Boucles de courant - +
c

E
ve

sans sécurité intrinsèque


protégées par Ip40

sous nsion l Ne
pas o te pparei
uvrir l’a
355
188
100

133
Ø 8.6 (M8)

100

123

A00021287

Endress+Hauser 25
Sección 6 ~ Página 84 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

There is a separate mounting kit for the wall-mounted housing. It can be ordered from Endress+Hauser as an
accessory. The following installation variants are possible:
• Panel-mounted installation
• Pipe mounting

Panel-mounted installation

21 +
– 00.5
0 .5

– 0.5
+0.5
245
10
~1

A0001131

Pipe mounting
Ø 20...70

55
~1

A0001132

26 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 85 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Compact version DN ≤ 300

F06-53Fxxxxx-06-00-xx-xx-000

DN L A B C K E

EN (DIN) / JIS / ANSI


AS* [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
[mm]

15 1/2" 200 341 257 84 120 94

25 1" 200 341 257 84 120 94


32 − 200 341 257 84 120 94

40 1 1/2" 200 341 257 84 120 94

50 2" 200 341 257 84 120 94

65 − 200 391 282 109 180 94

80 3" 200 391 282 109 180 94

100 4" 250 391 282 109 180 94


125 − 250 472 322 150 260 140

150 6" 300 472 322 150 260 140

200 8" 350 527 347 180 324 156

250 10" 450 577 372 205 400 156

300 12" 500 627 397 230 460 166

The fitting length (L) is always the same, regardless of the pressure rating.
* Only DN 25 and 50 are available if flanges according to AS are used.

High temperature version DN ≤ 300


B1
110

A1

F06-5xPxxxxx-06-00-00-xx-000
Measurement A1, B1 = Measurement A, B of the standard compact version plus 110 mm

Endress+Hauser 27
Sección 6 ~ Página 86 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Remote version DN ≤ 300

129 163
143

102
B
A
C
E
K L (DVGW)

A0003219

DN L A B C K E
EN (DIN) / JIS / ANSI
AS* [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
[mm]
15 1/2" 200 286 202 84 120 94
25 1" 200 286 202 84 120 94
32 − 200 286 202 84 120 94
40 1 1/2" 200 286 202 84 120 94
50 2" 200 286 202 84 120 94
65 − 200 336 227 109 180 94
80 3" 200 336 227 109 180 94
100 4" 250 336 227 109 180 94
125 − 250 417 267 150 260 140
150 6" 300 417 267 150 260 140
200 8" 350 472 292 180 324 156
250 10" 450 522 317 205 400 156
300 12" 500 572 342 230 460 166
The fitting length (L) is always the same, regardless of the pressure rating.
* Only DN 25 and 50 are available if flanges according to AS are used.

High-temperature version DN ≤ 300


B1
110

A1

F06-xxPxxxxx-06-05-00-xx-000
Measurement A1, B1 = Measurement A, B of the standard compact version plus 110 mm

28 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 87 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Compact version DN ≥ 350

227 187
207 168

160
Esc
- + E

B
A
C
E

K L

F06-53Fxxxxx-06-00-xx-xx-001

DN L A B C K E

EN (DIN) ANSI
[mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
350 14" 550 738.5 456.5 282.0 564 276

400 16" 600 790.5 482.5 308.0 616 276

450 18" 650 840.5 507.5 333.0 666 292


500 20" 650 891.5 533.0 358.5 717 292

600 24" 780 995.5 585.0 410.5 821 402

The fitting length (L) is always the same, regardless of the pressure rating.

Endress+Hauser 29
Sección 6 ~ Página 88 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Remote version DN ≥ 350

129 163
143

102

B
A
C
E
K L

A0003220

DN L A B C K E

EN (DIN) ANSI
[mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]

350 14" 550 683.5 401.5 282.0 564 276

400 16" 600 735.5 427.5 308.0 616 276


450 18" 650 785.5 452.5 333.0 666 292

500 20" 650 836.5 478.0 358.5 717 292

600 24" 780 940.5 530.0 410.5 821 402


The fitting length (L) is always the same, regardless of the pressure rating.

30 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 89 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Ground disk (DN 15...300)

ØB

6.5
Ø

15
Ø di
10

ØD
2

A0003221

DN 1) di B D H

EN (DIN) / JIS / ANSI


AS 4) [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
[mm]

15 1/2" 16 43 61.5 73

25 1" 26 62 77.5 87.5

32 − 35 80 87.5 94.5

40 1 1/2" 41 82 101 103

50 2" 52 101 115.5 108

65 − 68 121 131.5 118

80 3" 80 131 154.5 135

100 4" 104 156 186.5 153

125 − 130 187 206.5 160

150 6" 158 217 256 184

200 8" 206 267 288 205

250 10" 260 328 359 240


2) 12" 2) 312 375 413 273
300
3) 3)
300 12" 310 375 404 268
1)
Ground disks can, with the exception of DN 300, be used for all flange norms / pressure ratings.
2) PN 10/16, Class 150
3)
PN 25, JIS 10K/20K
4)
Only DN 25 and 50 are available if flanges according to AS are used.

Endress+Hauser 31
Sección 6 ~ Página 90 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Weight Weight data in kg


Nominal Compact version Remote version (without cable)
diameter
Sensor Wall
housing
[mm] [inch] EN (DIN) / JIS ANSI EN (DIN) / JIS ANSI
AS* AS*

15 1/2" 6.5 6.5 6.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.0

25 1" 7.3 7.3 7.3 5.3 5.3 5.3 6.0

PN 40

PN 40
32 1 1/4" 8.0 7.3 – 6.0 5.3 – 6.0

40 1 1/2" 9.4 8.3 9.4 7.4 6.3 7.4 6.0

50 2" 10.6 9.3 10.6 8.6 7.3 8.6 6.0

65 2 1/2" 12.0 11.1 – 10.0 9.1 – 6.0


10K

10K
80 3" 14.0 12.5 14.0 12.0 10.5 12.0 6.0
PN 16

PN 16
100 4" 16.0 14.7 16.0 14.0 12.7 14.0 6.0

Class 150

Class 150
125 5" 21.5 21.0 – 19.5 19.0 – 6.0
150 6" 25.5 24.5 25.5 23.5 22.5 23.5 6.0

200 8" 45 41.9 45 43 39.9 43 6.0

250 10" 65 69.4 75 63 67.4 73 6.0

300 12" 70 72.3 110 68 70.3 108 6.0


350 14" 115 175 113 173 6.0
PN 10

PN 10

400 16" 135 205 133 203 6.0

450 18" 175 255 173 253 6.0


500 20" 175 285 173 283 6.0

600 24" 235 405 233 403 6.0

Transmitter Promag (compact version): 3.4 kg


High-temperature version: +1.5 kg
(Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material)
* Only DN 25 and 50 are available if flanges according to AS are used.

Materials Transmitter housing:


• Compact housing: powder coated die-cast aluminium or stainless steel field housing
• Wall-mounted housing: powder coated die-cast aluminium

Sensor housing:
• DN 15…300: powder-coated die-cast aluminium
• DN 350…600: painted steel (Amerlock 400)

Measuring tube:
• DN < 350: stainless steel 1.4301 or 1.4306/304L; non-stainless flange material with
AI/Zn protective coating
• DN > 300: stainless steel 1.4301/304; non-stainless flange material with
Amerlock 400 paint

Flange:
• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501): 316L / 1.4571; RSt37-2 (S235JRG2) / C22 / FE 410W B
(with flanges made of carbon steel: DN < 350 with Al/Zn protective coating,
DN > 300 with Amerlock 400 paint)
• ANSI: A105, F316L
(with flanges made of carbon steel: DN < 350 with Al/Zn protective coating,
DN > 300 with Amerlock 400 paint)
• JIS: RSt37-2 (S235JRG2) / H II / 1.0425 / 316L
(with flanges made of carbon steel: DN < 350 with Al/Zn protective coating,
DN > 300 with Amerlock 400 paint)

32 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 91 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

• AS 2129: (DN 25) A105 or RSt37-2 (S235JRG2)


(DN 50) A105 oder St44-2 (S275JR)
(with Al/Zn protective coating)
• AS 4087: A105 or St44-2 (S275JR)
(with Al/Zn protective coating)

Ground disks: 1.4435/316L or Alloy C-22


Electrodes: 1.4435, platinum/rhodium 80/20 or Alloy C-22, tantalum
Seals: Seals to DIN EN 1514-1

Material load diagrams Caution!


The following diagrams contain material load curves (reference curves) for various process connections relating
to the fluid temperature. But the maximal permissible fluid temperature always depends on the lining material
of the sensor and/or the sealing material (s. Page 20).

Flange connection to EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)


Flange material: RSt37-2 (S235JRG2) / C22 / FE 410W B

[bar]
40
PN 40
35

30

25
PN 25
20

15
PN 16
10
PN 10
5 PN 6

0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]

F06-xxFxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-000

Flange connection to EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)


Flange material: 316L / 1.4571

[bar]
40
PN 40
35

30

25
PN 25
20

15
PN 16

10
PN 10
5 PN 6

0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]

F06-xxFxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-001

Endress+Hauser 33
Sección 6 ~ Página 92 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Flange connection to ANSI B16.5


Flange material: A105

[bar] [psi]

60 870

50 725
Class 300
40 580

30 435

20 290
Class 150
10 145

0 0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]

A0003226

Flange connection to ANSI B16.5


Flange material: F316L

[bar] [psi]

60 870

50 725

40 580
Class 300
30 435

20 290
Class 150
10 145

0 0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]

F06-xxFxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-002

Flange connection to JIS B2238


Flange material: RSt37-2 (S235JRG2) / H II / 1.0425

[bar]

30

20K
20

10K
10

0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]

A0003228

34 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 93 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Flange connection to AS2129 Table E or AS4087 Cl. 14


Flange material: A105 / RSt37-2 (S235JRG2) / St44-2 (S275JR)

[bar]
25

20

15

10

0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 [°C]

F06-xxFxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-010

Fitted electrodes Measuring, reference and EPD electrodes


• Standard available with 1.4435, Alloy C-22, tantalum, platinum/rhodium 80/20
• Optional: measuring electrodes made of platinum/rhodium 80/20

Process connection Flange connection:


• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501), < DN 350 From A, > DN 300 From B
(dimensions acc. to DIN 2501; DN 65 PN 16 and DN 600 PN 16 exclusively to EN 10921)
• ANSI B16.5
• JIS B2238
• AS2129 Table E
• AS4087 Cl. 14

Surface roughness • PFA liner: ≤ 0.4 µm


• Electrodes:
– 1.4435, Alloy C-22: 0.3...0.5 µm
– Tantalum, platinum/rhodium: 0.3...0.5 µm
(all data relate to parts in contact with the medium)

Endress+Hauser 35
Sección 6 ~ Página 94 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Human interface
Display elements • Liquid-crystal display: backlit, two lines (Promag 50) or four lines (Promag 53) with 16 characters per line
• Custom configurations for presenting different measured-value and status variables
• Totalizer:
Promag 50: 2 totalizers
Promag 53: 3 totalizers

Operating elements Unified operation concept for both types of transmitter:

Promag 50:
• Local operation with three push buttons (–, +, E)
• Quick Setup menus for straightforward commissioning

Promag 53:
• Local operation with Touch Control (–, +, E)
• Application-specific Quick Setup menus for straightforward commissioning

Language group Language groups available for operation in different countries:

Promag 50, Promag 53:


• Western Europe and America (WEA):
English, German, Spanish, Italian, French, Dutch and Portuguese
• Eastern Europe and Scandinavia (EES):
English, Russian, Polish, Norwegian, Finnish, Swedish and Czech
• South and east Asia (SEA):
English, Japanese, Indonesian

Promag 53:
• China (CIN):
English, Chinese

You can change the language group via the operating program “ToF Tool - Fieldtool Package.”

Remote operation Promag 50: Remote control via HART, PROFIBUS DP/PA
Promag 53: Remote control via HART, PROFIBUS DP/PA, MODUBUS RS485, FOUNDATION Fieldbus

36 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 95 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Certificates and approvals


Ex approvals Information about currently available Ex versions (ATEX, FM, CSA) can be supplied by your Endress+Hauser
Sales Centre on request. All explosion protection data are given in a separate documentation which is available
upon request.

CE mark The measuring system is in conformity with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives. Endress+Hauser
confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.

C-Tick mark The measuring system is in conformity with the EMC requirements of the Australian Communications
Authority (ACA).

Pressure Equipment Directive Flow meters with a nominal diameter smaller or equal DN 25 are covered by Art. 3(3) of the European directive
97/23/EG (Pressure Equipment Directive) and are designed according to sound engineer practice.
For larger nominal diameter, optional approvals according to Cat. III are available when required (depends on
fluid and process pressure).

PROFIBUS DP/PA The flow device has successfully passed all the test procedures carried out and is certified and registered by the
certification PNO (PROFIBUS User Organisation). The device thus meets all the requirements of the following specifica-
tions:

• Certified to PROFIBUS PA, profile version 3.0 (device certification number: on request)
• The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers (interoperability)

FOUNDATION Fieldbus The flow device has successfully passed all the test procedures carried out and is certified and registered by the
certification Fieldbus Foundation. The device thus meets all the requirements of the following specifications:

• Certified to FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specification


• The device meets all the specifications of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1.
• Interoperability Test Kit (ITK), revision status 4.0 (device certification number: on request)
• The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers
• Physical Layer Conformance Test of the Fieldbus Foundation

MODBUS certification The measuring device meets all the requirements of the MODBUS/TCP conformity test and has the “MOD-
BUS/TCP Conformance Test Policy, Version 2.0”. The measuring device has successfully passed all the test
procedures carried out and is certified by the “MODBUS/TCP Conformance Test Laboratory” of the University
of Michigan.

Other standards, guidelines EN 60529:


Degrees of protection by housing (IP code)

EN 61010:
Protection Measures for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, Regulation and
Laboratory Procedures.

EN 61326/A1 (IEC 6326):


Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements)

NAMUR NE 21:
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control equipment.

NAMUR NE 43:
Standardisation of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitters with analogue
output signal.

NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics.

Endress+Hauser 37
Sección 6 ~ Página 96 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Ordering information
The Endress+Hauser service organisation can provide detailed ordering information and information on the
order codes on request.

Accessories
Various accessories, which can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser, are available for the transmitter
and the sensor. The Endress+Hauser service organisation can provide detailed information on request.

Supplementary documentation
• Flow Measurement (FA005D/06/en)
• Operating Instructions Promag 50 (BA046D/06/en, BA049D/06/en)
• Operating Instructions Promag 50 PROFIBUS PA (BA055D/06/en, BA056D/06/en)
• Operating Instructions Promag 53 (BA047D/06/en, BA048D/06/en)
• Operating Instructions Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP/PA (BA053D/06/en, BA054D/06/en)
• Operating Instructions Promag 53 FOUNDATION Fieldbus (BA051D/06/en, BA052D/06/en)
• Operating Instructions Promag 53 MODBUS (BA117D/06/en und BA118D/06/en)
• Supplementary documentation on Ex-ratings: ATEX, FM, CSA, etc.

Registered trademarks
HART®
Registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation, Austin, USA

PROFIBUS®
Registered trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organisation, Karlsruhe, Germany

FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus
Registered trademark of the Fieldbus FOUNDATION, Austin, USA

MODBUS®
Registered trademark of the MODBUS Organisation

HistoROM™, S-DAT®, T-DAT™, F-CHIP®, ToF Tool - Fieldtool® Package, Fieldcheck®, Applicator®
Registered or registration-pending trademarks of Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG, Reinach, CH

38 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 97 de 275
Proline Promag 50P, 53P

Endress+Hauser 39
Sección 6 ~ Página 98 de 275

Subject to modification

International Head Quarter

Endress+Hauser
GmbH+Co. KG
Instruments International
Colmarer Str. 6
79576 Weil am Rhein
Deutschland

Tel. +49 76 21 9 75 02
Fax +49 76 21 9 75 34 5
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com

TI047D/06/en/07.05
50096459
FM+SGML 6.0
Sección 6 ~ Página 99 de 275

BA 035D/06/en/01.98
No. 50085724
CV 5.0
promag 35
valid from software version
V 3.01.XX (amplifier)
(PROFIBUS PA)
V 2.05.XX (communication)
Electromagnetic
Flow Measuring System
Operating Manual

ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG

>3s

E – +

Endress + Hauser
Nothing beats know-how
Sección 6 ~ Página 100 de 275
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA

Short Instruction
With the following instructions, you may configure your measuring instrument quickly
and easily.
Safety instructions → see page 5

Mounting and electrical connection:


Mounting → see page 11
Electrical connection → see page 23

Operation → see page 29


(Programming the device)

E - +

>3s

-
+
E E E E E

Programming the display


Contrast → see page 42
Language → see page 42
Display upper line → see page 41
Display lower line → see page 41

Unit selection → s. page 35/36


(Flow rate/volume)

Configuration of outputs

Current output
Full scale → see page 37
Current span → see page 38

PROFIBUS PA
Bus address → see page 56
Adressing by DIP switch → see page 57

For highest accuracy:


Creep suppression → see page 44
Empty pipe detection (EPD) → see page 45

Note!
Complex applications require programming
Note! of additional functions. You will find the
appropriate pages and functions in:
Contents → see page 3
Index → see page 77
Operating matrix → see page 31

2 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 101 de 275
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA

Inhaltsverzeichnis
Contents
1 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . 5 8 Troubleshooting and Remedies . 59
1.1 Correct usage . . . . . . . . . . . 5 8.1 Response of the measuring system to
1.2 Dangers and notes . . . . . . . . . 5 faults or alarm . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1.3 Personnel for installation, start-up and 8.2 Instructions for troubleshooting . . . . . 60
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 8.3 Diagnostic function for fault location . . . 61
1.4 Repairs, dangerous chemicals . . . . . 6 8.4 Error and status messages . . . . . . 62
1.5 Technical improvements . . . . . . . 6 8.5 Replacing the fuse . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.6 Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2 System Description . . . . . . . 7
9 Dimensions and Weights . . . . 65
2.1 Correct usage . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2 Promag 35 S measuring system . . . . 7
2.3 Design of the measuring system . . . . 8 10 Technical Data . . . . . . . . 69

3 Mounting and Installation . . . 11 11 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . 77


3.1 General information . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2 Transport instructions (for DN > 200/8") . 12
3.3 Mounting instructions . . . . . . . . 13
3.4 Mounting Promag 35 S . . . . . . . . 16
3.5 Turning the transmitter housing and local
display (compact version) . . . . . . . 18
3.6 Mounting the transmitter (remote version) 19
3.7 Potential equalisation . . . . . . . . 20

4 Electrical Connection . . . . . 23
4.1 Connecting the transmitter for the
compact version . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2 Connection diagrams . . . . . . . . 24
4.3 Connection diagram for the remote version 25
4.4 Cable specifications . . . . . . . . . 26
4.5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . 27

5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.1 Operating and display elements . . . . 29
5.2 Functions of the operating elements . . . 30
5.3 Programming matrix Promag 35
PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.4 Information for programming . . . . . . 32
5.5 Programming example . . . . . . . . 33

6 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 35

7 PROFIBUS PA Interface . . . . . 55
7.1 PROFIBUS PA . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.2 GSD- and Type-Files . . . . . . . . . 55
7.3 Setting the bus address . . . . . . . 56
7.4 PROFIBUS PA addressing via touch control 56
7.5 Addressing PROFIBUS PA by DIP switches 57
7.6 PROFIBUS PA Parameters . . . . . . 58

Endress+Hauser 3
Sección 6 ~ Página 102 de 275
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA 1 Safety Instructions

1 Safety Instructions

1.1 Correct usage


• The Promag 35 S is only to be used for measuring the flow of conductive fluids.
• The manufacturer assumes no liability for damage caused by incorrect use of the
instrument.

1.2 Dangers and notes


All instruments are designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, have been
tested, and have left the factory in an operational perfectly safe condition.

The devices were developed according to EN 61010 “Protection Measures for


Electronic Equipment for Measurement, Control, Regulation and Laboratory
Procedures”.
A hazardous situation may occur if the flowmeter is not used for the purpose it was
designed for or is used incorrectly.
Please carefully note the information provided in this Operating Manual indicated by
the pictograms:

Warning!
A “warning” indicates actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may
lead to personal injury or a safety hazard.
Please strictly observe the instructions supplied and proceed carefully. Warning!

Caution!
A “caution” indicates actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may
lead to faulty operations or the destruction of the instrument.
Please strictly observe the respective instructions. Caution!

Note!
A “note” indicates actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may
Note!
indirectly affect operations or lead to an unexpected instrument response.

1.3 Personnel for installation, start-up and operation


• Mounting, electrical installation, start-up and maintenance of the instrument may
only be carried out by trained personnel authorised by the operator of the facility.
Personnel must absolutely and without fail read and understand this Operating
Manual before carrying out its instructions.
• The instrument may only be operated by personnel who are authorised and trained
by the operator of the facility. All instructions in this manual are to be observed
without fail.
• With special fluids, incl. those used for cleaning, E+H will be pleased to supply
information concerning the chemical resistance properties of wetted parts.

Endress+Hauser 5
Sección 6 ~ Página 103 de 275
1 Safety Instructions Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA

• The installer has to make sure that the measuring system is correctly wired up
according to the wiring diagrams. The measuring system is to be grounded.

Danger of electric shock!


Protection against accidental contact is no longer assured when the
connection housing cover is unscrewed.

• Please observe all provisions valid for your country and pertaining to the opening
and repairing of electrical devices.

1.4 Repairs, dangerous chemicals


The following procedures must be carried out before a Promag 35 S is sent to
Endress+Hauser for repair:
• A note must always be enclosed with the instrument, containing a description of the
fault, the application, and the chemical and physical properties of the product be-
ing measured.
• Remove all residue which may be present. Pay special attention to the gasket
grooves and crevices where fluid may be present. This is especially important if
the fluid is dangerous to health, e.g. corrosive, carcinogenic, radioactive, etc.
• No instrument should be returned without all dangerous material being
removed first (e.g. in scratches or diffused through plastic).

Incomplete cleaning of the instrument may result in waste disposal or cause harm to
personnel (burns, etc). Any costs arising from this will be charged to the owner of the
instrument.

1.5 Technical improvements


The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
local E+H Sales Office will supply you with all current information and any updates to
this Operating Manual.

6 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 104 de 275
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA 2 System Description

2 System Description

2.1 Correct usage


The Promag 35 S measuring system is used whenever a system has to meet high
requirements. It is particularly suitable for media characterised by a high solids content,
high abrasiveness, and a highly inhomogeneous distribution of additives and chemicals.
Any fluids with a minimum conductivity of ≥ 1 μS/cm, ≥ 20 μS/cm for demineralised and
desalinised water, may be measured.
For difficult-to-measure media, Promag 35 S is mainly used for the following applications:

Paper and pulp industry pulp with 15% solids contents, cellulose,
additives/chemicals
Mining industry ore slurries, coal washings
Building material industry cement, concrete, pastes
Food industry yoghurt with pieces of fruit, fruit mash
Sewage industry slurries of up to 30% dry solids

2.2 Promag 35 S measuring system


The Promag measuring system is fully modular, both electrically and mechanically.
The measuring system can be updated at any time by exchanging electronic boards.
The measuring point can always be optimally equipped and upgraded.
The following illustration is an overview of the entire Promag 35 S measuring system.

Sensor

Equipment of the transmitter Promag 35 S

Power supply board


180...260 V AC or

Power supply board


85...130 V AC, or

DN 15...200 ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG
Power supply board
20...55 V AC,
16...62 V DC

ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG Measuring amplifier board

Communication board with


PROFIBUS PA interface and
active current output

Display/operating module
DN 250...600 (blind version: without display/
operating module optional)
ba035y02

Fig. 1
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA
measuring system

Note!
For standard applications, the cost-effective Promag 30 version is available or the con-
Note!
venient Promag 33 version with the E+H matrix operation mode.
All information on these measuring systems are available from your E+H
representative.

Endress+Hauser 7
Sección 6 ~ Página 105 de 275
2 System Description Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA

2.3 Design of the measuring system

Power supply *
Transmitter
180...260 V AC 45...65 Hz
85...130 V AC 45...65 Hz Screw cover
20... 55 V AC 45...65 Hz ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG 33
Electronics compartment
16... 62 V DC
Screw cover
Terminal compartment

Connection housing

DN 15...200 DN 250...600

3 3
1 1
1 1
2 2
Outputs * Sensor
1 Measuring electrodes
PROFIBUS PA interface (see page 55ff) 2 Reference electrodes
3 Empty pipe detection electrode
Current output active
electrically isolated
0/4...20 mA
RL <350 Ω
Full scale value, current range, time constant, etc. selectable

ba035y04
Fig. 2 * Technical Data: see page 69ff
Design of measuring system

Operation
The Promag 35 transmitter is equipped with a two-line, illuminated LCD.
Configuration is very simple to carry out using the E+H matrix-driven operation.
All parameters can be selected and varied with only three control elements, e.g.
• Engineering units
• Functions of the current output
• Functions of the totalizer
• Display parameters
• Creep suppression
• Empty Pipe Detection (EPD)

Twelve languages are selectable for the display text. During configuration a help
function (diagnosis) is available.

Dynamic response
The Promag 35 measuring amplifier has a very high dynamic response of over
1000:1. It measures at fluid velocities from less than 0.01 m/s to over 10 m/s within
the specified accuracy. When the flow is pulsating the amplifier is not overloaded
even if above the preset end value and at a flow velocity of up to 12.5 m/s.
There is no falsification of the measured value as long as the outputs are not
overloaded.

8 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 106 de 275
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA 2 System Description

Operational safety
• A comprehensive measuring system self-monitoring facility assures high availability.
Any system errors (coil current error, amplifier error, DAT error, EEPROM error,
ROM error, RAM error) or power supply failures that do occur are immediately
signalled via the PROFIBUS PA interface or the fail-safe mode of the current output.
• Corresponding error messages also appear on the transmitter display. By means of
the diagnostic function any errors present can be systematically scanned and their
cause determined.
• In the event of a power supply failure, all data in the measuring system are safely
stored in the EEPROM (no batteries required).
• The Promag 35 S measuring system fulfils the safety requirements according
to EN 61010 “Protection Measures for Electronic Equipment for Measurement,
Control, Regulation and Laboratory Procedures”, as well as the general require-
ments for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to EN 50081 Part 1 and
Part 2 / EN 50082 Part 1 and Part 2 as well as the NAMUR recommendations.

Data Memory (DAT)


The DAT is an exchangeable memory module. It stores all characteristic data
of the sensor, such as calibration factors, nominal diameter, sampling rate, version,
serial number. When the transmitter has been changed, the previous DAT is inserted
in the new transmitter. When the measuring system is started, the measuring point
continues to operate with the data stored in the DAT memory. Thus, the DAT
assures maximum safety and optimum ease of operation when components of the
equipment are exchanged.

Endress+Hauser 9
Sección 6 ~ Página 107 de 275
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA 3 Mounting and Installation

3 Mounting and Installation


Warning!
The instructions given in this section are to be observed at all times in order to
ensure safe and reliable operation of the measuring system. Warning!

3.1 General information


Degree of protection IP 65 (EN 60529)
The instruments fulfil all the requirements for IP 65. After successful installation in
the field or after servicing, the following points must always be observed in order
to ensure the degree of protection IP 65:

• Housing gaskets must be clean and


undamaged when inserted in the
gasket groove. The gaskets may need
to be dried, cleaned or replaced.
• All housing screws and the housing
cover must be tightened firmly.
• The cables used for connecting must
have the correct outer diameter (see
page 26).
• The cable gland must be
tightened firmly (see Fig. 3).
• The cable must loop down before
entering the cable gland to ensure that
no moisture can enter it (see Fig. 3).
• Any cable gland not used must be
replaced with a blind plug.
• The protective bushing should not ba035y05
be removed from the cable gland.
Fig. 3
Mounting cable entries

Caution!
The screws of the Promag sensor housing must not be loosened or the degree of
protection guaranteed by E+H is no longer valid. Caution!

Note!
The Promag 35 S sensor can optionally be supplied with the IP 67 or IP 68 degree of
protection (permanently under water to a depth of 3 m). In this case the transmitter
Note!
(generally supplied in IP 67) has to be mounted remote from the sensor.

Temperature ranges
The maximum approved ambient and process temperatures must be observed
(see page 71). An all-weather cover should be used to protect from direct sunlight
when mounting in the open.

Endress+Hauser 11
Sección 6 ~ Página 108 de 275
3 Mounting and Installation Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA

3.2 Transport instructions (for DN > 200/8")


The pipe lining on the flanges is protected by disks to prevent damage when
transporting to the measuring point. These are to be removed when installing.
Instruments are to be transported in the containers they are delivered in.

Transporting to the measuring point


• The grips on the flange must be used
when lifting the sensor and when
installing the sensor in the pipeline
(from DN 200/8").

• The sensor must not be lifted by the


transmitter housing.

• The sensor must not be lifted by the


metal casing using a fork lift truck.
The casing may be dented and so
damage the magnetic coils inside the
sensor.

ba035y07

Fig. 4
Transport instructions for
Promag 35 S

Base support for the sensor


The sensor should stand on a base
strong enough to support its weight.

Note!
Do not support the sensor by its metal
Note!
casing! The casing may be dented and
so damage the magnetic coils inside the
sensor.
ba035y08

Fig. 5
Correct sensor supporting for
large diameter

12 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 109 de 275
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA 3 Mounting and Installation

3.3 Mounting instructions


Please observe the following instructions when mounting for correct operation and to
prevent damage to the equipment.

Mounting position (as preferred)


a) Vertical:
This is the best with the flow
direction upwards. Entrained
solids sink downward and fatty
a)
components in the stationary
fluid always rise away from the
measuring electrodes.
b)
In case of vertical mounting, the
PGs are always pointing downward
(inlet side).

ba035y09
Fig. 6
b) Horizontal: Mounting position
The axis of the electrodes must
be horizontal, thus preventing brief
insulation of the electrodes by
entrained air bubbles.

Position of the electrode axis


The position of the electrode axis is
based on the nominal diameter and
has to be respected (see Fig. 7).
1 Measuring electrodes
Position of the cable glands
2 Reference electrode (from DN 25)
For the compact version, the transmitter 3 EPD electrode ba035y10
PGs have to be either oriented down- 4 Connection housing
wards or laterally, independently of the
Fig. 7
mounting position. Plane of electrode axis

Vibration
Secure the piping upstream and
downstream of the sensor.

Caution!
Excessive vibration necessitates
separate mounting of the sensor and
transmitter (see pages 19, 71).
Caution!

Mechanical supports are recommended


for free runs of piping over 10 m long.

> 10 m
ba035y11

Fig. 8
Remedies to avoid vibrations

Endress+Hauser 13
Sección 6 ~ Página 110 de 275
3 Mounting and Installation Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA

Inlet and outlet runs


The sensor should be mounted
> 3...5 x DN > 2 x DN
upstream from fittings liable to
generate turbulence (e.g. valves
elbows, T-junctions).

Inlet run: > 3...5 x DN


Outlet run: > 2 x DN

ba035y12
Fig. 9
Inlet and outlet runs

Mounting location
Correct measurement is only possible
when the pipe is full. The following
locations should therefore be avoided:

a) No installation at the highest point


(air accumulation).
a)
b) No installation immediately before
an open pipe outlet in a downward
b)
line. The alternative suggestion,
however, permits such a location.

alternatively

h > 2 x DN
ba035y13

Fig. 10
Mounting location

Partly filled pipes


For inclines, a mounting similar to a
drain should be adopted. Do not mount
the sensor at the lowest point (risk of
solids collecting). In this case we recom-
mend to install a sliding valve.

Added security is offered by Empty Pipe


Detection (EPD). This option provides
> 2 x DN an extra electrode in the flowmeter.

> 3...5 x DN Note!


Note!
Here, too, the inlet and outlet lengths
ba035y14

should be observed.
Fig. 11
Partly filled pipes

14 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 111 de 275
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA 3 Mounting and Installation

Downward pipe
Venting valve
With the installation suggested opposite,
partial vacuum is avoided even with a
downward pipe >5 m long (siphon, vent
valve downstream of the sensor).

>5 m

ba035y15
Fig. 12
Installation downward pipe

Installation of pumps
Do not mount the sensors on the
suction side of pumps. There is a risk of
vacuum! Information on the resistance
to vacuum of the flowmeter lining can be
found on page 73.

ba035y16
Fig. 13
Installation of pumps

Adapters
The sensor can also be mounted in a
pipe with a larger nominal diameter
when suitable adapters (reducers and max. 8°

expanders) to DIN 28545 are fitted. The


resultant increase in the rate of flow
increases the accuracy of measurement
with slowly moving fluids. 100

The adjacent nomogram can be used to


8 m/s
determine the pressure loss caused.
7 m/s

Procedure:
6 m/s
1. Determine the ratio of the
diameter d/D. 10
Pressure loss in mbar

5 m/s
2. From the nomogram read off the
pressure loss at the flow velocity 4 m/s
and d/D ratio.
3 m/s

Note! 2 m/s
The nomogram applies to fluids with a 1
viscosity similar to that of water.
Note!
1 m/s

0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9


ba035y17

Diameter ratio d/D


Fig. 14
Adapters

Endress+Hauser 15
Sección 6 ~ Página 112 de 275
3 Mounting and Installation Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA

3.4 Mounting Promag 35 S


Length and dimensions
See pages 65 - 67

Mounting
The sensor is mounted between the flanges of the pipe (Fig. 15). Since the lining of
the measuring pipe also covers the sensor flange, it also performs as a seal.

Caution!
The Teflon (PTFE) lined Promag S is fitted with protective discs to guard the lining
which is turned over the flanges. These discs are to be removed just before mounting
the sensor. Ensure that the lining on the flange is not damaged or removed (these
Caution! discs must remain in position during storage).

ba035y18
Fig. 15

Gaskets
With soft rubber/Teflon (PTFE) lining a flange gasket is not required.
With soft rubber lining the mating flange should have a thin film of non-conductive
sealing grease applied.
Use a gasket according to DIN 2690.

Caution!
Do not use sealing material that is electrically conductive, e.g. graphite. This could
result in an electrically conductive layer on the inside of the flowmeter and result in a
Caution! short-circuit of the measuring signal.

16 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 113 de 275
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA 3 Mounting and Installation

Screw tightening torques


The listed tightening torques apply to greased threads.
Screws tightened too tightly deform the sealing surface (this applies especially to soft
rubber).

DN Pressure ratings Screws Max. tightening torques [Nm]

[mm] [inch] DIN ANSI AWWA JIS Hard rubber Soft rubber PTFE
[bar] [lbs] (EPDM) (Teflon)

1
15 /2" PN 40 – – – 4 x M 12 – – 15

25 1" 20K 4 x M 12 25 5 33
32 – PN 16 Class – 20K 4 x M 16 40 8 53
40 11/2" 150 20K 4 x M 16 50 11 67
50 2" 10K 4 x M 16 64 15 84

65 – 4 x M 16 87 22 114
80 3" Class 8 x M 16 53 14 70
100 4" PN 16 150 – 10K 8 x M 16 65 22 85
125 – 8 x M 16 80 30 103
150 6" 8 x M 20 110 48 140

200 8" Class 10K 12 x M 20 108 53 137


250 10" PN 10 150 – – 12 x M 20 104 29 139
300 12" – 12 x M 20 119 39 159

350 14" 16 x M 20 141 39 188


400 16" Class 16 x M 24 192 60 255
– 18" PN 10 150 – – 20 x M 24 170 58 227
500 20" 20 x M 24 197 70 262
600 24" 20 x M 27 261 108 348

Endress+Hauser 17
Sección 6 ~ Página 114 de 275
3 Mounting and Installation Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA

3.5 Turning the transmitter housing and local display


(compact version)
Both the transmitter housing and the display of the compact version can be rotated in
90° steps, thus enabling the unit to be adapted to different mounting positions in the
pipe and simplifying reading and operation.

Turning the transmitter housing


ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG 33

1. Loosen the two mounting screws of the


transmitter bayonet catch (approx. two turns)

2. Turn the bayonet catch of the transmitter as


far as the groove of the nut (approx. 15 mm).
30o
3. Carefully pull out the transmitter housing to the
ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG 33 stop.

Note!
During servicing (and only then) the
transmitter housing can be removed from the
Note! sensor. To do this, the marking notches on the
side of the bayonet flange have to be aligned
with one another. Do not damage the
connecting cable!
ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG 33

4. Turn the transmitter housing to the position


required.
Engage the bayonet catch and tighten the two
screws again.

ba035y19
Fig. 16
Instructions for turning the
transmitter housing

Turning the local display

Warning!
ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG 33
Risk of electric shock. Switch off the power supply.
Warning!
1. Release the safety claw of the cover of the
electronics compartment. Loosen the Allen
screws with a 3 mm Allen key.

2. Unscrew the cover from the transmitter


electronics compartment.

3. Unscrew the two Phillips screws with which


the display module is fastened.
ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG 33

4. Rotate the display module into the desired


position.

5. Tighten the fixing screws securely.

6. Screw the cover of the electronics compartment


back on to the unit securely.
PROMAG 33
ENDRESS+HAUSER

7. Fasten the safety claw.


ba035y20

Fig. 17
Instructions for turning the local
display

18 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 115 de 275
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA 3 Mounting and Installation

3.6 Mounting the transmitter


(remote version)
The transmitter has to be mounted remote from the sensor when:
• access is difficult
• space is restricted
• extreme process and ambient temperatures prevail (for temperature ranges see
page 71)
• there is severe vibration (tested according to EN 61010 and IEC 68-2-6)

Wall mounting

ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG 33

Transmitter housing

Connection housing
Cable
glands

ba035y22
Abb. 18
Fixing the wall-mounted holder

Caution!
• The permissible length Lmax of cable between the sensor and the transmitter at a
distance of >10 m is governed by the fluid conductivity (Fig. 19).
• The overall conductor resistance of the coil-loaded cable has to be RCu max ≤2.5 Ω.
With the coil-loaded cable available from E+H, the maximum admissible distance is
Lmax = 50 m between sensor and transmitter.
• With the Empty Pipe Detection (EPD) the maximum possible cable length
between transmitter and sensor is limited to 10 m. Caution!
• Fasten the cable gland or lay it in a conduit. When the fluid conductivity is low,
cable movements can cause serious changes in capacitance and thereby falsify
the measuring signal.
• Do not run the cable in the vicinity of electrical machines or switching elements.
• Ensure potential equalization between the transmitter and the sensor.

Conductivity
[μS/cm]

50

Permissible
range

L max 25

1
10 25 50

Cable length Lmax [m]


ba035y21

Fig. 19
Cable length of the remote
version

Endress+Hauser 19
9y24
Sección 6 ~ Página 116 de 275
3 Mounting and Installation Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA

3.7 Potential equalisation


The sensor and the fluid must be at roughly the same electrical potential to ensure
that the measurement is accurate and no galvanic erosion takes place at the
electrodes. Normally the reference electrode in the sensor or the metal pipe ensures
that the potentials are equalised. When an reference electrode exists and for fluid
carried in grounded metal piping it is sufficient to connect the ground terminal of the
Promag 35 transmitter housing to the potential equalisation grid. Depending on the
material used for the reference electrode, the electrode is already intergrated into the
sensor or available as an option. For the DN 15 device, you will have to use ground-
ing rings instead of the reference electrode.

Potential equalization for certain special cases is described below:

Potential equalisation for lined pipes


with cathodic protection
Isolating transformer
If, for operational reasons, the fluid
ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG 33

supply
can not be grounded, installation of
the flowmeter must be potential-free
(Fig. 20).

In this case it is important that the


sensor is equiped with a reference
electrically
insulated electrode.

Observe all national regulations for


potential-free installations
electrically (e.g. VDE 0100).
insulated
ba035y24

Fig. 20
Potential equalisation for lined 6 mm2 Cu
pipes with cathodic protection

It is also important to ensure that the mounting material used does not result in a
conductive bond to the flowmeter and that the material can withstand the tightening
torque used.

20 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 117 de 275
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA 3 Mounting and Installation

Plastic or lined pipes


Grounding rings are needed if there is ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG33

no reference electrode present or the 6 mm2 Cu


fluid has to be grounded on account of
equalisation current.

Observe that no strong equalisation


current (fluid and mains ground/pipeline)
flows via the reference electrode, since
in extreme cases it can be destroyed by
galvanic deterioration.

ba035y25
Grounding rings: approx. 3 mm thick Fig. 21
Plastic or lined piping

Caution!
Ensure the grounding rings are corrosion-resistant! Grounding rings must be of the
same material as the reference electrode. Caution!

Equalisation currents in
ungrounded metal pipes
and ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG33

Grounding in an area with severe 6 mm2 Cu


electrical interference
The fluid may be grounded.
In order to get the most out of the
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
of the Promag 35, it is advisable to
provide two flange-to-flange links and to
connect them jointly with the transmitter
housing to the ground potential (Fig. 22).
ba035y26

Fig. 22
Equalisation currents in
ungrounded metal pipes

Endress+Hauser 21
Sección 6 ~ Página 118 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 4 Electrical Connection

4 Electrical Connection
Warning!
Note the information given in Section 3.1 on maintaining the degree of protection IP 65. Warning!

4.1 Connecting the transmitter for the compact version


Warning!
• Risk of electric shock! Do not install or wire the unit while connected to the power
supply. Failure to comply may also result in damage of electronic components. Warning!
• Connect the protective conductor to the ground terminal on the housing before the
power supply is switched on.
• Check that local power supply and frequency agree with the information on the
nameplate. All relevant national regulations for mounting must also be observed.

1. Loosen the safety claw on the screw


cover of the wiring compartment using
a 3 mm Allen key.
Unscrew the wiring compartment cover.

2. Push the power and signal cables À


through the appropriate cable glands.

3. Wire up according to the wiring dia-


grams (see also the wiring diagram

Á
ENDRESS+HAUSER

in the screw cover):


PROMAG 33

• Power supply is connected Supply cable


to terminal 1 (L1, L+),
terminal 2 (N, L-) and the ground 1
2

terminal (3). 20
21
22
23

2 24

• Fine-wire leads: max. 4 mm ;


25
26
27

put sleeve on the end of the cores.


2
Single-core lead: max. 6 mm .
 1
1
3
Signal cable

4. Having made the connection, screw on


20
21
22
23
23
24
24 28
25

the cover tightly again. Tighten the Allen


25
26
26
27

27

screw of the safety claw securely.

4 mm2
6 mm2

Ã
ba035y30

Fig. 23
Connecting the transmitter

Endress+Hauser 23
Sección 6 ~ Página 119 de 275
4 Electrical Connection Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

4.2 Connection diagrams

Fuse

Supply cable
1
2
3
Ground terminal for
20
21
protective conductor
22
23
24
25 28
26
27 Ground terminal for
cable shield

Signal cable

3
Ground connection (protective earth)

L1 ⎫ L+ ⎫
1
⎬ for AC ⎬ for DC Power supply
2 N ⎭ L- ⎭

20
21
+
22
23
- Current output (active) 0/4...20 mA
RL < 350 Ω
24
25
+
26
PROFIBUS PA (EN 50170 Volume 2, IEC 1158-2)
27 -

Ground connection (screen of the signal cable)


28

Note!
Selection of the bus address via:
Note!
a) local display (see page 29)
b) DIP switches on the communication board (see page 57)

The signal cables are specified in the Technical Information


TI 260F/00/en “Field Communications-Planning Notes PROFIBUS PA”.
ba035y31

Fig. 24
Electrical connection of
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

24 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 120 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 4 Electrical Connection

4.3 Connection diagram for the remote version


1. The connection to the transmitter wiring compartment is made as described on
page 24.

2. Open the covers of the connection housing of both sensor and transmitter by
loosening the four recessed-head screws on the sensor and the safety clamp on
the transmitter and unscrew the lock cover.

3. Push both cables (signal and coil cable) in through the appropriate cable glands
of both terminal housings.

Caution!
Only connect or disconnect the coil cable when the power supply to the
instrument is switched off.
Caution!
4. Wire up the sensor and the transmitter according to the wiring diagrams.

5. Tighten the covers of the connection housings securely.

Transmitter

ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG33

Lmax =
Connection housing 50 m

Sensor
ba035y32

Fig. 25
Connecting the remote version

Endress+Hauser 25
Sección 6 ~ Página 121 de 275
4 Electrical Connection Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Remote version: Connection between sensor and transmitter

EPD ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG33

S1 E1 E2 S2 GND E S Coils

6 5 7 8 4 37 36 23 22 14 42 41

Coil cable

Signal cable
wh

gn
ye
br

1
2
Lmax =
Signal cable screen Coil cable screen 50 m

4 6 5 7 8 37 36 14 41 42

GND S1 E1 E2 S2 E S Coils
EPD

EPD = Empty Pipe Detection

ba035e33
Fig. 26
Wiring diagram of the remote
version

4.4 Cable specifications


Cable specifications for the remote version FS
2
Coil cable: 2 x 0.75 mm PVC cable with common screen
Conductor resistance ≤12.5 Ω/km
Capacitance: core/core, screen grounded ≤120 pF/m
Permanent operation temperature –20...+70 °C
(Cable length and additional information see page 19)
2
Signal cable: 3 x 0.38 mm PVC cable with common screen and
separately screened cores
2
With EPD (Empty Pipe Detection) 4 x 0.38 mm PVC cable
Conductor resistance: ≤50 Ω/km
Capacitance: core/screen ≤420 pF/m
Permanent operation temperature –20...+70 °C
(Cable length and additional information see page 19)

Cable specifications for use in areas with severe electrical interference


The Promag 35 S measuring system fulfils all general requirements for electromag-
netic compatibility (EMC) according to EN 50081 Part 1 and 2 / EN 50082 Part 1 and
2 as well as to NAMUR recommendations.

Note!
With the remote-mounted version the signal and the coil cables between the sensor
and transmitter must always be screened and earthed at both ends. This is done at
the earth terminals inside the connection housing of sensor and transmitter
Note!
(see Fig. 26).

26 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 122 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 4 Electrical Connection

4.5 Commissioning
Before the measuring system is turned on for the first time, the following checks
should be carried out again:
• Check the electrical connections and terminal assignments.
• Compare the data on the nameplate with the local mains voltage and frequency.
• Does the direction of the arrow on the nameplate of the sensor correspond with the
actual direction of flow in the pipe?

If the results of these checks are satisfactory, then the power supply should be
switched on. The unit is now ready for operation.

After switching on, the system performs various self-test routines. During this
procedure the following sequence of messages appears on the display:

The version of the communication board


software appears on the display. P R O M A G 3 5
The PROFIBUS PA communications board V 2 . 0 5 . 0 0 P B U S
identifies itself by displaying “PBUS” and
the actual software version.

Having started up successfully, normal


S : S T A R T - U P
operation continues.
On the display the momentary flow and R U N N I N G
the total value appear simultaneously.

In the HOME position the communication


2 9 0 . 8 2 m 3
/ h ↔
with a PROFIBUS PA master is indicated
by a flashing double arrow. During 2 . 1 0 8 0 m 3

programming and in error status the


double arrow disappears.

Note!
If it is not possible to start up successfully, a message is displayed, depending on the
Note!
cause of the fault. The possible fault messages are listed on page 62, 63.

Endress+Hauser 27
Sección 6 ~ Página 123 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 5 Operation

5 Operation

5.1 Operating and display elements

Liquid Crystal Display

• Illuminated, two lines with 16 characters each


• Messages and values appear in plain text on the display as well as error, alarm and
status messages
• HOME position (display during normal operation of the device):
upper line → factory setting “FLOW RATE”
lower line → custom selectable measuring value (factory setting “TOTAL VOLUME”)

ENDRESS+HAUSER

>3s
E - +

3 optical operating elements (“Touch-Control”)

above: infrared transmitting diode


below: infrared receiving diode

+ / – keys

6 Selecting function groups (>GROUP SELECTION<) or


programming, e.g. numerical values; setting parameter
(When the two keys are held down, the numbers on the display will
change at increasing speed)

7
Diagnosis and help function
(simultaneously pushing + and – keys)

“Enter-key”

3 Access to the programming matrix

2 Quit the programming matrix, return to the HOME position


(when E-key is pressed for more than 3 seconds)

Selecting individual functions within the function group,


1 saving data or settings
ba035y34

Fig. 27
Operating and display elements
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Endress+Hauser 29
Sección 6 ~ Página 124 de 275
5 Operation Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

5.2 Functions of the operating elements

Procedure:

1. Access to the programming matrix

2. Select function group (>GROUP SELECTION<)

3. Select function

4. Quit programming matrix


Return to HOME position
(from every matrix position, e.g. after programming)

Note!
Programming matrix ⇒ see page 31
Note! Programming example ⇒ see page 33
Description of functions ⇒ see page 35ff.

ENDRESS+HAUSER

E - +


>3s

➀ E


-

E E E E
+

Function groups Functions

Note!
• When in operating mode, an automatic return to the HOME position will be made if the
operating elements are not actuated for 1 minute (only when the programming is
Note! locked).
• If the diagnosis function 7 is activated from the HOME position, an automatic return to
the HOME position will be made if the operating elements are not pressed within 60 se-
conds; no matter whether the programming is enabled or locked.
ba035y35

Fig. 28
Function principle of the
operating elements

30 Endress+Hauser
Group selection

Endress+Hauser
FLOW RATE UNIT VOLUME UNIT GALLONS/BARREL NOM. DIAM. UNIT
SYSTEM UNITS
P. 35 P. 36 P. 36 P. 36

FULL SCALE TIME CONSTANT CURRENT SPAN FAIL SAFE MODE SIMULATION CURR. NOMINAL CURRENT
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

CURRENT OUTPUT
P. 37 P. 37 P. 38 P. 38 P. 39 P. 39

TOTAL VOLUME TOTAL OVERFLOW RESET TOTALISER FLOW RATE ASSIGN LINE 1 ASSIGN LINE 2 DISPLAY DAMPING DISPLAY FORMAT LCD CONTRAST LANGUAGE
DISPLAY
P. 40 P. 40 P. 40 P. 41 P. 41 P. 41 P. 41 P. 41 P. 42 P. 42

BUS ADDRESS MEASURING POINT SYSTEM CONFIG.


COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONFIG.
P. 43 P. 43 P. 43

LOW FLOW CUTOFF NOISE SUPPRESS: EMPTY PIPE DET. EPD RESPONSE TIME MEASURING MODE FLOW DIRECTION AMPLIFIER MODE DELAY
PROCESSING
PARAMETER P. 44 P. 44 P. 45 P. 45 P. 46 P. 46 P. 46 P. 47

POS. ZERO RETURN DEF. PRIVATE CODE ACCESS CODE SELF CHECKING PRESENT SYSTEM PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE SOFTWARE
SYSTEM CONDITION CONDITION VERSION VER. COM
PARAMETER P. 48 P. 48 P. 49 P. 49 P. 50 P. 50 P. 51 P. 51

K-FACTOR POS. K-FACTOR NEG. ZERO POINT NOMINAL DIAMETER MAX. SAMPLING RATE SAMPLING RATE SERIAL NUMBER EPD ELECTRODE COIL SLOPE
SENSOR DATA
P. 52 P. 52 P. 52 P. 53 P. 53 P. 53 P. 53 P. 54 P. 54
5.3 Programming matrix Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

These function is only shown with corresponding selection/adjustment


Sección 6 ~ Página 125 de 275

Field is protected by a special code (service code)

ba035e36

Fig. 29
Programming matrix
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

31
5 Operation
Sección 6 ~ Página 126 de 275
5 Operation Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

5.4 Information for programming


For the Promag 35 S measuring system, there is a choice of many functions and
parameters which the user can set individually and adapt to the process conditions.

Please observe the following important programming notes:


• If the power supply breaks down, all calibrated and set values are stored safely
in the EEPROM (without requiring batteries).
• Functions which are not required, e.g. current output, can be turned “OFF”. The
corresponding functions in other function groups then no longer appear on the
display (see programming matrix on page 31).
• If, during programming, you wish to undo a setting carried out with 6 then select
“CANCEL”. This is only possible for settings which have not yet been stored by
pressing 1.
• For certain functions, a prompt is given after entering data for safety reasons. Select
“SURE? [YES]” with the 6 keys and confirm by pressing 1 again. The setting is
then stored or a function, e.g. zero point calibration, is then activated.

Enable programming (access code)


Normally programming is locked. It is therefore impossible to change system
functions, numbers or factory settings accidentally. Only after the access code has
been entered (factory setting = 35) parameters may be entered or altered.
The use of a personal code, which can be chosen freely, prevents data access from
unauthorised personal (see page 48).

Locking programming
Following a return in the HOME position, programming is locked after 1 minute without
activating an operating element. In addition, programming can be deliberately
locked by re-entering any code number (other than the customer code) in the
function “ACCESS CODE”.

32 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 127 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 5 Operation

5.5 Programming example


You would like to change the bus adress to 25, which is set to default 126 in the factory.
Proceed as follows:

ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG

>3s
E - +

3 Entering the programming matrix. S Y S T E M


> G R O U P
U N I T S
S E L E C T <

Selecting the desired function group,


6
C O M M U N I C A T I O N
in this case“COMMUNICATION” > G R O U P S E L E C T <

4 Select the function “BUS ADDRESS” 1 2 6


B U S A D D R E S S

On pressing + or - the entry of the


6
0
code is automatically prompted A C C E S S C O D E

Enter the code number


6
3 5
(Factory setting: 35) A C C E S S C O D E

1 Programming is now enabled P R O G R A M M I N G


E N A B L E

The programmable value flashes 1 2 6


B U S A D D R E S S

Select the desired bus adress


6 The display stops flashing B U S
2 5
A D D R E S S
New setting: 25

1 Save the input. I N P U T


The display flashes and the value S A V E D
can be changed again if required.
2 5
B U S A D D R E S S

Return to HOME position


2 (press the 1 element for more than
3 seconds). Programming is locked again
after 1 minute, in case no operating
element is activated.

or

1 Selecting other functions. R E T U R N T O


Following the last function an G R O U P S E L E C T
automatic return to the function
group concerned takes place.

Endress+Hauser 33
Sección 6 ~ Página 128 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 6 Functions

6 Functions
This section is an in-depth description of the individual functions and specifications of
Promag 35 S. Factory settings are indicated in bold italics.
With Promag 35 S instruments with customer-specific configuration, values/settings
may differ from the factory settings shown here.

Function group SYSTEM UNITS → page 35


Function group CURRENT OUTPUT → page 37
Function group DISPLAY → page 40
Function group COMMUNICATION → page 43
Function group PROCESSING PARAMETER → page 44
Function group SYSTEM PARAMETER → page 48
Function group SENSOR DATA → page 52

Function group
SYSTEM UNITS
FLOW RATE Selection of the required and indicated units for the flow (volume/time).
UNIT

The unit selected here is also defining the unit for:


• creep rate
• full scale value of the current output

Selection:

dm3/s, dm3/min, dm3/h


6 m3/s, m3/min, m3/h
l/s, l/min, l/h
hl/min, hl/h
gal/min, gal/hr, gal/day
gpm, gph, gpd, mgd
bbl/min, bbl/hr, bbl/day
cfs (cubic feet per second)
cc/min

Diagnosis:

The actual flow rate appears on the display.


7

Endress+Hauser 35
Sección 6 ~ Página 129 de 275
6 Functions Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Function group
SYSTEM UNITS
VOLUME UNIT Selection of the required and indicated units for the volume flow.

The units selected here are also the same as those for the totaliser value
(and totaliser overflow).

Selection:

dm3, m3, l, hl, gal, bbl, 103 gal, ft3


6
Diagnosis:

The actual totaliser value appears on the display.


7

GALLONS / In the USA and in the UK the relationship between the units barrel (bbl) and
BARREL gallon (gal) is differently defined, depending on the fluid and the industry. The
relationship required can be selected here. Selection is also made on whether
it is US or imperial gallons.

Note!
This function is only available when barrel or gallon is selected as “FLOW
RATE UNITS” or “VOLUME UNITS”.
Note!

Selection:

US: 31.0 gal/bbl ⇒ for beer


6 US: 31.5 gal/bbl ⇒ standard for liquids
US: 42.0 gal/bbl ⇒ petrochemicals
US: 55.0 gal/bbl ⇒ filling tanks
US: 36.0 gal/bbl ⇒ for beer
US: 42.0 gal/bbl ⇒ petrochemicals

NOM. DIAM. This function is used for selecting the required units for nominal diameter.
UNIT
Note!
The units selected here is shown under the function “NOMINAL DIAMETER”
Note! (see page 53).

Selection:

mm
6 inch

Diagnosis:

The nominal diameter set is shown in the units selected.


7

36 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 130 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 6 Functions

Function group
CURRENT OUTPUT
With this group of functions, the user is able to adjust the output current to suit the requirements (full
scale value, time constant, current span, etc.). Two basic modes of the current output are offered.
When programming “0/4...20 mA (25 mA)”, the current output can overrun to 125% of the calibrated
full scale value (25 mA), with the programming “0/4...20 mA”, the current output operates according to
the NAMUR recommendations. This allows a maximum full scale overrun of up to 102.5% (20.5 mA).

FULL SCALE By scaling the full scale value, a flow rate is assigned to the 20 mA current.
Scaling always applies to both directions of flow (bidirectional), but with the
unidirectional mode, only for a positive flow (forward).

Minimum 20 mA current Maximum


full scale value full scale value

0 0,3 10 12,5 [m/s]

Measuring range of Promag 35 electronics


Flow rate Q ~ Fluid velocity v

ba035y37
Note!
When programming according to NAMUR, the range is reduced from 12.5 m/s
Note!
to 10.25 m/s.

Input:

five-digit number with floating decimal point


6 (e.g. 520.00 dm3/min)

Diagnosis:

The units can be selected in the function “FLOW RATE UNIT".


7

TIME CONSTANT Selecting the time constant determines whether the current output signal
responds especially rapidly to widely varying flow (short time constant) or is
delayed (long time constant).

The time constant does not affect the behaviour of the display.

Input:

three-digit number with floating decimal point: 0.01...100 s


6 Factory setting: 1 s

Endress+Hauser 37
Sección 6 ~ Página 131 de 275
6 Functions Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Function group
CURRENT OUTPUT
CURRENT SPAN Selecting the 0/4...20 mA current range. This allows a choice between the
current output in compliance with NAMUR recommendations (max. 20.5 mA)
or the current output with a maximum of 25 mA.

I [mA] 4 ... 20 mA
0 ... 20 mA
25
20,5
20
NAMUR

Reverse Forward
flow flow
-Q Q

Scaled full Scaled full [Volume/time]


scale value scale value

ba035y38
Selection:

0...20 mA current output according to NAMUR


6 4...20 mA current output according to NAMUR
0...20 mA (25 mA) maximum 25 mA
4...20 mA (25 mA) maximum 25 mA

FAILSAFE For safety reasons, in the event of a fault it is useful for the current output to
MODE assume a previously defined status.

The setting only affects the current output.

Selection:

MIN. CURRENT
6 When a fault occurs, the current signal is set to 0 mA
(0...20 mA) or 2 mA (4...20 mA).

MAX. CURRENT
The current signal is set to 25 mA for 0/4...20 mA (25 mA) or
22 mA for 0/4 ...20 mA.

HOLD VALUE
Last valid measured value is held.

ACTUAL VALUE
Normal measured output despite fault.

38 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 132 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 6 Functions

Function group
CURRENT OUTPUT
SIMULATION With this function an output current can be simulated.
CURRENT The selection of simulated values correspond to 0%, 50% or 100% of the full
scale value. In addition, the two error modes 2 mA (at 4...20 mA) and 25 mA
(maximum possible value) or 22 mA for NAMUR can also be simulated.

Example application 1: Checking auxiliary units.


Example application 2: Checking the internal current signal calibration.

Note!
• The specified current span 0/4...20 mA determines what simulation values
can be selected here.
Note!
• The flowmeter is fully operational for measuring during simulation, i.e. the
totaliser and the display of the flow rate continue to operate normally.
• The “POSITIVE ZERO RETURN” function deactivates any simulation in
progress and sets the output current to 0/4 mA.
• For programming according to NAMUR, the 25 mA simulation value is not
available.

Selection:

OFF
6
0 mA 0% ⎫
10 mA 50% ⎬ 0...20 mA
20 mA 100% ⎪
22 mA 110% ⎭
25 mA 125% (overflow)

2 mA error ⎫
4 mA 0% ⎪
12 mA 50% ⎬ 4...20 mA
20 mA 100% ⎪
22 mA 110% ⎭
25 mA 125% (overflow)

NOMINAL Display of the current calculated from the measured flow. The effective current
CURRENT may vary slightly due to external factors such as temperature.

Display:

The actual set value appears on the display (0.00...25.00 mA).

Diagnosis:

The actual flow rate value appears on the display.


7

Endress+Hauser 39
Sección 6 ~ Página 133 de 275
6 Functions Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Function group
DISPLAY
TOTAL Here, the summed flow quantity is shown as a floating-point number
VOLUME of maximum seven digits.

Display:
Max. seven-digit number (0.0000....9999999)
Factory setting: 0.0000

Diagnosis:

The units can be selected in the function “VOLUME UNIT”


7 (see page 36).

TOTAL The total flow quantity is displayed in the HOME position by a max. seven-digit
OVERFLOW number with variable decimal point. Larger numbers (>9,999,999) are shown
in this function as overflow. The effective quantity is thus the sum of the
overflow and the value shown in the HOME position (or in the function “TOTAL
VOLUME”).

Example:
The display shows 2e7 dm3 ⇒ overflow = 2 x 107 dm3 = 20,000,000 dm3.
The actual totaliser value is 196,845.7 dm3. The total amount, added together
since measurement started, is therefore 20,196,845.7 dm3.

Note!
• This display only appears when there is an overflow. In addition, in the HOME
position an overflow is made visible by optically inverting the “>”sign.
Note!
• With bidirectional measurement, the totaliser value may have a positive or a
negative sign.

Display:
Integer to a decimal point (e.g. 10e7 dm3)

Diagnosis:

The actual totaliser value (HOME position) appears on the display.


7

RESET The totaliser can be reset to zero.


TOTALISER
Note!
Not only the “overflow” but also the value displayed in the HOME position
Note! is reset to zero.

Selection (with prompt):

NO
6 YES

Diagnosis:

The actual totaliser value appears on the display.


7

40 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 134 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 6 Functions

Function group
DISPLAY
FLOW RATE Here, the current flow value is shown. This is particularly advantageous if the
HOME position is assigned to other measured variables.

Display:

Max. five-digit number (-99999...+99999). Unit according to the selection in


the function “FLOW RATE UNIT”.

ASSIGN LINE 1 With this function the variable is defined which is to be displayed on the upper
display line during normal operation (HOME position).

Selection:

FLOW RATE - TOTAL VOLUME


6

ASSIGN LINE 2 With this function the variable is defined which is to be displayed on the lower
display line during normal operation (HOME position).

Selection:

OFF - FLOW RATE - TOTAL VOLUME - TOTAL OVERFLOW


6

DISPLAY Selecting a time constant determines whether the display reacts quickly (small
DAMPING time constant) or slowly (large time constant) to changing flow values.

Note!
• Damping is inactivated when set to “zero”.
• The damping of the display does not affect the behaviour of the current
Note!
output.

Input:

Max. two-digit number: 0...99 seconds


6 Factory setting: 1 s

DISPLAY FORMAT The number of significant digits for displaying the actual flow rate is selected.
Along with the function “DISPLAY DAMPING”, this serves to stabilise heavily
fluctuating flows.

Note!
• Insignificant digits in front of the decimal point are shown as zeros.
• Insignificant digits after the decimal points are not shown, and the last digit Note!
displayed is rounded.

Selection:

X.XXXX (five significant digits)


6 X.XXX (four significant digits)
X.XX (three significant digits)

Endress+Hauser 41
Sección 6 ~ Página 135 de 275
6 Functions Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Function group
DISPLAY
LCD CONTRAST The contrast can be adjusted optimally to match the operating conditions on
site.

Caution!
At temperatures below the freezing point (<0 °C) the visibility of the display
text is no longer assured, even with maximum contrast. If no display is visible,
Caution! then see page 60.

Adjustment:

A change in contrast is immediately indicated with a


6 bar graph (IIIIIIIII.......).

LANGUAGE Selection of the operating language required.

Selection:

ENGLISH
6 DEUTSCH
FRANCAIS
ESPANOL
ITALIANO
NEDERLANDS
DANSK
NORSK
SVENSKA
SUOMI
BAHASA INDONESIA
JAPANESE

Factory setting: country-specific

Note!
By simultaneously pressing the 6 keys during power-up the Promag 35 starts
Note!
with “ENGLISH” and maximum contrast.

42 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 136 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 6 Functions

Function group
COMMUNICATION
BUS ADDRESS In this function the bus address is set.

Local configuration can be deactivated using a miniature switch (DIP switch)


on the communications board. When this is done, “DIP switch” is displayed
(see page 57).

Input:

three-digit number: 0...127


6 Factory setting: 126

Diagnosis:

In case the DIP switch addressing mode is selected, the choosen


7 address is displayed.

MEASURING In this function, the actual measuring point designation (name) is displayed.
POINT It is set by the PROFIBUS master, e.g. Commuwin II.
DESIGNATION
The measuring point designation corresponds to the TAG-DESC of the
Physical Block, as defined in the PROFIBUS PA profile B.

Diagnosis:

The complete measuring point designation is displayed


7 (up to 32 characters).

SYSTEM This function enables switching between local operation (via E+H matrix) and
CONFIG. remote operation via PROFIBUS PA.

The device can only be operated in either local or remote mode at one time.
The system configuration and parameters are independent of the operation
mode and are carried out in the event of a change of the operating mode.

Display:

LOCAL - REMOTE
6

Endress+Hauser 43
Sección 6 ~ Página 137 de 275
6 Functions Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Function group
PROCESSING PARAMETER
LOW FLOW Set the required switch point for the creep rate (volume/time). Creep
CUTOFF suppression prevents a rate of flow being measured in the lower part of the
range (e.g. fluctuating head at standstill). The creep function always operates
with negative hysteresis:

Flow rate
[Volume/time]

Hysteresis = -50% of creep rate


1 Suppression switched on
2 Suppression switched off
2 2 Creep rate
Creep
100%
rate
1 1
50%

time

ba035y39
suppression suppression
activated activated

Note!
• When creep suppression is active, the sign of the flow appears optically
inverted on the display.
Note!
• The max. creep rate depends on the nominal diameter of the sensor currently
being used and corresponds to a flow velocity v = 1 m/s.
• The units shown can be selected in the function “FLOW RATE UNIT”.

Input:

five-digit number with floating decimal point


6 (e.g. 15,000 dm3/min.)

Diagnosis:

Hysteresis = 50%
7 Creep suppression operates with a negative hysteresis of 50%.

NOISE A software filter (= interference blanking) can be used to reduce the sensitivity
SUPPRESS. of the output signals to transient flows and interference peaks, e.g. with fluids
containing solids.

Selection:

OFF
6 LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH

44 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 138 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 6 Functions

Function group
PROCESSING PARAMETER
EMPTY PIPE Only a completely full flowmeter pipe enables correct readings to be obtained.
DET. This can be continuously checked by Empty Pipe Detection
(= EPD). EPD is based on measuring the conductivity of the fluid. If
conductivity drops below a specific value defined by EPD, then the display
shows the error message “EMPTY PIPE”. The alarm effects also the other
outputs according to their settings.

Note!
• The EPD function is available only if the sensor is fitted with an extra
electrode.
Note!
• Before switching on EPD, the full/empty adjustment necessary for EPD must
be carried out within this function.
• If the alarm message “EMPTY PIPE” appears, though the pipes are filled, a
new full/empty adjustment must be carried out.
• If different fluids with different conductivity are measured, a new full/empty
adjustment must be made for each fluid!
• EPD can be switched on and off by software at any time.
• EPD has the same effect on the outputs as if there was a fault.

Full pipe

Measurand 1

Switching 1/
2 • (Measurand 1+2)
point (EPD)
Empty pipe

ba035y40

Measurand 2
Conductivity
[μS/cm]

Selection:

OFF - ON - EMPTY PIPE ADJ. - FULL PIPE ADJ.


6

EPD RESPONSE The response time of Empty Pipe Detection can be selected by the user to suit
TIME process conditions. An alarm is not given until this response time has expired.
Brief air bubbles in the flowmeter are then not interpreted as a partly filled pipe.

This function is only available when Empty Pipe Detection is switched “ON”.

Selection:

60 s
6 30 s
10 s
5s
2s
1s

Endress+Hauser 45
Sección 6 ~ Página 139 de 275
6 Functions Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Function group
PROCESSING PARAMETER
MEASURING The measuring system is able to measure in both flow directions
MODE (bidirectional). The signal outputs (PROFIBUS PA interface, current output,
and the internal totaliser) can all be switched to a unidirectional mode. In this
case, a signal is only given or internally totalised for positive flow. The flow
display in the HOME position still operates in both flow directions.

Selection:

UNIDIRECTIONAL
6 BIDIRECTIONAL

FLOW There is an arrow on the flowmeter nameplate to indicate the positive (forward)
DIRECTION flow direction. Under certain circumstances it may be necessary to operate
the flowmeter in the reverse direction. This can be done by inverting the sign
of the flow rate measured (reverse).

Selection:

FORWARD1)
6 REVERSE2)
1)
Positive flow according to the arrow on the nameplate.
2)
Positive flow opposite the direction of the arrow on the nameplate.

AMPLIFIER The Promag 35 amplifier has an automatic amplifier gain control. This ensures
MODE that the amplifier always operates at optimum amplification according to the
flow velocity of the fluid. High accuracy is thus maintained over a wide
dynamic range of 1000:1.
Applications with rapid and heavily fluctuating flow rates can still affect the
measurement and the desired accuracy will not be achieved. In such
applications it may be better under certain circumstances to program the
amplifier at a fixed amplification step.

Caution!
With selection of “MODE 3” or “MODE 4”, it must be ensured that the actual
Caution! flow velocity is not higher than the selected velocity range. Overshooting will
not be registered as an error and can lead to false measurements.

Selection:

NORMAL automatic amplifier gain control


6 MODE 1 for flow rates 0...>12 m/s
MODE 2 for flow rates 0...12 m/s
MODE 3 for flow rates 0...4 m/s
MODE 4 for flow rates 0...1 m/s

46 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 140 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 6 Functions

Function group
PROCESSING PARAMETER
DELAY Within the measuring amplifier, the delay of the automatic amplification
switchover may be varied. In case of an overload, the amplification is
immediately reduced, independent of the value set originally. In case of a
massive underload, the ‘n’ measured results (samples) are waited for before
the amplification is once again increased.

This is especially useful if occasional and rapid flow peaks occur (e.g. piston
pumps). The programmed number thus corresponds to the number of
measuring events (samples) to be ignored before a switch-over of the
amplifier gain control is necessary.

Selection:

Max. four-digit number: 10...1000


6

Endress+Hauser 47
Sección 6 ~ Página 141 de 275
6 Functions Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Function group
SYSTEM PARAMETER
POS. ZERO With positive zero return (PZR) the output signals can be deliberately set to
RETURN zero. Measured value suppression is equivalent to zero flow:

• PROFIBUS PA interface: flow = 0


• Current output signal ⇒ 0/4 mA
• Display of HOME position: flow = 0; totaliser remains at the actual value

Caution!
This function has top priority over all other functions of the instrument.
Caution! Simulation in progress is interrupted by the PZR.

Selection:

OFF
6 ON

DEF. PRIVATE Selection of a personal code number, to enable programming.


CODE For the Promag 35 S measuring system the factory setting is 35.

• When programming is locked, this function is not available and access to the
personal code by third parties is excluded.
• The code number can only be altered when programming has been enabled.

Caution!
Caution!
Programming is always enabled when code number = 0 is selected.

Input:

Max. four-digit number: 0...9999


6 Factory setting: 35

48 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 142 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 6 Functions

Function group
SYSTEM PARAMETER
ACCESS CODE All data of the Promag 35 S measuring system are protected against
unauthorised access. By entering a code number, programming is enabled
and the settings of the instrument can be altered:
• Entering code set in the factory “35"
• Entering personal code number

Note!
• If, in any function, the + or - key is pressed when programming is locked,
a call to enter the code number is automatically issued. Once this number
has been entered, programming is enabled.
Note!
• Following a return to the HOME position, programming is again locked after
1 minute if no key is pressed during this time.
• Programming can also be locked by entering another code number in the
function ”ACCESS CODE" (not the same number as the personal code).
• A set of functions can only be altered once a special code (service
code) has been entered as changing these parameters would lead to
inaccuracies in measurement. This code is known by your E+H Service
organisation.
For more information, please contact your E+H Service organisation.

Caution!
If you can no longer find your personal code, the Endress+Hauser Service
organisation will be able to help you.
Caution!

Input:

Max. four-digit number: 0...9999


6

SELF Switching the periodical self check of the amplifier on or off. The amplifier is
CHECKING fitted with an automatic temperature compensation. Any temperature drift
occurring in the region of the amplifier path can be compensated for by a
periodical measurement against an internal reference voltage.

Selection:

OFF
6 ON

Endress+Hauser 49
Sección 6 ~ Página 143 de 275
6 Functions Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Function group
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
PRESENT System and process errors, as well as status messages which occur while
SYSTEM measurement is in progress, are displayed in the HOME position, alternating
CONDITION with the measured values. A jump to the diagnostic function is made
automatically by pressing the diagnostic key. The user can scan the error and
status messages currently on hand.

Note!
• The messages are displayed in order of message importance
(first message = highest priority)
Note!
• A complete list of all possible error and status messages can be found
on page 62f.
• With error-free measurement the message “S: SYSTEM WORKS NORMALLY”
appears.
• This function can also be selected directly through the function group
“SYSTEM PARAMETERS”.

Procedure (example):

In the HOME position, press the diagnostic function key


7 (or select this function via the programming matrix).

F : S Y S T E M E R R O R

P O W E R S U P P L Y

With the diagnostic function, additional error descriptions


7 can be scanned (with system errors only!)

9 : L O W V O L T A G E

D E T E C T E D

(Example)

Ask for further error or status messages.


6

PREVIOUS In this function all error and status messages that have occurred are listed in
SYSTEM chronological order (max. 10 messages).
CONDITIONS
Note!
• Storage of this list is volatile and is lost if the power supply is interrupted.
• A complete list of all possible error and status messages can be found on
Note! page 62f.
• If no error or status messages have occurred since the measuring equipment
was last started up, then the message “S: NO ENTRY EXISTING” will appear.

Selection:

Other system/process parameters and status messages are called up:


6 ”+” lists chronologically the oldest, second oldest ... etc. message
”–” lists the most recent, second most recent ... etc. message.

50 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 144 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 6 Functions

Function group
SYSTEM PARAMETER
SOFTWARE Display of the software version installed on the amplifier board.
VERSION The numbers of the software version have the following meaning:

PRO 35 V 3 . 01 . 00

Number changes if basic alterations have


to be made to the software, e.g. due to
technical modifications to the flowmeter.

Number changes if the new software


contains additional functions.

Number changes if minor alterations are


made to the new software.
Also for special releases of software.

SOFTWARE Display of the software version installed on the communication board.


VER. COM The numbers of the software version have the following meaning:

V 2 . 05 . 00 PBUS

Number changes if basic alterations have


to be made to the software, e.g. due to
technical modifications to the flowmeter.

Number changes if the new software


contains additional functions.

Number changes if minor alterations are


made to the new software.
Also for special releases of software.

Communication interface

Note!
If the display does not show “PBUS”, no PROFIBUS PA communications board Note!
is installed, but another type!

Endress+Hauser 51
Sección 6 ~ Página 145 de 275
6 Functions Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Function group
SENSOR DATA
Sensor data, such as nominal diameter, calibration factor, etc., are set in the factory. All characteristic
values of the sensor are stored in the DAT memory. The functions of this line can only be saved after
entering a special code (service code) and cannot be altered using the personal code. Please
contact your E+H Service organisation for more information.

Caution!
Normally these characteristic data should not be altered. A change to the data of the sensor affects a
Caution! number of functions of the whole measuring system, especially its accuracy.

K-FACTOR POS. The calibration for the positive direction of flow depends on the particular
sensor. The factor is determined and set in the factory.

Caution!
Normally the calibration factor should not be altered. The special code
Caution!
(service code) is known to your E+H Service organisation.
Please contact it for more information.

Selection:

five-digit number with fixed decimal point (0.5000...2.0000)


6 Factory setting: dependent on the sensor: nominal diameter and
its calibration

K-FACTOR NEG. The calibration for the negative direction of flow depends on the particular
sensor. The factor is determined and set in the factory.

Caution!
Normally the calibration factor should not be altered. The special code
Caution! (service code) is known to your E+H Service organisation.
Please contact it for more information.

Selection:

five-digit number with fixed decimal point (0.5000...2.0000)


6 Factory setting: dependent on the sensor: nominal diameter and
its calibration

ZERO POINT The zero point error depends on the particular sensor. It is determined and set
(OFFSET) in the factory.

Caution!
Normally the calibration factor should not be altered. The special code
Caution! (service code) is known to your E+H Service organisation.
Please contact it for more information.

Selection:

Max. four-digit number (-1000...+1000)


6 Factory setting: dependent on the sensor: nominal diameter and
its calibration

52 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 146 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 6 Functions

Function group
SENSOR DATA
NOMINAL The nominal diameter is determined by the size of the sensor. It is set in the
DIAMETER factory.

Caution!
The nominal diameter given should not, in general, be altered. Numerous
functions depend directly on the nominal diameter (technical units, full scale
values, switch points, creep rate, etc.). Caution!
When the nominal diameter is changed, all dependent parameters are set to a
new plausible value.

Selection:

Value 15...600 mm or ½" ...24"


6 Factory setting: dependent on the sensor

Diagnosis:

The unit can be selected in the function “NOM. DIAM. UNIT”.


7

MAX. The maximum permissible sampling rate (SAPS) depends on the particular
SAMPLING RATE sensor being used. It is set in the factory.

Caution!
Under normal circumstances, the max. sampling rate should not be altered.
Caution!

Input:

Max. three-digit number with fixed decimal point (1.0...60.0 per second)
6 Factory setting: dependent on the sensor

SAMPLING The sampling rate (= SAPS) is set in the factory. The standard value is 16.7 per
RATE second.

Note!
• The sampling rate is usually set to the “MAX. SAMPLING RATE”. It should
only be altered in special cases. Note!
• The Promag 35 measuring system is synchronised with the main power
supply. Therefore, the sampling rate entered is set to the nearest possible
value or rounded off towards it.

Input:

Max. three-digit number with floating decimal point;


6 upper limit: depending on the nominal diameter, max. 60.0/s;
lower limit: 1.0/s).
Factory setting: dependent on the sensor

SERIAL Display of the serial number of the sensor.


NUMBER
Note!
The serial number is normally entered in the factory. Note!

Input:

Max. six-digit number


6

Endress+Hauser 53
Sección 6 ~ Página 147 de 275
6 Functions Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Function group
SENSOR DATA
EPD This function indicates whether the sensor is equipped with an electrode for
ELECTRODE Empty Pipe Detection (EPD). This setting is made in the factory to suit the
sensor installed.

Note!
Empty Pipe Detection can only be activated when an EPD electrode is fitted.

Note!
Selection:

YES
6 NO

Factory setting with standard EPD electrodes: “YES”

COIL SLOPE To optimize the field coil slope, the coil voltage is briefly exalted. The duration
of this period of exalted voltage varies according to the diameter and is set at
the factory.

Caution!
Caution! The value set at the factory may only be altered after consulting your E+H
Service Organisation. This function is protected by a service code.

Selection:

Max. three-digit number (0...255)


6

54 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 148 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 7 PROFIBUS PA Interface

7 PROFIBUS PA Interface

7.1 PROFIBUS PA

Commuwin II
PLC

Process control system

31.25 kbit/s

IEC 1158

ba035e41
Fig. 30
PROFIBUS PA

Note!
Refer to Technical Information Manual TI 260F/00/en “Field Communications-Planning
Note!
Notes PROFIBUS PA” for detailed project information about PROFIBUS PA.

7.2 GSD- and Type-Files


To integrate PROFIBUS PA devices in a control system, GSD and type files are
required.

A floppy disk is shipped with each order. The files on this disk have to be loaded in
the control system (e.g. COMET 200 or COM PROFIBUS) prior start-up of a field bus
system.

This files are stored as follows:


• all *.200-files in the directory of the type-files ... \TYPDAT5X
• all *.GSD-files in the directory of the GSD-files ... \GSD
• all *.BMP-files in the directory of the bitmaps ... \BITMAPS

The meaning of this parameters is defined in the PROFIBUS PA specification.

The floppy disk is supplied with the delivery and may also be ordered from
E+H Flowtec AG (Order No. 50087303).

Endress+Hauser 55
Sección 6 ~ Página 149 de 275
7 PROFIBUS PA Interface Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

7.3 Setting the bus address


The address of a PROFIBUS PA device is an obligatory setting. An incorrect setting
of the address will result in the fieldbus not recognising the device. Valid device
addresses range from 0...127.

All devices are delivered with the default address 126. This address can be used for
testing the device. This address must be changed before installing the device into a
PROFIBUS PA network. The address is a unique identifier and must only be used
once in a PROFIBUS network.
The configuration of a PROFIBUS PA device address for a Promag 35 can be done
either through local operation or by using the DIP switches on the communications
board (see page 57).

7.4 PROFIBUS PA addressing via touch control


See page 43
Device function → Group function “COMMUNICATION” → Function “BUS ADDRESS”.

56 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 150 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 7 PROFIBUS PA Interface

7.5 Addressing PROFIBUS PA by DIP switches


With DIP switch No. 8 the address mode is selected. The addressing is done by
local operation (touch control), when the DIP switch No. 8 is set to “OFF”. Addressing
is done by the DIP switches 1...7 (see Fig. 31), when DIP switch No. 8 is set to “ON”.

Note!
Note!
Factory setting is DIP switch No. 8 = OFF (local operation).

Procedure:

Warning!
Danger from electrical shock! Switch off the power supply before opening the electronics housing.

1. Loosen the screw of the safety claw (3 mm Allen key). Warning!


2. Unscrew the cover of the transmitter electronics compartment.
3. Remove the local display (if present), by loosening the mounting screws of the display module.
4. Set the DIP switches on the communications board using an appropriate object.
5. Reassemble in reverse sequence.




Switch number

1 1 ⎫
2 2 ⎪

3 4 ⎪
4 8 ⎪
⎬ Bus address
5 16 ⎪ (diagram: 1+16+32 = 49)
6 32 ⎪


7 64

8
Address mode: (OFF = local operation)
9 (ON = DIP switches)

10 ⎪
11 ⎬ no function

12 ⎭
Fig. 31
ba035y42

OFF ON Addressing with the DIP


Selector switches switches on the
communications board

Endress+Hauser 57
Sección 6 ~ Página 151 de 275
7 PROFIBUS PA Interface Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

7.6 PROFIBUS PA Parameters


The function block model of the Promag 35

The Promag 35 software contains the following function blocks:

• One AI block (AI = Analogue Input)


The universal AI block supplies all flow rate parameters to the control system.

Three specialised function blocks related to flow measurement are implemented in


accordance with the recommendation of the PROFIBUS PA profile definition.

• One Totaliser function block


The totaliser block allows direct access to the Promag 35 from the control system.

• One Transducer block for flow rate


The transducer block contains the sensor data, e.g. the calibration factor.

• One Physical block


The physical block contains information such as language, measuring point
designation or the contrast of the LC display etc.

In addition, the control system is able to control important parameters of these blocks
such as the time constant of the flow or type of functions, e.g. reset of the totaliser.

Promag 35

AI TD
Function Transducer
Block Block ENDRESS+HAUSER
PROMAG33

PROFIBUS PA

Totalizer PB
Function Physical
Block Block
ba035y43

Fig. 32
Function block model of the
Promag 35 PROFIBUS PA

58 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 152 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 8 Troubleshooting and Remedies

8 Troubleshooting and Remedies

8.1 Response of the measuring system to faults or alarm


Error messages which occur while measuring is in progress are displayed in the
HOME position alternately to the measured values. The Promag 35 S measuring
system distinguishes between two kinds of error:

Type of error Response of the measuring instrument

Fault
(system error)

Fault due to failure of the instrument → Corresponding message on the display

→ The signal outputs respond according to their


error settings.

Alarm
(process error)

Fault due to factors influencing the process → Corresponding message on the display

Caution!
Note the following points when measured value suppression or simulation is active:
Caution!

Measured value suppression


• This function has top priority. The appropriate status message “S: POSITIVE ZERO
RETURN ACTIVE” is also displayed with priority in the HOME position. Any error
messages which occur during this time can only be asked for and displayed with
the aid of the diagnostic function.
• Measured value suppression sets all signal outputs to zero (corresponding to zero
flow).

Simulation
• This function has second highest priority, likewise the corresponding status
message. Any error messages which occur during this time can only be asked
for and displayed with the aid of the diagnostic function.

Endress+Hauser 59
Sección 6 ~ Página 153 de 275
8 Troubleshooting and Remedies Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

8.2 Instructions for troubleshooting


During manufacture, all units undergo quality control at numerous stages. The last of
these stages is wet calibration, carried out on a calibration rig conforming to the latest
state of the art technology.

To help you locate faults, some of their possible causes are given here.

Is the supply voltage present at • Check the wiring against the wiring
terminals 1 and 2? NO diagrams.
• Check the distribution fuse.

YES

Replace blown fuse.


Is the fuse in the terminal compartment sound? NO

YES

Is the display visible? 1. Switch off the supply voltage.


2. Reapply the supply voltage at the same
Caution! NO time actuating the 6 operating elements.
Visibility of the LCD is no longer assured at The measuring system starts with maximum
temperatures <0 °C. possible contrast.

YES

Does one of the following status messages Switch off the function concerned.
appear on the display? YES
S: POSITIVE ZERO RETURN ACTIVE
S: CURRENT OUTPUT SIMULATION ACTIVE

NO

Does an error message appear on the display? No system or process error has occured:
NO • Check the wiring of the output signal cable.
• Check parameters.

YES

Is a system error concerned? • With the diagnostic function 6 ask for more
(Fault, Failure)? YES details of the fault.
F:.............. • Take measures to clear the fault
(see page 62).

NO

Is a process error involved Take measures to clear the fault


YES
(Alarm)? (see page 63).
A:..............

NO

YES Note status messages (see page 63).


Does a status message appear on the display?
No action required.
S:................

60 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 154 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 8 Troubleshooting and Remedies

8.3 Diagnostic function for fault location

1: In the HOME position an error message F : S Y S T E M E R R O R


is displayed alternately to the measured P O W E R S U P P L Y
value (provided neither measured value
suppression no simulation is active).

2. Actuate diagnostic function (by pressing


the 6 keys simultaneously).
7
A change is automatically made to the
function “PRESENT SYSTEM
CONDITION”, in which all current error
and status messages are listed.

By actuating the diagnostic function 9 : L O W V O L T A G E


again additional information of the fault D E T E C T E D
can be asked for in the event of a
system fault (see page 62).
The stethoscope symbol appears on the
display.

3. Ask for further faults with lower priority,


if present.
6

4. Return to HOME position 1

Endress+Hauser 61
Sección 6 ~ Página 155 de 275
8 Troubleshooting and Remedies Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

8.4 Error and status messages


Diagnosis Error messages F:.... Cause Remedy
code (system error, failure) (call up by 7)

4 F: SYSTEM ERROR 9: LOW VOLTAGE By E+H


POWER SUPPLY DETECTED Service
The voltage from the power supply board
is too low.

5 9: COIL CURRENT CONTROL By E+H


Coil current out of tolerance. Service

7 F: SYSTEM ERROR
9: EEPROM FAILURE By E+H Service
AMPLIFIER
Error when accessing EEPROM data (adjusted
values of the amplifier)
6
9: DAT FAILURE Call your E+H
Error when accessing DAT data (adjusted value Service
of sensor).
8
9: ROM / RAM FAILURE By E+H
Error when accessing program memory (ROM) Service
or main memory (RAM) of the processor.

9: GAIN ERROR By E+H


9
AMPLIFIER Service
Gain error of the amplifier.

9: NO AMPLIFIER RESPONSE By E+H


10
Faulty data transmission between Service
communication module and amplifier.

17 F: VALUE NOT The value entered was not correctly accepted by Repeat input
ACCEPTED the amplifier.

11 F: SYSTEM ERROR 9: MODULE NOT By E+H


COM-MODULE COMPATIBLE Service
Communication module and amplifier are not
compatible

12 9: EEPROM FAILURE By E+H


Error when accessing EEPROM data (process Service
and adjustment data of the communication
module).

13 9: RAM ERROR By E+H


Error when accessing the main memory Service
(RAM).

14 9: ROM ERROR By E+H


Error when accessing the program memory Service
(ROM).

15 9: LOW VOLTAGE By E+H


DETECTED Service
The voltage supplied by the DC/DC converter
on the communication module is too low.

16 9: VOLTAGE By E+H
REFERENCE Service
Voltage reference of the communication module
is out of tolerance, i.e. correct functioning of the
current output is not assured.

62 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 156 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 8 Troubleshooting and Remedies

Diagnosis Alarm messages A:.... Cause Remedy


code (process errors)

18 A: EPD ADJUSTMENT EPD switched on. No adjustment has taken place. Adjust EPD as
VALUES MISSING descriped on
page 45.

20 A: EPD ADJUSTMENT EPD switched on, but alarm given because Repeat
FULL = EMPTY adjustment values for full and empty pipe are adjustment as
identical. descriped on
page 45.

21 A: EPD ADJUSTMENT EPD switched on, but alarm given because Repeat
FULL <=> EMPTY adjustment did not take place with full or empty adjustment as
pipe. descriped on
page 45.

19 A: EPD ADJUSTMENT EPD switched on, adjustment not possible EPD function
NOT POSSIBLE because the conductivity of the medium is outside cannot be used.
the permissible range (too high or too low).

22 A: EMPTY PIPE The measuring pipe is not Check the


DETECTED completely full or may be empty. process
conditions of the
installation.

23 A: FLOW Fluid velocity in flowmeter >12.5 m/s. Reduce flow rate.


TOO HIGH Measuring range of transmitter electronics
exceeded.

24 A: CURRENT OUTP. The actual flow rate is too high for the scaled full Scale a higher
TOO HIGH scale value (Imax = 25 mA). full scale value
(see page 37) or
reduce flow rate.

Diagnosis Status messages S:.... Cause Remedy


code

1 S: POS. ZERO Measured value suppression active. This Unnecessary


RET. ACTIVE message has top priority for Promag 35.

2 S: CURRENT OUTP. Current simulation active. Unnecessary


SIMUL. ACTIVE

27 S: EPD ADJUSTMENT EPD adjustment in progress (full or empty pipe Unnecessary


RUNNING adjustment).

Endress+Hauser 63
Sección 6 ~ Página 157 de 275
8 Troubleshooting and Remedies Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

8.5 Replacing the fuse


Warning!
Danger from electrical shock! Switch off the power supply before unscrewing the
Warning! cover of the terminal compartment from the transmitter housing.

Use only the following types of fuses:

Approval Voltage Location Dimensions Nominal current/ Typ


Nominal voltage

Non Ex 180...260 V AC Supply 5.2 x 20 mm 1 A / 250 V slow blow


board

CSA General Purpose 85...130 V AC Supply 5.2 x 20 mm 1 A / 250 V slow blow


Non Ex board

Non Ex 24 V AC/DC Supply 5.2 x 20 mm 1 A / 250 V slow blow


board

8.6 Repairs
If a Promag 35 S flowmeter is to be sent to Endress+Hauser for repair, then it must
always be accompanied by a note containing the following information:
• Description of the application
• Description of the fault
• Description of the chemical and physical properties of the product being measured.

Caution!
The following procedures must be carried out before a Promag 35 S flowmeter is sent
Caution! for repair:
• Remove all residue which may be present.
This is especially important if the fluid is dangerous to health, e.g. corrosive,
poisonous, carcinogenic, radioactive, etc.
• No instrument should be returned to us without first completely removing all
dangerous material (e.g. penetrated into scratches or diffused though plastic parts).

Incomplete cleaning of the instrument may result in waste disposal or cause harm to
personnel (burns, etc). Any costs arising from this will be charged to the owner of the
instrument.

64 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 158 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 9 Dimensions and Weights

9 Dimensions and Weights


DN 15...200

Compact version
A
B C 209
156.5 B1 (185)
171
190.5
K

Fig. 33

ba035y44
H F Promag 35 S
Compact version
DN 15...200

Remote version (FS)

246
(222)
156.5

ANSCHLUSSKLEMMEN - FIELD TERMINALS


86
334

130
177.5
100
Ø 8.6 (M8)

133

ANSCHLUSSKLEMMEN - FIELD TERMINALS


25

100
Fig. 34
ba035y45

123 E
Promag 35 S
L
Remote version
DN 15...200

DN PN1) L A B C K E F H B1 Weight
DIN ANSI JIS DIN/ANSI JIS PTFE HG/WG DIN ANSI JIS
[mm] [inch] [bar] Class [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
1
15 /2" 40 150 – 156/152 – 361 291.5 69.5 200 94.2 – 14 12 – 194.5 125 6
25 1" 16 150 20K 202 228 409 315.5 93.5 247.6 121.2 120 14 15 20 242.5 149 8
32 – 16 150 20K 202 228 409 315.5 93.5 247.6 121.2 120 16 16 20 242.5 149 10
40 11/2" 16 150 20K 202 228 409 315.5 93.5 247.6 121.4 120 16 18 20 242.5 149 11
50 2" 16 150 10K 202 202 409 315.5 93.5 247.6 121.8 120 18 20 18 242.5 149 12
65 – 16 150 10K 272 272 451 336.5 114.5 308.6 165.9 164 18 23 18 284.5 170 25
80 3" 16 150 10K 272 272 451 336.5 114.5 308.6 166.8 164 20 24 20 284.5 170 26
100 4" 16 150 10K 272 272 451 336.5 114.5 308.6 167.2 164 22 24 22 284.5 170 27
125 – 16 150 10K 332 332 575.5 398.5 177 401.8 205.6 202 24 24 24 409 232 63
150 6" 16 150 10K 332 332 575.5 398.5 177 401.8 207.8 202 24 26 24 409 232 66
200 8" 10 150 10K 332 332 575.5 398.5 177 401.8 208.0 202 26 29 26 409 232 69
1)
Other pressure rates available as option, see page 17, 71
2)
Weights for sensor.

Weights Transmitter:
Compact version 3 kg
Remote version 5 kg (with wall mounted)

Endress+Hauser 65
Sección 6 ~ Página 159 de 275
9 Dimensions and Weights Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

DN 250...600

Compact version
209 190.5
(185) 171

156.5
ANSCHLUSSKLEMMEN - FIELD TERMINALS

B
A
C
Fig. 35 E

ba035y46
Promag 35 S
Compact version K L
DN 250...600

Remote version

246
(222)
156.5

ANSCHLUSSKLEMMEN - FIELD TERMINALS

B1
334

H
177.5
100
Ø 8.6 (M8)

133

ANSCHLUSSKLEMMEN - FIELD TERMINALS

C
25

100
Fig. 36

ba035y47
Promag 35 S 123
Remote version
DN 250...600

DN PN1) L A B C K E F H B1 Weight
DIN ANSI JIS DIN/ANSI JIS PTFE HG/WG DIN ANSI JIS
[mm] [inch] [bar] Class [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
250 10" 10 150 – 450 – 658.5 446.5 212.0 424 338 338 28 30.5 – 497 285 73
300 12" 10 150 – 480 – 709.5 473.0 236.5 473 358 364 28 32 – 548 311.5 100
350 14" 10 150 – 530 – 773.5 505.5 268.0 536 404 410 30 35 – 612 344 125
400 16" 10 150 – 580 – 837.5 537.6 299.9 598 453 450 32 37 – 676 376.1 150
450 18" 10 150 – 690 – 870.5 554.5 316.0 632 531 528 32 42 – 709 393 180
500 20" 10 150 – 690/710 – 927.5 583.5 344.0 688 531 528 34 43 – 766 422 200
600 24" 10 150 – 820 – 1038.5 639.5 399.0 798 665 683 36 45 – 877 478 250
1)
Other pressure rates available as option, see page 17, 71
2)
Weights for sensor.

Weights Transmitter:
Compact version 3 kg
Remote version 5 kg (with wall mounted)

66 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 160 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 9 Dimensions and Weights

Pipe fittings according to DIN 11851 (milk coupling)

DN PN L [mm]
25...50 16 210
65...100 16 310

ba035y48
L
Fig. 37
Promag 35 S with milk coupling

Endress+Hauser 67
Sección 6 ~ Página 161 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 10 Technical Data

10 Technical Data
Application
Instrument name Flow measuring system “Promag 35 S" PROFIBUS PA

Instrument function Flow measurement of liquids in closed piping.


Applications in measurement, control and regulation processes, for e.g.
batching and dosing.

Function and system design


Measuring principle Electromagnetic flow measurement according to Faraday’s law
(Generation of a voltage by induction in a magnetic field).

Measuring system Instrument family “Promag 35 S" (PROFIBUS PA) consisting of:
• Transmitter: Promag 35
• Sensor: Promag S (DN 15...600)

Two versions are available:


• Compact version (transmitter and sensor are one unit).
• Remote version (FS version)

Input variables
Measured variable Flow velocity (proportional to induced voltage. Measured by two
electrodes in the measuring pipe)

Measuring range Measuring range electronics: v = 0...12.5 m/s


Minimum full-scale value: < 0.01 m/s
Maximum full-scale value: > 10.0 m/s

Electrical isolation All circuits for inputs, power supply, and sensor are electrically isolated
from each other.

Output variables
Output signal PROFIBUS PA interface:
According EN 50 170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS
Physical layer IEC 1158-2; galvanically isolated,
PROFIBUS Profile Class B

Current output:
0/4...20 mA, electrically insulated, RL= max. 350 Ω, time constant
selectable, full scale value selectable,
temperature coefficient typical: 0.005% o.r./°C

Signal on alarm PROFIBUS PA interface:


Status and alarms according to Class B PROFIBUS profile.

Current output:
In case of an alarm the current output delivers the previous defined
signal (see page 38).

Load RL = max. 350 Ω (current output)

Creep suppression Selectable, the maximum creep quantity is dependent on the nominal
diameter of the sensor and correspond to a medium velocity of v = 1 m/s
(see page 44)

Electrical isolation All circuits for inputs, power supply, and sensor are electrically isolated
from each other.

Endress+Hauser 69
Sección 6 ~ Página 162 de 275
10 Technical Data Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Accuracy
Reference conditions According DIN 19200 and VDI/VDE 2641
Fluid temperature: +28 °C ±2 K
Ambient temperature: +22 °C ±2 K
Warm up period: 30 minutes

Mounting: Inlet run > 10 x DN


Outlet run > 5 x DN
Transmitter and sensor are grounded.
The sensor is build-in centered into the piping.

Measured error PROFIBUS PA interface:


±0.5% o.r. ±0.01% o.f.s. (full scale value = 10 m/s)

Additional measuring error of the current output: ±5 μA typical

0.5%
Measured error [% o.r.]
0.2% (option)
2,5

2,0

1,5

1,0

0,5

0
0 2 4 6 8 10

ba035y49
Fluid velocity v
[m/s]

Option:
±0.2% o.r. ±0.05% o.Qk
Qk = desired reference flow quantity for calibration (v = 2...10 m/s).
Qk has to be noted for ordering

Deviations in power supply voltage have no influence on the specified


ranges.

Repeatability ±0.1% o.r. ±0.005% o.f.s.

Operating conditions
Installation instructions Orientation: vertical or horizontal
Restrictions and other recommendations see page 13 ff

Inlet / and outlet sections Inlet run: >3...5 x DN


Outlet run: >2 x DN

Connection cable length FS version:


for remote version Cable length 0... 10 m → min. conductivity ≥ 1 μS/cm
≥ 20 μS/cm for
demineralised and
desalinised water

Cable length 10...50 m → min. conductivity = f (Lmax)

Instrument equiped with empty pipe detection (EPD):


max. cable length → 10 m

see page 19

70 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 163 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 10 Technical Data

Operating conditions (continued)


Ambient temperature Sensor: –10...+50 °C
range Transmitter: –20...+60 °C
–20...+50 °C with 20...55 V AC; 16...62 V DC power supply
board

Depending on the fluid temperature, certain installation positions are to be


observed to ensure that the permitted ambient temperature range for the
transmitter is not exceeded.
An all-weather cover should be used to protect the housing from direct
sunlight when mounting in the open.
This is especially important in warmer climates and with high ambient
temperatures. Install the remote version if needed.

140
Temperature range
Medium temperature [°C]
120 only for the remote
100 version available
80

60

40

20
PTFE (Teflon)
0
–20
Soft rubber (EPDM)
–40 Hard rubber

ba035y50
–40 –20 0 20 40 60 80

Ambient temperature [°C]

Degree of protection Sensor: IP 65 (EN 60529) NEMA 4X


Transmitter: IP 67 (EN 60529) NEMA 4X
Option Sensor: IP 67/IP 68 (EN 60529)

Shock and vibrational Tested according to EN 61010 and IEC 68-2-6


resistance (complete measuring system)

Electromagnetic According to EN 50081 Part 1 and 2 / EN 50082 Part 1 and 2 as well as


compatibility (EMC) the NAMUR recommendations

Fluid conditions
Fluid temperature/ Fluid temperature range depends on the sensor lining:
Lining
–40...+ 130 °C (PTFE → Teflon) DN 15...600
–20...+ 120 °C (soft rubber → EPDM) DN 65...600
0...+ 80 °C (hard rubber) DN 65...600

on request: –40...65 °C for NR, PU

DIN PN 10 (DN 200...600)


Nominal pressure PN 16 (DN 25...150)
PN 40 (DN 15)
PN 25 (DN 200...600), optional
PN 40 (DN 25...600), optional

ANSI Class 150 (1/2...8")


Class 150 (10...24"), optional
Class 300 (1/2...24"), optional

JIS 10K (DN 50...200)


20K (DN 25... 40)
20K (DN 50...200), optional

Fluid conductivity Min. conductivity: ≥ 1 μS/cm


≥ 20 μS/cm for demineralised and
desalinised water

For remote version the minimum conductivity depends on the cable


length between sensor and transmitter → see “Connection cable length”.

No pressure loss, if sensor and piping have the same nominal diameter.
Pressure loss

Mechanical construction
Design / Dimensions see page 65 - 67

Weight see page 65 - 67

Endress+Hauser 71
Sección 6 ~ Página 164 de 275
10 Technical Data Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Mechanical construction (continued)


Materials:
Transmitter housing Powder-coated die-cast aluminium

Sensor housing Powder-coated die-cast aluminium (DN 15...200)


Coated steel (DN 250...600)

Process connections DIN → Stainless steel 1.4435 ; St. 37-2


ANSI → A 105 ; 316L
JIS → S20C ; SUS 316 L

Electrodes Platin/Rhodium 80/20; Hastelloy C-22; Tantal

Electrodes fitted DN 15...600: Measuring, reference and empty pipe detection electrodes
in Hastelloy C-22)

CIP cleanable Yes (observe maximum temperature)

Cable entries Power supply and signal cable (outputs):


Cable glands PG 13.5 (5...12 mm) or 1/2" NPT, M20 x 1.5 (8...15 mm),
G 1/2" A threads for cable glands.

Coil cable and signal cable (remote version)


Promag S Cable glands PG 11 (5...12 mm) or 1/2" NPT,
M20 x 1.5 (8...15 mm), G1/2" A threads for cable glands

Process connections Flange connection (DIN, ANSI, JIS),


Pipe fittings according to DIN 11851 (milk couplings) for DN 25...100
User interface
Operation / Display • On-site operation with three operating elements (Touch Control) for
setting all instrument functions in the E+H programming matrix.

• Operation via PROFIBUS PA

• LC-display, illuminated, two lines (16 characters each)

• Blind version without on-site operation and display.


Power supply
Supply voltage / 180...260 V AC, 45...65 Hz
frequency 85...130 V AC, 45...65 Hz
20... 55 V AC, 45...65 Hz
16... 62 V DC

Power consumption AC: < 35 VA (incl. sensor)


DC: < 35 W (incl. sensor)

Power supply failure Bridges minimum one power cycle (22 ms at 50 Hz)
EEPROM saves measuring system data on power failure (no batteries
required).
Certificates and approvals
CSA, General Purpose For compact and remote version: 85...130 V AC

CE mark By attaching the CE mark, Endress+Hauser confirms that the Promag 35 S


measurement system has been successfully tested and fulfils all legal
requirements of the relevant CE directives.
Order information
Accessories Local display for Promag 35

Supplementary Technical Information Promag 35 S (TI 035D/06/en)


documentation Technical Information PROFIBUS PA (TI 260F/00/en)
System Information (SI 010D/06/en)

Other standards and guidelines


EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS
EN 60529 (IP protection classes)
EN 61010 (Protection Measures for Electronic Equipment for Measurement, Control, Regulation and
Laboratory Procedures)
EN 50081 Part 1 and 2 / EN 50082 Part 1 and 2 (interference immunity)
NAMUR (Association of Standards for Control and Regulation in the Chemical Industry)

72 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 165 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 10 Technical Data

Inside diameter of flowmeter

Sensor DN PN Lining

DIN ANSI JIS PTFE Hard rubber


(Teflon) Soft rubber
[mm] [inch] [bar] [lbs] (EPDM)

1 –
Promag S 15 /2" 40 Class 150 – 14.9
25 1" 16 Class 150 20K 26.5 23.7
32 – 16 Class 150 20K 35.2 32.4
40 11/2" 16 Class 150 20K 40.9 37.3
50 2" 16 Class 150 10K 51.3 48.1
65 – 16 Class 150 10K 67.0 63.9
80 3" 16 Class 150 10K 78.9 76.7
100 4" 16 Class 150 10K 103.9 99.1
125 – 16 Class 150 10K 128.9 124.5
150 6" 16 Class 150 10K 154.1 151.9
200 8" 10 Class 150 10K 204.7 202.7
250 10" 10 Class 150 257.2 257.0
300 12" 10 Class 150 306.7 307.9
350 14" 10 Class 150 349.8 352.0
400 16" 10 Class 150 387.4 390.4
450 18" 10 Class 150 436.8 441.2
500 20" 10 Class 150 485.0 492.0
600 24" 10 Class 150 590.0 591.6

Resistance of the lining to vacuum (standard version)

Sensor DN DN Measuring Limits for vacuum [mbar absolute]


pipe lining at different temperatures

[mm] [inch] 25°C 80°C 100°C 120°C 130°C

Promag S 65...600 3...24" Hard rubber * 0 – – –


25...600 1...24" Soft rubber * 0 * 0 –
(EPDM)

1
15...50 /2...2" 0 0 0 * 100
65...80 3" 0 * 40 * 130
100 4" 0 * 135 * 170
125...150 6" 135 * 240 * 385
200 8" PTFE 200 * 290 * 410
250 10" (Teflon) 330 * 400 * 530
300 12" 400 * 500 * 630
350 14" 465 * 600 * 730
400 16" 530 * 665 * 800

450...600 18...24" Vacuum not permitted!

* no value available

Endress+Hauser 73
Sección 6 ~ Página 166 de 275
10 Technical Data Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Pressure limitations

Pressure limitations due to fluid temperature (DIN 2413 and 2505)


Flange material: St 37.2
40
PN 40
35

30

Pressure [bar]
25
PN 25
20

15
PN 16
10
PN 10
5
PN 6
0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

ba035y51
Fig. 38 Temperature [°C]
Flange material steel 37.2

Pressure limitations due to fluid temperature (DIN 2413 and 2505)


Flange material: stainless steel 1.4435
40
PN 40
35

30

25
Pressure [bar]

PN 25
20

15
PN 16
10
PN 10
5
PN 6
0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

ba035y52
Temperature [°C]
Fig. 39
Stainless steel 1.4435

Pressure limitations due to fluid temperature (ANSI B16.5)


Flange material: steel A 105

870 60

725 50
Class 300
580 40
Pressure [bar]
Pressure [psi]

435 30

290 20
Class 150
145 10

0 0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ba035y53

Fig. 40 Temperature [ C]
Steel A 105

74 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 167 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA 10 Technical Data

Pressure limitations (continued)

Pressure limitations due to fluid temperature (ANSI B16.5)


Flange material: steel 316L

870 60

725 Pressure [bar] 50


Pressure [psi]

580 40
Class 300
435 30

290 20

145 10 Class 150

0 0

ba035y54
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

Temperature [°C] Fig. 41


Steel 316L

Endress+Hauser 75
Sección 6 ~ Página 168 de 275
10 Technical Data Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Nominal diameter and flow rate

The diameter of the pipe usually governs the nominal diameter of the sensor.
The optimum flow velocity range is between v = 2...3 m/s (see table below).
Furthermore, the flow velocity (v) has to be matched to the physical properties of
the fluid:
• v <2 m/s: with abrasive media (potter’s clay, lime milk, ore slurry)
• v >2 m/s: with media forming coating (waste water sludge, etc.)

If it is necessary to increase the flow velocity, this can be done by reducing the
nominal diameter of the sensor (see page 15 “Adapters”).

The table below shows the scalable minimum and maximum full scale values
inclusive factory settings.

DN DN Minimum Full scale value Maximum


full scale value factory setting full scale value

[mm] [inch] (Scaling at (Scaling at (Scaling at


v ~ 0.3 m/s) v ~ 2.5 m/s) v ~ 10 m/s)

15 1/ "
2 0.1909 m3/h 1.5904 m3/h 6.3617 m3/h
25 1" 0.5310 m3/h 4.4179 m3/h 17.671 m3/h
32 11/4" 0.8686 m3/h 7.2382 m3/h 28.953 m3/h
40 11/2" 1.3572 m3/h 11.310 m3/h 45.239 m3/h
50 2" 2.1206 m3/h 17.671 m3/h 70.686 m3/h
65 21/2" 3.5838 m3/h 29.865 m3/h 119.46 m3/h
80 3" 5.4287 m3/h 45.239 m3/h 180.96 m3/h
100 4" 8.4823 m3/h 70.686 m3/h 282.74 m3/h
125 5" 13.254 m3/h 110.45 m3/h 441.79 m3/h
150 6" 19.085 m3/h 159.04 m3/h 636.17 m3/h
200 8" 33.929 m3/h 282.74 m3/h 1131.0 m3/h
250 10" 53.014 m3/h 441.79 m3/h 1767.1 m3/h
300 12" 76.341 m3/h 636.17 m3/h 2544.7 m3/h
350 14" 103.91 m3/h 865.90 m3/h 3463.6 m3/h
400 16" 135.72 m3/h 1131.0 m3/h 4523.9 m3/h
450 18" 171.77 m3/h 1431.4 m3/h 5725.6 m3/h
500 20" 212.06 m3/h 1767.1 m3/h 7068.6 m3/h
600 24" 305.36 m3/h 2544.7 m3/h 10179 m3/h

76 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 169 de 275
Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA Index

Index
11 Index
A E
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Electrical isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Addressing PROFIBUS PA by DIP switch . . . . 57 Electrode axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Electrode EPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
All-weather cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Electronics compartment . . . . . . . . . . 8
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 71
Amplifier mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Empty pipe detection (EPD) . . . . . . . . . 45
Assign line 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Empty pipe detection electrode . . . . . . . . 8
Assign line 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 EPD electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Axis of the electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 EPD response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Error (measured error) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
B
Barrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 F
Base support for the sensor . . . . . . . . . 12 Faile safe mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Bus address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Flow rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
C Flow rate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Cable entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Fluid temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cable glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Cable length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Full scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Cable length maximum . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Function of the operating elements . . . . . . . 30
Cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Cathodic protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 G
CIP cleanable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Gallons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Ground connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . 23 Gsd- and Type files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Connection diagram of the remote version . . . 26
Connection diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
I
Connection of the remote version . . . . . . . 25
Inlet and outlet run . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Contrast LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Inside diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Correct usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 7
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 14
Correct usage of the measuring system . . . . . 7
Instructions for troubleshooting . . . . . . . . 60
Creep suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Instrument functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Current span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
K
K-Factor negative . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
D K-Factor positive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Dangerous chemicals . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Dangers and notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 L
Data Memory (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Degree of protection IP 67 (EN 60529) . . . . . 11 Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Degree of protection IP 67 (EN 60529) 11 . . . . 71 Low flow cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Diagnostic function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 M
DIP switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Display damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Measuring electrode . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 13
Display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Measuring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Display turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Measuring point designation . . . . . . . . . 43
Downward pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Dynamic response . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Endress+Hauser 77
Sección 6 ~ Página 170 de 275
Index Promag 35 S PROFIBUS PA

Measuring system Promag 35 S . . . . . . . . 7 S


Mechanical support of the sensor . . . . . . . 13 Sampling rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Milk coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Sampling rate maximum . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Self checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Setting bus address via Touch Control . . . . . 56
Mounting Promag 35 S . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Setting the bus address . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Mounting the remote version . . . . . . . . . 19 Short Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Signal cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 24
Mounting the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Simulation current . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Software version communication module . . . . 51
N Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Noise suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Nominal current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 System description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Nominal diameter . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 77 System condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Nominal pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
T
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
O Temperature ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Terminal compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Operation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Time constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Total overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Total volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Touch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 56
Transport instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
P Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Turning the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Partly filled pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . 18
Pipes partly filled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Positive zero return (PZR) . . . . . . . . . . 48
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 U
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Unit nominal diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 24, 72 Unit volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Power supply cable . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 24
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 V
Present system condition . . . . . . . . . . 50 Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 71
Pressure limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 W
Previous system condition . . . . . . . . . . 50 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 66
Private code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Profibus PA connection . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Z
PROFIBUS PA interface . . . . . . . . . 55, 56 Zero point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
PROFIBUS PA parameters . . . . . . . . . . 58
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Programming enabling . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Programming example . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Programming locking . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Programming matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Pumps installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

R
Reference electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 64
Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Reset Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Resistance of lining to vacuum . . . . . . . . 74
Response to faults and alarms . . . . . . . . 59

78 Endress+Hauser
Sección 6 ~ Página 171 de 275

Netherlands Canada Singapore


Europe ❑ Endress+Hauser B.V. ❑ Endress+Hauser Ltd. ❑ Endress+Hauser (S.E.A.) Pte., Ltd.
Naarden Burlington, Ontario Singapore
Austria Tel. (0 35) 6 95 86 11, Fax (0 35) 6 95 88 25 Tel. (9 05) 6 81 92 92, Fax (9 05) 6 81 94 44 Tel. (065) 566 82 22, Fax (065) 5 66 68 48
❑ Endress+Hauser Ges.m.b.H.
Wien Norway Chile
❑ Endress+Hauser A/S DIN Instrumentos Ltda. South Korea
Tel. (01) 8 80 56-0, Fax (01) 8 80 56-35 Hitrol Co. Ltd.
Tranby Santiago
Tel. (0 32) 85 10 85, Fax (0 32) 85 11 12 Tel. (02) 2 05 01 00, Fax (02) 2 25 81 39 Bucheon City
Belarus Tel. (032) 6 72 31 31, Fax (032) 6 72 00 90
Belorgsintez
Minsk Poland Colombia
Tel. (0172) 26 31 66, Fax (0172) 26 31 11 ❑ Endress+Hauser Polska Sp. z o.o. Colsein Ltd. Taiwan
Warsaw Santafe de Bogota D.C. Kingjarl Corporation
Belgium / Luxembourg Tel. (022) 6 51 01 74, Fax (022) 6 51 01 78 Tel. (01) 2 36 76 59, Fax (01) 6 10 78 68 Taipei R.O.C.
❑ Endress+Hauser S.A./N.V. Tel. (02) 7 18 39 38, Fax (02) 7 13 41 90
Brussels Portugal Costa Rica
Tel. (02) 2 48 06 00, Fax (02) 2 48 05 53 Tecnisis - Tecnica de Sistemas Industriais EURO-TEC S.A.
Linda-a-Velha San Jose Thailand
Bulgaria Tel. (01) 4 17 26 37, Fax (1) 4 18 52 78 Tel.(0506) 2 96 15 42, Fax(0506) 2 96 15 42 ❑ Endress+Hauser Ltd.
INTERTECH-AUTOMATION Bangkok
Romania Ecuador Tel. (02) 9 96 78 11-20, Fax (02) 9 96 78 10
Sofia Insetec Cia. Ltda.
Tel. (02) 65 28 09, Fax (02) 65 28 09 Romconseng SRL
Bucharest Quito
Tel. (02) 46 18 33, Fax (02) 46 18 33 Vietnam
Croatia Tel. (01) 4 10 16 34, Fax (01) 4 10 16 34 Tan Viet Bao Co. Ltd.
❑ Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. Ho Chi Minh City
Zagreb Russia
Avtomatika-Sever Ltd. Guatemala Tel. (08) 8 33 52 25, Fax (08) 8 33 52 27
Tel. (01) 6601418, Fax (01) 6601418
St. Petersburg ACISA Automatiziacion Y Control
Cyprus Tel. (0 8 12) 5 56 1 3 2 1 , Fa x ( 0 8 12) Ciudad de Guatemala, C.A. Iran
I+G Electrical Services Co. Ltd. 5 56 13 21 Tel. (02) 334 5985, Fax (02) 33 2 7 4 3 1 Telephone Technical Services Co. Ltd.
Nicosia Tehran
Slovak Republic Mexico Tel. (021) 8 74675054, Fax (021) 8 73 7295
Tel. (02) 48 47 88, Fax (02) 48 46 90 Endress+Hauser Instruments International
Transcom Technik s.r.o.
Bratislava Mexico City Office, Mexico D.F.
Czech Republic Israel
Tel. (07) 5 21 31 61, Fax (07) 5 21 31 81 Tel. (05) 568 9658 , Fa x ( 0 5 ) 5 6 8 4 1 8 3
❑ Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. Instrumetrics Industrial Control Ltd.
Ostrava Paraguay Tel-Aviv
Tel. (069) 6 61 19 48, Fax (069) 6 61 28 69 Slovenia
❑ Endress+Hauser D.O.O. INCOEL S.R.L. Tel. (03) 6 48 02 05, Fax (03) 6 47 19 92
Ljubljana Asuncion
Denmark Tel. (021) 20 34 65, Fax (021) 2 65 83
❑ Endress+Hauser A/S Tel. (061) 1 59 22 17, Fax (061) 1 59 22 98 Jordan
Søborg Peru A.P. Parpas Engineering S.A.
Tel. (31) 67 31 22, Fax (31) 67 30 45 Spain Amman
❑ Endress+Hauser S.A. Esim S.A.
Lima Tel. (06) 559283, Fax (06) 559205
Estonia Barcelona
Tel. (3) 4 80 33 66, Fax (3) 4 73 38 39 Tel. (01) 4 71 46 61, Fax (01) 4 71 09 93
Elvi-Aqua-Teh
Tartu Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Sweden Uruguay Anasia
Tel. (07) 42 27 26, Fax (07) 42 27 27 Circular S.A.
❑ Endress+Hauser AB Jeddah
Sollentuna Montevideo Tel. (03) 6 7 1 0 0 1 4 , F a x ( 0 3 ) 6 7 2 5 9 2 9
Finland Tel. (02) 92 57 85, Fax (02) 92 91 51
❑ Endress+Hauser Oy Tel. (08) 6 26 16 00, Fax (08) 6 26 94 77
Espoo USA Kuwait
Switzerland
Tel. (90) 8 59 61 55, Fax (90) 8 59 60 55 ❑ Endress+Hauser Inc. Kuwait Maritime & Mercantile Co. K.S.C.
❑ Endress+Hauser AG
Reinach/BL 1 Greenwood, Indiana Safat
France Tel. (03 17) 5 35-71 38, Fax (03 17) 5 35-14 89 Tel. (05) 2 43 47 52, Fax (05)2 44 14 86
❑ Endress+Hauser Tel. (0 61) 7 15 62 22, Fax (0 61) 7 11 16 50
Huningue Venezuela
Tel. 3 89 69 67 68, Fax 3 89 69 48 02 Turkey H. Z. Instrumentos C.A. Lebanon
Intek Endüstriyel Ölcü ve Kontrol Sistemleri Caracas Network Engineering Co.
Germany Istanbul Tel. (02) 9 79 88 13, Fax (02) 9 79 96 08 Jbeil
❑ Endress+Hauser Messtechnik GmbH+Co. Tel. (0212) 2 75 13 55, Fax (02 12) 2 66 27 75 Tel. (01) 325 40 51, Fax (01) 99 440 80
Weil am Rhein
Tel. (0 76 21) 9 75-01, Fax (0 76 21) 9 75-5 55 Ukraine
Industria Ukraïna Asia Sultanate of Oman
Great Britain Kiev Mustafa & Jawad Sience & Industry Co.
❑ Endress+Hauser Ltd. Tel. (044) 2 68 52 13, Fax (044) 2 68 52 13 China L.L.C.
Manchester ❑ Endress+Hauser Shanghai Ruwi
Tel. (01 61) 2 86 50 00, Fax (01 61) 9 98 18 41 Tel. (021) 64646700, Fax (02 1 ) 6 4 7 4 7 8 6 0 Tel. (08)60 20 09, Fax (08) 60 70 66
Africa Hong Kong
Greece United Arab Emirates
I & G Building Services Automation S.A. ❑ Endress+Hauser (H.K.) Ltd.
Morocco Hong Kong Tel.(0852) 25 28 31 20, Descon Trading EST.
Athens Oussama S.A. Dubai
Tel. (01) 9 24 15 00, Fax (01) 9 22 17 14 Fax (0852) 28 65 41 71
Casablanca Tel. (04) 35 95 22, Fax (04) 35 96 17
Tel. (02) 24 13 38, Fax (02) 40 2 657 India
Hungary
Mile Ipari-Elektro ❑ Endress+Hauser India Branch Office Yemen
South Africa Mumbai Yemen Company for Ghee and Soap Industry
Budapest ❑ Endress+Hauser Pty. Ltd.
Tel. (01) 2 61 55 35, Fax (01) 2 61 55 35 Tel. (022) 6 04 55 78, Fax (022) 6 04 02 11 Taiz
Sandton Tel. (04) 23 06 65, Fax (04) 21 23 38
Tel. (11) 4 44 13 86, Fax (1 1 ) 4 44 19 77 Indonesia
Iceland PT Grama Bazita
Vatnshreinsun HF Tunisia Jakarta
Reykjavik Controle, Maintenance et Regulation Tel. (021) 7 97 50 83, Fax (021) 7 97 50 89
Tel. (00354) 88 96 16, Fax (00354) 889613 Tunis Australia + New Zealand
Tel. (01) 79 30 77, Fax (01) 78 85 95 Japan
Ireland ❑ Sakura Endress Co., Ltd. Australia
Flomeaco Company Ltd. Tokyo GEC Alsthom LTD.
Kildare Tel. (4 22) 54 06 11, Fax (422) 55 02 75 Sydney
Tel. (0 4 5 ) 8 6 86 15, Fax (045) 86 81 82 America Tel. (02) 6 45 07 77, Fax (02) 9 6 4 5 0 8 1 8
Malaysia
Italy Argentina ❑ Endress+Hauser (M) Sdn. Bhd.
❑ Endress+Hauser Italia S.p.A. Servotron SACIFI New Zealand
Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan
Cernusco s/N Milano Buenos Aires EMC Industrial Instrumentation
Tel. (3) 7 33 48 48, Fax 03) 7 33 88 00
Tel. (02) 92 10 64 21, Fax (02) 92 10 71 53 Tel. (01) 7 0 2 1 1 2 2 , Fa x ( 0 1 ) 3 34 01 04 Auckland
Tel. (09) 4 44 92 29, Fax (09) 4 44 11 45
Latvia Bolivia Pakistan
Raita Ltd. Tritec S.R.L. Speedy Automation
Riga Cochabamba Karachi
Tel. (02) 264023, Fax (02) 264193 Tel. (042) 5 6993, Fax (042) 5 09 81 Tel. (021) 772 2953, Fax (021)773 6884 All other countries
Lithuania Brazil Philippines ❑ Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co.
Agava Ltd. Servotek Brenton Industries Inc. Instruments International
Kaunas Sao Paulo Makati Metro Manila Weil am Rhein, Germany
Tel. (07) 20 24 10, Fax (07) 20 74 14 Tel. (01) 5 36 34 55, Fax (011) 5 36 30 6 7 Tel. (2) 8 43 06 61, Fax (2) 8 17 57 39 Tel. (0 76 21) 9 75-02, Fax (0 76 21) 97 53 45

Endress + Hauser
❑ Members of the Endress+Hauser Group 12. 97/E+H II
Sección 6 ~ Página 172 de 275

Technical Information

Prosonic M FMU40/41/42/43/44
Ultrasonic Level Measurement
Compact transmitters for non-contact level measurement of fluids,
pastes and coarse bulk materials

Application Features and benefits


• Continuous, non-contact level measurement in fluids, • Quick and simple commissioning via menu-guided on-
pastes, sullages and coarse bulk materials site operation with four-line plain text display
• Flow measurement in open channels and measuring • Envelope curves on the on-site display for simple
weirs diagnosis
• System integration via: • Easy remote operation, diagnosis and measuring point
– HART (standard), 4...20mA documentation with the supplied ToF Tool operating
– PROFIBUS PA program.
– Foundation Fieldbus • Suitable for explosion hazardous areas
• Maximum measuring range: (Gas-Ex, Dust-Ex)
– FMU 40: • Linearisation function (up to 32 points) for conversion
5 m in fluids / 2 m in bulk materials of the measured value into any unit of length, volume
– FMU 41: or flow rate
8 m in fluids / 3,5 m in bulk materials • Non-contact measurement method minimizes service
– FMU 42: requirements
10 m in fluids / 5 m in bulk materials • optional remote display and operation (up to 20 m
– FMU 43: from transmitter)
15 m in fluids / 7 m in bulk materials • Installation possible from thread G 1½“ or 1½ NPT
– FMU44: upwards
20 m in fluids / 10 m in bulk materials • Integrated temperature sensor for automatic
correction of the temperature dependent sound
velocity

TI365F/00/en
Sección 6 ~ Página 173 de 275

Inhaltsverzeichnis

Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21


Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Process temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Equipment architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22


Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Design; dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Operating frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Housing design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Process connection,
sealing material,
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
sensor material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Load HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Output damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Linearisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 On-site operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Auxiliary energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terminal compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Certificates and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fieldbus plug connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Ex-Zulassung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 External standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Product structure FMU 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Current consumption
Product structure FMU 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
(2-wire-instruments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Product structure FMU 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
HART ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Product structure FMU 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Max. noise HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Product structure FMU 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Reaction time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installation bracket for FMU 40/41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Measured value resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Adapter flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Pulse frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cantilever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Measuring error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Mounting Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Wall Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Commubox FXA191 HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installation variants FMU 40, FMU 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Commubox FXA195 HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installation variants FMU42, FMU44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Service Interface FXA193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Installation variants FMU 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Remote display FHX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Installation conditions for level measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Installation in narrow shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Installation conditions for flow measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Blocking distance,
Operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
nozzle installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Description of device functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Short instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Control drawings Installation drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Resistance to alternating
temperature cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Ingress protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2
Sección 6 ~ Página 174 de 275

Function and system design


Measuring principle

BD
20 mA
100%

E F

4 mA
0%
L00-FMU4x-15-00-00-de-001

E: Empty distance; F: Span (full distance); D: Distance from sensor membrane - product surface; L: Level; BD: Blocking
distance

Sensor BD Max. range fluids Max. range bulk materials

FMU40 0.25 m 5m 2m

FMU41 0.35 m 8m 3.5 m

FMU42 0.4 m 10 m 5m

FMU43 0.6 m 15 m 7m

FMU44 0.5 m 20 m 10 m

Time-of-flight method
The sensor of the Prosonic M transmits ultrasonic pulses in the direction of the product surface. There, they
are reflected back and received by the sensor. The Prosonic M measures the time t between pulse transmission
and reception. The instrument uses the time t (and the velocity of sound c) to calculate the distance D between
the sensor membrane and the product surface:

D = c ⋅ t/2

As the device knows the empty distance E from a user entry, it can calculate the level as follows:

L=E-D

An integrated temperature sensor compensates for changes in the velocity of sound caused by temperature
changes.

Interference echo suppression


The interference echo suppression feature on the Prosonic M ensures that interference echos (e.g. from edges,
welded joints and installations) are not interpreted as a level echo.

Calibration
Enter the empty distance E and the span F to calibrate the device.

Blocking distance
Span F may not extend into the blocking distance BD. Level echos from the blocking distance cannot be
evaluated due to the transient characteristics of the sensor.

3
Sección 6 ~ Página 175 de 275

Equipment architecture 4…20 mA output with HART protocol


The complete measuring system consists of:

PLC
- ToF Tool - - ToF Tool -
FieldTool FieldTool
Package Package
- FieldCare

Commubox Power supply service adapter


FXA191/195 (for 4-wire) FXA193

transmitter power
supply unit
RMA422 operating and ENDRESS + HAUSER

or RN221N display module – +


%

(communication resistor VU331


included) 3 PV
4 SV
DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
ONLINE
1 QUICK SETUP
2 OPERATING MENU
352 mbar
0 °C
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.

HELP SAVE

6
ENDRESS + HAUSER
9 Page
Up

RMA 422 Bksp Delete

Page
On

#%& ABC DEF


1 2 3
Copy Paste Hot Key

GHI JKL MNO


4 5 6
Insert + Hot Key

PQRS TUV W XY Z
7 8 9
,()‘
.
_<>
0
+*/
-
HART handheld
FXA191/195 375
FIELD COMMUNICATOR

DXR375
or
DXR375

L00-FMxxxxxx-14-00-06-en-007

If the HART communication resistor is not built into the supply unit, it is necessary to insert a communication
resistor of 250 Ω into the 2-wire line.

On-site operation
• with display and operating module VU 331
• with a Personal Computer, FXA 193 and the operating software ToF Tool

Remote operation
• with HART handheld terminal DXR 375
• with a Personal Computer, Commubox FXA 191 and the operating software COMMUWIN II respectively
ToF Tool.

4
Sección 6 ~ Página 176 de 275

System integration using PROFIBUS PA


A maximum of 32 transmitters (8 if mounted in an explosion hazardous location EEx ia IIC according to
FISCO-model) can be connected to the bus.The segment coupler provides the operating voltage to the bus.
Both on-site as well as remote operation are possible.

personal computer e.g. with


ToF Tool - FieldTool
Package and PLC
Profibard resp. Proficard

segment coupler
PROFIBUS DP
ENDRESS + HAUSER

PROFIBUS PA
T

More
operating and Functions
display module (valves etc)
VU331 ENDRESS + HAUSER

– + E

Micropilot M Prosonic M
FXA193
Levelflex M

ToF Tool - FieldTool Package


L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-001

System integration using Foundation Fieldbus (FF)


A maximum of 32 transmitters (standard or EEx d) can be connected to the bus. For protection class EEx ia:
the maximum number of transmitters depends on the established rules and standards for intrinsically safe
circuits (EN 60070-14) and proof of instrinsic safety. Both on-site and remote operation are possible.

personal computer
e.g. with
NI-FBUS configurator

power supply
FF link
power conditioner T T

Additional
operating and functions
display module (valves etc.)
VU331 ENDRESS + HAUSER

– +
%

Micropilot M Prosonic M
FXA193
Levelflex M

ToF Tool - FieldTool Package


L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-003

5
Sección 6 ~ Página 177 de 275

System integration using Endress+Hauser Rackbus


You can interconnect a maximum of 64 2-wire devices with HART protocol to a Rackbus. Use an FXN 672
interface module for each device. You can integrate this bus into a higher-level bus by using a ZA gateway.
Gateways are available for MODBUS, FIP, PROFIBUS, INTERBUS etc. Both on-site and remote operation are
possible.

PLC
personal computer
with Commuwin II

RS 232C Bus
FXN672
FXN 671 FXN 671 FXN 671 ZA 672 ZA 672
Gateway to
MODBUS, FIP,
PROFIBUS,
INTERBUS etc.
+ + +
mA1 mA1 mA1

4…20 mA with HART

operating and
display module
VU331 ENDRESS + HAUSER

– + E

Micropilot M Prosonic M
FXA193

Levelflex M

ToF Tool - FieldTool Package


L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-006

! Hinweis!
The FXN672 can be used with all 2-wire devices of the Prosonic M family.

6
Sección 6 ~ Página 178 de 275

System integration via Fieldgate

Vendor Managed Inventory


By using Fieldgates to interrogate tank or silo levels remotely, suppliers of raw materials can provide their
regular customers with information about the current supplies at any time and, for example, account for them
in their own production planning. For their part, the Fieldgates monitor the configured level limits and, if
required, automatically activate the next supply. The spectrum of options here ranges from a simple purchasing
requisition via e-mail through to fully automatic order administration by coupling XML data into the planning
systems on both sides.

Remote maintenance of measuring equipment


Fieldgates not only transfer the current measured values, they also alert the responsible standby personnel, if
required, via e-mail or SMS. In the event of an alarm or also when performing routine checks, service
technicians can diagnose and configure connected HART devices remotely. All that is required for this is the
corresponding HART operating software (e.g. ToF Tool - FieldTool Package, FieldCare, ...) for the connected
device. Fieldgate passes on the information transparently, so that all options for the respective operating
software are available remotely. Some on-site service operations can be avoided by using remote diagnosis and
remote configuration and all others can at least be better planned and prepared.

Remote configuration/diagnostics Remote monitoring


HTTP script
via HART Client: Web browser
- ToF Tool - FieldTool …
Package
- FieldCare
...

Multidrop-Connector
e.g. 2 x RN221N-B … FXN520

ENDRESS+HAUSER
RN 221N
ENDRESS+HAUSER
RN 221N
Analogue
Ethernet
GSM
Fieldgate
FXA520

FXN 520
Fieldgate 20...45 VDC
Channel 1 Channel 2 FXA520

-
.
L00-FXA520xx-14-00-06-en-009

! Note!
The number of instruments which can be connected in mutidrop mode can be calculated by the "FieldNetCalc"
program. A description of this program can be found in Technical Information TI 400F (Multidrop Conncector
FXN520). The program is available form your Endress+Hauser sales organisation or in the internet at:
"www.endress.com É Download" (Text Search = "Fieldnetcalc").

7
Sección 6 ~ Página 179 de 275

Input
Measured variable The distance D between the sensor membrane and the product surface is measured.
Using the linearisation function, the device uses D to calculate:
• level L in any units
• volume V in any units
• flow Q across measuring weirs or open channels in any units

Measuring range The measuring range is limited by the range of a sensor. The sensor range is, in turn, dependent on the
operating conditions. To estimate the actual range, proceed as follows (see also the calculation example in the
diagram):
1. Determine which of the influences shown in the following table are appropriate for your process.
2. Add the corresponding attenuation values.
3. From the total attenuation, use the diagram to calculate the range.

Fluid surface Attenuation

Calm 0 dB

Waves 5 ... 10 dB

Strong turbulence (e.g. stirrers) 10 ... 20 dB

Foaming Ask Endress+Hauser

Bulk material surface Attenuation

Hard, rough (e.g. rubble) 40 dB

Soft (e.g. peat, dust-covered clinker) 40 ... 60 dB

Dust Attenuation

No dust formation 0 dB

Little dust formation 5 dB

Heavy dust formation 5 ... 20 dB

Filling curtain in detection range Attenuation


None 0 dB

Small quantities 5 ... 10 dB

Large quantities 10 ... 40 dB

Temperature difference between Attenuation


sensor and product surface

to 20 °C 0 dB

to 40 °C 5 ... 10 dB

to 80 °C 10 ... 20 dB

8
Sección 6 ~ Página 180 de 275

20
FMU 44
19

18

17

16

15
FMU 43
14

13

12

11

10
FMU 42
9
8

range/ m
FMU 41
7

4 FMU 40

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

attenuation / dB
L00-FMU4xxxx-05-00-00-en-002

Example (for FMU 43)


For typical solid applications, a certain amount of dust coverage is normally present. Therefore, the following
range results from the table and the diagram

• Dust-covered rubble approx. 50 dB


• no dust formation 0 dB
• No filling curtain in
detection range 0 dB
• Temperature diff. < 20°C 0 dB
approx. 50 dB => range approx. 7 m

These measuring conditions have been taken into account during the calculation of the maximum measuring
range in solid applications.

Operating frequency Sensor Operating frequency

FMU40 approx. 70 kHz


FMU41 approx. 50 kHz

FMU42 approx. 42 kHz

FMU43 approx. 35 kHz

FMU44 approx. 30 kHz

9
Sección 6 ~ Página 181 de 275

Output
Output signal according to the instrument version ordered:
• 4…20 mA with HART protocol
• PROFIBUS PA
• Foundation Fieldbus (FF)

Signal on alarm Error information can be accessed via the following interfaces:
• On-site display (error symbol, error code and plain text description)
• Current output (error current configurable)
• Digital interface

Load HART Minimum load for HART communication: 250 Ω

Output damping Freely selectable, 0 ... 255 s

Linearisation The linearisation function of the Prosonic M allows conversion of the measured value into any unit of length
or volume. In open channels or measuring weirs, also a flow linearistion is possible (calculation of the flow from
the measured level). The linearisation table for calculating the volume in an horizontal cylindrical tank is
preprogrammed. You can also enter any number of other tables containing up to 32 value pairs either manually
or semi-automatically (by filling the vessel under controlled conditions).
The supplied ToF Tool operating program can automatically calculate the table for any tank, weir or flume and
upload it into the device.
Flow curves for open channels can be calculated and entered into the instrument by the ToT Tool as well.

10
Sección 6 ~ Página 182 de 275

Auxiliary energy
Terminal compartment In the F12 housing, the terminals are located underneath the housing cover. In the T12 housing, they are under
the cover of the separate terminal compartment.

F12 housing T12 housing

sealed terminal
compartment

L00-FMR2xxxx-04-00-00-en-001

Terminal assignment 4 ... 20 mA with HART, 2-wire 4 ... 20 mA active with HART, 4-wire

DC AC / DC

power display unit, power


alternatively recorder, PCS

Commubox
FXA191/195 alternatively
communication
DXR375
resistor Commubox
(> 250 W) communication FXA191/195
resistor DXR375
(> 250 W)

4...20 mA
4...20mA

test sockets for testing


of the signal current

plant
1 2 3 4 ground
L- L+ I+ I- plant
5 6 1 2 ground
I+ I- L1/L+ N/L-
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-015 L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-011

• Connect the connecting line to the screw terminals (line cross-sections of 0.5 ... 2.5mm) in the terminal
compartment.
• Use 2-wire twisted pair cable with screen for the connection.
• Protective circuitry against reverse polarity, RFI and over-voltage peaks is built into the device (see also
Technical Information TI 241F/00/en "EMC Test Procedures")

11
Sección 6 ~ Página 183 de 275

PROFIBUS PA Foundation Fieldbus

PROFIBUS PA
T-Box

plant
plant 1 2 3 4 ground
1 2 3 4 ground – +
– +
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-012 L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-013

The digital communication signal is transmitted to the bus via a 2-wire connection. The bus also provides the
auxiliary energy. Use 2-wire twisted pair cable with screen.
Refer to the following operating manuals for information on cable types, and how to set up and ground the
network:
• BA 198F/00/de „PROFIBIS -DP/-PA, Guidelines for planning and commissioning“
• BA 013S/04/en „Foundation Fieldbus, Installation and Commissioning Guidelines“

Fieldbus plug connectors For the versions with fieldbus plug connector (M12 or 7/8"), the signal line can be connected without opening
the housing.

Pin assignment of the M12 plug connector (PROFIBUS PA plug)

Pin Meaning

1 Ground
1 3 –
2 Signal +

2 + 4 nc 3 Signal -

4 not connected

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-016

Pin assignment of the 7/8" plug connector (FOUNDATION Fieldbus plug)

Pin Meaning

1 Signal -
1 – 3 nc
2 Signal +

2 + 4 3 not connected

4 ground

L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-017

12
Sección 6 ~ Página 184 de 275

Supply voltage HART, 2-wire


The following values are the voltages across the terminals directly at the instrument:

Current Terminal voltage Terminal voltage


Version
consumption minimum maximum

2-wire HART 4 mA 14 V 36 V
Standard
20 mA 8V 36 V

4 mA 14 V 30 V
EEx ia
20 mA 8V 30 V

4 mA 14 V 30 V
EEx d
20 mA 11 V 30 V

Fixed current,
adjustable, e.g. for Standard 11 mA 10 V 36 V
solar power
operation
(measured value via EEx ia 11 mA 10 V 30 V
HART)

Fixed current for Standard 4 mA1) 14 V 36 V


HART multidrop
mode EEx ia 4 mA1 14 V 30 V

1) Start-up current 11 mA

HART, 4-wire, active

Version Voltage max. load

DC 10,5 ... 32 V 600 Ω

AC 50/60 Hz 90 ... 253 V 600 Ω

Terminals Cable cross-section: 0.5 to 2.5 mm (20 to 14 AWG)

Cable entry • Cable gland: M20x1.5 (recommended cable diameter 6 ... 10 mm)
• Cable entry G ½ or ½ NPT
• PROFIBUS-PA M12 plug
• Fieldbus Foundation 7/8" plug

Power consumption Version Power consumption

2-wire 51 mW ... 800 mW

4-wire AC max. 4VA

4-wire DC; FMU 40/41 330 mW ... 830 mW

4-wire DC; FMU 42/43 600 mW ... 1 W

Current consumption Communication Current consumption


(2-wire-instruments)
HART 3,6 ... 22 mA

PROFIBUS PA max. 13 mA

Foundation Fieldbus max. 15 mA

13
Sección 6 ~ Página 185 de 275

HART ripple 47...125 Hz: Vpp = 200 mV (measured at 500 Ω)

Max. noise HART 500 Hz...10 kHz: Vrms = 2.2 mV (measured at 500 Ω)

Galvanic isolation With 4-wire devices, the evaluation electronics and mains voltage are galvanically isolated from each other.

14
Sección 6 ~ Página 186 de 275

Performance characteristics
Reaction time The reaction time depends on the parameter settings. The minimum values are:
• 2-wire devices (FMU40/41/42): min. 2 s
• 2-wire diveces (FMU43 - PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus): min. 2 s
• 2-wire devices (FMU44): min. 3 s
• 4-wire devices (FMU40/41/42/43/44): 0.5 s

Reference operating • Temperature = +20 °C


conditions • Pressure = 1013 mbar abs.
• Humidity = 50 %
• Ideal reflective surface (e.g. calm, smooth fluid surface)
• No interference reflections within signal beam
• Set application parameters:
– Tank shape = flat ceiling
– Medium property = liquid
– process conditions = calm surface

Measured value resolution Sensor Measured value resolution

FMU40 1 mm

FMU41 1 mm

FMU42 2 mm

FMU43 2 mm

FMU44 2 mm

Pulse frequency • 2-wire devices (FMU40/41/42): max. 0.5Hz


• 2-wire devices (FMU43 - PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus): max. 0.5 Hz
• 2-wire devices (FMU44): max. 0.3 Hz
• 4-wire devices (FMU40/41/42/43/44): max. 2Hz
The exact values are dependent on the type of device and the parameter settings.

Measuring error Typical specifications for reference operating conditions (include linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis):

Sensor Measuring error

FMU40 ±2mm or 0.2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU41 ± 2 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU42 ± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU43 ± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

FMU44 ± 4 mm or 0,2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1

1
whichever is greater

15
Sección 6 ~ Página 187 de 275

Installation conditions
Installation variants FMU 40,
Installation with counter nut Installation with sleeve
FMU 41

Sealing ring
(EPDM)
supplied

counter nut (PC)


supplied
for G 1½” and
G 2” instruments

Installation with installation bracket Installation with adapter flange

ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M

Sealing ring
(EPDM)
adapter flange supplied

sensor nozzle
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-002

For installation bracket or adapter flange s. chapter "Accessories".

Installation variants FMU42,


FMU44 Installation with universal flange Installation with mounting bracket

ER
HAUS
ESS+
ENDR ic M
Proson

-
e.g. Zone 20
.
Zone 20
L00-FMU42xxxx-17-00-00-en-001

16
Sección 6 ~ Página 188 de 275

Installation variants FMU 43


Installation with Installation with
universal slip-on flange (option) mounting bracket

AUSER
ESS+H
ENDR ic M
Proson

slip-on flange

nozzle -
e.g.Zone 20
sensor .
Zone 20
L00-FMU43xxxx-17-00-00-en-001

Installation conditions for


2 3 4
level measurements

7
1
5

1/6D

D
6 L
α

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-de-005

• Do not install the sensor in the middle of the tank (3). We recommend leaving a distance between the sensor
and the tank wall (1) measuring 1/6 of the tank diameter.
• Use a protective cover, in order to protect the device from direct sun or rain (2).
• Avoid measurements through the filling curtain (4).
• Make sure that equipment (5) such as limit switches, temperature sensors, etc. are not located within the
emitting angle α. In particular, symmetrical equipment (6) such as heating coils, baffles etc. can influence
measurement.
• Align the sensor so that it is vertical to the product surface (7).
• Never install two ultrasonic measuring devices in a tank, as the two signals may affect each other.
• To estimate the detection range, use the 3 dB emitting angle α.

Sensor α Lmax rmax

FMU40 11° 5m 0.48 m

FMU41 11° 8m 0.77 m

FMU42 9° 10 m 0.79 m

FMU43 6° 15 m 0.79 m

FMU44 11 ° 20 m 1.93 m

17
Sección 6 ~ Página 189 de 275

Installation in narrow shafts In narrow shafts with strong interference echoes, we ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M

recommend using an ultrasound guide pipe (e.g. PE


or PVC wastewater pipe) with a minimum diameter
of 100 mm. venting
Make sure that the pipe is not soiled by accumulated hole
dirt. If necessary, clean the pipe at regular intervals.

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-010

Installation conditions for flow • Install the Prosonic M at the inflow side, as close above the maximum water level Hmax as possible (take into
measurements account the blocking distance BD).
• Position the Prosonic M in the middle of the channel or weir.
• Align the sensor membrane parallel to the water surface.
• Keep to the installation distance of the channel or weir.
• You can enter the "Flow to Level" linearisation curve ("Q/h curve") using ToF Tool or manually via the on-
site display.

Example: Khafagi-Venturi flume

inflow outflow
empty calibr.

BD

Khafagi - Venturi - flume


Hmax direction of flow

1 x b0

b0

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-003

18
Sección 6 ~ Página 190 de 275

Example: Triangular weir

min. 2 Hmax
α

Hmax (= full calibr.)

min. 2 Hmax

min. 3 H max
BD
empty calibr.

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-012

19
Sección 6 ~ Página 191 de 275

Blocking distance, Install the Prosonic M at a height so that the blocking distance BD is not undershot, even at maximum fill level.
nozzle installation Use a pipe nozzle if you cannot maintain the blocking distance in any other way. The interior of the nozzle
must be smooth and may not contain any edges or welded joints. In particular, there should be no burr on the
inside of the tank side nozzle end. Note the specified limits for nozzle diameter and length. To minimise
disturbing factors, we recommend an angled socket edge (ideally 45°).

FMU 43
FMU 40/41 FMU 42/44

BD
SD

E F
L L
L

D D
D

L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-004

BD: blocking distance; SD: safety distance; E: empty calibration; F: full calibration (span); D: nozzle diameter; L: nozzle
length

Max. range Max. range


Sensor BD nozzle diameter max. nozzle length
liquids bulk materials
50 mm approx. 80 mm

FMU40 0.25 m 5m 2m 80 mm approx. 240 mm

100 mm approx. 300 mm

80 mm approx. 240 mm
FMU41 0.35 m 8m 3.5 m
100 mm approx. 300 mm

80 mm approx. 250 mm
FMU42 0.4 m 10 m 5m
100 mm approx. 300 mm

FMU43 0.6 m 15 m 7m min. 100 mm approx. 300 mm

FMU44 0.5 m 20 m 10 m min. 150 mm approx. 400 mm

" Caution!
If the blocking distance is undershot, it may cause device malfunction.

! Note!
In order to notice if the level approaches the blocking distance, you can specify a safety distance (SD). If the
level is within this safety distance, the Prosonic M outputs a warning or alarm message.

20
Sección 6 ~ Página 192 de 275

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -40 °C ... +80 °C
The functionality of the LC display becomes restricted at Tu<-20 °C and Tu>+60 °C.
If the device is operated outdoors in strong sunlight, you should use a protective cover.

Storage temperature -40 °C ... +80 °C

Resistance to alternating to DIN EN 60068-2-14; Nb test : +80°C/-40°C, 1K/min, 100cycles


temperature cycles

Climate class DIN EN 60068-2-38 (Test Z/AD) DIN/IEC 68 T2-30Db

Ingress protection • With closed housing, tested according to


– IP 68, NEMA 6P (24h at 1.83m under water surface)
– IP 66, NEMA 4x
• With open housing: IP 20, NEMA 1 (also ingress protection of the display)

" Caution!
Degree of protection IP 68 NEMA 6P applies for M12 PROFIBUS-PA plugs only when the PROFIBUS cable is
plugged in.

Vibration resistance DIN EN 60068-2-64 / IEC 68-2-64: 20…2000 Hz, 1 (m/s2)2/Hz; 3 x 100 min

Electromagnetic compatibility • Interference emission to EN 61326, Equipment Class B


(EMC) • Interference immunity to EN 61326, Appendix A (Industrial) and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 (EMC).
• A standard installation cable is sufficient if only the analogue signal is used. Use a screened cable when
working with a superimposed communication signal (HART).

Process conditions
Process temperature -40°C ... +80°C
A temperature sensor is integrated in the sensor for correction of the temperature-dependent time-of-flight.

Process pressure • FMU 40/41: 0.7 bar ... 3bar abs.


• FMU 42/43/44: 0.7 bar ... 2.5bar abs.

21
Sección 6 ~ Página 193 de 275

Mechanical construction
Design; dimensions FMU40, FMU41

F12 T12 65 78
(2.6) (3.1)
~86 65 78 68 94
(~3.4) (2.6) (3.1) 32 (1.3)
(2.7) (3.7)

Ø 129 (5.1)

Ø 129 (5.1)
150 (5.9)

162 (6.4)
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M

85 85
(3.3) (3.3)

FMU 40 FMU 41
SW (AF) 60 SW (AF) 60
(0.9)
22

(0.9)
22
~148 (5.8)

~148 (5.8)
G1½” G2”
1½ NPT 2 NPT

~83 (3.3)
(~3.4)
~87

Ø 39 (1.5)
Ø 50 (2.0)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-006

Dimensions in mm (inch)

FMU42, FMU44 with slip-on flange

F12 T12 65 78
(2.6) (3.1)
~86 65 78 68 94
(~3.4) (2.6) (3.1) 32 (1.3)
(2.7) (3.7)
Ø 129 (5.1)

Ø 129 (5.1)
150 (5.9)

ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M 162 (6.4)

85 85
(3.3) (3.3)

FMU 42 FMU 44
~ 110 (4.3)

~ 145 (5.7)
(3.3)
~ 85

~ 107
(4.2)

Ø 70 (2.8)
Ø 98 (3.9)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-007

Dimensions in mm (inch)

22
Sección 6 ~ Página 194 de 275

FMU42, FMU44 with mounting bracket

FMU 42 FMU 44

ENDRESS+HAUSER ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M

F12/ F12/
Prosonic M

T12 T12

M8 M8

105 (4.1)

125 (4.9)

30 (1.2)
30 (1.2)
75
(3.0) 119 (4.7)
119 (4.7)
98
(3.9)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-008

Dimensions in mm (inch)

FMU43

A B

~86 65 78
(3.4) (2.6) (3.1)

F12
Ø 129 (5.1)

ER
HAUS
ESS+
ENDR ic M
150 (5.9)

Proson
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
~248 (9.8)

2 x M8
.0)
75 (3
85 (3.3)

.5)
89 (3
.2)
1 (6
5 8
ANSI 4” DN 100 * Ø 230 (9.1)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-009

Dimensions in mm (inch);
A: with slip-on flange; B: with mounting bracket

Mounting bracket for FMU42, FMU43 and FMU44

25
119 (4.68) (0.98)
~123 (4.8)
120 (4.7)

2 (0.079)
40 (1.6) 40 (1.6)
25
(0.98)

11 (0.43)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-010

Dimensions in mm (inch)

23
Sección 6 ~ Página 195 de 275

Flanges for FMU42 and FMU44

A
B

D
20 (0.79)

G2”
ISO228

C
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-011

suitable for A B C D E number of


boreholes
3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80 150 mm 160 mm 200 mm 19 mm 45° 8
(5,91") (6,30") (7,87") (0,75")

4" 150 lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100 175 mm 190,5 mm 228,6 mm 19 mm 45° 8
(6,90") (7,50") (9,00") (0,75")

6" 150 lbs / DN150 PN16 / 10 K 150 240 mm 241,3 mm 285 mm 23 mm 45° 8
(9,45") (9,50") (11,22") (0,91")

8" 150 lbs 298,5 mm 298,5 mm 342,9 mm 22, 5 mm 45° 8


(11,75") (11,75") (13,50") (0,89")

DN200 PN16 / 10 K 200 290 mm 295 mm 340 mm 23 mm 30° 12


(11,42") (11,61") (13,39") (0,91")

Weight Sensor Weight

FMU40 approx. 2,5 kg

FMU41 approx. 2,6 kg

FMU42 approx. 3 kg

FMU43 approx. 3,5 kg

FMU44 approx. 4 kg

24
Sección 6 ~ Página 196 de 275

Housing design Types of housings


• F12 housing with sealed terminal compartment for standard or EEx ia applications
• T12 housing with separate terminal compartment and explosionproof encapsulation

Material
Aluminium, seawater resistant, chromed, powder-coated

Cover
• Aluminium, for version without on-site display
• Inspection glass for version with on-site display. This version cannot be supplied together with the ATEX II
1/2 D certificate.

Process connection, Sensor Process connection Material in contact with process


sealing material,
sensor material FMU40 • Thread G 1½“ Sensor: PVDF
• Thread NPT 1½“ - 11.5 Seal: EPDM

FMU41 • Thread 2" Sensor: PVDF


• Thread NPT 2" - 11,5 Seal: EPDM
FMU42 • Universal flange
DN 80 PN16 / ANSI 3" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 80 Sensor: PVDF
• Universal flange Seal: VITON or EPDM
DN 100 PN16 / ANSI 4" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 100 Flange: PP, PVDF or SS 316L
• Mounting bracket

FMU43 • Universal flange Sensor: UP and SS 316Ti


DN 100 / ANSI 4" / JIS16K100 Seal: EPDM
• Mounting bracket Flange: PP or SS 316Ti

FMU44 • Universal flange Sensor PVDF


DN 100 PN16 / ANSI 4" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 100 Seal: VITON or EPDM
• Universal flange Flange: PP, PVDF or SS 316L
DN 150 PN16 / ANSI 6" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 150
• Universal flange
DN200 PN16 / JIS 10K 200
• Flange ANSI 8" 150 lbs
• Mounting bracket

25
Sección 6 ~ Página 197 de 275

Human interface
Display and operating The LCD module VU 331 for display and operation is located beneath the housing cover. The measured value
elements is legible through the glass in the cover. Open the cover to operate the device.

LCD
Order

Messber
ENDR
MICR ESS+
Code:
Ser.-No.
:

Measurin
OPILOHAUS

eich
g range
U 16...36
4...20
T II ER

max.
20
(liquid crystal display)

Maulburg
mA V DC m
IP
65
T

Made in Germany
A >70°C
: t
>85°C

Symbols
ENDRESS + HAUSER

– + E

3 keys

snap-fit

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-en-001

Symbol in display

continuous flashing

Meaning Alarm Warning Communication Security Locking

Function of the keys

Key(s) Meaning

O or V Navigate upwards in the selection list


Edit numeric value within a function

S or W Navigate downwards in the selection list


Edit numeric value within a function

X or Z Navigate to the left within a function group

F Navigate to the right within a function group, confirmation.

O and F
or Contrast settings of the LCD
S and F
Hardware lock / unlock
After a hardware lock, an operation of the instrument via display or
O and S and F communication is not possible!
The hardware can only be unlocked via the display. An unlock parameter must
be entered to do so.

26
Sección 6 ~ Página 198 de 275

On-site operation Operation with VU 331


The LC-Display VU 331 allows configuration via 3 keys directly at the instrument. All device functions can be
set through a menu system. The menu consists of function groups and functions. Within a function, application
parameters can be read or adjusted. The user is guided through a complete configuration procedure.

Headline Position indicator

ENDRESS + HAUSER

Symbol Main value Unit


– + E

Selection list

Function groups -> Functions

HOME X F
F FG00 X F000 F001 F002 F003 F004 ...

X
FG01
O FG02 F F
FG03
O Help text
FG04 S
S
FG05
FG06
X
FG07 Envelope
... curve

L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-en-004

Operation with the handheld terminal DXR 375


On devices with HART communication, you can also access the menu using the handheld terminal DXR 375.

dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.

dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
FMU43: LIC0001
FMU42: LIC0001 ONLINE
ONLINE
1 GROUP SELECTION
1 GROUP SELECT
2 PV 8.7 m 2 PV 8.7 m Delete

HELP SAVE

H dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.

6
9
HELP SAVE FMU43: LIC0001
Page GROUP SELECTION
Up

1 BASIC SETUP
Bksp Delete 2 SAFETY SETTINGS Delete
3 TEMPERATURE
Page 4 LINEARISATION
On Bksp 5 EXTENDED CALIBR.
#%& ABC DEF
1 2 3
Copy

GHI
Paste

JKL
Hot Key

MNO
H dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.

4 5 6 SAVE HOME FMRU43: LIC0001


Insert + Hot Key
BASIC SETUP
PQRS TUV W XY Z
1 MEASURED VALUE
Page
7 8 9
2 TANK SHAPE Up
,()‘ _<> +*/ 3 MEDIUM PROPERTY
. 0 - 4 PROCESS COND.
Bksp 5 EMPTY CALIBR. Page
On
375
FIELD COMMUNICATOR
SAVE HOME

L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-de-005

27
Sección 6 ~ Página 199 de 275

Remote operation Operation with ToF Tool


The ToF Tool is a graphical operation software for instruments from Endress+Hauser. It is used to support
commissioning, securing of data, signal analysis and documentation of the instruments. It is compatible with
the following operating systems: WinNT4.0, Win2000 and WinXP.
The ToF Tool supports the following functions:
• Online configuration of transmitters
• Signal analysis via envelope curve
• Linearisation table (graphically supported creation, editing, importing and exporting)
• Loading and saving of instrument data (Upload/Download)
• Documentation of measuring point

! Note!
Further information you may find on the CD-ROM, which is enclosed to the instrument.
Connection options
• HART with Commubox FXA 191 (available as accessory)
• PROFIBUS PA
• Service-interface with adapter FXA 193 (available as accessory)

Menu-guided commissioning:

L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-003

28
Sección 6 ~ Página 200 de 275

Signal analysis via envelope curve:

L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-004

Operation with FieldCare


FieldCare is Endress+Hauser's FDT based Plant Asset Management Tool. It can configure all intelligent field
devices in your plant and supports you in managing them. By using status information, it also provides a simple
but effective means of checking their health.
• Supports Ethernet, HART, PROFIBUS, FOUNDATION Fieldbus etc.
• Operates all Endress+Hauser devices
• Operates all third-party actuators, I/O systems and sensors supporting the FDT standard
• Ensures full functionality for all devices with DTMs
• Offers generic profile operation for any third-party fieldbus device that does not have a vendor DTM

Operation with Commuwin II (for communication variants HART or PROFIBUS-PA)


Commuwin II is an operating software with graphical support (MS Windows) for intelligent transmitters with
the communication protocols Rackbus, Rackbus RS-485, HART and PROFIBUS-PA.
Commuwin II supports the following functions:
• Online configuration of transmitters
• Loading and saving of instrument data (Upload/Download)
• Orderly visualisation of measured values and limit values
• Display and recording of measured values with a line recorder
It is not possible to display envelope curves with Commuwin II. To display them, please use the ToF Tool
program supplied.
Connections:
• HART with Commubox FXA 191 (available as accessory)
• PROFIBUS PA

29
Sección 6 ~ Página 201 de 275

Operation with NI-FBUS Configurator (only Foundation Fieldbus)


The NI-FBUS Configurator is an easy-to-use graphical environment for creating linkages, loops, and a schedule
based on the fieldbus concepts.
You can use the NI-FBUS Configurator to configure a fieldbus network as follows:
• Set block and device tags
• Set device addresses
• Create and edit function block control strategies (function block applications)
• Configure vendor-defined function and transducer blocks
• Create and edit schedules
• Read and write to function block control strategies (function block applications)
• Invoke Device Description (DD) methods
• Display DD menus
• Download a configuration
• Verify a configuration and compare it to a saved configuration
• Monitor a downloaded configuration
• Replace devices
• Save and print a configuration

Certificates and Approvals


CE mark The measuring system meets the legal requirements of the EC-guidelines. Endress+Hauser confirms the
instrument passing the required tests by attaching the CE-mark.

Ex-Zulassung Die erhältlichen Zertifikate sind in den Bestellinformationen aufgeführt. Beachten Sie jeweils die zugehörigen
Sicherheitshinweise (XA) bzw. Control oder Installation Drawings (ZD).

External standards and EN 60529


guidelines
Protection class of housing (IP-code)

EN 61326
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements)

NAMUR
Standards committee for measurement and control in the chemical industry

30
Sección 6 ~ Página 202 de 275

Ordering information
Product structure FMU 40 Certificates
A Variant for non-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6
4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6
G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6
2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover
5 ATEX II 1/3D
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
N CSA General Purpose
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6
E NEPSI Ex nA II T6
Y Special certificate

Process connection
R G 1½“ threadISO 228
N NPT 1½“ - 11,5 thread
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation


1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment;
with overvoltage protection
9 Special version

Screw union/entry
2 M20x1.5 screw union
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

FMU 40 - Product designation

31
Sección 6 ~ Página 203 de 275

Product structure FMU 41 Certificates


A Variant for non-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6
4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6
G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6
2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover
5 ATEX II 1/3D
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
N CSA General Purpose
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6
E NEPSI Ex nA II T6
Y Special certificate

Process connection
R G 2“ threadISO 228
N NPT 2“ - 11,5 thread
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation


1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68 with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment;
with overvoltage protection
9 Special version

Screw union/entry
2 M20x1.5 screw union
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

FMU 41 - Product designation

32
Sección 6 ~ Página 204 de 275

Product structure FMU 42 Certificates


A Variant for non-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX ia IIC T6
4 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX d [ia] IIC T6
G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 (in preparation)
2 ATEX II 1/2 D, Alu bond cover
5 ATEX II 1/3D
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
N CSA General Purpose
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6 (in preparation)
E NEPSI Ex nA II T6
Y Special certificate

Process connection
M mounting bracket FAU20
P DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS10K80, PP, Universal flange
Q DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS10K80, PVDF, Universal flange
S DN80/ANSI 3"/JIS10K80, 316L, Universal flange
T DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS16K100, PP, Universal flange
U DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS16K100, PVDF, Universal flange
V DN100/ANSI 4"/JIS16K100, 316L, Universal flange
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation


1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T 12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment; with
overvoltage protection
Y Special version

Gland/Entry
2 M20x1.5 gland
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

Sealing Sensor/Flange
2 VITON flat sealing
3 EPDM flat sealing
9 special version

Additional options
A Additional options not selected

FMU 42 - Product designation

33
Sección 6 ~ Página 205 de 275

Product structure FMU 43 Certificates


A Variant for non-hazardous area
2 ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D, Aluminium Deckel
5 ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D, Sichtdeckel
M FM DIP Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI
N CSA General Purpose
P CSA DIP, Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI
Y Special version

Process connection/material
P Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, PP (universal slip-on flange included)
S Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, SS 316TI (universal slip-on flange included)
K Without slip-on flange/without mounting bracket (customer mounting equipment)
M With mounting bracket
Y Special version

Power supply/communication
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version

Display / on-site operation


1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version

Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
9 Special version

Screw union/entry
2 M20x1.5 screw union
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version

FMU 43 - Product designation

34
Sección 6 ~ Página 206 de 275

Product structure FMU 44 Approval


A Non-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 1/2G EEx ia IIC T6 (in preparation)
4 ATEX II 1/2G EEx d (ia) IIC T6 (in preparation)
G ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6 (in preparation)
2 ATEX II 1/2 D, Alu blind cover (in preparation)
5 ATEX II 1/3 D
S FM IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, NI Cl.I Div.2 (in preparation)
T FM XP Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G (in preparation)
N CSA General Purpose (in preparation)
U CSA IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, NI Cl.I Div.2 (in preparation)
V CSA XP Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G (in preparation)
K TIIS EEx ia IIC T6 (in preparation)
I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 (in preparation)
J NEPSI Ex d(ia) IIC T6 (in preparation)
E NEPSI Ex nA II T6 (in preparation)
Q NEPSI DIP (in preparation)
Y Special version, to be specified

Process connection
T UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PP, max 3bar abs./ 44psia,
suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100
U UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PVDF, max. 3bar abs./ 44 psia,
suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100
V UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, 316L, max 3bar abs./ 44psia,
suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100
E UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PP, max 3bar abs./ 44psia,
suitable for 6" 150lbs / DN150 PN16 / 10K 150
F UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PVDF, max 3bar abs./ 44psia,
suitable for 6" 150lbs /DN150 PN16 / 10K 150
G UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, 316L, max 3bar abs. 44psia,
suitable for 6" 150lbs / DN150 PN16 / 10K 150
H UNI flange DN200/200, PP, max 3bar abs./ 44 psia,
suitable for DN200 PN16 / 10K 200
J UNI flange DN200/200, PVDF, max 3bar abs./ 44psia,
suitable for DN200 PN16 / 10K 200
K UNI flange DN200/200, 316L, max 3bar abs./ 44psia,
suitable for DN200 PN16 / 10K 200
L 8" 150lbs FF, PP, max 3bar abs./ 44psia
N 8" 150lbs FF, PVDF, max 2bar abs./ 44psia
A 8" 150lbs FF, 316L, max 3bar abs./44psia
M Mounting bracket FAU20
Y Special version, to be specified

Power supply; Output


B 2-wire; 4-20mA HART
D 2-wire; PROFIBUS PA
F 2-wire; FOUNDATION Fieldbus
G 4-wire 90-250VAC; 4-20mA HART
H 4-wire 10.5-32VDC; 4-20mA HART
Y Special version, to be specified

Operation
1 w/o display, via communication
2 4-line display VU331, Envelope curve display on site
3 Prepared for FHX40, Remote display (accessory)
9 Special version, to be specified

FMU 44 - product designation, part 1

35
Sección 6 ~ Página 207 de 275

Housing
A F12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P
C T12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P, Separate conn. compartment
D T12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P + OVP, Sep. conn. compartment, OVP = overvoltage
protection
9 Special version, to be specified

CAble entry
2 Gland M20 (EEx d > thread M20)
3 Thread G1/2
4 Thread NPT 1/2
5 Plug M12
6 Plug 7/8“
9 Special version, to be specified

Process Sealing Sensor/ Flange


2 Viton
3 EPDM
9 Special version, to be specified

Additional option
A Basic version
Y Special version, to be specified

FMU 44 - complete product designation

Scope of delivery • Instrument according to the version ordered


• "ToF Tool FieldTool Package (2 CD-ROMs: Program CD-ROM, Utility CD-ROM)
• Operating manual according to the communication version
• for certified instrument versions: Safety Instructions, Control- or Installation drawings
• for FMU 40 *R**** and FMU 41 *R****: counter nut (PC)
• for FMU 40/41: sealing ring (EPDM)
• for gland M20x1.5:
– 1 cable gland for 2-wire instruments
– 2 cable glands for 4-wire instruments
The cable glands are mounted on delivery.

36
Sección 6 ~ Página 208 de 275

Accessories
Weather protection cover A Weather protection cover made of stainless steel is recommended for outdoor mounting (order code:
543199-0001). The shipment includes the protective cover and tension clamp.

F12 / F23 / T12 housing

EN
DR
Orde MIC ES
r
Se Code
RO S+H
r.-N PIL AU
o.: : OT SE
II R
Me
Messberei
asuri ch
ng
ran
U 16 ge
ma
4...20...36 x. 20

Maulburg
m
mAV DC
IP
65
T

Made in Germany
A >7
0°C
: t >8
5°C

L00-FMR2xxxx-00-00-06-en-001

Installation bracket for


400
FMU 40/41 120
G

A ø16

250

120
3

30
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-de-001

• for FMU 40, G1½: Order No. 942669-0000


• for FMU 41, G2: Order No. 942669-0001
suited for NPT 1½" and 2" as well

37
Sección 6 ~ Página 209 de 275

Adapter flange
sealing ring
EPDM adapter flange
(supplied)

sensor nozzle
L00-FMUX3XXX-00-00-00-en-001

Version with metrical thread (FAU 70 E)


Process Connection
12 DN 50 PN 16 A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)
14 DN 80 PN 16 A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)
15 DN 100 PN 16, A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)

Sensor Connection
3 Thread ISO228 G1-1/2
4 Thread ISO228 G2

Flange Material
2 316L
7 Polypropylene

FAU 70 E Product designation

Version with conical thread(FAU 70 A)


Process Connection
22 2" 150lbs FF, flange ANSI B16.5
24 3" 150lbs FF, flange ANSI B16.5
25 4" 150lbs FF, flange ANSI B16.5

Sensor Connection
5 Thread NPT1-1/2
6 Thread NPT2

Flange Material
2 316L
7 Polypropylene

FAU 70 A Product designation

38
Sección 6 ~ Página 210 de 275

Cantilever
A

20
C

20

100
50
35

25
D M8

75 75 100 B 35

50/
62

22

C
105

6.5

15
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-005

A B C D for Sensor Material Order Code

585 mm 250 mm 2 mm 200 mm FMU 40 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014132

galv. steel 52014131

FMU 41 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014136

galv. steel 52014135

1085 mm 750 mm 3 mm 300 mm FMU 40 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014134

galv. steel 52014133

FMU 41 1.4301 (AISI 304) 52014138

galv. steel 52014137

• The 50 mm or 62 mm orifices serve for the mounting of the FMU 40 or FMU 41 sensor, respecitvely.
• The 22 mm orifice may be used for an additional sensor.

39
Sección 6 ~ Página 211 de 275

Mounting Frame

13

100
25
55

3.2
Ø 33.7
60
20 4

700/1400
6.5
45

76
200
100
100
130 150
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-005

Height Material Order Code

700 mm galv. steel 919791-0000

700 mm 1.4301 (AISI 304) 919791-0001

1400 mm galv. steel 919791-0002

1400 mm 1.4301 (AISI 304) 919791-0003

Wall Bracket
3.2
5 ø 33.7
6.5
180

213
150
110

25
13

88 110
150
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-006

Material Order Code

galv. steel 919792-0000

316Ti/1.4571 919792-0001

Commubox FXA191 HART For intrinsically safe communication with ToF Tool/FieldCare via the RS232C interface. For details refer to
TI237F/00/en.

Commubox FXA195 HART For intrinsically safe communication with ToF Tool/FieldCare via the USB interface. For details refer to
TI404F/00/en.

40
Sección 6 ~ Página 212 de 275

Service Interface FXA193 The Service-Interface connects the Service plug of Proline and ToF instruments with the 9 pin RS 232C
interface of a PC. (USB connectors must be equipped with a usual commercial USB/Serial adapter.)

Product structure
Approvals
A For use in non-hazardous areas
B ATEX II (1) GD
C CSA/FM Class I Div. 1
D ATEX, CSA, FM
9 other

Connection cable
B Connection cable for ToF devices
E Connection cable for Proline and ToF devices
H Connection cable for Proline and ToF devices and Connection cable for Ex two-wire devices
X without connection cable
9 others

FXA193- Complete product designation

Associated documentation
• Technical Information: TI063D
• Safety Instructions for ATEX II (1) GD: XA077D
• Supplementary information for the cable adapters: SD092D

Commubox FXA291
The Commubox FXA291 connects Endress+Hauser field instruments with CDI interface (= Endress+Hauser
Common Data Interface) to the USB interface of a personal computer or a notebook. For details refer to
TI405C/07/en.

! Note!
For the following Endress+Hauser instruments you need the "ToF Adapter FXA291" as an additional accessory:
• Cerabar S PMC71, PMP7x
• Deltabar S PMD7x, FMD7x
• Deltapilot S FMB70
• Gammapilot M FMG60
• Levelflex M FMP4x
• Micropilot FMR130/FMR131
• Micropilot M FMR2xx
• Micropilot S FMR53x, FMR540
• Prosonic FMU860/861/862
• Prosonic M FMU4x
• Tank Side Monitor NRF590 (with additional adapter cable)

ToF Adapter FXA291


The ToF Adapter FXA291 connects the Commubox FXA291 via the USB interface of a personal computer or
a notebook to the following Endress+Hauser instruments:
• Cerabar S PMC71, PMP7x
• Deltabar S PMD7x, FMD7x
• Deltapilot S FMB70
• Gammapilot M FMG60
• Levelflex M FMP4x
• Micropilot FMR130/FMR131
• Micropilot M FMR2xx
• Micropilot S FMR53x, FMR540
• Prosonic FMU860/861/862
• Prosonic M FMU4x
• Tank Side Monitor NRF590 (with additional adapter cable)
For details refer to KA271F/00/a2.

41
Sección 6 ~ Página 213 de 275

Remote display FHX40


Wall-mounting Pipe-mounting
(without mounting bracket) (mounting bracket and plate
supplied optionally,
s. product structure)

5
8,
0 Separate housing
15 FHX 40 (IP 65)

Micropilot M 122

180

160
Levelflex M
Prosonic M

80
EN
DR
Orde ES
r S+H
Se Code
r.-N
o.: :
AU
SE
Me
Messb
ssbe
ere
asuri reiich
ng
U 16
ch
ran
ge
ma
R

Cable 88
4...20...36 x. 20
Maulburg

m
mAV DC

T
IP
65
120 118
Made in Germany

A >7
0°C
: t
>8 5°C

82
96
3
6,

max. 80
min. 30

106

122
pipe

L00-FMxxxxxx-00-00-06-en-003

Technical data (cable and housing) and product structure:

Max. cable length 20 m (65 ft)

Temperature range -30 °C...+70 °C (-22 °F...158 °F)

Degree of protection IP65 acc. to EN 60529 (NEMA 4)

Materials Housing: AlSi12; cable glands: nickle plated brass


Dimensions [mm] / [inch] 122x150x80 (HxWxD) / 4.8x5.9x3.2

Approval:
A Nn-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6, ATEX II 3D
S FM IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D
U CSA IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D
N CSA General Purpose
K TIIS ia IIC T6 (in preparation)

Cable:
1 20m/65ft; for HART
5 20m/65ft; for PROFIBUS PA/FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Additional option:
A Basic version
B Mounting bracket, pipe 1"/ 2"

FHX40 - Complete product designation

For connection of the remote display FHX40 use the cable which fits the communication version of the
respective instrument.

42
Sección 6 ~ Página 214 de 275

Supplementary documentation
System Information SI 005F
Ultrasonic level measurement

Operating manual Depending on the communication variant ordered, the following operating manuals are supplied with the
device:

Communication Operating manual

4 ... 20mA, HART BA 237F

Profibus PA BA 238F

Foundation Fieldbus BA 239F

These instructions describe the installation and first commissioning of the Prosonic M. From the operating
menu, all functions are included, which are required for standard measurement tasks. Additional functions are
not contained in the manual.

Description of device BA 240F


functions
This contains a detailed description of all the functions of the Prosonic M and is valid for all communication
variants.
A pdf file of this document can be found
• in the supplied "ToF Tool - FieldTool Package" at "Help/ToF Tool Help/ Online Manual/ Operating
Manual/Ultrasonic/Prosonic M FMU4x Functions"1).
• in the internet at "www.endress.com". Klick "Download" and enter the product code "FMU4*" into the
search form.

Short instructions KA 183F


can be found under the device housing cover.
The most important menu functions are summarised on this sheet. It is intended primarily as a memory jogger
for users who are familiar with the operating concept of Endress+Hauser time-of-flight instruments.

Safety Instructions The following safety instructions are supplied with ATEX-certified device versions. If the devices are used in
explosive areas, comply with all the specifications in these safety instructions.

Instrument version Certificate Communication Housing Safety Instructions

• FMU40 - 1*B*A*
ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G
• FMU41 - 1*B*A* HART (2-wire) F12 XA 174F
EEx ia II C T6
• FMU42 - 1*B*A***
• FMU40 - 1*B*D*
ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G
• FMU41 - 1*B*D* HART (2-wire) T12 with overvoltage protection XA 224F
EEx ia II C T6
• FMU42 - 1*B*D***

• FMU40 - 1*D*A*
- 1*F*A*
• FMU41 - 1*D*A* ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G • Profibus-PA
F12 XA 175F
- 1*F*A* EEx ia II C T6 • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - 1*D*A***
- 1*F*A***
• FMU40 - 1*D*D*
- 1*F*D*
• FMU41 - 1*D*D* ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G • Profibus-PA
T12 with overvoltage protection XA 225F
- 1*F*D* EEx ia II C T6 • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - 1*D*D***
- 1*F*D***

1) If the Operating Instructions have not been installed together with the "ToF Tool - FieldTool Package", they can be added to the installation subsequently.

43
Sección 6 ~ Página 215 de 275

Instrument version Certificate Communication Housing Safety Instructions

• FMU40 - 4*B*C*
- 4*D*C*
- 4*F*C*
• FMU41 - 4*B*C* • HART (2-wire)
ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G
- 4*D*C* • Profibus-PA T12 XA 176F
EEx d [ia] II C T6
- 4*F*C* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - 4*B*C***
- 4*D*C***
- 4*F*C***

• HART (2-wire)
• FMU40 - G***** • HART (4-wire, DC) • F12
• FMU41 - G***** ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 • HART (4-wire, AC) • T12 XA 179F
• FMU42 - G******* • Profibus-PA • T12 with overvoltage protection
• Foundation Fieldbus

• FMU40 - 2*B*A*
- 2*D*A*
- 2*F*A*
- 5*B*A*
- 5*D*A*
- 5*F*A*
• FMU41 - 2*B*A*
- 2*D*A*
• HART (2-wire)
- 2*F*A* • ATEX II 1/2D
• Profibus-PA F12 XA 180F
- 5*B*A* • ATEX II 1/3D
• Foundation Fieldbus
- 5*D*A*
- 5*F*A*
• FMU42 - 2*B*A***
- 2*D*A***
- 2*F*A***
- 5*B*A***
- 5*D*A***
- 5*F*A***

• FMU40 - 2*G*A*
- 2*H*A*
- 5*G*A*
- 5*H*A*
• FMU41 - 2*G*A*
- 2*H*A* • ATEX II 1/2D • HART (4-wire, DC)
F12 XA 259
- 5*G*A* • ATEX II 1/3 D • HART (4-wire, AC)
- 5*H*A*
• FMU42 - 2*G*A***
- 2*H*A***
- 5*G*A***
- 5*H*A***

• FMU43 - 2*G*A*
- 2*H*A* • ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D • HART (4-wire, DC)
F12 XA 177F
- 5*G*A* • ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D • HART (4-wire, AC)
- 5*H*A*

• FMU43 - 2*D*A*
- 2*F*A* • ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D • Profibus-PA
F12 XA 178F
- 5*D*A* • ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D • Foundation Fieldbus
- 5*F*A*

• FMU40 - E***** • HART • F12 XA 403F


• FMU41 - E***** • NEPSI Ex nA II T6 • Profibus PA • T12
• FMU42 - E******* • Foundation Fieldbus

44
Sección 6 ~ Página 216 de 275

Control drawings Installation The following control or installation drawings are supplied with the FM, CSA and TIIS-certified device
drawings versions:

Instrument version Certificate Communication Housing Control or Installation


Drawing

• FMU40 - S*B*A*
• FMU41 - S*B*A* FM IS HART (2-wire) F12 ZD 096F
• FMU42 - S*B*A***

• FMU40 - S*D*A*
- S*F*A*
• FMU41 - S*D*A* • Profibus-PA
FM IS F12 ZD 097F
- S*F*A* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - S*D*A***
- S*F*A***

• FMU40 - S*B*D*
• FMU41 - S*B*D* FM IS HART (2-wire) T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 139F
• FMU42 - S*B*D***

• FMU40 - S*D* D*
- S*F*D*
• FMU41 - S*D* D* • Profibus-PA
FM IS T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 140F
- S*F*D* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - S*D* D***
- S*F*D***

• FMU40 - T*B*C*
- T*D*C*
- T*F*C*
• FMU41 - T*B*C* • HART (2-wire)
- T*D*C* FM XP • Profibus PA T12 ZD 098F
- T*F*C* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - T*B*C***
- T*D*C***
- T*F*C***

• FMU40 - U*B*A*
• FMU41 - U*B*A* CSA IS HART (2-wire) F12 ZD 088F
• FMU42 - U*B*A***

• FMU40 - U*D*A*
- U*F*A*
• FMU41 - U*D*A* • Profibus-PA
CSA IS F12 ZD 099F
- U*F*A* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - U*D*A***
- U*F*A***

• FMU40 - U*B* D*
• FMU41 - U*B* D* CSA IS HART (2-wire) T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 101F
• FMU42 - U*B* D***

• FMU40 - U*D*D*
- U*F*D*
• FMU41 - U*D*D* • Profibus-PA
CSA IS T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 102F
- U*F*D* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - U*D*D***
- U*F*D***

• FMU40 - V*B*C*
- V*D*C*
- V*F*C*
• FMU41 - V*B*C* • HART (2-wire)
- V*D*C* CSA XP • Profibus PA T12 ZD 100F
- V*F*C* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - V*B*C***
- V*D*C***
- V*F*C***

• FMU 40 - K***** TIIS


HART F12 ZD 138F
• FMU 41 - K***** Ex ia IIC T6

45
Sección 6 ~ Página 217 de 275

Instruments International

Endress+Hauser
Instruments International AG
Kaegenstrasse 2
4153 Reinach
Switzerland

Tel. +41 61 715 81 00


Fax +41 61 715 25 00
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com

TI365F/00/en/04.07
FM+SGML 6.0 ProMoDo
Sección 6 ~ Página 218 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 219 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series


Sección 6 ~ Página 220 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Product range overview D series service units, metal design

Type Size Pneumatic connection Pressure Grade of filtration


regulation range
[bar] [µm]

0.5 0.5 2.5


… … …
M5 M7 Gx G¼ Gy G½ G¾ G1 QS4 QS6 7 12 12 0.01 1 5 40
Service units
FRC/FRCS
/ Micro    – – – – –    – – – –  –
Mini – –    – – – – – –  – – –  
Midi – – –     – – – –  – – –  
Maxi – – – – –    – – –  – – –  

Service unit combinations


FRC-K Micro –
Mini – –   – – – – – – –   – – – 
Midi – – –    – – – – –   – – – 
Maxi – – – – –   – – – –   – – – 
LFR-K Micro –
LFRS-K Mini – –   – – – – – – –   – – – 
Midi – – –    – – – – –   – – – 
Maxi – – – – –   – – – –   – – – 

Individual devices
Filter Micro    – – – – –    – – – –  –
regulators
g Mini – –    – – – – –   – – –  
LFR/LFRS
/ Midi – – –     – – –   – – –  
Maxi – – – – –    – –   – – –  

Filters Micro    – – – – –   – – – – –  –
LF Mini – –    – – – – – – – – – –  
Midi – – –     – – – – – – – –  
Maxi – – – – –    – – – – – – –  
Fine and micro Micro –
filters Mini – –    – – – – – – – –   – –
LFMA/LFMB
/ Midi – – –     – – – – – –   – –
Maxi – – – – –    – – – – –   – –
Active carbon Micro –
filters Mini – –    – – – – – – – – – – – –
LFX Midi – – –     – – – – – – – – – –
Maxi – – – – –    – – – – – – – – –
Filter Micro –
combinations Mini – –    – – – – – – – –   – –
LFMBA Midi – – –     – – – – – –   – –
Maxi – – – – –    – – – – –   – –

Pressure Micro    – – – – –    – – – – – –
regulators
g Mini – –    – – – – –   – – – – –
LR/LRS
/ Midi – – –     – – –   – – – – –
Maxi – – – – –    – –   – – – – –

2  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 221 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Product range overview D series service units, metal design

Type Size Bowl guard Condensate drain Pressure Actuator lock Supply voltage Options  Page/
indication Internet

regulator with integrated return

regulator with integrated return

Differential pressure indicator


Rotary knob with integrated

Directly actuated pressure


Rotary knob with detent
Without pressure gauge

Pilot actuated pressure


With pressure gauge
Metal bowl guard

Semi-automatic

Fully automatic
Manual rotary

flow function

flow function
Plastic bowl

110 V AC

230 V AC
24 V DC
lock
Service units
FRC/FRCS
/ Micro –    –    – – – – – – – frc
Mini  –  –      – – – – – –
Midi  –  –      – – – – – –
Maxi  –  –      – – –   –

Service unit combinations


FRC-K Micro – frc
Mini  –  –   –  – – – – – – –
Midi  –  –   –  – – – – – – –
Maxi  –  –   –  – – – –   –
LFR-K Micro – lfr
LFRS-K Mini  –  –   –    – – – – –
Midi  –  –   –    – – – – –
Maxi  –  –   –    – –   –

Individual devices
Filter Micro –    –    – – – – – – – 6
regulators
g Mini  –  –      – – – – – –
LFR/LFRS
/ Midi  –  –      – – – – – –
Maxi  –  –      – – –   –

Filters Micro –    – – – – – – – – – – – lf
LF Mini  –  –  – – – – – – – – – –
Midi  –  –  – – – – – – – – – –
Maxi  –  –  – – – – – – – – – –
Fine and micro Micro – lfma,, lfmb
filters Mini  –  –  – – – – – – – – – 
LFMA/LFMB
/ Midi  –  –  – – – – – – – – – 
Maxi  –  –  – – – – – – – – – 
Active carbon Micro – lfx
filters Mini  – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
LFX Midi  – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Maxi  – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Filter Micro – lfmba
combinations Mini  –  –  – – – – – – – – – 
LFMBA Midi  –  –  – – – – – – – – – 
Maxi  –  –  – – – – – – – – – 

Pressure Micro – – – – –    – – – – – – – lr
regulators
g Mini – – – – –     – – –  – –
LR/LRS
/ Midi – – – – –     – – –  – –
Maxi – – – – –     – – –   –

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 3


Sección 6 ~ Página 222 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Product range overview D series service units, metal design

Type Size Pneumatic Pressure


connection regulation range
[bar]

0.5 0.5
… …
M5 M7 Gx G¼ Gy G½ G¾ G1 QS4 QS6 7 12
Individual devices
Pressure Micro –
regulators
g Mini – – –  – – – – – –  
LRB/LRBS
/ Midi – – – –  – – – – –  
Maxi –
Pressure Micro –
regulator
g Mini – – –   – – – – –  
combinations Midi – – – –   – – – –  
LRB-K Maxi –

Lubricators Micro    – – – – –   – –
LOE Mini – –    – – – – – – –
Midi – – –     – – – – –
Maxi – – – – –    – – – –

On-off valves Micro –


HE Mini – –    – – – – – – –
Midi – – –     – – – – –
Maxi – – – – –    – – – –
On-off valves,, Micro –
electrical Mini – –    – – – – – – –
HEE Midi – – –     – – – – –
Maxi – – – – –    – – – –
On-off valves,, Micro –
ppneumatic Mini – –    – – – – – – –
HEP Midi – – –     – – – – –
Maxi – – – – –    – – – –
Soft-start Micro –
valves Mini – –    – – – – – – –
HEL Midi – – –     – – – – –
Maxi – – – – –    – – – –

Membrane air Micro –


dryers
y Mini –
LDM1 Midi –
Maxi – – – – –    – – – –

Branchingg Micro –
modules Mini – –    – – – – – – –
FRM Midi – – –     – – – – –
Maxi – – – – –    – – – –
Distributor Micro – – – – – – – – – – – –
block Mini – – – – – – – – – – – –
FRZ Midi – – – – – – – – – – – –
Maxi – – – – – – – – – – – –

4  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 223 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Product range overview D series service units, metal design

Type Size Bowl guard Pressure indication Actuator lock Supply voltage Options  Page/
Internet

Rotary knob with integrated


Rotary knob with detent
Without pressure gauge
With pressure gauge

Non-return function
Metal bowl guard

Pressure switch
Plastic bowl

110 V AC

230 V AC
24 V DC
lock
Individual devices
Pressure Micro – lrb
regulators
g Mini – – –    – – – – –
LRB/LRBS
/ Midi – – –    – – – – –
Maxi – –
Pressure Micro – lrb
regulator
g Mini – – –   – – – – – –
combinations Midi – – –   – – – – – –
LRB-K Maxi – –

Lubricators Micro –  –  – – – – – – – loe


LOE Mini  – –  – – – – – – –
Midi  – –  – – – – – – –
Maxi  – –  – – – – – – –

On-off valves Micro – he


HE Mini – – –   – – – – – –
Midi – – –   – – – – – –
Maxi – – –   – – – – – –
On-off valves,, Micro – hee
electrical Mini – – –  – –    – –
HEE Midi – – –  – –    – –
Maxi – – –  – –    – –
On-off valves,, Micro – hepp
ppneumatic Mini – – –  – – – – – – –
HEP Midi – – –  – – – – – – –
Maxi – – –  – – – – – – –
Soft-start Micro – hel
valves Mini – – –  – – – – – – –
HEL Midi – – –  – – – – – – –
Maxi – – –  – – – – – – –

Membrane air Micro – ldm1


dryers
y Mini –
LDM1 Midi –
Maxi  – –  – – – – – – –

Branchingg Micro – frm


modules Mini – – –  – – – – –  
FRM Midi – – –  – – – – –  
Maxi – – –  – – – – –  
Distributor Micro – – –  – – – – – – – frz
block Mini – – –  – – – – – – –
FRZ Midi – – –  – – – – – – –
Maxi – – –  – – – – – – –

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 5


Sección 6 ~ Página 224 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Peripherals overview

Micro
Individual unit with connection plates, Individual unit without connection plates, for service unit combination
connection size Gx, QS4 or QS6 connection size M5 or M7 in housing

3 3

1
1
1

1
1 2

4 1 4

Mounting attachments and accessories


Individual unit Combination  Page/
g /
with connection without connection with connection without connection Internet
plates plates plates plates
1 Mounting bracket hfoe-d
   
HFOE
2 Connecting plate kit pbl
–  – 
PBL
3 Mounting bracket hrs-d
   
HRS
4 Pressure gauge 35
   
MA-27

6  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 225 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Peripherals overview

Mini/Midi/Maxi
Filter regulator LFR Filter regulator LFRS, lockable

2 6
4

1
4 1

6
3

5
5

Mounting attachments and accessories


Rotary knob with detent Rotary knob, lockable  Page/
Internet
1 Mounting bracket hfoe-d
 
HFOE
2 Regulator lock lrvs-d
 –
LRVS
3 Padlock lrvs-d
 –
LRVS-D
4 Mounting bracket hr-d
 
HR-D
5 Pressure gauge 35
 
MA
6 Knurled nut (included in scope of delivery) –
 
HMR

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 7


Sección 6 ~ Página 226 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Type codes

LFR — y — D — 7 — — O — — MIDI — A

Basic function
LFR Filter regulator
LFRS Filter regulator, lockable

Pneumatic connection
M5 Thread M5
M7 Thread M7
QS4 Push-in fitting QS4
QS6 Push-in fitting QS6
x Thread Gx
¼ Thread G¼
y Thread Gy
½ Thread G½
¾ Thread G¾
1 Thread G1

Series
D Series

Pressure regulation range


0.5 … 12 bar
7 0.5 … 7 bar

Grade of filtration
40 µm
5M 5 µm

Pressure gauge
With pressure gauge
O Without pressure gauge

Function (Maxi size only)


DI Directly actuated pressure regulator
with integrated return flow function

Size
MICRO Grid dimension 25 mm
(without connecting plates)
MINI Grid dimension 40 mm
(without connecting plates)
MIDI Grid dimension 55 mm
(without connecting plates)
MAXI Grid dimension 66 mm
(without connecting plates)

Condensate drain
Turned manually
H Semi-automatic
A Fully automatic

8  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 227 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

LFR/LFRS-…-MICRO/MINI/MIDI
Manual rotary condensate drain,
-M- Flow rate
110 … 11000 l/min
with pressure gauge

-Q- Temperature range


–10 … +60 °C

Semi or fully automatic condensate


-L- Input pressure
1 … 16 bar
drain, with pressure gauge

• Space-saving design with filter and • With manual, semi-automatic or


regulator in a single unit fully automatic condensate drain
LFR/LFRS-…-MAXI • Good particle separation and high • Setting values are secured by
Manual rotary condensate drain, flow rate locking the rotary knob
with pressure gauge • Good regulating characteristics • Choice of filter cartridges: 5 µm or
with minimal hysteresis 40 µm
• Two pressure regulation ranges: • New filter cartridges  34
0.5 … 7 bar and 0.5 … 12 bar • Pressure sensor (optional)  35
• Two pressure gauge connections for
flexible installation
Fully automatic condensate drain,
with pressure gauge

General technical data


Size Micro Mini Midi Maxi
Pneumatic connection M5 M7 Gx QS4 QS6 Gx G¼ Gy G¼ Gy G½ G¾ G½ G¾ G1
Operating medium Compressed air
Design Filter regulator with/without pressure gauge
Type
yp of mountingg Via accessories
In-line installation
Assembly position Vertical ±5°
Regulator
g lock Rotary knob with detent
– Rotary knob with integrated lock
Grade of filtration [µm] 5 5 or 40
Max. hysteresis [bar] 0.3 0.2 0.4
Pressure regulation
g range
g [[bar]] 0.55 … 7 0.5 … 7
0.5 … 12
Pressure indication Via pressure gauge
M5 prepared Gx prepared G¼ prepared G¼ prepared
Max. condensate volume [cm3] 3 22 43 801)

Input pressure [bar]


Condensate drain turned manually 1 … 10 1 … 16
semi-automatic 1 … 10 –
fully automatic – 2 … 12

1) The max. condensate volume for the LFR/LFRS-…-DI-MAXI is 43 cm3.


-H- Note: This product conforms with the ISO 1179-1 standard and the ISO 228-1 standard.

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 9


Sección 6 ~ Página 228 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Standard nominal flow rate1) qnN [l/min]


Connection Female thread Connecting plate
M5 M7 Gx QS4 QS6
Micro
LFR 110 280 410 150 410

1) Measured at p1 = 10 bar, p2 = 6 bar and Δp = 1 bar.

Standard nominal flow rate1) qnN [l/min]


Connection Gx G¼ Gy G½ G¾ G1
Mini
LFR/LFRS-…-D-… 750 1400 1600 – – –
LFR/LFRS-…-D-7-… 900 1500 1700 – – –
LFR/LFRS-…-D-5M-… 650 1200 1350 – – –

Midi
LFR/LFRS-…-D-… – 2000 3100 3400 3400 –
LFR/LFRS-…-D-7-… – 2100 3200 3900 4000 –
LFR/LFRS-…-D-5M-… – 1600 2400 2600 2600 –

Maxi
LFR/LFRS-…-D-… – – – 9400 9700 10000
LFR/LFRS-…-D-7-… – – – 9500 10000 11000
LFR/LFRS-…-D-5M-… – – – 7500 7600 8000

Maxi – Directly actuated diaphragm regulator with integrated return flow function
LFR/LFRS-…-D-…-DI – – – 4500 6800 7000
LFR/LFRS-…-D-7-…-DI – – – 7600 7700 7800
LFR/LFRS-…-D-5M-…-DI – – – 4000 5800 6000

1) Measured at p1 = 10 bar, p2 = 6 bar and Δp = 1 bar.

10  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 229 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Screw-in depth of connecting thread [mm]


Connection M5 M7 Gx QS4 QS6
Micro
In housing 5 6 – – –
In connecting plates – – 8 – –

Ambient conditions
Size Micro Mini Midi Maxi
Ambient temperature [°C] –10 … +60
Temperature of medium [°C] –10 … +60
Corrosion resistance class CRC1) 2

1) Corrosion resistance class 2 according to Festo standard 940 070


Components requiring moderate corrosion resistance. Externally visible parts with primarily decorative surface requirements which are in direct contact with a normal industrial environment or media such as coolants
or lubricating agents.

Weight [g]
Size Micro Mini Midi Maxi
Female Connecting Connection Connection
thread plate G½, G¾ G1
With pressure gauge
LFR-… 74 94 460 920 1370 1470
LFR-…-DI – – – – 1670 1670
LFRS-… – – 560 1160 1470 1570
LFRS-…-DI – – – – 1950 1950

Without pressure gauge


LFR-… 64 84 410 830 1300 1400
LFR-…-DI – – – – 1600 1600
LFRS-… – – 510 1070 1400 1500
LFRS-…-DI – – – – 1880 1880

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 11


Sección 6 ~ Página 230 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Materials
Sectional view

2
1

Filter regulator Micro Mini/Midi/Maxi


1 Housing Wrought aluminium alloy Die-cast zinc
2 Connecting plates Wrought aluminium alloy Die-cast zinc/aluminium
3 Bowl Polycarbonate Polycarbonate
4 Metal bowl guard – Aluminium
5 Regulating knob Polyacetal Polyacetal
6 Knurled nut Wrought aluminium alloy Aluminium
– Seals Nitrile rubber Nitrile rubber
Note on materials – Designs free of copper and PTFE  Ordering data

12  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 231 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Standard flow rate qn as a function of the output pressure p2


LFR-M5-…-MICRO LFR-M7-…-MICRO B
p2 [bar]

p2 [bar]
qn [l/min] qn [l/min]

LFR-QS4-…-MICRO LFR-QS6-…-MICRO and LFR-x-…-MICRO


p2 [bar]
p2 [bar]

qn [l/min] qn [l/min]
Primary pressure p1 = 10 bar

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 13


Sección 6 ~ Página 232 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Standard flow rate qn as a function of the output pressure p2


LFR/LFRS-¼-D-MINI LFR/LFRS-½-D-MIDI
p2 [bar]

p2 [bar]
qn [l/min] qn [l/min]

LFR/LFRS-1-D-MAXI LFR/LFRS-1-D-DI-MAXI
p2 [bar]
p2 [bar]

qn [l/min] qn [l/min]
Primary pressure p1 = 10 bar

-H- Note
In order to improve control behav-
iour, primary-pressure dependent
internal air consumption is
provided on the LFR/LFRS-…-MAXI.

14  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 233 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Dimensions Download CAD data  www.festo.com


Micro

Turned manually Semi-automatic


condensate drain condensate drain

1 Barbed fitting for plastic tubing  Flow direction


type PCN-4

Type B1 B2 D1 H1

LFR-M5-…-MICRO (H) M5
25
LFR-M7-…-MICRO (H) B – M7 –
LFR-x-…-MICRO (H) Gx
LFR-QS4-…-MICRO (H) 45
5 QS4 ~8
~2 5
~2.5
LFR-QS6-…-MICRO (H) QS6 ~10

-H- Note: This product conforms with the ISO 1179-1 standard and the ISO 228-1 standard.

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 15


Sección 6 ~ Página 234 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Dimensions Download CAD data  www.festo.com


Mini/Midi/Maxi
lockable

Turned manually Fully automatic


condensate drain condensate drain

1 Barbed fitting for plastic tubing 2 Metal bowl guard 4 Second pressure gauge  Flow direction
type PCN-4 3 Installation dimensions connection

Type B1 B2 B3 B4 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
∅ ∅ ∅
Mini
LFR/LFRS-x-D-MINI (A) Gx
64
LFR/LFRS-¼-D-MINI (A) 52
5 40 776 G¼ 331 M4 M36x1.5
3 5 41 38
3
LFR/LFRS-y-D-MINI (A) 70 Gy

Midi
LFR/LFRS-¼-D-MIDI (A) G¼
LFR/LFRS-y-D-MIDI (A) Gy
85 70 55 95 50 M5 M52x1 5
M52x1.5 50 52
LFR/LFRS-½-D-MIDI (A) G½
LFR/LFRS-¾-D-MIDI (A) G¾

Maxi
LFR/LFRS-½-D-MAXI (A) 31 M36x1.5

LFR/LFRS-½-D-DI-MAXI (A) 49 M52x1.5
96 80
LFR/LFRS-¾-D-MAXI (A) 31 M36x1.5
66 107 G¾ M5 50 65
LFR/LFRS-¾-D-DI-MAXI (A) 49 M52x1.5
LFR/LFRS-1-D-MAXI (A) 31 M36x1.5
116 91 G1
LFR/LFRS-1-D-DI-MAXI (A) 49 M52x1.5

-H- Note: This product conforms with the ISO 1179-1 standard and the ISO 228-1 standard.

16  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 235 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Type H1 H2 L1 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 T1 ß1 ß2
max.
Mini
LFR/LFRS-x-D-MINI (A)
LFR/LFRS-¼-D-MINI (A) 20 11 193
93 60 68 3 998 60 15
5 19
9 7 14 22
LFR/LFRS-y-D-MINI (A)

Midi
LFR/LFRS-¼-D-MIDI (A)
LFR/LFRS-y-D-MIDI (A)
32 22 250 80 99 5 130 60 15 19 8 14 24
LFR/LFRS-½-D-MIDI (A)
LFR/LFRS-¾-D-MIDI (A)

Maxi
LFR/LFRS-½-D-MAXI (A) 252 82 111
LFR/LFRS-½-D-DI-MAXI (A) 275 105 135
32
LFR/LFRS-¾-D-MAXI (A) 252 82 111
22 90 4 60 15 19 8 14 24
LFR/LFRS-¾-D-DI-MAXI (A) 275 105 135
LFR/LFRS-1-D-MAXI (A) 252 82 111
40
LFR/LFRS-1-D-DI-MAXI (A) 275 105 135

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 17


Sección 6 ~ Página 236 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Ordering data
Pressure regulation range 0.5 … 7 bar
Condensate drain Size Connection Grade of filtration 5 µm
Part No. Type
With pressure gauge
Turned manuallyy Micro Without threaded connecting plates, connecting thread in housing
M5 526273 LFR-M5-D-7-5M-MICRO
M7 534184 LFR-M7-D-7-5M-MICRO-B
With threaded connecting plates
Gx 526277 LFR-x-D-7-5M-MICRO
With connecting plate and push-in fitting
QS4 526289 LFR-QS4-D-7-5M-MICRO
QS6 526293 LFR-QS6-D-7-5M-MICRO

Semi-automatic Micro Without threaded connecting plates, connecting thread in housing


M5 526274 LFR-M5-D-7-5M-MICRO-H
M7 534185 LFR-M7-D-7-5M-MICRO-H-B
With threaded connecting plates
Gx 526278 LFR-x-D-7-5M-MICRO-H
With connecting plate and push-in fitting
QS4 526290 LFR-QS4-D-7-5M-MICRO-H
QS6 526294 LFR-QS6-D-7-5M-MICRO-H

Without pressure gauge


Turned manuallyy Micro Without threaded connecting plates, connecting thread in housing
M5 526275 LFR-M5-D-7-O-5M-MICRO
M7 534186 LFR-M7-D-7-O-5M-MICRO-B
With threaded connecting plates
Gx 526279 LFR-x-D-7-O-5M-MICRO
With connecting plate and push-in fitting
QS4 526291 LFR-QS4-D-7-O-5M-MICRO
QS6 526295 LFR-QS6-D-7-O-5M-MICRO

Semi-automatic Micro Without threaded connecting plates, connecting thread in housing


M5 526276 LFR-M5-D-7-O-5M-MICRO-H
M7 534187 LFR-M7-D-7-O-5M-MICRO-H-B
With threaded connecting plates
Gx 526280 LFR-x-D-7-O-5M-MICRO-H
With connecting plate and push-in fitting
QS4 526292 LFR-QS4-D-7-O-5M-MICRO-H
QS6 526296 LFR-QS6-D-7-O-5M-MICRO-H

18  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 237 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Ordering data
Pressure regulation range 0.5 … 12 bar, metal bowl guard
Condensate drain Size Connection Grade of filtration 5 µm Grade of filtration 40 µm
Part No. Type Part No. Type
With pressure gauge
Turned manuallyy Mini Gx 162718 LFR-x-D-5M-MINI 159630 LFR-x-D-MINI
G¼ 162719 LFR-¼-D-5M-MINI 159631 LFR-¼-D-MINI
Gy 162720 LFR-y-D-5M-MINI 162682 LFR-y-D-MINI
Midi G¼ 186483 LFR-¼-D-5M-MIDI 186481 LFR-¼-D-MIDI
Gy 162721 LFR-y-D-5M-MIDI 159582 LFR-y-D-MIDI
G½ 162722 LFR-½-D-5M-MIDI 159584 LFR-½-D-MIDI
G¾ 162723 LFR-¾-D-5M-MIDI 162683 LFR-¾-D-MIDI
Maxi G½ 186491 LFR-½-D-5M-MAXI 186489 LFR-½-D-MAXI
G¾ 162724 LFR-¾-D-5M-MAXI 159632 LFR-¾-D-MAXI
G1 162725 LFR-1-D-5M-MAXI 159633 LFR-1-D-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Mini Gx 162726 LFR-x-D-5M-MINI-A 159634 LFR-x-D-MINI-A


G¼ 162727 LFR-¼-D-5M-MINI-A 159635 LFR-¼-D-MINI-A
Gy 162728 LFR-y-D-5M-MINI-A 162684 LFR-y-D-MINI-A
Midi G¼ 186486 LFR-¼-D-5M-MIDI-A 186484 LFR-¼-D-MIDI-A
Gy 162729 LFR-y-D-5M-MIDI-A 159583 LFR-y-D-MIDI-A
G½ 162730 LFR-½-D-5M-MIDI-A 159585 LFR-½-D-MIDI-A
G¾ 162731 LFR-¾-D-5M-MIDI-A 162685 LFR-¾-D-MIDI-A
Maxi G½ 186494 LFR-½-D-5M-MAXI-A 186492 LFR-½-D-MAXI-A
G¾ 162732 LFR-¾-D-5M-MAXI-A 159636 LFR-¾-D-MAXI-A
G1 162733 LFR-1-D-5M-MAXI-A 159637 LFR-1-D-MAXI-A

Without pressure gauge


Turned manuallyy Mini Gx 192610 LFR-x-D-5M-O-MINI1) 162686 LFR-x-D-O-MINI1)
G¼ 192611 LFR-¼-D-5M-O-MINI1) 162687 LFR-¼-D-O-MINI1)
Gy 192612 LFR-y-D-5M-O-MINI1) 162688 LFR-y-D-O-MINI1)
Midi G¼ 192613 LFR-¼-D-5M-O-MIDI1) 186482 LFR-¼-D-O-MIDI1)
Gy 192614 LFR-y-D-5M-O-MIDI1) 162689 LFR-y-D-O-MIDI1)
G½ 192615 LFR-½-D-5M-O-MIDI1) 162690 LFR-½-D-O-MIDI1)
G¾ 192616 LFR-¾-D-5M-O-MIDI1) 162691 LFR-¾-D-O-MIDI1)
Maxi G½ 192617 LFR-½-D-5M-O-MAXI1) 186490 LFR-½-D-O-MAXI1)
G¾ 192618 LFR-¾-D-5M-O-MAXI1) 162692 LFR-¾-D-O-MAXI1)
G1 192619 LFR-1-D-5M-O-MAXI1) 162693 LFR-1-D-O-MAXI1)

Fullyy automatic Mini Gx 192620 LFR-x-D-5M-O-MINI-A1) 162694 LFR-x-D-O-MINI-A1)


G¼ 192621 LFR-¼-D-5M-O-MINI-A1) 162695 LFR-¼-D-O-MINI-A1)
Gy 192622 LFR-y-D-5M-O-MINI-A1) 162696 LFR-y-D-O-MINI-A1)
Midi G¼ 192623 LFR-¼-D-5M-O-MIDI-A1) 186485 LFR-¼-D-O-MIDI-A1)
Gy 192624 LFR-y-D-5M-O-MIDI-A1) 162697 LFR-y-D-O-MIDI-A1)
G½ 192625 LFR-½-D-5M-O-MIDI-A1) 162698 LFR-½-D-O-MIDI-A1)
G¾ 192626 LFR-¾-D-5M-O-MIDI-A1) 162699 LFR-¾-D-O-MIDI-A1)
Maxi G½ 192627 LFR-½-D-5M-O-MAXI-A1) 186493 LFR-½-D-O-MAXI-A1)
G¾ 192628 LFR-¾-D-5M-O-MAXI-A1) 162700 LFR-¾-D-O-MAXI-A1)
G1 192629 LFR-1-D-5M-O-MAXI-A1) 162701 LFR-1-D-O-MAXI-A1)

1) Free of copper and PTFE

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 19


Sección 6 ~ Página 238 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Ordering data
Pressure regulation range 0.5 … 7 bar, metal bowl guard
Condensate drain Size Connection Grade of filtration 40 µm
Part No. Type
With pressure gauge
Turned manuallyy Mini Gx 162702 LFR-x-D-7-MINI
G¼ 162703 LFR-¼-D-7-MINI
Gy 162704 LFR-y-D-7-MINI
Midi G¼ 186487 LFR-¼-D-7-MIDI
Gy 162705 LFR-y-D-7-MIDI
G½ 162706 LFR-½-D-7-MIDI
G¾ 162707 LFR-¾-D-7-MIDI
Maxi G½ 186495 LFR-½-D-7-MAXI
G¾ 162708 LFR-¾-D-7-MAXI
G1 162709 LFR-1-D-7-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Mini Gx 162710 LFR-x-D-7-MINI-A


G¼ 162711 LFR-¼-D-7-MINI-A
Gy 162712 LFR-y-D-7-MINI-A
Midi G¼ 186488 LFR-¼-D-7-MIDI-A
Gy 162713 LFR-y-D-7-MIDI-A
G½ 162714 LFR-½-D-7-MIDI-A
G¾ 162715 LFR-¾-D-7-MIDI-A
Maxi G½ 186496 LFR-½-D-7-MAXI-A
G¾ 162716 LFR-¾-D-7-MAXI-A
G1 162717 LFR-1-D-7-MAXI-A

Without pressure gauge


Turned manuallyy Mini Gx 192590 LFR-x-D-7-O-MINI1)
G¼ 192591 LFR-¼-D-7-O-MINI1)
Gy 192592 LFR-y-D-7-O-MINI1)
Midi G¼ 192593 LFR-¼-D-7-O-MIDI1)
Gy 192594 LFR-y-D-7-O-MIDI1)
G½ 192595 LFR-½-D-7-O-MIDI1)
G¾ 192596 LFR-¾-D-7-O-MIDI1)
Maxi G½ 192597 LFR-½-D-7-O-MAXI1)
G¾ 192598 LFR-¾-D-7-O-MAXI1)
G1 192599 LFR-1-D-7-O-MAXI1)

Fullyy automatic Mini Gx 192600 LFR-x-D-7-O-MINI-A1)


G¼ 192601 LFR-¼-D-7-O-MINI-A1)
Gy 192602 LFR-y-D-7-O-MINI-A1)
Midi G¼ 192603 LFR-¼-D-7-O-MIDI-A1)
Gy 192604 LFR-y-D-7-O-MIDI-A1)
G½ 192605 LFR-½-D-7-O-MIDI-A1)
G¾ 192606 LFR-¾-D-7-O-MIDI-A1)
Maxi G½ 192607 LFR-½-D-7-O-MAXI-A1)
G¾ 192608 LFR-¾-D-7-O-MAXI-A1)
G1 192609 LFR-1-D-7-O-MAXI-A1)

1) Free of copper and PTFE

20  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 239 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Ordering data
Pressure regulation range 0.5 … 12 bar, directly actuated diaphragm regulator with integrated return flow function
Condensate drain Size Connection Grade of filtration 5 µm Grade of filtration 40 µm
Part No. Type Part No. Type
With pressure gauge
Turned manuallyy Maxi G½ 192370 LFR-½-D-5M-DI-MAXI 192368 LFR-½-D-DI-MAXI
G¾ 192376 LFR-¾-D-5M-DI-MAXI 192374 LFR-¾-D-DI-MAXI
G1 192382 LFR-1-D-5M-DI-MAXI 192380 LFR-1-D-DI-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Maxi G½ 192388 LFR-½-D-5M-DI-MAXI-A 192386 LFR-½-D-DI-MAXI-A


G¾ 192394 LFR-¾-D-5M-DI-MAXI-A 192392 LFR-¾-D-DI-MAXI-A
G1 192400 LFR-1-D-5M-DI-MAXI-A 192398 LFR-1-D-DI-MAXI-A

Without pressure gauge


Turned manuallyy Maxi G½ 192371 LFR-½-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI 192369 LFR-½-D-O-DI-MAXI
G¾ 192377 LFR-¾-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI 192375 LFR-¾-D-O-DI-MAXI
G1 192383 LFR-1-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI 192381 LFR-1-D-O-DI-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Maxi G½ 192389 LFR-½-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI-A 192387 LFR-½-D-O-DI-MAXI-A


G¾ 192395 LFR-¾-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI-A 192393 LFR-¾-D-O-DI-MAXI-A
G1 192401 LFR-1-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI-A 192399 LFR-1-D-O-DI-MAXI-A

Ordering data
Pressure regulation range 0.5 … 7 bar, directly actuated diaphragm regulator with integrated return flow function
Condensate drain Size Connection Grade of filtration 5 µm Grade of filtration 40 µm
Part No. Type Part No. Type
With pressure gauge
Turned manuallyy Maxi G½ – 192372 LFR-½-D-7-DI-MAXI
G¾ – 192378 LFR-¾-D-7-DI-MAXI
G1 – 192384 LFR-1-D-7-DI-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Maxi G½ – 192390 LFR-½-D-7-DI-MAXI-A


G¾ – 192396 LFR-¾-D-7-DI-MAXI-A
G1 – 192402 LFR-1-D-7-DI-MAXI-A

Without pressure gauge


Turned manuallyy Maxi G½ – 192373 LFR-½-D-7-O-DI-MAXI
G¾ – 192379 LFR-¾-D-7-O-DI-MAXI
G1 – 192385 LFR-1-D-7-O-DI-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Maxi G½ – 192391 LFR-½-D-7-O-DI-MAXI-A


G¾ – 192397 LFR-¾-D-7-O-DI-MAXI-A
G1 – 192403 LFR-1-D-7-O-DI-MAXI-A

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 21


Sección 6 ~ Página 240 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Ordering data
Pressure regulation range 0.5 … 12 bar, lockable
Condensate drain Size Connection Grade of filtration 5 µm Grade of filtration 40 µm
Part No. Type Part No. Type
With pressure gauge
Turned manuallyy Mini Gx 194704 LFRS-x-D-5M-MINI 194696 LFRS-x-D-MINI
G¼ 194716 LFRS-¼-D-5M-MINI 194708 LFRS-¼-D-MINI
Gy 194728 LFRS-y-D-5M-MINI 194720 LFRS-y-D-MINI
Midi G¼ 194740 LFRS-¼-D-5M-MIDI 194732 LFRS-¼-D-MIDI
Gy 194752 LFRS-y-D-5M-MIDI 194744 LFRS-y-D-MIDI
G½ 194764 LFRS-½-D-5M-MIDI 194756 LFRS-½-D-MIDI
G¾ 194776 LFRS-¾-D-5M-MIDI 194768 LFRS-¾-D-MIDI
Maxi G½ 194788 LFRS-½-D-5M-MAXI 194780 LFRS-½-D-MAXI
G¾ 194800 LFRS-¾-D-5M-MAXI 194792 LFRS-¾-D-MAXI
G1 194812 LFRS-1-D-5M-MAXI 194804 LFRS-1-D-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Mini Gx 194706 LFRS-x-D-5M-MINI-A 194697 LFRS-x-D-MINI-A


G¼ 194718 LFRS-¼-D-5M-MINI-A 194709 LFRS-¼-D-MINI-A
Gy 194730 LFRS-y-D-5M-MINI-A 194721 LFRS-y-D-MINI-A
Midi G¼ 194742 LFRS-¼-D-5M-MIDI-A 194733 LFRS-¼-D-MIDI-A
Gy 194754 LFRS-y-D-5M-MIDI-A 194745 LFRS-y-D-MIDI-A
G½ 194766 LFRS-½-D-5M-MIDI-A 194757 LFRS-½-D-MIDI-A
G¾ 194778 LFRS-¾-D-5M-MIDI-A 194769 LFRS-¾-D-MIDI-A
Maxi G½ 194790 LFRS-½-D-5M-MAXI-A 194781 LFRS-½-D-MAXI-A
G¾ 194802 LFRS-¾-D-5M-MAXI-A 194793 LFRS-¾-D-MAXI-A
G1 194814 LFRS-1-D-5M-MAXI-A 194805 LFRS-1-D-MAXI-A

Without pressure gauge


Turned manuallyy Mini Gx 194705 LFRS-x-D-5M-O-MINI 194698 LFRS-x-D-O-MINI
G¼ 194717 LFRS-¼-D-5M-O-MINI 194710 LFRS-¼-D-O-MINI
Gy 194729 LFRS-y-D-5M-O-MINI 194722 LFRS-y-D-O-MINI
Midi G¼ 194741 LFRS-¼-D-5M-O-MIDI 194734 LFRS-¼-D-O-MIDI
Gy 194753 LFRS-y-D-5M-O-MIDI 194746 LFRS-y-D-O-MIDI
G½ 194765 LFRS-½-D-5M-O-MIDI 194758 LFRS-½-D-O-MIDI
G¾ 194777 LFRS-¾-D-5M-O-MIDI 194770 LFRS-¾-D-O-MIDI
Maxi G½ 194789 LFRS-½-D-5M-O-MAXI 194782 LFRS-½-D-O-MAXI
G¾ 194801 LFRS-¾-D-5M-O-MAXI 194794 LFRS-¾-D-O-MAXI
G1 194813 LFRS-1-D-5M-O-MAXI 194806 LFRS-1-D-O-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Mini Gx 194707 LFRS-x-D-5M-O-MINI-A 194699 LFRS-x-D-O-MINI-A


G¼ 194719 LFRS-¼-D-5M-O-MINI-A 194711 LFRS-¼-D-O-MINI-A
Gy 194731 LFRS-y-D-5M-O-MINI-A 194723 LFRS-y-D-O-MINI-A
Midi G¼ 194743 LFRS-¼-D-5M-O-MIDI-A 194735 LFRS-¼-D-O-MIDI-A
Gy 194755 LFRS-y-D-5M-O-MIDI-A 194747 LFRS-y-D-O-MIDI-A
G½ 194767 LFRS-½-D-5M-O-MIDI-A 194759 LFRS-½-D-O-MIDI-A
G¾ 194779 LFRS-¾-D-5M-O-MIDI-A 194771 LFRS-¾-D-O-MIDI-A
Maxi G½ 194791 LFRS-½-D-5M-O-MAXI-A 194783 LFRS-½-D-O-MAXI-A
G¾ 194803 LFRS-¾-D-5M-O-MAXI-A 194795 LFRS-¾-D-O-MAXI-A
G1 194815 LFRS-1-D-5M-O-MAXI-A 194807 LFRS-1-D-O-MAXI-A

22  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 241 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Ordering data
Pressure regulation range 0.5 … 7 bar, lockable
Condensate drain Size Connection Grade of filtration 40 µm
Part No. Type
With pressure gauge
Turned manuallyy Mini Gx 194700 LFRS-x-D-7-MINI
G¼ 194712 LFRS-¼-D-7-MINI
Gy 194724 LFRS-y-D-7-MINI
Midi G¼ 194736 LFRS-¼-D-7-MIDI
Gy 194748 LFRS-y-D-7-MIDI
G½ 194760 LFRS-½-D-7-MIDI
G¾ 194772 LFRS-¾-D-7-MIDI
Maxi G½ 194784 LFRS-½-D-7-MAXI
G¾ 194796 LFRS-¾-D-7-MAXI
G1 194808 LFRS-1-D-7-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Mini Gx 194702 LFRS-x-D-7-MINI-A


G¼ 194714 LFRS-¼-D-7-MINI-A
Gy 194726 LFRS-y-D-7-MINI-A
Midi G¼ 194738 LFRS-¼-D-7-MIDI-A
Gy 194750 LFRS-y-D-7-MIDI-A
G½ 194762 LFRS-½-D-7-MIDI-A
G¾ 194774 LFRS-¾-D-7-MIDI-A
Maxi G½ 194786 LFRS-½-D-7-MAXI-A
G¾ 194798 LFRS-¾-D-7-MAXI-A
G1 194810 LFRS-1-D-7-MAXI-A

Without pressure gauge


Turned manuallyy Mini Gx 194701 LFRS-x-D-7-O-MINI
G¼ 194713 LFRS-¼-D-7-O-MINI
Gy 194725 LFRS-y-D-7-O-MINI
Midi G¼ 194737 LFRS-¼-D-7-O-MIDI
Gy 194749 LFRS-y-D-7-O-MIDI
G½ 194761 LFRS-½-D-7-O-MIDI
G¾ 194773 LFRS-¾-D-7-O-MIDI
Maxi G½ 194785 LFRS-½-D-7-O-MAXI
G¾ 194797 LFRS-¾-D-7-O-MAXI
G1 194809 LFRS-1-D-7-O-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Mini Gx 194703 LFRS-x-D-7-O-MINI-A


G¼ 194715 LFRS-¼-D-7-O-MINI-A
Gy 194727 LFRS-y-D-7-O-MINI-A
Midi G¼ 194739 LFRS-¼-D-7-O-MIDI-A
Gy 194751 LFRS-y-D-7-O-MIDI-A
G½ 194763 LFRS-½-D-7-O-MIDI-A
G¾ 194775 LFRS-¾-D-7-O-MIDI-A
Maxi G½ 194787 LFRS-½-D-7-O-MAXI-A
G¾ 194799 LFRS-¾-D-7-O-MAXI-A
G1 194811 LFRS-1-D-7-O-MAXI-A

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 23


Sección 6 ~ Página 242 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

Ordering data
Pressure regulation range 0.5 … 12 bar, directly actuated diaphragm regulator with integrated return flow function, lockable
Condensate drain Size Connection Grade of filtration 5 µm Grade of filtration 40 µm
Part No. Type Part No. Type
With pressure gauge
Turned manuallyy Maxi G½ 194818 LFRS-½-D-5M-DI-MAXI 194816 LFRS-½-D-DI-MAXI
G¾ 194824 LFRS-¾-D-5M-DI-MAXI 194822 LFRS-¾-D-DI-MAXI
G1 194830 LFRS-1-D-5M-DI-MAXI 194828 LFRS-1-D-DI-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Maxi G½ 194836 LFRS-½-D-5M-DI-MAXI-A 194834 LFRS-½-D-DI-MAXI-A


G¾ 194842 LFRS-¾-D-5M-DI-MAXI-A 194840 LFRS-¾-D-DI-MAXI-A
G1 194848 LFRS-1-D-5M-DI-MAXI-A 194846 LFRS-1-D-DI-MAXI-A

Without pressure gauge


Turned manuallyy Maxi G½ 194819 LFRS-½-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI 194817 LFRS-½-D-O-DI-MAXI
G¾ 194825 LFRS-¾-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI 194823 LFRS-¾-D-O-DI-MAXI
G1 194831 LFRS-1-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI 194829 LFRS-1-D-O-DI-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Maxi G½ 194837 LFRS-½-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI-A 194835 LFRS-½-D-O-DI-MAXI-A


G¾ 194843 LFRS-¾-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI-A 194841 LFRS-¾-D-O-DI-MAXI-A
G1 194849 LFRS-1-D-5M-O-DI-MAXI-A 194847 LFRS-1-D-O-DI-MAXI-A

Ordering data
Pressure regulation range 0.5 … 7 bar, directly actuated diaphragm regulator with integrated return flow function, lockable
Condensate drain Size Connection Grade of filtration 5 µm Grade of filtration 40 µm
Part No. Type Part No. Type
With pressure gauge
Turned manuallyy Maxi G½ – 194820 LFRS-½-D-7-DI-MAXI
G¾ – 194826 LFRS-¾-D-7-DI-MAXI
G1 – 194832 LFRS-1-D-7-DI-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Maxi G½ – 194838 LFRS-½-D-7-DI-MAXI-A


G¾ – 194844 LFRS-¾-D-7-DI-MAXI-A
G1 – 194850 LFRS-1-D-7-DI-MAXI-A

Without pressure gauge


Turned manuallyy Maxi G½ – 194821 LFRS-½-D-7-O-DI-MAXI
G¾ – 194827 LFRS-¾-D-7-O-DI-MAXI
G1 – 194833 LFRS-1-D-7-O-DI-MAXI

Fullyy automatic Maxi G½ – 194839 LFRS-½-D-7-O-DI-MAXI-A


G¾ – 194845 LFRS-¾-D-7-O-DI-MAXI-A
G1 – 194851 LFRS-1-D-7-O-DI-MAXI-A

24  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 243 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series, metal design


Technical data

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 25


Sección 6 ~ Página 244 de 275

Filter regulators LFR, D series, polymer


Product range overview D series service units, polymer

Type Size Pneumatic connection Pressure Grade of filtration


regulation range
[bar] [µm]

Gx G¼ G½ 0.5 … 7 5 40
Service units
FRC Mini

  –   

Individual devices
Filter Mini
regulators
LFR   –   

Pressure Mini
regulators
LR   –  – –

Pressure Mini
regulator
combinations – –   – –
LRB-K

26  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 245 de 275

Filter regulators LFR, D series, polymer


Product range overview D series service units, polymer

Type Size Condensate drain Pressure display Actuator lock Regulating functions  Page/
Internet

With return flow function


Rotary knob with detent
Without pressure gauge

With secondary venting


With pressure gauge
Semi-automatic
Manual rotary

Service units
FRC Mini frc

   –   

Individual devices
Filter Mini 28
regulators
LFR       

Pressure Mini lr
regulators
LR – –     

Pressure Mini lrb


regulator
combinations – – –    
LRB-K

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 27


Sección 6 ~ Página 246 de 275

Filter regulators LFR, D series, polymer


Peripherals overview

3 2

1
1
5

Mounting attachments and accessories


 Page/
Internet
1 Connecting plate kit pbl
PBL
2 Mounting bracket hfoe-d
HFOE
3 Mounting bracket hr-d
HR-D
4 Hex nut hmr-d
HMR
5 Pressure gauge 35
MA

28  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 247 de 275

Filter regulators LFR, D series, polymer


Type codes

LFR — x — DB — 7 — 5M — O — MINI — H

Basic function
LFR Filter regulator

Pneumatic connection
x Thread Gx
¼ Thread G¼

Series
DB Series

Pressure regulation range


7 0.5 … 7 bar

Grade of filtration
40 µm
5M 5 µm

Pressure gauge
With pressure gauge
O Without pressure gauge

Size
MINI

Condensate drain
Manual rotary
H Semi-automatic

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 29


Sección 6 ~ Página 248 de 275

Filter regulators LFR, D series, polymer


Technical data

Manual rotary condensate drain,


with pressure gauge
-M- Flow rate
500 … 1200 l/min

-Q- Temperature range


–5 … +50 °C

Semi-automatic condensate drain,


with pressure gauge
-L- Input pressure
1.5 … 10 bar

• Space-saving design with filter and • Setting values are secured by


Manual rotary condensate drain,
regulator in a single unit locking the rotary knob
without pressure gauge
• Good particle separation and high • Choice of filter cartridges: 5 µm or
flow rate 40 µm
• Good regulating characteristics • New filter cartridges  34
with minimal hysteresis
• With manual or semi-automatic
condensate drain
Semi-automatic condensate drain,
without pressure gauge

General technical data


Size Mini
with pressure gauge without pressure gauge
Pneumatic connection Gx G¼ Gx G¼
Operating medium Compressed air
Design Filter regulator with pressure gauge Filter regulator without pressure gauge
Regulating
g g function With return flow function
With secondary venting
Type
yp of mountingg Inline installation
Via through-holes
Via mounting bracket
Assembly position Vertical ±5°
Regulator lock Rotary knob with detent
Grade of filtration [µm] 5 or 40 5 or 40
Max. hysteresis [bar] 0.5
Input pressure [bar] 1.5 … 10
Pressure regulation range [bar] 0.5 … 7
Pressure indication Via pressure gauge Gx prepared
Pressure gauge connection Gx

Standard nominal flow rate1) qnN [l/min]


Pneumatic connection Gx G¼
Mini
Grade of filtration 5 µm ≥ 500 ≥ 1000
40 µm ≥ 700 ≥ 1200

1) Measured at p1 = 10 bar, p2 = 6 bar and Δp = 1 bar.

30  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 249 de 275

Filter regulators LFR, D series, polymer


Technical data

Ambient conditions
Size Mini
Ambient temperature [°C] –5 … +50
Temperature of medium [°C] –5 … +50
Corrosion resistance class CRC1) 1

1) Corrosion resistance class 1 according to Festo standard 940 070


Components requiring low corrosion resistance. Transport and storage protection. Parts that do not have primarily decorative surface requirements, e.g. in internal areas that are not visible or behind covers.

Weight [g]
Size Mini
Filter regulator 200

Materials
Sectional view

4 Filter regulator Mini


1 Housing Polyamide, reinforced
2 Bowl Polycarbonate
3 Filter Polyethylene
1 4 Rotary knob Polyacetate
– Seals Nitrile rubber

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 31


Sección 6 ~ Página 250 de 275

Filter regulators LFR, D series, polymer


Technical data

Standard flow rate qn as a function of output pressure p2


Pneumatic connection Gx Grade of filtration 5 µm Grade of filtration 40 µm

p2 [bar]
p2 [bar]

qn [l/min] qn [l/min]

Pneumatic connection G¼ Grade of filtration 5 µm Grade of filtration 40 µm


p2 [bar]

p2 [bar]

qn [l/min] qn [l/min]

Primary pressure p1 = 10 bar

-H- Note
Slight leakage at the output has In a few cases leakage may amount
been taken into account in the to 500 l/min.
design. It improves the control
behaviour of the non pre-pressure
compensated controller.

32  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 251 de 275

Filter regulators LFR, D series, polymer


Technical data

Dimensions Download CAD data  www.festo.com


Mini
with pressure gauge

Manual rotary Semi-automatic


condensate drain condensate drain

1 Barbed connector for plastic 3 Socket head screw for wall  Flow direction
tubing PCN-4 mounting (2 included in scope
2 Installation dimensions of delivery)

Type D1
LFR-x-DB Gx
LFR-¼-DB G¼

Ordering data
Pressure regulation range 0.5 … 7 bar
Condensate drain Size Connection Grade of filtration 5 µm Grade of filtration 40 µm
Part No. Type Part No. Type
With pressure gauge
Manual rotaryy Mini Gx 539687 LFR-x-DB-7-5M-MINI 539683 LFR-x-DB-7-MINI
G¼ 539689 LFR-¼-DB-7-5M-MINI 539685 LFR-¼-DB-7-MINI

Semi-automatic Mini Gx 539688 LFR-x-DB-7-5M-MINI-H 539684 LFR-x-DB-7-MINI-H


G¼ 539690 LFR-¼-DB-7-5M-MINI-H 539686 LFR-¼-DB-7-MINI-H

Without pressure gauge


Manual rotaryy Mini Gx 537648 LFR-x-DB-7-5M-O-MINI 537651 LFR-x-DB-7-O-MINI
G¼ 537644 LFR-¼-DB-7-5M-O-MINI 537647 LFR-¼-DB-7-O-MINI

Semi-automatic Mini Gx 537650 LFR-x-DB-7-5M-O-MINI-H 537649 LFR-x-DB-7-O-MINI-H


G¼ 537646 LFR-¼-DB-7-5M-O-MINI-H 537645 LFR-¼-DB-7-O-MINI-H

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 33


Sección 6 ~ Página 252 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series


Accessories

Filter cartridges, D series, metal de-


sign

Ordering data
Size Grade of filtration Part No. Type
[µm]
Micro 5 526818 LFP-D-MICRO-5M

Mini 5 159640 LFP-D-MINI-5M


40 363665 LFP-D-MINI-40M

Midi 5 159594 LFP-D-MIDI-5M


40 363667 LFP-D-MIDI-40M

Maxi 5 159641 LFP-D-MAXI-5M


40 363664 LFP-D-MAXI-40M

Filter cartridges, D series, polymer

Ordering data
Size Grade of filtration Part No. Type
[µm]
Mini 5 547957 LFP-DB-MINI-5M
40 534502 MS4-LFP-E

34  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... Subject to change – 2009/03


Sección 6 ~ Página 253 de 275

Filter regulators LFR/LFRS, D series


Accessories

Ordering data – Pressure gauge MA


Nominal size Pneumatic Indicating range Part No. Type
yp
connection [bar] [psi]
Pressure gauge MA Technical data  Internet: ma
27 M5 0 … 10 – 526323 MA-27-10-M5
40 x
Gx 0 … 10 0 … 145 359874 MA-40-10-¼
0 … 16 0 … 232 345395 MA-40-16-¼
550 ¼
G¼ 0 … 10 0 … 145 359873 MA-50-10-¼
0 … 16 0 … 232 356759 MA-50-16-¼

Pressure gauge MA, DIN EN 837-1 Technical data  Internet: ma


40 Rx 0 … 10 0 … 145 162835 MA-40-10-x-EN
G¼ 0 … 10 0 … 145 183900 MA-40-10-G¼-EN

Flanged pressure gauge FMA, DIN EN 837-1 Technical data  Internet: fma
40 ¼
G¼ 0 … 10 0 … 145 159596 FMA-40-10-¼-EN
0 … 16 0 … 232 159597 FMA-40-16-¼-EN
550 ¼
G¼ 0 … 10 0 … 145 159599 FMA-50-10-¼-EN
0 … 16 0 … 232 159600 FMA-50-16-¼-EN

Ordering data – Pressure sensor SDE1 Technical data  Internet: sde1


Pneumatic Electrical output Electrical Display Part No. Type
connection connection
Pressure sensor SDE1 for direct mounting on the service unit with pressure gauge connection (adapter for pneumatic connection included in scope of delivery),
pressure measuring range 0 … 10 bar, relative pressure measurement
Male thread Rx 1 switch output PNP M8x1, 3-pin LCD 192026 SDE1-D10-G2-R18-C-P1-M8
2 switch outputs PNP M8x1, 4-pin LCD 192027 SDE1-D10-G2-R18-C-P2-M8
Male thread R¼ 1 switch output PNP M8x1, 3-pin LCD 192028 SDE1-D10-G2-R14-C-P1-M8
2 switch outputs PNP M8x1, 4-pin LCD 192029 SDE1-D10-G2-R14-C-P2-M8

2009/03 – Subject to change  Internet: www.festo.com/catalogue/... 35


Sección 6 ~ Página 254 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 255 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 256 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 257 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 258 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 259 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 260 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 261 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 262 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 263 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 264 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 265 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 266 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 267 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 268 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 269 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 270 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 271 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 272 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 273 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 274 de 275
Sección 6 ~ Página 275 de 275
Sección 7 ~ Página 1 de 36

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION

SECCION 7

MOTORES ELECTRICOS

AS RB MAYO 10 0
PREPARO REVISO FECHA REVISION

BELT FILTER 2x73m²

NOMBRE DEL EQUIPO TAG MODELO


COMPAÑIA
73M² BELT FILTER #1 05-820-4223-003 MINERA MILPO

32B / 08-30V
MILPO II
73M² BELT FILTER #2 05-820-4223-004

CONTRATO ORDEN DECOMPRA


DOCUMENTO DELKOR
DELKOR- No:
No: D284-HBF-MO-01
No: 28410 LMCO-0000000794
Sección 7 ~ Página 2 de 36

LISTADO DE MOTORES Y HOJAS DE DATOS


COMPAÑÍA MINERA MILPO S.A.A.

DOC. Nro. F284-HBF-003

CN 28410

FILTRO BANDA HORIZONTAL 73m2


32B / 08–30 V

WA FA CERTIFICATED 17/05/10 0
WA FA ISSUED FOR 23/04/10 A
APPROVAL
PREPARED CHECKED REASON FOR DATE REV
REVISION

DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA LTDA.


DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA LTDA

LISTADO DE MOTORES Y HOJAS DE DATOS


Doc No.:F284-HBF-003 Rev.0

CONTRACT 28410 DATE: 17-05-2010


CLIENT: MILPO II REVISION: 0
EQUIPMENT: 2 x 73 m2 HBF BY FA

LOCATION kW / (Hp) Voltage Hz poles mounting position VSD Qty Total Data Sheet No. PID
Vacuum pump 220 / (300 Hp) 460 60 6 Foot Horiz No 2 37756 M2 8517
Filter Drive 75 (100 Hp) 460 60 4 Foot Horiz Yes 2 42768 M2 8512
Fan 15 (20Hp) 460 60 4 Foot Horiz No 2 37760 M2 8521
Filter Pump 7,5 (10 Hp) 460 60 4 Foot Horiz No 2 37762 M2 8518
Cooling tower 5,5 (7,5 Hp) 460 60 4 Foot Vert No 2 59919 M2 8524
Agitator 1,1 (1,5Hp) 460 60 4 Footless Vert No 2 35A02X142G1 M2 8511
Sección 7 ~ Página 3 de 36

Observaciones: Motores son Norma NEMA Premium Efficiency IEEE841


Motor (220 Kw) utiliza partidor suave, suministrado por el Cliente.
Sección 7 ~ Página 4 de 36

Nr.: 037756/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

HOJA DE DATOS
Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula

Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA


Código del producto :
Línea del producto : Motor Especial

Carcasa : 586/7T
Potencia : 300 HP (220 kW)
Frecuencia : 60 Hz
Polos : 6
Rotación nominal : 1190 rpm
Resbalamiento : 0.83 %
Tensión nominal : 460V
Corriente nominal : 365 A
Corriente de arranque : 2263 A
Ip/In : 6.2 Cód. G
Corriente en vacío : 117 A
Torque nominal : 1771 Nm
Torque de arranque : 180 %
Torque máximo : 200 %
Categoría : B
Clase do aislamiento : F
Elevación de temperatura : 80 K
Tiempo de rotor bloqueado : 36 s (caliente) CERTIFICADO
Factor de servicio : 1.15 WEG MOTORES
Régimen de servicio : S1 - Documento no sujeto para
Temperatura ambiente : -20°C hasta +40°C aprobación.
- En caso de comentarios
Altitud : 2200 m habrá prorrogación en el
Protección : IP55 (TEFC) plazo de entrega.
Forma constructiva : B3R(D)
Sentido de giro : Ambos
Masa aproximada* : 1962 kg
Momento de inercia : 13.8 kgm²
Nivel de Presión Sonora : 77.0 dB(A)

Delantero Trasero Carga Fact. potencia Rendimiento (%)


Rodamiento 6322-C3 6319-C3 100% 0.79 95.8
Intervalo de lubricación 9212 h 11093 h 75% 0.78 94.4
Cantidad de grasa 60 g 45 g 50% 0.75 92.6
Grasa - MOBIL POLYREX EM

Notas:
- Nema Premium IEEE841

Esta revisión substituye y anula la emisión anterior, la cual deberá ser eliminada. Los valores indicados son estimados con base en
calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12. Nivel de ruido con tolerancia de +3 dB(A).

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


cleison elianes Nr.: 1 Fecha: 24-JUN-2010

*El valor del peso puede cambiar sin previo aviso.


Sección 7 ~ Página 5 de 36

Nr.: 037756/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

CURVAS CARACTERÍSTICAS EN FUNCIÓN DE LA ROTACIÓN


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
2.50 10.0

B - Corriente en relación a la nominal


2.25 9.0

2.00 8.0

1.75 7.0
A - Momento en relación al momento nominal

B A
1.50 6.0

1.25 5.0

1.00 4.0

0.75 3.0

0.50 2.0

0.25 1.0

0.00 0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Rotación en porcentaje de la rotación sincrónica

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : Motor Especial

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 300 HP (220 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 586/7T Factor de servicio : 1.15
Rotación nominal : 1190 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 180 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 150 %
Corriente nominal : 365 A Torque máximo : 200 %
Ip/In : 6.2 Cód. G

Notas:
- Nema Premium IEEE841

Esta revisión substituye y anula la emisión anterior, la cual deberá ser eliminada.Los valores indicados son estimados con base en
calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


cleison elianes Nr.: 1 Fecha: 24-JUN-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 6 de 36

Nr.: 037756/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

DESEMPEÑO EN CONDICIONES DE CARGA


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
100 1.0 C 0.0

C - Resbalamiento (%)
90 0.9 A 1.0

80 0.8 2.0

70 0.7 B 3.0

60 0.6 4.0

50 0.5 5.0

D - Corriente en 460V (A)


40 0.4 400

300
A - Rendimiento (%)

B - Fact. potencia

D 200

100

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
Potencia provista en porcentaje de la nominal

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : Motor Especial

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 300 HP (220 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 586/7T Factor de servicio : 1.15
Rotación nominal : 1190 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 180 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 150 %
Corriente nominal : 365 A Torque máximo : 200 %
Ip/In : 6.2 Cód. G

Notas:
- Nema Premium IEEE841

Esta revisión substituye y anula la emisión anterior, la cual deberá ser eliminada.Los valores indicados son estimados con base en
calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


cleison elianes Nr.: 1 Fecha: 24-JUN-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 7 de 36

Nr.: 037756/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

CURVA DE CAPACIDAD TÉRMICA EN SOBRECARGA


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
100000

10000
Tiempo (s)

1000

C
B - Rotor bloqueado (caliente)
C - Rotor bloqueado (frío)

B
A
100
A - Sobrecarga

10
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
I/In

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : Motor Especial

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 300 HP (220 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 586/7T Factor de servicio : 1.15
Rotación nominal : 1190 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 180 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 150 %
Corriente nominal : 365 A Torque máximo : 200 %
Ip/In : 6.2 Cód. G

Notas:
- Nema Premium IEEE841

Esta revisión substituye y anula la emisión anterior, la cual deberá ser eliminada.Los valores indicados son estimados con base en
calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


cleison elianes Nr.: 1 Fecha: 24-JUN-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 8 de 36
Sección 7 ~ Página 9 de 36

Nr.: 042768/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 22-APR-2010

HOJA DE DATOS
Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula

Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA


Código del producto :
Línea del producto : Motor Especial

Carcasa : 444/5T
Potencia : 100 HP (75 kW)
Frecuencia : 60 Hz
Polos : 4
Rotación nominal : 1785 rpm
Resbalamiento : 0.83 %
Tensión nominal : 460V
Corriente nominal : 119 A
Corriente de arranque : 762 A
Ip/In : 6.4 Cód. G
Corriente en vacío : 38.5 A
Torque nominal : 393 Nm
Torque de arranque : 200 %
Torque máximo : 220 %
Categoría : B
Clase do aislamiento : F
Elevación de temperatura : 80 K
Tiempo de rotor bloqueado : 17 s (caliente) CERTIFICADO
Factor de servicio : 1.25 WEG MOTORES
Régimen de servicio : S1 - Documento no sujeto para
Temperatura ambiente : -20°C hasta +40°C aprobación.
- En caso de comentarios
Altitud : 2200 m habrá prorrogación en el
Protección : IP55 (TEFC) plazo de entrega.
Forma constructiva : B3L(E)
Sentido de giro : Ambos
Masa aproximada* : 791 kg
Momento de inercia : 2.41 kgm²
Nivel de Presión Sonora : 80.0 dB(A)

Delantero Trasero Carga Fact. potencia Rendimiento (%)


Rodamiento 6319-C3 6316-C3 100% 0.83 95.4
Intervalo de lubricación 7037 h 8568 h 75% 0.79 94.6
Cantidad de grasa 45 g 34 g 50% 0.72 93.8
Grasa - MOBIL POLYREX EM

Notas:
- Premium Efficiency
- Apto a operar con VDF en faja de rotación de 30 a 60Hz con par constante y FS 1.15 para esta condición.

Esta revisión substituye y anula la emisión anterior, la cual deberá ser eliminada. Los valores indicados son estimados con base en
calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12. Nivel de ruido con tolerancia de +3 dB(A).

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos smolina Nr.: 2 Fecha: 01-SEP-2010

*El valor del peso puede cambiar sin previo aviso.


Sección 7 ~ Página 10 de 36

Nr.: 042768/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 22-APR-2010

CURVAS CARACTERÍSTICAS EN FUNCIÓN DE LA ROTACIÓN


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
2.50 10.0

B - Corriente en relación a la nominal


2.25 9.0

2.00 8.0

1.75 A 7.0
A - Momento en relación al momento nominal

B
1.50 6.0

1.25 5.0

1.00 4.0

0.75 3.0

0.50 2.0

0.25 1.0

0.00 0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Rotación en porcentaje de la rotación sincrónica

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : Motor Especial

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 100 HP (75 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 444/5T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1785 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 200 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 170 %
Corriente nominal : 119 A Torque máximo : 220 %
Ip/In : 6.4 Cód. G

Notas:
- Premium Efficiency
- Apto a operar con VDF en faja de rotación de 30 a 60Hz con par constante y FS 1.15 para esta condición.

Esta revisión substituye y anula la emisión anterior, la cual deberá ser eliminada.Los valores indicados son estimados con base en
calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos smolina Nr.: 2 Fecha: 01-SEP-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 11 de 36

Nr.: 042768/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 22-APR-2010

DESEMPEÑO EN CONDICIONES DE CARGA


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
100 1.0 C 0.0

C - Resbalamiento (%)
A
90 0.9 1.0

80 0.8 2.0

70 0.7 3.0
B
60 0.6 4.0

50 0.5 5.0

D - Corriente en 460V (A)


40 0.4 160

120
A - Rendimiento (%)

B - Fact. potencia

80
D
40

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
Potencia provista en porcentaje de la nominal

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : Motor Especial

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 100 HP (75 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 444/5T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1785 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 200 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 170 %
Corriente nominal : 119 A Torque máximo : 220 %
Ip/In : 6.4 Cód. G

Notas:
- Premium Efficiency
- Apto a operar con VDF en faja de rotación de 30 a 60Hz con par constante y FS 1.15 para esta condición.

Esta revisión substituye y anula la emisión anterior, la cual deberá ser eliminada.Los valores indicados son estimados con base en
calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos smolina Nr.: 2 Fecha: 01-SEP-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 12 de 36

Nr.: 042768/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 22-APR-2010

CURVA DE CAPACIDAD TÉRMICA EN SOBRECARGA


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
100000

10000
Tiempo (s)

1000
B - Rotor bloqueado (caliente)
C - Rotor bloqueado (frío)

100 C
A - Sobrecarga

B
A

10
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
I/In

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : Motor Especial

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 100 HP (75 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 444/5T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1785 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 200 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 170 %
Corriente nominal : 119 A Torque máximo : 220 %
Ip/In : 6.4 Cód. G

Notas:
- Premium Efficiency
- Apto a operar con VDF en faja de rotación de 30 a 60Hz con par constante y FS 1.15 para esta condición.

Esta revisión substituye y anula la emisión anterior, la cual deberá ser eliminada.Los valores indicados son estimados con base en
calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos smolina Nr.: 2 Fecha: 01-SEP-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 13 de 36
Sección 7 ~ Página 14 de 36

Nr.: 037762/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

HOJA DE DATOS
Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula

Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA


Código del producto :
Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

Carcasa : 256T
Potencia : 20 HP (15 kW)
Frecuencia : 60 Hz
Polos : 4
Rotación nominal : 1765 rpm
Resbalamiento : 1.94 %
Tensión nominal : 460V
Corriente nominal : 24.4 A
Corriente de arranque : 171 A
Ip/In : 7.0 Cód. H
Corriente en vacío : 11.9 A
Torque nominal : 79.6 Nm
Torque de arranque : 250 %
Torque máximo : 250 %
Categoría : B
Clase do aislamiento : F
Elevación de temperatura : 80 K
Tiempo de rotor bloqueado : 25 s (caliente) CERTIFICADO
Factor de servicio : 1.25 WEG MOTORES
Régimen de servicio : S1 - Documento no sujeto para
Temperatura ambiente : -20°C hasta +40°C aprobación.
- En caso de comentarios
Altitud : 2200 m habrá prorrogación en el
Protección : IP55 (TEFC) plazo de entrega.
Forma constructiva : B3R(D)
Sentido de giro : Ambos
Masa aproximada* : 140 kg
Momento de inercia : 0.1305 kgm²
Nivel de Presión Sonora : 69.0 dB(A)

Delantero Trasero Carga Fact. potencia Rendimiento (%)


Rodamiento 6309-C3 6209-C3 100% 0.83 93.0
Intervalo de lubricación 20000 h 20000 h 75% 0.77 93.0
Cantidad de grasa 13 g 9g 50% 0.66 92.4
Grasa - MOBIL POLYREX EM

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12. Nivel de ruido con
tolerancia de +3 dB(A).

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos AUTOMATICO Nr.: 0 Fecha: 13-APR-2010

*El valor del peso puede cambiar sin previo aviso.


Sección 7 ~ Página 15 de 36

Nr.: 037762/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

CURVAS CARACTERÍSTICAS EN FUNCIÓN DE LA ROTACIÓN


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
2.50 10.0

B - Corriente en relación a la nominal


A
2.25 9.0

2.00 8.0
B
1.75 7.0
A - Momento en relación al momento nominal

1.50 6.0

1.25 5.0

1.00 4.0

0.75 3.0

0.50 2.0

0.25 1.0

0.00 0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Rotación en porcentaje de la rotación sincrónica

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 20 HP (15 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 256T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1765 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 250 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 210 %
Corriente nominal : 24.4 A Torque máximo : 250 %
Ip/In : 7.0 Cód. H

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos AUTOMATICO Nr.: 0 Fecha: 13-APR-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 16 de 36

Nr.: 037762/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

DESEMPEÑO EN CONDICIONES DE CARGA


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
100 1.0 0.0

C - Resbalamiento (%)
C
90 0.9 A 1.0

80 0.8 2.0

70 0.7 3.0

60 0.6 B 4.0

50 0.5 5.0

D - Corriente en 460V (A)


40 0.4 40

30
A - Rendimiento (%)

B - Fact. potencia

20
D
10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
Potencia provista en porcentaje de la nominal

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 20 HP (15 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 256T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1765 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 250 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 210 %
Corriente nominal : 24.4 A Torque máximo : 250 %
Ip/In : 7.0 Cód. H

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos AUTOMATICO Nr.: 0 Fecha: 13-APR-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 17 de 36

Nr.: 037762/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

CURVA DE CAPACIDAD TÉRMICA EN SOBRECARGA


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
100000

10000
Tiempo (s)

1000
B - Rotor bloqueado (caliente)

C
C - Rotor bloqueado (frío)

B
100
A - Sobrecarga

10
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
I/In

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 20 HP (15 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 256T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1765 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 250 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 210 %
Corriente nominal : 24.4 A Torque máximo : 250 %
Ip/In : 7.0 Cód. H

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos AUTOMATICO Nr.: 0 Fecha: 13-APR-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 18 de 36
Sección 7 ~ Página 19 de 36

Nr.: 037760/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

HOJA DE DATOS
Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula

Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA


Código del producto :
Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

Carcasa : 215T
Potencia : 10 HP (7.5 kW)
Frecuencia : 60 Hz
Polos : 4
Rotación nominal : 1765 rpm
Resbalamiento : 1.94 %
Tensión nominal : 460V
Corriente nominal : 12.6 A
Corriente de arranque : 84.4 A
Ip/In : 6.7 Cód. H
Corriente en vacío : 6.15 A
Torque nominal : 39.8 Nm
Torque de arranque : 230 %
Torque máximo : 290 %
Categoría : B
Clase do aislamiento : F
Elevación de temperatura : 80 K
Tiempo de rotor bloqueado : 20 s (caliente) CERTIFICADO
Factor de servicio : 1.25 WEG MOTORES
Régimen de servicio : S1 - Documento no sujeto para
Temperatura ambiente : -20°C hasta +40°C aprobación.
- En caso de comentarios
Altitud : 2200 m habrá prorrogación en el
Protección : IP55 (TEFC) plazo de entrega.
Forma constructiva : B3R(D)
Sentido de giro : Ambos
Masa aproximada* : 82.1 kg
Momento de inercia : 0.0659 kgm²
Nivel de Presión Sonora : 61.0 dB(A)

Delantero Trasero Carga Fact. potencia Rendimiento (%)


Rodamiento 6308-C3 6207-C3 100% 0.81 91.7
Intervalo de lubricación 20000 h 20000 h 75% 0.75 91.7
Cantidad de grasa 11 g 7g 50% 0.63 90.5
Grasa - MOBIL POLYREX EM

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12. Nivel de ruido con
tolerancia de +3 dB(A).

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos AUTOMATICO Nr.: 0 Fecha: 13-APR-2010

*El valor del peso puede cambiar sin previo aviso.


Sección 7 ~ Página 20 de 36

Nr.: 037760/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

CURVAS CARACTERÍSTICAS EN FUNCIÓN DE LA ROTACIÓN


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
5.0 10.0

B - Corriente en relación a la nominal


4.5 9.0

4.0 8.0

3.5 B 7.0
A - Momento en relación al momento nominal

3.0 6.0
A
2.5 5.0

2.0 4.0

1.5 3.0

1.0 2.0

0.5 1.0

0.0 0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Rotación en porcentaje de la rotación sincrónica

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 10 HP (7.5 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 215T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1765 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 230 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 195 %
Corriente nominal : 12.6 A Torque máximo : 290 %
Ip/In : 6.7 Cód. H

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos AUTOMATICO Nr.: 0 Fecha: 13-APR-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 21 de 36

Nr.: 037760/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

DESEMPEÑO EN CONDICIONES DE CARGA


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
100 1.0 0.0

C - Resbalamiento (%)
C
90 0.9 A 1.0

80 0.8 2.0

70 0.7 3.0

60 0.6 4.0
B
50 0.5 5.0

D - Corriente en 460V (A)


40 0.4 16

12
A - Rendimiento (%)

B - Fact. potencia

D 8

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
Potencia provista en porcentaje de la nominal

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 10 HP (7.5 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 215T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1765 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 230 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 195 %
Corriente nominal : 12.6 A Torque máximo : 290 %
Ip/In : 6.7 Cód. H

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos AUTOMATICO Nr.: 0 Fecha: 13-APR-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 22 de 36

Nr.: 037760/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 13-APR-2010

CURVA DE CAPACIDAD TÉRMICA EN SOBRECARGA


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
100000

10000
Tiempo (s)

1000
B - Rotor bloqueado (caliente)
C - Rotor bloqueado (frío)

100 C
A - Sobrecarga

A
10
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
I/In

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 10 HP (7.5 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 215T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1765 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 230 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 195 %
Corriente nominal : 12.6 A Torque máximo : 290 %
Ip/In : 6.7 Cód. H

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


elagos AUTOMATICO Nr.: 0 Fecha: 13-APR-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 23 de 36
Sección 7 ~ Página 24 de 36

Nr.: 059919/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 07-JUN-2010

HOJA DE DATOS
Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula

Cliente : WEG CHILE S.A


Código del producto :
Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

Carcasa : 213T
Potencia : 7.5 HP (5.5 kW)
Frecuencia : 60 Hz
Polos : 4
Rotación nominal : 1770 rpm
Resbalamiento : 1.67 %
Tensión nominal : 460V
Corriente nominal : 9.29 A
Corriente de arranque : 69.7 A
Ip/In : 7.5 Cód. J
Corriente en vacío : 4.00 A
Torque nominal : 29.8 Nm
Torque de arranque : 200 %
Torque máximo : 240 %
Categoría : B
Clase do aislamiento : F
Elevación de temperatura : 80 K
Tiempo de rotor bloqueado : 16 s (caliente) CERTIFICADO
Factor de servicio : 1.25 WEG MOTORES
Régimen de servicio : S1 - Documento no sujeto para
Temperatura ambiente : -20°C hasta +40°C aprobación.
- En caso de comentarios
Altitud : 2200 m habrá prorrogación en el
Protección : IP55 (TEFC) plazo de entrega.
Forma constructiva : B3R(D)
Sentido de giro : Ambos
Masa aproximada* : 73.3 kg
Momento de inercia : 0.0582 kgm²
Nivel de Presión Sonora : 61.0 dB(A)

Delantero Trasero Carga Fact. potencia Rendimiento (%)


Rodamiento 6308-C3 6207-C3 100% 0.81 91.7
Intervalo de lubricación 20000 h 20000 h 75% 0.75 91.7
Cantidad de grasa 11 g 7g 50% 0.65 90.5
Grasa - MOBIL POLYREX EM

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12. Nivel de ruido con
tolerancia de +3 dB(A).

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


daianet jenis Nr.: 0 Fecha: 07-JUN-2010

*El valor del peso puede cambiar sin previo aviso.


Sección 7 ~ Página 25 de 36

Nr.: 059919/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 07-JUN-2010

CURVAS CARACTERÍSTICAS EN FUNCIÓN DE LA ROTACIÓN


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
2.50 10.0

B - Corriente en relación a la nominal


2.25 A 9.0

2.00 8.0
B
1.75 7.0
A - Momento en relación al momento nominal

1.50 6.0

1.25 5.0

1.00 4.0

0.75 3.0

0.50 2.0

0.25 1.0

0.00 0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Rotación en porcentaje de la rotación sincrónica

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : WEG CHILE S.A
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 213T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1770 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 200 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 170 %
Corriente nominal : 9.29 A Torque máximo : 240 %
Ip/In : 7.5 Cód. J

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


daianet jenis Nr.: 0 Fecha: 07-JUN-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 26 de 36

Nr.: 059919/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 07-JUN-2010

DESEMPEÑO EN CONDICIONES DE CARGA


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
100 1.0 0.0

C - Resbalamiento (%)
C
90 0.9 A 1.0

80 0.8 2.0

70 0.7 3.0

60 0.6 B 4.0

50 0.5 5.0

D - Corriente en 460V (A)


40 0.4 16

12
A - Rendimiento (%)

B - Fact. potencia

8
D
4

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
Potencia provista en porcentaje de la nominal

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : WEG CHILE S.A
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 213T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1770 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 200 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 170 %
Corriente nominal : 9.29 A Torque máximo : 240 %
Ip/In : 7.5 Cód. J

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


daianet jenis Nr.: 0 Fecha: 07-JUN-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 27 de 36

Nr.: 059919/2010
WEG Indústrias S.A. Fecha: 07-JUN-2010

CURVA DE CAPACIDAD TÉRMICA EN SOBRECARGA


Motor Trifásico de Inducción - Rotor de Jaula
100000

10000
Tiempo (s)

1000
B - Rotor bloqueado (caliente)
C - Rotor bloqueado (frío)

C
100
B
A - Sobrecarga

10
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
I/In

CERTIFICADO
Cliente : WEG CHILE S.A
Código del producto :

- Documento no sujeto para


Línea del producto : IEEE 841 NEMA Premium Efficiency

habrá prorrogación en el
- En caso de comentarios
WEG MOTORES
Potencia : 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) Régimen de servicio : S1

plazo de entrega.
Carcasa : 213T Factor de servicio : 1.25
Rotación nominal : 1770 rpm Categoría : B

aprobación.
Frecuencia : 60 Hz Protección : IP55 (TEFC)
Tensión nominal : 460 V Torque de arranque : 200 %
Clase do aislamiento : F Torque mínimo : 170 %
Corriente nominal : 9.29 A Torque máximo : 240 %
Ip/In : 7.5 Cód. J

Notas:

Los valores indicados son estimados con base en calculo, sujetos a las tolerancias de la norma NEMA MG 1-12.

Ejecutado Verificado Revisión Aprobado


daianet jenis Nr.: 0 Fecha: 07-JUN-2010
Sección 7 ~ Página 28 de 36
Product Information Packet
VM3554T-50
1.5HP,1425RPM,3PH,50HZ,145TC,3524M,TEFC
Sección 7 ~ Página 29 de 36

Copyright © All product information within this document is subject to Baldor Electric Company copyright © protection, unless otherwise noted.
Product Information Packet: VM3554T-50 - 1.5HP,1425RPM,3PH,50HZ,145TC,3524M,TEFC

Product Detail
Revision: V Status: PRD/A Change #: Proprietary: No
Type: AC Prod Type: 3524M Elec. Spec: 35WGX142 CD Diagram: CD0044
Enclosure TEFC Mfg Plant: Mech Spec: 35A003 Layout: 35LYA003
Frame: 145TC Mounting: F1 Poles: 04 Created Date:
Base: N Rotation: R Insulation: F Eff. Date: 01-16-2006
Leads: 12#18 Replaced By:

Nameplate NP1372L
CAT.NO. VM3554T-50
SPEC. 35A03X142
HP 1.5
VOLTS 220/380/440
AMP 4.4/2.5/2.2
RPM 1425
FRAME 145TC HZ 50 PH 3
SER.F. 1.15 CODE K DES B CL F
NEMA-NOM-EFF 81.5 PF 81
Sección 7 ~ Página 30 de 36

RATING 40C AMB-CONT


CC USABLE AT 208V
DE 6205 ODE 6203
ENCL TEFC SN

Page 2 of 8
Product Information Packet: VM3554T-50 - 1.5HP,1425RPM,3PH,50HZ,145TC,3524M,TEFC

Parts List
Product ID Description Quantity List Price
SA023038 SA 35A03X142 1.000 235.00
RA019088 RA 35A03X142 1.000 196.00
NS2512A01 INSULATOR, CONDUIT BOX X X 1.000 2.00
35CB3007 35 CB CASTING W/.88 DIA. LEAD HOLE 1.000 25.00
36GS1000SP GASKET-CONDUIT BOX, .06 THICK #SV-330 LE 1.000 5.00
51XB1016A07 10-16 X 7/16 HXWSSLD SERTYB 2.000 4.00
11XW1032G06 10-32 X .38, TAPTITE II, HEX WSHR SLTD U 1.000 2.00
35EP3100M01 FREP TEFC 203 BRG W/GRSR (RAISED FH PADS 1.000 26.00
HW4500A01 1641B(ALEMITE)400 UNIV, GREASE FITT 1.000 2.00
HW5100A03SP WAVY WASHER (W1543-017) 1.000 2.00
35EP3300A46 SPL FACE MTD EP-ENCL-145TC-205 BRG 1.000 96.00
HW4500A01 1641B(ALEMITE)400 UNIV, GREASE FITT 1.000 2.00
51XN1032A20 10-32 X 1 1/4 HX WS SL SR 2.000 4.00
35FH4005A84SP IEC FH W/GRSR, NO DIMPLES W/AUTOPHERETIC 1.000 12.00
51XW1032A06 10-32 X .38, TAPTITE II, HEX WSHR SLTD S 3.000 9.00
Sección 7 ~ Página 31 de 36

35CB4510 35 CB LID 1.000 2.00


35GS1030 35 GS FOR CB LID - LEXIDE 1.000 2.00
51XW0832A07 8-32 X .44, TAPTITE II, HEX WSHR SLTD SE 4.000 8.00
HW2501D13SP KEY, 3/16 SQ X 1.375 1.000 2.00
HA7000A01 KEY RETAINER 7/8" DIA SHAFT 1.000 2.00
10XF0440S02 04-40 X 1/8 TYPE F HEX HD STAINLESS STIC 2.000 4.00
MJ1000A02 GREASE, POLYREX EM EXXON 0.050 0.45
35FN3002A05SP EXTERNAL FAN, PLASTIC, FOR .637 DIA JOUR 1.000 21.00
51XB1214A16 12-14X1.00 HXWSSLD SERTYB 1.000 2.00

Page 3 of 8
Product Information Packet: VM3554T-50 - 1.5HP,1425RPM,3PH,50HZ,145TC,3524M,TEFC

Parts List (continued)


Product ID Description Quantity List Price
MG1000G27 PAINT- S9282E CHARCOAL GREY 0.017 68.00
LB5040 INSTRUCTION TAG, AC & DC 1.000 2.00
HA3100A15 THRUBOLT 10-32 X 8.375 4.000 8.00
LB1119 WARNING LABEL 1.000 2.00
LB1125C01 STD (STOCK) CARTON LABEL BALDOR WITH FLA 1.000 2.00
LC0044 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 1.000 3.00
NP1372L STD NP LASER ENGRAVED, UL CSA CE CC, W/O 1.000 0.00
35PA1066 PACKING GROUP COMBINED PRINT 1.000 12.00
PK3082 STYROFOAB CRADLE 1.000 2.00
Sección 7 ~ Página 32 de 36

Page 4 of 8
Product Information Packet: VM3554T-50 - 1.5HP,1425RPM,3PH,50HZ,145TC,3524M,TEFC

Performance Data at 440.0V, 50.0Hz, 1.5HP (Typical performance - Not guaranteed values)
General Characteristics
Full Load Torque: 5.6 LB-FT Start Configuration: DOL
No-Load Current: 1.4 Amps Break-Down Torque: 21.0 LB-FT
Line-line Res. @ 25°C.: 13.0 Ohms A Ph / 0.0 Ohms B Ph Pull-Up Torque: 16.0 LB-FT
Temp. Rise @ Rated Load: 72ºC Locked-Rotor Torque: 18.0 LB-FT
Temp. Rise @ S.F. Load: 86ºC Starting Current: 16.0 Amps
Load Characteristics
% of Rated Load: 25 50 75 100 125 150 S.F.
Power Factor: 38.0 59.0 72.0 81.0 86.0 89.0 0.0
Efficiency: 66.4 76.8 79.5 79.5 78.2 75.8 0.0
Speed: 1480.0 1461.0 1440.0 1417.0 1391.0 1360.0 0.0
Line Amperes: 1.4 1.6 1.9 2.3 2.7 3.3 2.5
Sección 7 ~ Página 33 de 36

Page 5 of 8
Product Information Packet: VM3554T-50 - 1.5HP,1425RPM,3PH,50HZ,145TC,3524M,TEFC

Performance Graph at 440.0V, 50.0Hz, 1.5HP (Typical performance - Not guaranteed values)
Sección 7 ~ Página 34 de 36

Page 6 of 8
Product Information Packet: VM3554T-50 - 1.5HP,1425RPM,3PH,50HZ,145TC,3524M,TEFC
Sección 7 ~ Página 35 de 36

Page 7 of 8
Product Information Packet: VM3554T-50 - 1.5HP,1425RPM,3PH,50HZ,145TC,3524M,TEFC
Sección 7 ~ Página 36 de 36

Page 8 of 8
Sección 8 ~ Página 1 de 7

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION

SECCION 8

REPUESTOS

AS AS MAYO 10 0
PREPARO REVISO FECHA REVISION

BELT FILTER 2x73m²

NOMBRE DEL EQUIPO TAG MODELO


COMPAÑIA
73M² BELT FILTER #1 05-820-4223-003 MINERA MILPO

32B / 08-30V
MILPO II
73M² BELT FILTER #2 05-820-4223-004

CONTRATO ORDEN DECOMPRA


DOCUMENTO DELKOR
DELKOR- No:
No: D284-HBF-MO-01
No: 28410 LMCO-0000000794
DELKOR SOUTH AMERICA LTDA

LISTADO DE REPUESTOS RECOMENDADOS POR ENCARGO & PARA DOS AÑOS DE OPERACIÓN
CLIENTE MINERA MILPO HOJA 1
PROYECTO CERRO LINDO
CONTRATO Nro. 2 x HBF 73 m2
ORDEN CLIENTE Nro. 0000000794 FECHA 01-06-2011
EQUIPO HBF 73 m2 REV. 0
Nro. Partes Descripción Cantidad Tiepo Previsto Cantidad de Valor
Por de uso por Repuestos Unitario
Equipo Año Recomendados US $

PUESTA EN MARCHA
HBF-395 Filter Cloth 2 6 4a6
HBF-520-09 Wear Belt 50 2 6 2a4
HBF-450-04 Control Valve / Sensing Paddle 2 1 1a2

UN AÑO DE OPERACIÓN
HBF-395 Filter Cloth each 2 4a6 6
HBF-520-09 Wear Belt 50 2 2a4 6
HBF-500-08 Spray Nozzle Caps & Tips 392 1a2 120
HBF-500-06 Belt Guide Roller 20 2a4 6
HBF 330 38
HBF-330-38 T Pulley
Taill P ll B Bearing 4 1a2 1
HBF-330-37 Head Pulley Bearing 4 1a2 1
Sección 8 ~ Página 2 de 7

HBF-330-35 Belt Return Roller Bearing 11 1a2 8


HBF-520-06 Wear Belt Support 18 2a4 6
HBF-520-02 Seal Strip (3030) 16 3a4 6
HBF-520-04 End Pad (tail) 2 3a4 1
HBF-520-03 End Pad (head) 2 3a4 1
HBF-520-01 End Slide 8 3a4 4
HBF-520-10 Buta Seal 15 x 1 (p/m) 14 2a4 12
HBF-130-05 Filter Regulator 2 1a2 2
HBF-500-07 Tracker Slides 2 1a2 2
HBF-140-02 Tracker Bellows 4 1a2 4
HBF-310-03 Belt Return roller 18 3a4 2
HBF-310-05 Feed Dam Roller 2 3a4 1
HBF-310-01 Cloth Roller 150NB 42 3a4 4
HBF-330-20 Bearing Cover 94 4a5 10
HBF-110-15 Threaded Rod 36 2a4 12
HBF-110-16 Flanged Nut 72 2a4 24
HBF-110-08 Gasket (vac. Box) 18 2a4 8
HBF-110-11 Clamping Plate (400) 128 2a4 26
HBF-110-12 Clamping Plate (200) 8 2a4 4
HBF-110-13 Elbow 72 2a4 36
HBF-450-10-1 Pull Cord Switch 2 2a4 1
HBF-450-01 Limit Switch 12 1a2 1
Sección 8 ~ Página 3 de 7

SPARES PHOTOS

END PAD SEAL STRIP

END SLIDES
Sección 8 ~ Página 4 de 7

SPRAY
NOZZLES

TRACKER
BELOW

TRACKER
SLIDE
Sección 8 ~ Página 5 de 7

BELT GUIDE
ROLLER

CURBING
Sección 8 ~ Página 6 de 7

BELT
RETURN
ROLLER
CLOTH
ROLLER

FLOWMETER
Sección 8 ~ Página 7 de 7

BOWED
ROLLER
Sección 9 ~ Página 1 de 4

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION

SECCION 9

PROGRAMA DE LUBRICACION

AS AS MAYO 10 0
PREPARO REVISO FECHA REVISION

BELT FILTER 2x73m²

NOMBRE DEL EQUIPO TAG MODELO


COMPAÑIA
73M² BELT FILTER #1 05-820-4223-003 MINERA MILPO

32B / 08-30V
MILPO II
73M² BELT FILTER #2 05-820-4223-004

CONTRATO ORDEN DECOMPRA


DOCUMENTO DELKOR
DELKOR- No:
No: D284-HBF-MO-01
No: 28410 LMCO-0000000794
PROGRAMA DE LUBRICACION

CLIENTE: MINERA MILPO S.A.A. NOMBRE DEL PROYECTO: CERRO LINDO


EQUIPO: FILTRO BANDA HORIZONTAL 2x73m²
ORDEN DE COMPRA No: 0000000794
MODEL: 32B/08-30V

PREPARO: AS APROVED: RB REV.: 0 FECHA: MAYO 2011 CONTRATO DELKOR: 28410

LUBRICANTE CANTIDAD DE
ACEITE RECAMBIO EN
(POR OPERACION
RANGO
REDUCTOR TIPO VISC Tº REDUCTOR) NORMAL LUBRICANTE OBSERVACIONES
MINERAL ISOVG 460 -10ºC/ +45ºC
90 Lt CADA 10000HORAS/1AÑO PRIMER CAMBIO A LAS
SEW MC3PLHT09 500/800 HRS DE
OPERACION
CADA 17000HORAS/3
SINTETICO ISOVG 460 -20ºC /+60ºC 90 Lt
AÑOS
Sección 9 ~ Página 2 de 4
PROGRAMA DE LUBRICACION

CLIENTE: MINERA MILPO S.A.A. NOMBRE DEL PROYECTO: CERRO LINDO


EQUIPO: FILTRO BANDA HORIZONTAL 2x73m²
ORDEN DE COMPRA No: 0000000794
MODEL: 32B/08-30V

PREPARO: AS APROVED: RB REV.: 0 FECHA: MAYO 2011 CONTRATO DELKOR: 28410

GRASA CANTIDA
RODAMIENTOS DESIGNACION D DE RECARGA EN
DE POLEAS Y DEL SOPORTE GRASA CONDICION GRASA OBSERVACIONES
RODILLOS RODAMIENTO (POR SEVERA
NLG RANGO
BASE I GR Tº UNIDAD )

RODAMIENTOS EN KML 200010 CCK/W33 KML SNU SNL 10 GRS. CADA


LITIO 2 -20ºC/110º C 75 GR MOBILUX EP-2
6 MESES
RODILLOS (CORREA) (SKF) 510-608

RODAMIENTOS EN KML 200010 KML SNU SNL 2 20 GRS. CADA


LITIO -20ºC/110º C 180GR MOBILUX EP-2
6 MESES
RODILLOS (TELA) CCK/W33(SKF) 510-608
Sección 9 ~ Página 3 de 4

RODAMIENTOS EN KML 23144 CCK/W33 200 GRS. CADA


SNL 3144 LITIO 2 -20ºC/110º C 2.5 KG MOBILUX EP-2
6 MESES
POLEAS DE CABEZA (SKF)

RODAMIENTOS EN KML 23132 SPA 3132 AS 200 GRS. CADA


LITIO 2 -20ºC/110º C 1.5 KG MOBILUX EP-2
6 MESES
POLEAS DE COLA CCK/W33(SKF) HENFEL
PROGRAMA DE LUBRICACION

CLIENTE: MINERA MILPO S.A.A. NOMBRE DEL PROYECTO: CERRO LINDO


EQUIPO: FILTRO BANDA HORIZONTAL 2x73m²
ORDEN DE COMPRA No: 0000000794
MODEL: 32B/08-30V

PREPARO: AS APROVED: RB REV.: 0 FECHA: MAYO 2011 CONTRATO DELKOR: 28410

GRASA CANTIDAD DE
GRASA DENOMINACION
RANGO
MOTORES ELECTRICOS BASE NLGI GR Tº (POR UNIDAD) RODAMIENTO GRASA OBSERVACIONES
SHELL OIL CO.
RODAMIENTOS ESFERICOS 16 CC Rodamientos Esféricos DOLIUM R MOTOR EN STOCK DEBE
ELECTRICOS RELLIANCE LITIO 3 -25ºC/+50 ºC SER LUBRICADO CADA 6
TEXACO, INC.
MESES
15 HP 16 CC Rodamientos de Rodillo PREMIUM RB
SHELL OIL CO.
RODAMIENTOS ESFERICOS 16 CC Rodamientos Esféricos DOLIUM R MOTOR EN STOCK DEBE
ELECTRICOS RELLIANCE -25ºC/+50 ºC SER LUBRICADO CADA 6
Sección 9 ~ Página 4 de 4

LITIO 3 TEXACO, INC.


16 CC Rodamientos de Rodillo MESES
20 HP PREMIUM RB
SHELL OIL CO.
RODAMIENTOS ESFERICOS 16 CC Rodamientos Esféricos DOLIUM R MOTOR EN STOCK DEBE
ELECTRICOS RELLIANCE LITIO 3 -25ºC/+50 ºC SER LUBRICADO CADA 6
TEXACO, INC.
16 CC Rodamientos de Rodillo MESES
50 HP PREMIUM RB
SHELL OIL CO.
RODAMIENTOS ESFERICOS 16 CC Rodamientos Esféricos DOLIUM R MOTOR EN STOCK DEBE
ELECTRICOS RELLIANCE LITIO 3 -25ºC/+50 ºC SER LUBRICADO CADA 6
TEXACO, INC.
16 CC Rodamientos de Rodillo MESES
350 HP PREMIUM RB
Sección 10 ~ Página 1 de 20

MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENCION

SECCION 10

PLANOS

M.R/G.D.C. A.S. MAYO 10 0


PREPARO REVISO FECHA REVISION

BELT FILTER 2x73m²

NOMBRE DEL EQUIPO TAG MODELO


COMPAÑIA
73M² BELT FILTER #1 05-820-4223-003 MINERA MILPO

32B / 08-30V
MILPO II
73M² BELT FILTER #2 05-820-4223-004

CONTRATO ORDEN DECOMPRA


DOCUMENTO DELKOR
DELKOR- No:
No: D284-HBF-MO-01
No: 28410 LMCO-0000000794
Sección 10 ~ Página 2 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 3 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 4 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 5 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 6 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 7 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 8 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 9 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 10 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 11 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 12 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 13 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 14 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 15 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 16 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 17 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 18 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 19 de 20
Sección 10 ~ Página 20 de 20
SPECIALISES IN THE DESIGN, MANUFACTURE AND SUPPLY OF
MINERAL PROCESSING AND SOLID/LIQUID SEPARATION
EQUIPMENT

GALVARINO GALLARDO 1690-PROVIDENCIA


SANTIAGO, CHILE
PHONE: (56-2) 650 4700- FAX: (56-2) 650 4701

S-ar putea să vă placă și